VT240EL InstructionManual ST-3495 RevD

THYFREC VT240EL
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
General-purpose Inverter for Elevators
200V Series (2.2 to 50kW)

400V Series (2.2 to 45kW
NOTICE
1. Read this manual thoroughly before using the VT240EL, and store in a safe place
for reference.
2. Make sure that this manual is delivered to the final user.
MEIDENSHA CORPORATION
ST-3495D April 2010

Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Handling
1.1 Preface ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Precautions for safety............................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 Transportation and installation ............................................................................................ 1-3
1.2.2 Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.3 Operation............................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.4 Maintenance, inspection and part replacement .................................................................. 1-5
1.2.5 Others.................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3 Delivery inspection and storage ............................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.1 Delivery inspection and storage.......................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 Display on rating nameplate................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4 Instruction manual guide .......................................................................................................... 1-7
Chapter 2 Standard Specifications

2.1 Precautions for standard specifications table........................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Max. applicable motor ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Rated output voltage ........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Reduced rating with carrier frequency ................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Standard specifications table.................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.1 200V series ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 400V series ......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Control specifications table ...................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Selecting the inverter................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.1 Relation of operation pattern and required torque .............................................................. 2-4
2.4.2 Load torque ......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.3 Acceleration torque ............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.4.4 Calculating the current ........................................................................................................ 2-6
2.4.5 Setting VT240EL ................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.4.6 Examples of selecting inverter ............................................................................................ 2-7
2.4.7 Precautions for selecting inverter........................................................................................ 2-8
Chapter 3 Outline and Installation

3.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Outline dimension drawings ................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 Name of each part............................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Handling the operation panel ................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Removing the operation panel ............................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 Precautions for opening and closing the operation panel holder........................................ 3-4
3.3 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.1 Installation environment ...................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.2 Installation methods ............................................................................................................ 3-6
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.1 Precautions for wiring............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Relation of motor rotation direction and encoder signal polarity .............................................. 4-2
4.3 Example of general connection diagram.................................................................................. 4-3
4.4 Main circuit ............................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.1 Main circuit configuration and terminal layout drawing ....................................................... 4-4
4.4.2 Precautions for main circuit wiring ...................................................................................... 4-11
4.5 Control circuit ........................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.1 Control circuit diagram ........................................................................................................ 4-13
4.5.2 Wiring the control circuit terminals ...................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.3 Control circuit usage methods and precautions.................................................................. 4-15
1
Contents
Chapter 5 Operation Panel

5.1 Types........................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 LCD panel (V24-OP1) ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 LED panel (V24-OP2) ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Main displays............................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.1 Data display section ............................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.2 Status display area.............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3 Main operations........................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.3.1 Operation keys .................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.2 Parameter operations.......................................................................................................... 5-5
5.4 LCD panel ................................................................................................................................ 5-9
5.4.1 Display at power ON ........................................................................................................... 5-9
5.4.2 Operating and displaying the character display section ..................................................... 5-9
5.4.3 Displays and operation methods when changing parameters ............................................ 5-10
5.4.4 LCD panel display at fault occurrence ................................................................................ 5-12
5.5 LED panel................................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.5.1 Display at power ON ........................................................................................................... 5-14
5.5.2 Basic display methods ........................................................................................................ 5-14
5.5.3 Display and operation methods for changing parameters .................................................. 5-16
5.5.4 LCD panel display at fault occurrence ................................................................................ 5-17
5.5.5 LED panel character notations............................................................................................ 5-18
5.6 Monitor function........................................................................................................................ 5-19
5.6.1 Speed, torque, current, load detection value, etc. .............................................................. 5-19
5.6.2 Sequence input/output status.............................................................................................. 5-20
5.6.3 Fault monitor ....................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.6.4 Fault history reference ........................................................................................................ 5-26
5.6.5 Maintenance monitor........................................................................................................... 5-29
5.6.6 Hardware monitor................................................................................................................ 5-29
5.6.7 Parameter A, B and C modification list ............................................................................... 5-30
5.6.8 Analogue input display ........................................................................................................ 5-30
5.6.9 Speed detection signal input status display ........................................................................ 5-31
5.6.10 Analog encoder input display .............................................................................................. 5-31
Chapter 6 Various Functions and Parameters
6.1 Programmable input/output...................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Sequence inputs ................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 Sequence outputs ............................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.3 Analog inputs....................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.1.4 Analog output ...................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2 Basic settings ........................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.1 Control mode selection ....................................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.2 Input power voltage............................................................................................................. 6-19
6.2.3 Motor rated output............................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.4 No. of motor poles............................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.5 Rated output voltage ........................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.6 Speed .................................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.2.7 Motor rated current.............................................................................................................. 6-21
6.2.8 No. of encoder pulses ......................................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.9 No-load output voltage ........................................................................................................ 6-22
6.2.10 Carrier frequency ................................................................................................................ 6-22
6.2.11 Elevator rated speed ........................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.12 Machine time constant ........................................................................................................ 6-22
6.2.13 Control method.................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.14 RUN delay timer.................................................................................................................. 6-27
6.3 Motor circuit constant ............................................................................................................... 6-28
6.3.1 PM motor............................................................................................................................. 6-28
6.3.2 IM ........................................................................................................................................ 6-29
2
Contents
6.4 Various speed settings ............................................................................................................. 6-30

6.4.1 Multi-speed command......................................................................................................... 6-30
6.4.2 Analog commands .............................................................................................................. 6-34
6.4.3 Panel ................................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.4.4 ASR response changeover function ................................................................................... 6-35
6.4.5 Torque compensation.......................................................................................................... 6-37
6.5 Torque bias function ................................................................................................................. 6-38
6.5.1 With load sensor ................................................................................................................. 6-38
6.5.2 Start lock control (Anti-roll back function)............................................................................ 6-41
6.6 External brake control .............................................................................................................. 6-45
6.7 Output switch control................................................................................................................ 6-58
6.8 Single-phase UPS operation function ...................................................................................... 6-59
6.9 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................ 6-60
6.9.1 Elevator fault ....................................................................................................................... 6-60
6.9.2 Speed detection error.......................................................................................................... 6-61
6.9.3 Overload.............................................................................................................................. 6-62
6.9.4 Overcurrent limit.................................................................................................................. 6-63
6.9.5 Ground fault detection......................................................................................................... 6-63
6.9.6 External brake fault ............................................................................................................. 6-63
6.9.7 Fault automatic reset function ............................................................................................. 6-65
6.10 Panel and parameter related matters....................................................................................... 6-66
6.10.1 Operation panel mode......................................................................................................... 6-66
6.10.2 Display skip ......................................................................................................................... 6-67
6.10.3 Data and operation protection............................................................................................. 6-67
6.10.4 Password No....................................................................................................................... 6-69
6.10.5 Parameter copy function ..................................................................................................... 6-69
6.11 Extended functions................................................................................................................... 6-70
6.11.1 Cooling fan ON/OFF control................................................................................................ 6-70
6.12 PM motor vector control ........................................................................................................... 6-71
6.121 ASR control constant .......................................................................................................... 6-71
6.12.2 ACR control constant .......................................................................................................... 6-72
6.12.3 Low path filter ...................................................................................................................... 6-73
6.13 IM vector control....................................................................................................................... 6-74
6.13.1 ASR control constant .......................................................................................................... 6-74
6.13.2 ACR control constant .......................................................................................................... 6-75
6.13.3 Low path filter ...................................................................................................................... 6-76
6.14 V/f control mode ....................................................................................................................... 6-77
6.14.1 Torque boost ....................................................................................................................... 6-77
6.14.2 DC brake ............................................................................................................................. 6-79
6.14.3 Start/stop frequency ............................................................................................................ 6-80
6.14.4 S-shape ramp path.............................................................................................................. 6-80
6.14.5 V/f middle point setting........................................................................................................ 6-80
6.15 Serial ........................................................................................................................................ 6-82
Chapter 7 PM Motor Application

7.1 Magnetic pole position estimation function .............................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Conditions for starting magnetic pole position estimation function ..................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Operation chart ................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.3 Selecting the magnetic pole position estimation function ................................................... 7-2
7.2 Flow to trial operation ............................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3 Actual examples of using multi-speed command..................................................................... 7-5
7.3.1 Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.3.2 Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.3 Automatically adjusting the motor constants for the PM motor........................................... 7-14
7.3.4 Adjusting the magnetic pole position estimation with the panel.......................................... 7-18
7.3.5 Trial operation using panel .................................................................................................. 7-21
7.3.6 Trial operation using controller............................................................................................ 7-22
7.3.7 Hints for trial operation ........................................................................................................ 7-23
7.3.8 Adjustment during normal operation ................................................................................... 7-25
3
Contents
7.4 Cases when not using magnetic pole position estimation function.......................................... 7-29
7.4.1 Basic settings ...................................................................................................................... 7-29
7.4.2 Setting parameters according to encoder type ................................................................... 7-30
7.4.3 Tuning the Z-IN U phase winding phase angle .............................................................. 7-36
7.4.4 Adjusting the analog output encoder setting....................................................................... 7-38
Chapter 8 IM Application
8.1 Flow to trial operation ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Actual examples of using multi-speed command..................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1 Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2 Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.3 Automatically adjusting the motor constants for the IM motor ............................................ 8-9
8.2.4 Trial operation using panel .................................................................................................. 8-11
8.2.5 Trial operation using controller (Inspection operation)........................................................ 8-12
8.2.6 Hints for trial operation ........................................................................................................ 8-13
8.2.7 Adjustment during normal operation ................................................................................... 8-15
Chapter 9 Protective Functions and Faults

9.1 Protective functions .................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Troubleshooting with fault display ............................................................................................ 9-2
9.2.1 Emergency stop, power module error, overcurrent............................................................. 9-2
9.2.2 Overvoltage, undervoltage, phase failure ........................................................................... 9-3
9.2.3 Overheat, speed error ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.4 Automatic tuning error, overload fault ................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.5 Ground fault, I/O error ......................................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.6 CPU error, external fault, E2PROM data error .................................................................... 9-8
9.2.7 Elevator fault ....................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.2.8 Output switch control error .................................................................................................. 9-10
Chapter 10 Serial and Modbus Communication

10.1 Connection method .................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2 Communication specifications.................................................................................................. 10-3
10.3 Procedures for enabling communication with host controller................................................... 10-3
10.4 Using the VT240EL Series dedicated communication (standard serial communication) ........ 10-5
10.4.1 Setting the standard serial transmission function ............................................................... 10-5
10.4.2 Transmission procedure...................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.3 Transmission format............................................................................................................ 10-6
10.4.4 Transmission rules .............................................................................................................. 10-6
10.4.5 Creating a check sum ......................................................................................................... 10-8
10.4.6 Transmission commands .................................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.7 Setting data write (FW) ....................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.8 Setting data read (FR)......................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.9 Sequence command write (CW) ......................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.10 Sequence command read (CR)........................................................................................ 10-12
10.4.11 Block- A, B, C and U parameter write (DW) ..................................................................... 10-13
10.4.12 Block-A, B, C, U and D parameter read (DR)................................................................... 10-14
10.4.13 Fault history read (ER) ..................................................................................................... 10-15
10.4.14 List of transmission error codes........................................................................................ 10-16
10.4.15 Serial transmission sequence command Bit assignment table ........................................ 10-17
10.5 Using Modbus communication ................................................................................................. 10-18
10.5.1 Setting the Modbus communication function ...................................................................... 10-18
10.5.2 Modbus protocol.................................................................................................................. 10-19
10.5.3 VT240EL Modbus communication time chart ..................................................................... 10-20
10.5.4 Exceptional response code ................................................................................................. 10-21
10.5.5 List of standard serial communication code correspondence............................................. 10-22
10.5.6 List of Modbus registers and setting examples................................................................... 10-23
10.5.7 Modbus additional functions................................................................................................ 10-32
4
Contents
Chapter 11 Options
11.1 Outline of options ..................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Main circuit wiring devices ....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2.1 No-fuse breaker (MCCB) or fuse ........................................................................................ 11-1
11.2.2 Magnetic contactor (MC)..................................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 DC regenerative braking (DB) option ....................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 ACL........................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.4.1 Application of ACL............................................................................................................... 11-3
11.4.2 ACL outline dimensions....................................................................................................... 11-3
11.5 DCL .......................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.5.1 Application of DCL .............................................................................................................. 11-5
11.5.2 DCL outline dimensions ...................................................................................................... 11-5
11.6 EMI filter ................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.6.1 Application of EMI filter ....................................................................................................... 11-7
11.6.2 4009 to 4070 / 2010 to 2020 ............................................................................................... 11-7
11.6.3 4100 to 4150 / 2040 to 2350 ............................................................................................... 11-7
11.6.4 External noise filter outline drawing .................................................................................... 11-8
11.7 Option PCB .............................................................................................................................. 11-10
11.7.1 Mounting the PCB ............................................................................................................... 11-10
11.7.2 Speed detection 1 (V24-DN1) ............................................................................................. 11-11
Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection

12.1 Precautions for inspection........................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 Inspection items ....................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2.1 Daily inspections ................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2.2 Periodic inspections ............................................................................................................ 12-2
12.2.3 Insulation test of main circuit............................................................................................... 12-2
12.2.4 Insulation test of control circuit............................................................................................ 12-3
12.2.5 Inspection of spare parts..................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.6 Storage conditions............................................................................................................... 12-3
12.3 Measuring devices ................................................................................................................... 12-3
Chapter 13 Parameter List

13.1 Monitor parameter .................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Block-A Parameter ................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.3 Block-B Parameter ................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.3.1 Basic function setting .......................................................................................................... 13-7
13.3.2 Extended function setting.................................................................................................... 13-10
13.3.3 Software option function setting .......................................................................................... 13-14
13.4 Block-C Parameter ................................................................................................................... 13-20
13.4.1 Basic function settings ........................................................................................................ 13-20
13.4.2 Extended function setting.................................................................................................... 13-28
13.4.3 Hardware option function setting ........................................................................................ 13-31
13.5 Block-U Parameters ................................................................................................................. 13-35
13.5.1 Utility mode ......................................................................................................................... 13-35
Revision history
5
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
Chapter 1 Handling
1.1 Preface..................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Precautions for safety............................................................................................................1-2
1.2.1 Transportation and installation.......................................................................................1-3
1.2.2 Wiring ............................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.3 Operation.......................................................................................................................1-4
1.2.4 Maintenance, inspection and part replacement .............................................................1-5
1.2.5 Others............................................................................................................................1-5
1.3 Delivery inspection and storage ............................................................................................1-6
1.3.1 Delivery inspection and storage ....................................................................................1-6
1.3.2 Display on rating nameplate ..........................................................................................1-6
1.4 Instruction manual guide .......................................................................................................1-8
Chapter 1 Handling
Chapter 1 Handling
1.1 Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Meiden AC Speed Control Equipment THYFREC VT240EL.
The THRYFREC VT240EL is an easy-to-use and highly functional general-purpose inverter for elevators.
Please read this manual thoroughly before use, and keep the manual at hand for later reference. Also
make sure that this manual is delivered to the final users.
In this manual, the permanent magnet synchronous motor is indicated as the "PM motor",
and the squirrel-cage 3-phase induction motor is indicated as the "IM".
PM : Permanent Magnet synchronous
IM : Induction Motor
WARNING
ALWAYS READ THIS MANUAL THOROUGHLY BEFORE USING THE VT240EL.
THIS INVERTER CONTAINS HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS THAT MAY BE FATAL TO HUMANS. USE
EXTREME CAUTION DURING INSTALLATION. MAINTENANCE MUST BE PERFORMED BY
QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS, AND ALL POWER SOURCES MUST BE DISCONNECTED BEFORE
ANY MAINTENANCE. SUFFICIENT NOTICE MUST BE GIVEN TO THE GENERAL OPERATORS
AND WORKERS BEFORE STARTING.
ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY OCCUR IF THE FOLLOWING POINTS ARE NOT OBSERVED.
(1) DO NOT OPEN THE FRONT COVER WHILE THE POWER IS ON.
(2) A CHARGE STILL REMAINS IN THE INVERTER WHILE THE INDICATOR IS LIT EVEN IF THE
POWER HAS BEEN TURNED OFF. DO NOT OPEN THE FRONT COVER IN THIS CASE.
WAIT AT LEAST 10 MINUTES AFTER THE INDICATOR GOES OUT.
(3) DO NOT CONTACT THE ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT WHILE THE "CHARGE" LED ON THE UNIT
IS LIT. PERFORM SERVICING, ETC., AFTER WAITING AT LEAST 10 MINUTES AFTER THE
LAMP GOES OUT.
(4) ALWAYS GROUND THE INVERTER CASE. THE GROUNDING METHOD MUST COMPLY
WITH THE LAWS OF THE COUNTRY WHERE THE INVERTER IS BEING INSTALLED.
THE INVERTER MAY BE DESTROYED BEYOND REPAIR IF THE FOLLOWING POINTS ARE
NOT OBSERVED.
(1) OBSERVE THE INVERTER SPECIFICATIONS.
(2) CONNECT ADEQUATE CABLES TO THE INPUT/OUTPUT TERMINALS.
(3) ALWAYS KEEP THE INVERTER INTAKE/OUTTAKE PORTS CLEAN, AND PROVIDE ENOUGH
VENTILATION.
(4) ALWAYS OBSERVE THE CAUTIONS LISTED IN THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
THERE MAY BE SOURCES OF NOISE AROUND THIS INVERTER AND MOTOR DRIVEN BY
THIS INVERTER. CONSIDER THE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM, INSTALLATION PLACE AND
WIRING METHOD BEFORE INSTALLATION.
INSTALL THIS INVERTER AWAY FROM DEVICES THAT HANDLE MINUTE SIGNALS, SUCH AS
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT IN PARTICULAR. ALSO SEPARATE THE DEVICES ELECTRICALLY,
AND TAKE SUFFICIENT NOISE MEASURES.
11
Chapter 1 Handling
1.2 Precautions for safety
Items to be observed to prevent physical damage or property damage and to ensure safe use of this
product are noted on the product and in this instruction manual.
Please read this instruction manual and enclosed documents before starting operation to ensure correct
usage. Thoroughly understand the device, safety information and precautions before starting operation.
After reading, always store this manual where it can be accessed easily.
The safety precautions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION" in this instruction manual.
: When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading

DANGER
to fatal or major injuries.
: When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading

CAUTION to medium or minor injuries, or physical damage.
Note that some items described as CAUTION may lead to major results depending on the
situation. In any case, important information that must be observed is described.
This instruction manual is written on the premise that the user has an understanding of the inverter.
Installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of this product must be done by a qualified person.
Even qualified persons must undergo periodic training.
Qualified refers to satisfying the following conditions.

z The person has thoroughly read and understood this instruction manual.
z The person is well versed in the installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of this product,
and understands the possible dangers.
z The person is informed on matters related to starting, stopping, installation, locks and tag displays,
and has been trained in the operation and remedies.
z The person has been trained on the maintenance, inspection and repairs of this product.
z The person has been trained on protective tools used to ensure safety.
12
Chapter 1 Handling
1.2.1 Transportation and installation
CAUTION
Always transport the product with an appropriate amount according to the products weight.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.
Install the inverter, dynamic braking unit and resistor, and other peripheral devices on non-combustible
material such as metal.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires.
Do not place the product near inflammable items.
Do not hold the front cover while transporting the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries from dropping.
Do not let conductive materials such as screws or metal pieces and inflammable materials such as oil enter
the product.
Install the product in a place that can withstand the weight of the product, and follow the instruction manual.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries from dropping.
Do not install and operate an inverter that is damaged or that has missing parts.
Always observe the conditions described in the instruction manual for the installation environment.
Failure to observe this could lead to faults.
1.2.2 Wiring
DANGER
Always turn the device's input power OFF before starting wiring.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or fires.
Carry out grounding that complies with the standards of the country where the inverter is being installed.
Wiring must always be done by a qualified electrician.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks or fires.
Always install the device before starting wiring.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks or injuries.
Prepare a breaker such as an MCCB or fuses that matches the capacity for the inverter's power supply side.
Failure to do so could lead to fires.
When using the PM motor, even if the inverter is stopped, the voltage will be generated at the output
terminal (U, V, W) during rotation. Always carry out wiring while the motor is stopped.
CAUTION
Do not connect an AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W).

Failure to observe this could lead to injuries or fires.
Confirm that the product's rated voltage and frequency match the power supply voltage and frequency.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or fires.
Install an overheating protection device on the dynamic braking unit and resistor, and shut off the power with
this fault signal.
Failure to do so could lead to fires in the event of abnormal overheating.
Do not directly connect a resistor to the DC terminals (between L+1, L+2, and L).
Tighten the terminal screws with the designated tightening torque.
Correctly connect the output side (U, V, W).
Failure to do so could cause the motor to rotate in reverse and the machine to be damaged.
Always correctly connect when using the encoder.
The signal polarity specifications differ according to the encoder. If the specifications differ from the
VT240EL standard specifications, adjust the signal polarity with the parameter settings (C50, C51).
Failure to observe this could lead to reverse rotation or abnormal acceleration of the motor, and to injuries or
machine damage.
13
Chapter 1 Handling
1.2.3 Operation
DANGER
Always install the front cover before turning the input power ON. Never remove the cover while the power
is ON. There are sections in the front PCB that are charged with high voltages.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
Never touch the switches with wet hands.
Never touch the inverters terminals while the inverter power is ON even if the operation is stopped.
The machine may not stop when a stop command is issued if the deceleration stop function is selected
and the overvoltage/overcurrent limit function is activated. Prepare a separate emergency stop switch.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries.
To prevent unexpected operation, ensure that the operation signal is no longer being input, and reset the
alarm.
To prevent unexpected operations, when selecting the automatic fault reset function, design the machine
so that personnel safety is ensured even if the motor restarts when the operation command is input.
CAUTION
The heat sink and dynamic braking resistor are heated to high temperatures, so never touch them.
Failure to observe this could lead to burns.
Do not block the inverters ventilation holes.
The inverter operation can easily be set from low speeds to high speeds, so confirm that the operation is
within the tolerable range for the motor or machine before making settings.
Prepare holding brakes when necessary. Holding is not possible with the inverters brake functions.
Confirm the operation of the motor as a single unit before operating the machine.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or machine damage due to unforeseen movements.
Always prepare a safety backup device so that the machine is not placed in a hazardous situation when
an error occurs in the inverter or before preparation is completed.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or machine damage or fires.
14
Chapter 1 Handling
1.2.4 Maintenance, inspection and part replacement
DANGER
Always wait at least 10 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting inspections.
Make sure that the displays on the operation panel have gone out before removing the front cover.
Remove the front cover, and check the following matters before starting the inspection work:
1) The "CHARGE" LED in the unit is OFF
2) The voltage across L+1 or L+2 and L- is 15V or less.
(Check with the "CHARGE" LED if the unit is not provided with the L terminal.)
Maintenance, inspections and part replacement must be done by a designated person.
(Remove all metal accessories such as watches, bracelets, etc., before starting the work.)
(Always use an insulation measure tool.)
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks and injuries.
Always turn the power OFF before inspecting the motor or machine. A potential is applied on the motor
terminal even when the motor is stopped.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks and injuries.
Do not use parts other than those designated for the replacement parts.
Contact your inverter dealer for replacement parts.
CAUTION
Vacuum the inverter with a vacuum cleaner to clean it. Do not use water or organic solvents.
Failure to observe this could lead to fires or damage.
1.2.5 Others
DANGER
Never modify the product.

Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks or injuries.
CAUTION
Dispose of this product as industrial waste.
15
Chapter 1 Handling
1.3 Delivery inspection and storage
1.3.1 Delivery inspection and storage
(1) Remove the inverter from the packaging, and check the details on the rating nameplate to confirm that
the inverter is as ordered. The rating nameplate is on the left side of the unit.
(2) Confirm that the product has not been damaged.
(3) If the inverter is not to be used for a while after purchasing, store it in a place with no humidity or
vibration in the packaged state.
(4) Always inspect the inverter before using after storing for a long period.
1.3.2 Display on rating nameplate
(1) The following details are listed on the rating nameplate.
VT240EL-4060AF2-100X000
AC3PH 380-480V 50/60Hz Barcode printing section
53.9A
AC3PH 0-480V 0-440Hz
Software version display:
37.0A 50%ED,MAX180% 5sec
MA12345678 00401NN High-order side: CPU Ver.
Low-order side: ROM Ver.
(2) Using the above type as an example, the type is displayed as follows:
VT240EL4060 A F 2100 X000
Meidensha control No.
Indicates the control PCB option.
Indicates the operation panel selection.

0 : None
1 : LCD type
2 : LED type
Indicates the main circuit option 2.

0 : Standard
F : Noise filter built in
R : With DCL
Indicates the main circuit option 1.

A : Standard
Input voltage
2*** : 200V system
4*** : 400V system
16
Chapter 1 Handling
(3) The software version and monitor display (D21-2: CPU Ver., D21-3: ROM Ver., D21-5) have the
following relation.
The software version is displayed with alphabetic characters (A to Z), but the monitor can only display
hexadecimals, so following software version PP, CPU Ver. and ROM Ver. are displayed using D21-5.
Software version AA to 00: D21.2=9581.1 to 9581.F, D21-3=9582.1 to 9582.F (Not a D21-5 display)
Software version PP to ZZ: D21.2 = 9581.0, D21-3=9582.0, D21-5=1010 to 1A1A (High-order side:
CPU Ver., Low-order side: ROM Ver.)
17
Chapter 1 Handling
1.4 Instruction manual guide
This guide explains the "Instruction Manual's configuration", and an outline of the matters explained in
each chapter.
Chapter 1 Handling
Understand the precautions for handling!
The safety precautions, the inspections to be completed upon delivery, and the storage methods
are explained.
Read this section thoroughly before using the inverter.

The VT240EL ratings are explained.
When wondering which type to select, refer to this chapter and find the inverter's ratings!

The VT240EL dimensions and precautions for mounting are explained.
Always read this section before mounting the inverter.
Chapter 4 Wiring
The precautions for wiring the VT240EL are explained.
Refer to this chapter for quick reference on "Terminal layout for connecting the main circuit or
control circuit", "Connecting the control circuit", and the "Circuit ratings (restrictions).

The VT240EL operation panel is explained in this section.
There are actually two operation panel types, the "LCD" and "LED".
The display methods and operation keys on the two panels differ slightly.
The "Common operations", and the differences for the "LCD" and "LED" types are explained in
this section. Refer to the section corresponding to the purchased panel.
Various matters can be monitored with the operation panel.
The monitor functions are introduced in this chapter.
Chapter 6 Various functions and parameters

The VT240EL's functions and required parameters are explained.
Refer to this section for quick reference on "Available functions", "Parameter settings for required
functions", etc.
Refer to the "Parameter List" to cross reference explanations from the parameter number.

Examples of systems using the PM motor are explained.
"Precautions required for systems using PM motor", "Encoder to use", "Explanations on magnetic
pole position estimation function" are explained using actual wiring examples and charts.
Encoders can be replaced easily by using Meidensha's "magnetic pole position estimation
function".
Refer to this section for explanations on "steps for running elevator".
Actual examples are introduced, and the flow of operations up to trial operation are explained.
Examples of systems using IM are explained.
Actual wiring examples and charts are used to explain the operation methods up to trial operation
and the methods of configuring a system using a controller.
18
Chapter 1 Handling

The VT240EL protection functions and fault details are introduced.
Refer to this troubleshooting section when faults occur.

The VT240EL standard communication methods are explained.
The communication format required to create original personal computer tools using the
communication function is explained.
Chapter 11 Options
The VT240EL's main circuit options and control circuit options are introduced.

The VT240EL maintenance and inspection methods are introduced.
Always conduct periodic inspections.

The VT240EL parameters are listed in this section.
The parameters are listed in order, and the explanation reference page is also indicated.
Revision History
The revision history for this instruction manual is given.
19
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
2.1 Precautions for standard specifications table ........................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Max. applicable motor ...................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Rated output voltage .....................................................................................................2-1
2.1.3 Reduced rating with carrier frequency ...........................................................................2-1
2.2 Standard specifications table.................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 200V series ...................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.2 400V series ...................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Control specifications table....................................................................................................2-3
2.4 Selecting the inverter.............................................................................................................2-4
2.4.1 Relation of operation pattern and required torque .........................................................2-4
2.4.2 Load torque ...................................................................................................................2-5
2.4.3 Acceleration torque .......................................................................................................2-6
2.4.4 Calculating the current...................................................................................................2-6
2.4.5 Setting VT240EL ...........................................................................................................2-7
2.4.6 Examples of selecting inverter.......................................................................................2-7
2.4.7 Precautions for selecting inverter ..................................................................................2-8

2.1 Precautions for standard specifications table
2.1.1 Max. applicable motor
The values for the Meidensha standard 4-pole squirrel-cage induction motor are given.
Use the rated current values as a reference for selecting the inverter.
2.1.2 Rated output voltage
(1) An output voltage exceeding the input voltage cannot be attained.

The upper limit of the effective output voltage value is the DC voltage/1.37.
(2) Set the rated voltage of the motor driven with the sensor-less vector control mode, vector control
with sensor mode, and PM motor control with sensor mode to 85% or less of the rated input voltage.
* When setting B01-3 to a value smaller than the rated voltage indicated on the motors rating
nameplate, set the motor rated output in B01-1 to B01-3 setting/rated voltage on motor rating
nameplate * rated voltage on motor rating nameplate.
Example: For a 380V power, 7.5kW-360V motor, calculate 323V/360V*7.5kW and set 6.73kW.
2.1.3 Reduced rating with carrier frequency
The VT240ELs reference carrier frequency is 8kHz or 4kHz. To use with an increased carrier frequency,
the current rating must be reduced. The reference carrier frequency and reduction rate per 1kHz are
shown below.
200V series
Type 2010 2020 2040 2050 2080 2100 2130 2150 2210 2280 2350
Reference carrier
8kHz 4kHz
frequency
Reduction rate (1kHz) 6% 5% 6% 12% 5%
400V series
Type 4009 4015 4020 4030 4040 4050 4060 4070 4100 4130 4150
Reference carrier
8kHz 4kHz
frequency
Reduction rate (1kHz) 5% 10% 5% 6% 5% 6% 12%
* To protect the inverter, the carrier frequency may be automatically reduced to the above carrier
frequency or to 2kHz depending on the inverter output current size, cooling fin temperature and
operation frequency.
2-1
2.2 Standard specifications table

2.2.1 200V series
Type (VT240EL-) 2010 2020 2040 2050 2080 2100 2130 2150 2210 2280 2350
Max. continuous rated
11 16 24 33 46 61 76 88 118 156 193
current [A]
Inverter rating
Overload withstand
19.8 28.8 43.2 59.4 82.8 109.8 136.8 158.4 212.4 280.8 347.4
current [A] (180% 5 sec)
Max. applicable motor
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 40 50
[kW]
Selectable from 2kHz, 4kHz, 6kHz, 8kHz, 10kHz
Carrier frequency 2010 to 2100: 8kHz reference
2130 to 2350: 4kHz reference
supply
Power
Rated input voltage 200 to 240V 10% 200 to 230V 10%

Frequency 50 or 60Hz 5%
Output
Rated output voltage 200 to 240V (Max.) 200 to 230V (Max.)

Output frequency 0 to 180Hz (IM) / 0 to 210Hz (PM motor)
EMI filter Can be built in Standalone
Main circuit
(Option)
devices
DC reactor Standalone Can be built in

Dynamic braking circuit Built in (standard) Standalone
Dynamic braking resistor Standalone
Structure Wall-mounted
Construc-
Enclosure IP20 IP00

tion
Cooling method Forced air cooling

Approx. weight (kg) 3 5 12 23 30 45 65
Paint color Munsell N4.0
Indoors, Working ambient temperature: -10 to 45C
Relative humidity: 95%RH or below (no dew condensation),
Working environment 2
Altitude: 1000m or less, Vibration: 4.9m/s or less
Freedom from corrosive or explosive gases, steam, dust, oil mist or cotton lint.
2.2.2 400V series

Type (VT240EL-) 4009 4015 4020 4030 4040 4050 4060 4070 4100 4130 4150
5.5 8.6 13 17 23 31 37 44 60 73 87
current [A]
Inverter rating
Overload withstand
9.9 15.5 23.4 30.6 41.4 55.8 66.6 79.2 108.0 131.4 156.6
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
[kW]
Selectable from 2kHz, 4kHz, 6kHz, 8kHz, 10kHz
Carrier frequency 4009 to 4070: 8kHz reference
4100 to 4150: 4kHz reference
supply
Power
Rated input voltage 380 to 480V 10%

Frequency 50 or 60Hz 5%
Output
Rated output voltage 380 to 480V (Max.)

Output frequency 0 to 180Hz (IM) / 0 to 210Hz (PM motor)
devices (Option)
EMI filter Can be built in Standalone

Main circuit
DC reactor Standalone Can be built in

Dynamic braking circuit Built in (standard)
Dynamic braking resistor Standalone
Structure Wall-mounted
Construc-
Enclosure IP20 IP00

tion
Cooling method Forced air cooling

Approx. weight (kg) 3 5 12 23 27
Paint color Munsell N4.0
Indoors, Working ambient temperature: -10 to 45C
Relative humidity: 95%RH or below (no dew condensation),
Working environment 2
Altitude: 1000m or less, Vibration: 4.9m/s or less
Freedom from corrosive or explosive gases, steam, dust, oil mist or cotton lint.
2-2
2.3 Control specifications table

(1) The optional PCB for speed detection is required for "vector control with speed sensor" and "PM
motor control with sensor".
(2) The control specifications for the "PM motor control with sensor" are for the Meidensha standard PM
motor.
IM Vector control with speed sensor PM motor control with sensor
Control method All digital control Sine wave approximation PWM
Frequency control
Transfer frequency Selectable from 2kHz, 4kHz, 6kHz, 8kHz, 10kHz

Output frequency resolution 0.01Hz
0.01% (digital) / In respect to maximum frequency
Frequency setting resolution
0.03% (analog) / In respect to maximum frequency
0.01% (digital) at 2510C
Frequency accuracy
0.1% (analog) at 2510C
Voltage/frequency Randomly set between 40 and Randomly set between 40 and
-1 -1
characteristics 9999min (max. 180Hz) 9999min (max. 210Hz)
Motor constant, encoder phase adjustment
Automatic tuning Motor constants
Magnetic pole position estimation
Control specifications
Acceleration/deceleration
Program rate following acceleration and jerk settings 8
time
Braking start speed : Randomly set between 0.00 and 50.00%
DC braking Braking current : Randomly set between 50 and 150%.
Braking time : Randomly set between 0.0 and 20.0 seconds
Output frequency 0 to 180Hz 0 to 210Hz
Control range 1 : 1000 1 : 100
Speed Control accuracy
0.01% 0.01%
control (At Fmax 50Hz)
Control response 30Hz
Setting
Multi-step frequency setting 8 steps Acceleration/deceleration time as changeable 5-bit non-encode mode
Local/remote changeover operation, forward run/reverse run direct operation, reference,

Common change and copy of all parameters
Opera- Mountable outside unit (extension cable max. 3m)
tion Display : 16 characters 2 lines Status display LED: 4 points
LCD
Control input/output
panel Operation : Operate with knob and set key

Display : 7-segment LED 5 digits + sign Status/unit display LED: 7 points
LED
Operation : Operate with keys + set key
Sequence input Programmable : 7 points sink/source changeable
Relay 1c contact: 1 point, relay 1a contact: 1 point, open collector: 3 points (programmable)
Types of programmable signals
Sequence output
Speed detection, pre-charging complete, reverse run, speed reached, direct operation,
current reached, speed reached, acceleration, deceleration, fault code, etc.
Voltage input (0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V) or current input (4 to 20mA, 0 to 20mA): 2 points
Frequency setting
Voltage input (0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V): 1 point
Voltage output (0 to 10V) or current output (4 to 20mA): 2 points (programmable)
Control Meter output
Change between output frequency, output voltage, output current, DC voltage, etc.
Communication
Communication protocol: Modbus-RTU or VT240EL series dedicated communication

(standard serial)
Connection method: RS485, 2-wire type, Transmission distance: total extension distance
Serial interface
150m or less, Transmission method: Start-stop synchronization, half-duplex
communication, Baud rate: select from 1200 to 38400bps, No. of stations: max. 32 units,
Error detection: Sum check, parity, framing
Overcurrent limit, overvoltage limit, undervoltage limit, overload warning, carrier frequency
Preventive
automatic reduction at overload (cooling fin overheat) (selective)
Protection
Overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, IGBT fault, phase failure (input/output), overload,

Shut-off
cooling fin temperature rise, ground fault, other self-diagnosis
Past ten faults recorded. Recorded details: primary cause, secondary cause, output
Fault history frequency, current, DC voltage, hardware detection fault, cumulative ON time and
cumulative operation time before shutoff
2-3
2.4 Selecting the inverter
The following two conditions must be satisfied when selecting the VT240EL.
1) The current when driving a steady-state power must not exceed the inverter's "maximum continuous
rated current".
* Steady-state power: Power required to run at a constant speed
2) The current when driving a maximum acceleration power must not exceed the inverter's "overload
withstand current".
The procedures for calculating the elevator's power to selecting the inverter are given below.
In the explanation, obtain the "required power" as the "required torque", and obtain the current that the
inverter must output based on the motor's rated torque and rated current.
2.4.1 Relation of operation pattern and required torque
The relation of the elevator operation pattern and the required torque at that time are shown below.
As shown in the figure, the torque required for operating the elevator, or in other words, the "drive torque"
is the total of the "load torque" required for the steady-state and the "acceleration torque" required for
acceleration.
Operation
pattern (speed)
Load torque
Acceleration
torque
* Drive torque =
load torque + acceleration torque
Drive torque
Maximum torque Load torque
1) The current required for this torque must not

exceed the maximum continuous rated current
2) This current required for this torque must

not exceed the overload withstand current
2-4
2.4.2 Load torque
Calculate the power obtained from the elevator's rated speed and load, and covert the results based on
the motor's rated output and rated torque to obtain the load torque.
(1) Stead-state power (power required to run at constant speed)

The stead-state power PL (KW) is obtained with the following expression.
(1 k) W (V 60)
PL (kW) =
6120
K : Overbalance (0.45 to 0.5) * Normally 0.5
W : Rated load (kg)
V : Rated speed (m/s)
: Elevator efficiency
Gear-less PM machine : 0.75 to 0.85
Geared IM machine : 0.5 to 0.8
(2) Converting into load torque for steady-state power

When the stead-state power PL (kW) obtained in step 1 is converted into the load torque TL (Nm) using
the motor's rated output Pm (kW) and rated torque Tm (Nm), the results are as follow:
PL
TL (Nm) = Tm
Pm
Reference: Motor rated torque Tm (Nm) calculation expression
9.8 Pm 1000
Tm (Nm) = 1.027 N
Pm : Motor rated output (kW)
N : Motor rated speed (min-1)
2-5
2.4.3 Acceleration torque
The acceleration torque can be obtained from the elevator's inertia (motor shaft conversion) and elevator
specifications such as the acceleration and rated speed.
(1) Elevator inertia

If the machine system's total weight G (kg) is as follows:
G (kg) = W + Wc + Wb
W : Rated load (kg)
Wc : Cage weight
Wb : Counterweight
Then the elevator inertia GD2 (kgm2) is as follows:
D
GD2 (kgm2) = G ( )2 + GD2M
R RP
D : Sheave diameter (m)
R : Gear ratio
RP : Roping coefficient
GD2M : Machine GD2
(2) Acceleration torque

The acceleration torque Tacc (Nm) calculated from the elevator inertia GD2 (kgm2) obtained in 1) is
as follows:
9.8 GD N
2
Tacc (Nm) =
375 V
ACCEL
N : Motor rated speed (min-1)
V : Elevator rated speed (m/s)
ACCEL : Elevator acceleration (m/s2)
2.4.4 Calculating the current
Using the load torque TL and acceleration torque Tacc obtained in sections 2.4.2 and 2.4.3, the maximum
torque Tmax (Nm) is as follows:
Tmax (Nm) = TL + Tacc
Here, the current value IL (for load torque) and Imax (for maximum torque) required to generate the load
torque TL and maximum torque Tmax are calculated using the motor rated torque Tm (Nm) and motor
rated current Im (A).
TL
IL (A) = Im
Tm
Tmax
Imax (A) = Im
Tm
Note) It is assumed that the motor torque ITM and current Im have a proportional relation.
Before actually calculating the values, check the torque characteristics of the motor being
used.
2-6
2.4.5 Setting VT240EL
The VT240EL capacity is selected so that the current value IL for the load torque and the current value
Imax for the maximum torque obtained in section 2.4.4 do not exceed the VT240EL's maximum
continuous rated current and overload withstand current.
Selection conditions
Maximum continuous rated current current value IL for load torque, and
Overload withstand current current value Imax for maximum torque
Type (VT240EL-) 4009 4015

Max. continuous rated Compare this field and the current value IL for load torque.
Inverter rating
5.5 8.6
current [A]
Overload withstand
9.9 15.5 Compare this field and the current value Imax
for maximum torque
2.2 3.7
[kW]
2.4.6 Examples of selecting inverter
Two examples of selecting the inverter are given below.
(1) Setting conditions

Name Symbol Unit Example 1 Example 2
Rated load W kg 1000 1000
Cage weight Wc kg 1500 1500
Counterweight Wb kg 2000 2000
Overbalance K 0.5 0.5
Rated speed V m/sec 1.000 1.750
Elevator efficiency 0.8 0.8
Sheave diameter D m 0.4 0.4
Gear ratio R 1 1
Roping coefficient RP 2 2
Machine GD2 GD2M kgm2 3.5 3.5
Acceleration ACCEL m/sec2 0.700 0.800
Motor rated output Pm kW 6.2 11.0
Motor rated current Im A 17.0 30.0
Motor rated speed N min-1 95 167
* For 400V series. The motor rated current, etc., differs from the actual motor.
(2) Calculation results

Name Symbol Unit Example 1 Example 2
Steady-state power PL kW 6.2 10.8
Motor rated torque Tm Nm 622.8 628.5
Load torque TL Nm 622.8 617.2
Machine system total weight G kg 4500 4500
Elevator inertia GD2 kgm2 183.5 183.5
Acceleration torque Tacc Nm 318.9 366.1
Maximum torque Tmax Nm 941.7 983.3
Current for load torque IL A 17.0 29.5
Maximum current Imax A 25.8 47.0
Maximum current ratio Tmax% % 151.3 156.5
2-7
(3) Selecting the inverter

Select so that the "current value IL for load torque" and "current value Imax for maximum torque" n the
calculation results do not exceed the VT240EL's maximum continuous rated current and overload
withstand current.
Selection conditions
Maximum continuous rated current current value IL for load torque, and
Overload withstand current current value Imax for maximum torque
Type (VT240EL-) 4009 4015 4020 4030 4040 4050 4060 4070 4100 4130
Inverter rating
5.5 8.6 13 17 23 31 37 44 60 73
current [A]
Overload withstand
9.9 15.5 23.4 30.6 41.4 55.8 66.6 79.2 108.0 131.4
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
[kW]
According to this table, the following models should be selected.

Example 1 .... VT240EL-4030
Example 2 .... VT240EL-4050
2.4.7 Precautions for selecting inverter
(1) Make sure that the "current value IL for load torque) does not exceed the VT240EL's maximum
continuous rated current.
If it exceeds this value, the inverter life could be shortened, or overload protection (OLT) could occur
during travel.
(2) Make sure that the "current value Imax for maximum torque) does not exceed the VT240EL's overload
withstand current.
If it exceeds this value, the elevator may not accelerate or run correctly.
(3) When using a PM gear-less machine (when rated frequency during operation is less than 10Hz), a
one-rank higher inverter should be selected.
2-8
2-9
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Outline dimension drawings ..........................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Name of each part .........................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Handling the operation panel.................................................................................................3-3
3.2.1 Removing the operation panel.......................................................................................3-3
3.2.2 Precautions for opening and closing the operation panel holder ...................................3-4
3.3 Installation .............................................................................................................................3-5
3.3.1 Installation environment.................................................................................................3-5
3.3.2 Installation methods.......................................................................................................3-6

3.1 Outline
3.1.1 Outline dimension drawings
The outline dimensions are shown below.
Type Dimensions (mm) Main
Weight
200V 400V circuit Fig.
W0 W1 H0 H1 D d (kg)
series series terminal
2010 4009
155 140 250 235 180 6 3
2020 4015
M4
4020
-
4030
205 190 275 260 196 5
2040
4040 1
2050
7 M5
4050
-
4060
260 240 350 330 298 12
2080 4070 M6
2100 -
2130 4100 M8
470 450 23
2150 4130 300 200
317 2
- 4150 27
520 500 10
2210 - 340 240 30
2280 - 435 300 615 595 M10 45
350 3
2350 - 500 400 710 684 65
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Fig. 3
3-1
3.1.2 Name of each part
The names of each unit section are shown below.
2100 and 4070 and smaller
Operation panel
Front cover
Cooling fan installation case
Main body case
2130 and 4100 and larger
Operation panel
Main body case
Front cover
3-2
3.2 Handling the operation panel
3.2.1 Removing the operation panel
To remove the operation panel, securely hold the panel with a

thumb on the lower side and another finger on the top side as
shown right, and pull the panel forward and off. To mount the
operation panel, hold it the top and bottom sides with five
fingers, and press the panel on horizontally. Confirm that the
operation panel is securely fixed with the latches for the
operation panel mounting holder.
Note) The operation panel is fixed with the latches for

the operation panel mounting holder, so the front
cover can be removed with the operation panel
attached.
To remove the operation panel with the front cover removed, hold the mounting holder securely with
one hand, and remove the operation panel as explained above.
(1) (2) Remove
Securely hold down the

mounting holder with one
hand.
(1)
Securely hold down the

mounting holder with one
hand.
3-3
3.2.2 Precautions for opening and closing the operation panel holder
The operation panel mounting holder has a Movable hinge structure

movable hinge structure.
Lightly press in the direction of the

support point, and lift forward and
open.
When wiring to the control terminal block,

remove the front cover, and then lightly press
the left side of the holder toward the right
support point, and then lift forward and open.
After closing, make sure that the holder is
securely fixed in the PCB protection case.
PCB protection
Control terminal block case
The panel could come off if opened with force.

Do not open it by more than 90.
Approx. 90 Operation panel

mounting holder
If the holder does come off, attach it with the following procedure.
Lightly press in the hinge section in the direction of the arrows, and insert into the hinge section on the
operation panel mounting holder side.
3-4
3.3 Installation
CAUTION
Always transport the product with an appropriate amount according to the products weight.
Install the inverter, dynamic braking unit and resistor, and other peripheral devices on non-combustible
material such as metal.
Do not place the product near inflammable items.
Do not hold the front cover while transporting the product.
Failure to observe this could lead to injuries from dropping.
Do not let conductive materials such as screws or metal pieces and inflammable materials such as oil enter
the product.
Install the product in a place that can withstand the weight of the product, and follow the instruction manual.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries from dropping.
Do not install and operate an inverter that is damaged or that has missing parts.
Always observe the conditions described in the instruction manual for the installation environment.
Failure to observe this could lead to faults.
3.3.1 Installation environment
Observe the following points when installing the inverter.

(1) Install the inverter vertically so that the cable lead-in holes face downward.
(2) Make sure that the ambient temperature is 10C to 45C.
(3) Avoid installation in the following environment.
Place subject to direct sunlight Place subject to wind, rain or water Place with high levels of humidity
Place where dust, cotton lint or iron

Place subject to oil drops Place with high levels of salt
chips, etc., are present
3-5
Place with harmful corrosive or Place near sources of vibration such Place where flammable materials
explosive gases or fluids are present as dollies or press machines are present
Place with high levels of ambient Places with high levels of magnetic Places where radioactive
temperature noise substances are present
3.3.2 Installation methods
(1) Ensure ventilation space around the inverter.
For 2100, 4070 and smaller For 2130, 4100 and larger
200mm
200mm
VT240EL VT240EL
50mm 50mm 50mm 50mm
150mm
200mm
3-6
(2) Fixing method
2100, 4070 and smaller

Fix the VT240EL at four places when installing.
The lower two installation sections are notched.
Remove the front cover, and wire to the main circuit and control terminal block.
Operation panel
and holder
Front cover
Cooling fan installation case
Control terminal block
Main circuit terminal block
Main body case
VT240EL mounting hole

(Total 4 bolts)
2130, 4100 and larger

Fix the VT240EL at four places when installing. The VT240EL mass is more than 25kg, so installation
by two workers is recommended.
When two workers are installing the unit, they should confirm each step with signals.
Remove the front cover, and wire to the main circuit and control terminal block.
VT240EL mounting hole

(Total 4 bolts)
Operation panel
Main body case
Front cover
3-7
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.1 Precautions for wiring............................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Relation of motor rotation direction and encoder signal polarity............................................4-2
4.3 Example of general connection diagram ...............................................................................4-3
4.4 Main circuit ............................................................................................................................4-4
4.4.1 Main circuit configuration and terminal layout drawing ..................................................4-4
(1) 2010, 2020 / 4009 to 4040 ................................................................................................4-5
(2) 2040, 2050........................................................................................................................4-6
(3) 4050 to 4070.....................................................................................................................4-7
(4) 2080, 2100........................................................................................................................4-8
(5) 2130 to 2210, 4100 to 4150 ..............................................................................................4-9
(6) 2280, 2350........................................................................................................................4-10
4.4.2 Precautions for main circuit wiring .................................................................................4-11
(1) Wiring the inverter's main circuit .......................................................................................4-11
(2) Applicable wire..................................................................................................................4-11
(3) Breaker for wiring..............................................................................................................4-11
(4) Power voltage/frequency ..................................................................................................4-11
(5) Power supply capacity ......................................................................................................4-12
(6) Noise measures................................................................................................................4-12
(7) Inverter output...................................................................................................................4-12
(8) Grounding .........................................................................................................................4-12
(9) Inverter output surge voltage (For 400V series)................................................................4-12
(10) DCL ..................................................................................................................................4-12
(11) DB (Dynamic Braking) unit (2280 or more) .......................................................................4-12
(12) DB resistor protection .......................................................................................................4-12
(13) Installation of surge absorber............................................................................................4-12
4.5 Control circuit ........................................................................................................................4-13
4.5.1 Control circuit diagram...................................................................................................4-13
4.5.2 Layout the control circuit terminals ................................................................................4-14
4.5.3 Control circuit usage methods and precautions.............................................................4-15
(1) Sequence input.................................................................................................................4-15
(2) Sequence output...............................................................................................................4-16
(3) Analog input......................................................................................................................4-17
(4) Analog output....................................................................................................................4-18
(5) Standard serial transmission terminal block......................................................................4-18
Chapter 4 Wiring
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.1 Precautions for wiring
DANGER
Always turn the device's input power OFF before starting wiring.
Carry out grounding that complies with the standards of the country where the inverter is being installed.
When using the PM motor, even if the inverter is stopped, the voltage will be generated at the output
terminal (U, V, W) during rotation. Always carry out wiring while the motor is stopped.
Wiring must always be done by a qualified electrician.
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks or fires.
Always install the device before starting wiring.
Prepare a breaker such as an MCCB or fuses that matches the capacity for the inverter's power supply side.
CAUTION
Do not connect an AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W).

Failure to observe this could lead to injuries or fires.
Confirm that the product's rated voltage and frequency match the power supply voltage and frequency.
Failure to do so could lead to injuries or fires.
Install an overheating protection device on the dynamic braking unit and resistor, and shut off the power with
this fault signal.
Failure to do so could lead to fires in the event of abnormal overheating.
Do not directly connect a resistor to the DC terminals (between L+1, L+2, and L).
Tighten the terminal screws with the designated tightening torque.
Correctly connect the output side (U, V, W).
Failure to do so could cause the motor to rotate in reverse and the machine to be damaged.
Always correctly connect when using the encoder.
The signal polarity specifications differ according to the encoder. Adjust the signal polarity with the
parameter settings (C50, C51).
Failure to observe this could lead to reverse rotation or abnormal acceleration of the motor, and to injuries or
machine damage.
CAUTION
There is a risk of electric shocks.

The VT240EL has a built-in electrolytic capacitor, so a charge will remain even when the inverter power is
turned OFF.
Always observe the followings before carrying out wiring work.
Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the power OFF before starting work. Make sure that the displays on
the operation panel have gone out before removing the cover.
After removing the cover, confirm that the "CHARGE" LED in the unit has gone out. Also check that the
voltage between terminals L+1 or L+2 and L is 15V or less before starting the wiring work.
(Check with the "CHARGE" LED if the unit is not provided with the L terminal.)
4-1
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.2 Relation of motor rotation direction and encoder signal polarity
When using the VT240EL for an elevator, the following basic relation must be established for control.
1) "Inverter and motor wiring phase order" and "inverter forward run command and motor rotation
direction"
2) Motor forward run direction and encoder signal polarity
3) Motor rotation direction and elevator operation direction
The phrase "correct wiring" used in this manual refers to the state in which this "basic relation" is
established.
Before starting use, fully comprehend this relation, and complete the wiring and parameter settings.
Encoder
Motor
Forward
Forward run run
Sheave (CCW)
A phase
B phase UP
Reverse (F RUN)
U run
V A
View point Reverse run W
B DOWN
(CW) (R RUN)
U
V
Cage W
Up
Counter-
weight
Down
Load sensor
Basic relation (with correct connection)

direction"
When the U, V and W phases of the inverter and motor are each connected, and
a forward run command is issued to the inverter (F RUN is turned ON),
the motor will rotate in the CCW (counterclockwise direction) looking from the coupling side
(view point shown in figure).
This is called forward run.
During forward run, the encoder signal polarity generates pulses in the A phase to B phase
order.
During forward run, the cage moves up.
UP
DOWN
Forward run
Speed command
Reverse run
Up
Elevator speed
Down
Encoder output
(A phase)
Encoder output
(B phase)
4-2
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.3 Example of general connection diagram

An example of the multi-step speed operation system using the incremental encoder (A, B, Z signals) is
shown below.
76D DBR
Burn prevention circuit
using thermal relay, etc.
L+1 L+2
VT240EL B
MCCB MC
L1 U
L2 V
M3
L3 W to
L- PG
[A phase pulse output] -13 [PAO] 5VDC Max. 350mA -8 [5RP]

[B phase pulse output] -14 [PBO] -1 [0RP]
-9 [PA]
l=5 to 30mA [COM] -1 [0RP] A phase -2 [PAN]
-10 [PB]
B phase
-3 [PBN]
P10 750 -11 [PZ]
Z phase
+15V -4 [PZN]
AI1 11k
TB2
510 10k
PG : Pulse generator
COM
0V V24-DN2 ** Use twist-pair shielded cables
DS1-2 Option
AI2 11k
510 10k
DS1-3
0V
20k
TB1 AI3 W3
0 to 10V AO1
1
20k 4 to 20mA
Load detector 2 COM
COM
0V W4
0 to 10V 1 AO2
4 to 20mA 2
RY24 COM
RY24V 0V
PSI1 Brake open
Run command UP Sink RA command (MBRK)
1
PSI2 Ry RC
Run command 2 RY24V COM
W1
DOWN PSI3 FA
Emergency stop Fault (FLT)
FB
EMS PSI4 Ry
4.7k FC
Multi-speed S0 COM
PSI5
Source
Multi-speed S1 PSO1
PSI6 Zero speed (ZSP)
4.7k
Multi-speed S2 PSO2
PSI7 READY 2 (RDY2)
1 PSO3
Fault reset RST RY0V OFF
2 PSO3
W2 Run (RUN)
PSOE
RY0 ON COM
RY0V DS1-4 TB2
TB2
4-3
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.4 Main circuit
4.4.1 Main circuit configuration and terminal layout drawing
The configuration of the VT240EL main circuit differs according to the capacity.
The mounting state of each option is shown below. The circuit diagrams for (1) to (6) and the main circuit
terminal block configurations are shown on the following pages.
Type Circuit EMI filter DCL DB circuit

2010 4009
2020 4015
4020 (1) Built-in option
4030
4040
2040
(2) External option External option
2050
4050
4060 (3) Built-in option Built-in standard
4070 equipment
2080
(4)
2100
4100
4130
4150
(5) External option
2130
Additional option
2150
2210
2280 External
(6)
2350 standalone
4-4
Chapter 4 Wiring
(1) 2010, 2020 / 4009 to 4040
[Main circuit (1) configuration diagram]

Standalone External DB resistor
DC reactor (prepared by customer)
(option)
VT240 EL L +1 L+2 B
L1 U
Built-in
L2 EMI filter V
(option)
L3 W
L-
The L+1 and L+2 terminals are in the stage before the pre-charging circuit.
The DB resistor is installed externally (prepared by customer).
Use of the built-in EMI filter can be selected with the options.
[Terminal layout drawing]
Power supply (input)

Motor (output)
4-5
Chapter 4 Wiring
(2) 2040, 2050

(option)
VT240 EL L +1 L+2 B
L1 U
L2 V
L3 W
L-
The L+1 and L+2 terminals are in the stage before the pre-charging circuit.
The EMI filter is an external standalone option.
Power supply (input)

Motor (output)
4-6
Chapter 4 Wiring
(3) 4050 to 4070

(option)
VT240 EL L +1 L+2 B
L1 U
Built-in
L2 EMI filter V
(option)
L3 W
The L+1 and L+2 terminals are in the stage after the pre-charging circuit.
Use of the built-in EMI filter can be selected with the options.
<4050, 4060>
Power supply Motor (output)

(input)
<4070>

(input)
4-7
Chapter 4 Wiring
(4) 2080, 2100

(option)
VT240 EL L +1 L+2 B
L1 U
L2 V
L3 W
<2080>

(input)
<2100>

(input)
4-8
Chapter 4 Wiring
(5) 2130 to 2210, 4100 to 4150

Additional External DB resistor
(option)
VT240EL L +1 L+2 B
L1 U
L2 V
L3 W
<2130, 2150, 4100 to 4150>

(input)
<2210>

(input)
4-9
Chapter 4 Wiring
(6) 2280, 2350
Standalone Standalone
DC reactor DB unit
(option) (option)
VT240 EL L +1 L+2 L-
L1 U
L2 V
L3 W
The DB circuit is not built-in.
The optional DB unit is required.
2280
2350
4-10
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.4.2 Precautions for main circuit wiring
(1) Wiring the inverter's main circuit

The inverter input terminals are L1, L2 and L3. The output terminals to the motor are U, V and W. Do
not connect the power supply to the U, V, W terminals. Incorrect wiring will lead to inverter damage or
fires.
(2) Applicable wire

Power supply, motor, DCL wiring Dynamic braking wiring
Terminal Wire size Tightening torque Terminal Wire size Tightening torque
VT240EL-
screw size 2 screw size 2
AWG mm Nm lb-in AWG mm Nm lb-in
2010 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9
2020 M4 10 5.3 1.8 15.9 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9
2040 M5 8 8.4 3.0 26.5 M5 14 2.1 3.0 26.5
2050 M5 8 8.4 3.0 26.5 M5 14 2.1 3.0 26.5
2080 M6 6 13.3 4.5 39.8 M6 14 2.1 4.5 39.8
2100 M8 3 26.7 9.0 79.7 M8 14 2.1 9.0 79.7
2130 M8 2 33.6 9.0 79.7 M8 12 3.3 9.0 79.7
2150 M8 1 42.4 9.0 79.7 M8 10 5.3 9.0 79.7
M5 (L-) 2.0 17.4
2210 M10 1/02P 53.52P 10.0 88.5 10 5.3
M10 (L+2) 28.9 255.7
2280 M10 1/02P 53.52P 28.9 255.7 M10 6 13.3 28.9 255.7
2350 M10 1/02P 53.52P 28.9 255.7 M10 6 13.3 28.9 255.7
4009 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9
4015 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9
4020 M4 12 3.3 1.8 15.9 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9
4030 M4 10 5.3 1.8 15.9 M4 14 2.1 1.8 15.9
4040 M5 8 8.4 3.0 26.5 M5 14 2.1 3.0 26.5
4050 M5 8 8.4 2.0 17.4 M5 14 2.1 2.0 17.4
4060 M5 6 13.3 2.0 17.4 M5 14 2.1 2.0 17.4
4070 M6 6 13.3 4.5 39.8 M6 14 2.1 4.5 39.8
4100 M8 4 21.2 9.0 79.7 M8 12 3.3 9.0 79.7
4130 M8 2 33.6 9.0 79.7 M8 10 5.3 9.0 79.7
4150 M8 1 42.4 9.0 79.7 M8 6 13.3 9.0 79.7
(3) Breaker for wiring

Install a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB), fuse or magnetic contact (MC) on the inverter's power
supply side.
(4) Power voltage/frequency

Prepare the power supply to match the following power voltage and frequency.
Voltage system Type Power voltage Frequency
2010 to 2050 200 to 240V 10% 50/60Hz 5%
200V series
2080 to 2350 200 to 230V 10% 50/60Hz 5%
400V series 4009 to 4150 380 to 480V 10% 50/60Hz 5%
4-11
Chapter 4 Wiring
(5) Power supply capacity

Make sure that capacity of the transformer used as the inverter's power supply is within the following
range. (For 4% impedance transformer)
2210 and smaller, 400V series : 500kVA or less
2280 and 2350 : Capacity that is 10-times or less inverter capacity
If the above values are exceeded, install an ACL on the inverter's input side.
(6) Noise measures

The inverter will generate high harmonic electromagnetic noise, so using the following noise
measures is recommended.
a) Insert a noise filter on the input side of the inverter. A unit with built-in noise filter is available as an
option.
b) Keep the length of the wire between the noise filter and inverter as short as possible, and wire it
as far away from the noise filter's power supply side.
c) Use a shield cable for the inverter and motor wiring, and connect the shield to the inverter's
terminal and motor grounding terminal. Note that if the cable is long, the higher harmonic leakage
current may occur, the overcurrent limit function may malfunction, and in extreme cases, the
current detector in the unit could be damaged. In this case, lower the carrier frequency as low as
possible, and increase the inverter capacity as required.
d) Separate the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring. Do not place the wires in the same
conduit, lay them in parallel or bundle them, etc. If the wires must be laid in parallel, separate
them by 30cm or more, and pass each through a metal conduit. If the wires need to be
intersected, make sure they intersect at a right angle.
(7) Inverter output

Do not insert a power factor improvement capacitor on the output side of the inverter.
When inserting a magnetic contactor on the output side of the inverter, prepare a sequence control
circuit so that the magnetic contactor will not open and close when the inverter runs.
Directly connect only the motor to the inverter's load. Do not connect relay it through a transformer,
etc.
(8) Grounding
Always ground the inverter unit grounding terminal and the ground. Ground according to the
regulations of the country where the inverter is being used.
(9) Inverter output surge voltage (For 400V series)
If the wiring between the inverter and motor is long (20m or more), the surge voltage applied on the
motor will increase, and the motor insulation could deteriorate.
In this case, lower the carrier frequency as slow as possible (4kHz or less), use a motor with
reinforced insulation for inverter drive, or connect a surge absorber dedicated for the inverter output.
(10) DCL
Always short circuit across L+1 and L+2 when not using the DCL. (Factory setting state)
When connecting the optional DCL, connect it to L+1 and L+2.
Always remove the short-circuit bar at this time.
Twist the wiring to DCL, and keep it as short as possible (5m or less).
(11) DB (Dynamic Braking) unit (2280 or more)
When connecting the optional DB unit, connect the L+2 and L.
The DB unit and inverter unit will both be damaged if the connection is incorrect.
Twist the wiring to the DB unit, and keep it as short as possible (3m or less).
(12) DB resistor protection
When using the thermal relay (76D) or optional DB unit, use the DB unit's overload detection relay to
protect the DB resistor and inverter.
(13) Installation of surge absorber

Install a surge absorber on the magnetic contactor and relay coils installed near the inverter.
4-12
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.5 Control circuit
4.5.1 Control circuit diagram
The control circuit for the VT240EL has the following type of configuration.
Terminator DS1-1
P10 750
TB1 +15V
AI1 11k
510 10k DATA+ CN2
communication
COM
Analog input
DATA-
0V
0VOP
Serial
DS1-2 0VOP
11k 5VOP
AI2 5VOP
510 10k DATA+ TB3
DS1-3
DATA-
0V
20k 0VOP
W3
AI3
Analog output
010V 1 AO1 TB1
20k 420mA 2
COM COM
0V W4
010V 1 AO2
420mA 2
RY24 COM
RY24V 0V
PSI1 Sink RA TB2
1
Ry RC
PSI2 2
Sequence output
W1
Sequence input
PSI3 FA
Ry FB
PSI4 4.7k FC
TB2
PSI5 Source
PSO1
PSI6 4.7k
PSO2
PSI7 1
2 RY0V OFF PSO3
W2 PSO3
PSOE
RY0 PULSE
RY0V
ONDS1-4
Notes
1) Four [COM] terminals are internally connected.
2) No connection shall be made between [RY0], [0VOP] and [COM] since this section is insulated.
3) [RY24] and [RY0] must not be shorted.
4) [P10] and [COM] must not be shorted.
Always observe section "4.5.3 Control circuit usage methods and precautions" when wiring.
4-13
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.5.2 Layout the control circuit terminals
The control circuit terminal layout is shown below.

The TB1 and TB2 terminal block has two stages. M3 size terminal screws are used.
W4 W3
1 2 1 2
AI1
COM
AI2
COM
AI3
TB1 P10
AO1
COM
AO2
COM
RY24
PSI1
PSI2
PSI3
TB3 SG
D- CN2
D+
PSI4
1 2 DS1 ON
PSI5
PSI6 OPEN 1 120
PSI7 W1 PSI16 V1 2 I1
1 2
PSO1
V2 3 I2
TB2 PSO2 W2 PSI7 PSO3 4 PULSE
PSO3
PSOE
RY0
FB
RC
FC
RA
FA
Factory setting
(1) Dip switches [DS1]
Terminal No. OFF (factory setting) ON Signal
1 OPEN 120 Standard serial terminator changeover
2 V1 I1 AI1 current, voltage changeover
3 V2 I2 AI2 current, voltage changeover
4 PS03 PULSE Pulse train output, sequence output changeover
* Pulse train output is not possible with VT240EL. Fix DS1-4 to OFF when using.
(2) Ell bits [W1, W2, W3, W4]

1 (factory setting) 2 Signal
W1 SINK SOURCE PSI1 to 6 sinksource changeovers
W2 SINK SOURCE PSI7 sinksource changeover
W3 voltage current AO1 current, voltage changeover
W4 voltage current AO2 current, voltage changeover
4-14
Chapter 4 Wiring
4.5.3 Control circuit usage methods and precautions
(1) Sequence input

1) Terminal symbols
The [TB1-PSI1 to 3, TB2-PSI4 to 7] terminals and relay input common [TB1-RY24, TB2-RY0]
terminals are used for the sequence input.
Refer to Chapter 6 for details on the assigning (programming) the terminal functions.
2) Switching between sink and source

The logic can be switched between sink and source with the EL-bit W1 (for PSI1 to 6) and W2 (for
PSI7).
a) Sink logic b) Source logic
RY24 RY24
RY24V RY24V
W1 W1
1 SINK 1
SOURCE
2 2
PSI1 PSI1
4.7k 4.7k
PSI2 PSI2
4.7k 4.7k
PSI3 PSI3
4.7k 4.7k
PSI4 PSI4
4.7k 4.7k
PSI5 PSI5
4.7k 4.7k
PSI6 PSI6
W2 4.7k W2 4.7k
SINK
1 1
SOURCE
2 2
PSI7 PSI7
4.7k 4.7k
RY0 RY0
RY0V RY0V
3) Circuit rating
a) The tolerable leakage current is 0.5mA.
b) The internal resistance is 4.7k, and the circuit current is 5mADC. Use a contact for extremely
small currents.
4) Precautions
a) Use a 0.13 to 0.8mm2 wire. The wire length should be 30m or less.
b) The tightening torque for TB1 and TB2 must be 0.6Nm.
c) Do not connect with an analog input/output.
d) RY24 and RY0 are dedicated for the inverter unit's internal sequence circuit.
These are not designed to supply power externally.
4-15
Chapter 4 Wiring
(2) Sequence output

1) Terminal symbols
The [TB2-RA/RC, -FA/FB/FG] relay output terminals and [TB2-PS01 to 3/PS0E] open collector
output terminals are used for the sequence output.
2) Circuit rating
TB2
a) Relay output [TB2-RA/RC]
Rated capacity (resistance load) : 250VAC 3A or 30VDC 3A
Maximum voltage : 277VAC, 30VDC RA
Maximum current : 3A Ry RC
Switching capacity : 750VA, 90W
b) Relay output [TB2-FA/FB/FC]

Rated capacity (resistance load) : 250VAC 3A (NC), 5A (NO) FA
OR 30VDC, 1A FB
Ry
Maximum voltage : 250VAC, 150VDC FC
Maximum current : 3A (NC), 5A (NO)
Switching capacity : 1250VA, 750VA
PSO1
c) Open collector output [TB2-PS01 to 3/PS0E]
PSO2
Rating : 30VDC, 50mA
OFF PSO3
PSO3
PSOE
PULSE
ON
3) Precautions
a) The wire length should be 30m or less.
b) When driving an inductive load such as a coil with the open collector output [TB2-PS01 to
3/PS0E], insert a free wheeling diode.
Max. 50mA
PS01 to 3
Max. 30VDC
30m or less PSOE
4-16
Chapter 4 Wiring
(3) Analog input

1) Terminal symbols
The [TB1-AI1 to 3, P10, COM] terminals are used for the analog input.
AI1 and AI2 are each analog input terminals capable of a "voltage input between 0 and 10V" and a
"current input between 0 and 20mA".
AI3 is an analog input terminal capable of a "-10 to +10V voltage input".
2) Switching the input mode TB1

The voltage input and current input modes for the analog inputs
AI1 and AI2 can be switched. P10 750
Switch the input modes with the AI1: DS1-2 and AI2: DS1-3 DIP +15V
switches. AI1 11k
DS1 OFF (factory setting) ON 510 10k

AI1 2 V1 (Voltage) I1 (Current) COM
0V
AI2 3 V2 (Voltage) I2 (Current)
DS1-2
AI2 11k
3) Circuit rating
510 10k
The analog input ratings are shown below.
DS1-3
Current mode Voltage mode 0V
AI1 Max. 10.5VDC Max. 20.5mADC 20k
AI3
AI2 Max. 10.5VDC Max. 20.5mADC
AI3 Max. 10VDC 20k
COM
0V
4) Precautions
a) Use a shielded wire, and keep the length to 30m or less.
b) Keep the shield mate side open, and connect the VT240EL side to COM.
c) Do not connect with a relay input.
5) Examples of circuits
a) Using external VR (voltage input mode) b) Current input mode

AI2 11k
P10 750
+15V 510
AI1 11k 10k
VR
2k/2W 510 10k 20mA 0V
COM DS1-3:ON
0V COM
0V
DS1-2:OFF
c) Voltage input mode

20k
AI3
10V 20k
COM
0V
4-17
Chapter 4 Wiring
(4) Analog output

1) Terminal symbols
The [TB1-A01, A02, COM] terminals are used for the analog output.
AO1 and AO2 are each analog output terminals capable of a "voltage output between 0 and 10V"
and a "current output between 0 and 20mA".
2) Switching the output mode

The voltage output and current output modes for the analog output AO1 and AO2 can be switched.
Switch the output modes with the AO1: W3 and AO2: W4 EL-bits.
EL-bits 1 2 W3
0 to 10V 1 AO1
AO1 W3 Voltage (0 to 10V) Current (4 to 20mA) TB1
4 to 20mA 2
AO2 W4 Voltage (0 to 10V) Current (4 to 20mA) COM
W4
0 to 10V 1 AO2
3) Circuit rating 4 to 20mA 2
COM
Current mode Voltage mode 0V
AO1 0 to 10VDC 4 to 20mA
AO2 Max. 1mA Max. 500
4) Precautions
a) Use a shielded wire, and keep the length to 30m or less.
b) Keep the shield mate side open, and connect the VT240EL side to COM.
(5) Standard serial transmission terminal block

1) CN2 (Connector type: 4-pole modular, Hirose Electric TM3P-44P or equivalent)
A signal level is based RS-485.
The terminus resistance (120) can set up on/off in DS1-1.
((DS1-1=120): Connected, (DS1-1=OPEN): Not connected)
Terminal No. Signal Outline drawing of connector
1 DATA+
2 DATA-
3 0V0P 5 7.7
4 5V0P
* The signal direction uses the VT240EL as a reference.
* 5VOP and 0VOP are not designed to supply power externally.
6.6
2) TB3
CN2 and TB3 DATA+, DATA- and OVP are connected in the PCB.
The terminal size is M2. The applicable wire size is AWG26 to 16.
Terminal
Signal Symbol Wire peeling size
No.
1 DATA+ D+
2 DATA- D- 5mm
3 0VP SG
4-18
Chapter 4 Wiring
4-19
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
5.1 Types.....................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 LCD panel (V24-OP1) ...................................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 LED panel (V24-OP2)....................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Main displays ........................................................................................................................5-2
5.2.1 Data display section ......................................................................................................5-2
(1) LCD panel (V24-OP1).......................................................................................................5-2
(2) LED panel (V24-OP2) .......................................................................................................5-2
5.2.2 Status display section ....................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Main operations.....................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.1 Operation keys ..............................................................................................................5-4
5.3.2 Parameter operations ....................................................................................................5-5
(1) Parameter configuration....................................................................................................5-5
(2) Parameter notation method ..............................................................................................5-6
(3) Switching the block No......................................................................................................5-6
(4) Selecting the main No. and sub-No. .................................................................................5-7
5.4 LCD panel .............................................................................................................................5-9
5.4.1 Display at power ON......................................................................................................5-9
5.4.2 Operating and displaying the character display section.................................................5-9
5.4.3 Displays and operation methods when changing parameters .......................................5-10
(1) Displaying the parameter No. ...........................................................................................5-10
(2) Changing and displaying the parameters..........................................................................5-10
5.4.4 LCD panel display at fault occurrence ...........................................................................5-12
(1) Configuration of fault history .............................................................................................5-12
(2) Displaying the fault history ................................................................................................5-13
5.5 LED panel..............................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.1 Display at power ON......................................................................................................5-14
5.5.2 Basic display methods...................................................................................................5-14
(1) Differences in displays according to parameter operation methods..................................5-14
(2) Displaying the parameter No. and setting value ...............................................................5-15
(3) Parameters changeable only when stopped .....................................................................5-15
5.5.3 Display and operation methods for changing parameters .............................................5-16
5.5.4 LED panel display at fault occurrence ...........................................................................5-17
(1) Configuration of fault history .............................................................................................5-17
(2) Displaying the fault history ................................................................................................5-17
5.5.5 LED panel character notations ......................................................................................5-18
(1) Numeric ............................................................................................................................5-18
(2) Alphabet............................................................................................................................5-18
(3) Display messages.............................................................................................................5-18
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
5.6 Monitor function.....................................................................................................................5-19

5.6.1 Speed, torque, current, load detection value, etc. (D17) ...............................................5-19
5.6.2 Sequence input/output status (D04, D20-3, 4, D08) ......................................................5-20
(1) LCD panel and LED panel displays ..................................................................................5-20
(2) Sequence input (D04-0 to 3).............................................................................................5-21
(3) Sequence output (D04-4 to 7)...........................................................................................5-22
(4) LCD panel dedicated display methods (D20-3, 4) ............................................................5-23
(5) Terminal block input status display (D08-B) ......................................................................5-24
5.6.3 Fault monitor (D05) .......................................................................................................5-25
5.6.4 Fault history reference (D20).........................................................................................5-26
(1) Error code entry (D20-0) ...................................................................................................5-26
(2) Error code entry (D20-1) ...................................................................................................5-28
5.6.5 Maintenance monitor (D21) ...........................................................................................5-29
5.6.6 Hardware monitor (D30) ................................................................................................5-29
5.6.7 Parameter A, B and C modification list ..........................................................................5-30
5.6.8 Analog input monitor function (D08-3 to A)....................................................................5-30
5.6.9 Speed detection input display (D08-C) ..........................................................................5-31
5.6.10 Analog encoder input display (D09-0 to 7) ....................................................................5-31

5.1 Types
There are two types of operation panels which can be used with the VT240EL, the LCD panel (V24-OP1)
and LED panel (V24-OP2).
5.1.1 LCD panel (V24-OP1)

Data display section (LCD)
Parameter increase/decrease knob
Status display LED
Parameter operation keys
Operation keys
5.1.2 LED panel (V24-OP2)

Data display section (LED) Unit indications LED
Sign display LED
Parameter increase/decrease keys
Status display LED
Operation keys
CAUTION
A protective sheet is attached to the surface of the panel when shipped.

Peel of this sheet before starting use.
Hold down the parameter increase/decrease knob when peeling off the LCD panel (V24-OP1) protection
sheet as it could come off.
Do not drop the panel.
The panel could break if strong impact is applied.
If the display does not appear even when the inverter power is turned ON, the cable between the panel
and inverter might not be connected properly. Check the connection.
When using the operation panel away from the inverter by using an extension cable, do not place objects
on the panel. The connector section could be damaged.
5-1
5.2 Main displays
5.2.1 Data display section

(1) LCD panel (V24-OP1)
The LCD panel displays the characters, parameters and setting values with a 5*8 dot 16-digit
2-line LCD.
Character display section

The details of the parameters are
displayed. The default setting is English.
* The display language is set with C11-4.
Setting value display section

The setting value or display value is
displayed.
Parameter display section

The parameter No. is displayed.
(2) LED panel (V24-OP2)

The LED panel displays the parameters and the setting values with five 7-segment LEDs, a sign
display LED and a unit display LED.
Unit display section <Hz, A, %>

The unit of the parameter displayed in the
data display section is indicated.
Data display section

The parameter No. and setting value are
displayed.
Sign display section

This LED lights if the parameter displayed
at the data display area is a minus value.
5-2
5.2.2 Status display section
LCL
ON : "Local operation mode" Operation using the
operation panel is possible
OFF : "Remote operation mode" Operation using
the control terminal block is possible
FLT
ON : A fault has been detected and the system is
stopped
OFF : Normal state
FWD/REV
The operation state is indicated by turning these
ON, OFF or flickering them.
Each status is shown below.
FWD/REV status display and relation with operation status
Output
frequency
(speed)
Panel key
FWD
Panel key
REV
Panel key
STOP
FWD,REV FWD FWD FWD FWD FWD FWD FWD FWD FWD
display
REV REV REV REV FWD REV REV REV REV
Operation Stop Forward Forward Reverse Reverse Forward Decel- Braking Stop
Reverse Forward eration
stop
* The FWD/REV states in the graph each have the following meanings.
Status Display
* The FWD/REV display flickers even
OFF FWD REV when the operation delay timer
(C20-3) is functioning.
ON FWD REV
Flicker FWD REV
5-3
5.3 Main operations
5.3.1 Operation keys
The functions of the main operation keys are explained below.
RST FWD REV STOP LCL

MOD SET
STOP
If pressed when [LCL] is ON, the motor will stop.
* Decelerate to stop or coast to stop can be selected with
C00-1.
STOP <Hold down for two seconds>

When this key is held down for two or more seconds, the
motor will coast to a stop regardless of the local operation
mode or remote operation mode.
REV
If pressed when [LCL] is ON, the motor will start running in
reverse.
FWD
If pressed when [LCL] is ON, the motor will start running in
forward.

MOD SET
STOP + LCL (pressed together)

Press these to switch the mode between local operation and
remote operation.
[LCL] turns ON during the local operation mode.
* Operation prohibited conditions
(The mode cannot be switched in the following states.)
1) During operation
2) Even when stopped, if a run command such as the
terminal block input signal "RUN" is ON
This interlock can be canceled with C09-2.

MOD SET
STOP + RST (pressed together)

Press these to reset a fault.
If these are pressed when the [FLT] LED is ON, the fault will
be reset as long as there is no fault cause, and the [FLT] LED
will turn OFF.
5-4
5.3.2 Parameter operations
(1) Parameter configuration

The VT240EL parameters are grouped into five blocks according to function and purpose. Each block
has a hierarchical structure.
Monitor parameters [D{{-{] The internal status is monitored (displayed).

Frequency, speed, current
Sequence input/output
Expansion monitor, fault display
Maintenance monitor, etc.
Block-A parameters [A{{-{] The parameters used most frequently are grouped in
this block.
ASR, ACR control constants
Machine time constants, torque limit
Display skip setting
Block-B parameters [B{{-{] These parameters are grouped into basic functions,
expansion functions, and software option functions.
Basic functions
Input voltage, motor rating, motor constants
Carrier frequency, number of encoder pulses
Expansion functions
Torque bias, overcurrent limit
Automatic tuning
Speed control expanded function, torque
compensation setting
Software options
Magnetic pole position estimation function,
external brake control
Elevator control function, etc.
Block-C parameters [C{{-{] These parameters are grouped into the basic
functions, expansion functions, and hardware option
functions.
Basic functions
Operation method, setting input selection
Sequence input/output function assignment
Analog input/output function setting
Data operation protection, operation panel
Expanded functions
Protection level setting, serial communication
setting
Hardware options
Control mode setting, option setting
Encoder setting, etc.
Block-U parameters [U{{-{] Utility mode

Parameter copy function
Password No. setting
5-5
(2) Parameter notation method

The VT240EL parameter notations are divided into the [Block No.] which indicates the parameter
mode, and the [Main No.] and [Sub-No.] which indicate the hierarchy.
D 00 0
Sub-No.
Main No.
Block No.
D : Monitor
A : Parameter A
B : Parameter B
C : Parameter C
U : Parameter U
(3) Switching the block No.

RST
Press the MOD key to switch the parameter [Block No.].
The [Block No.] will change in the order of D A B C U (D).
The operations are the same for the "LCD panel" and "LED panel".
D01 z A01 z B01 z

D00 z A00 z B00 z
Monitor D Parameter A Parameter B
RST RST
MOD MOD
RST
RST
MOD
MOD
U01 z C01 z
U00 z C00 z
Parameter U Parameter C
RST
MOD
5-6
(4) Selecting the main No. and sub-No.

With the operation panel, the operation method can be selected from "sub-No. method" or "main &
sub-No. selection method".
The operation method is selected with the parameter [C11-7: Operation panel operation method
selection].
<C11-7> = 1: Sub-No. selection method = 2: Main & sub-No. selection method
Select the operation method according to the working environment.
1) Sub-No. selection method

If [Sub-No.] exceeds the maximum value or minimum value, the [main No.] will increase or
decrease by 1.
In this case, the value after <D00-99> is <D01-0>.
D00-0 D00-1 D00-99 D01-0 D01-99
D02-0 D02-99 D99-0 D99-99
The [Sub-No.] can be increased and decreased with the (LCD panel) or (LED panel)
operations.
To directly change the [Main No.] with this method, increase or decrease the value with +
(LCD panel) or + (LED panel).
No. Decrease Increase

Main Sub Main Sub
LCD + +
LED + +
* When using the LED panel, the parameter numbers will increase or decrease at a high speed
by pressing down the key.
Application
This method is easy to use when holding the panel in hand and operating.
* This method is the default method.
5-7
2) Main & sub-No. selection method

The parameter is set by setting both the [Main No.] and [Sub-No].
If [Sub-No.] exceeds the maximum value or minimum value, the number will loop within the
[Sub-No.]
LCL
After selecting the [Main No.], press the SET key to enter the [Sub-No.] selection.
Press the key to return from the [Sub-No.] loop to the [Main No.] loop.
Main No. Sub-No.

loop loop
LCL
SET
D00- D00-0 D00-1 D00-99
or or
or
or
D01-
No
or Decrease Increase
LCD
D02- LED
* When using the LED panel, the parameter numbers will

increase or decrease at a high speed by pressing down
the key.
Application
This method is easy to use when the operation panel is mounted on the inverter, and the buttons
and knobs are operated.
5-8
5.4 LCD panel

5.4.1 Display at power ON
The state when the power is turned ON with the panel connected
to the inverter is explained in this section.
If there is a cause of a fault when the power is turned ON, the
initial fault occurrence display will appear.
STOP RST
In this case, remove the cause of the fault, and then reset the fault by pressing + MOD together.
The state will be checked again, and if the check ends normally, the "normal end display" will appear.
V24OP1 Output frequency

ROM1 D00- 0: OFF.Hz
Checking the operation * The value after ROM is Normal end display
after power ON the software version
EC*0
E00 : CPU.6
Initial fault occurrence

display
CAUTION
If the normal end or initial fault occurrence screen does not appear even after 10 seconds, check the
following points.
1) Are the panel and inverter connected correctly?
Remove the panel once, and securely connect it.
2) Is the cable connecting the PCB in the inverter and the connector section disconnected?
Check and securely insert the connector.
If the problem cannot be resolved with method 1) or 2), there may be a short circuit in the inverter's
internal circuit. Turn the power OFF immediately.
5.4.2 Operating and displaying the character display section
The character display section starts left scrolling after two seconds.
When the last character is displayed, the display remains for two seconds, and then the first display
appears.
Output frequency put frequency in frequency in Hz

D00-0: OFF.Hz D00-0: OFF.Hz D00-0: OFF.Hz
Head display (two seconds) Character display scrolling to left Last character display
(two seconds)
After displaying the last character display for

two seconds, the head display appears
The character display can be selected from five languages, English, French, German, Spanish or Italian.
The default language is English.
The display language can be changed with parameter [C11-4: LCD panel language selection].
5-9
5.4.3 Displays and operation methods when changing parameters
The actual displays and operation methods when changing the parameters are explained in this section.
Refer to the previous sections for explanations on "changing the block No." and "selecting the main No.
and sub-No.".
(1) Displaying the parameter No.

Displaying the flicker at the change section
If the "parameter increase/decrease knob" at the right of the panel is turned, the number at the
flickering section will increase or decrease.
Output frequency Output frequency Motor speed in m

D00-0: OFF.Hz D00-1: OFF.% D00-2: 0.0min-1
Decreases 1 in one count Current display Increases 1 in one count

when turned left when turned right
Display when changing parameter No.

When changing parameter No.:
1) Immediately after change: Only the changed parameter No. is displayed
2) After 0.1 seconds: The character display and setting value are displayed
1) 2)
Output frequency Output frequency

D00-0: OFF.Hz D00-1 1.0 D00-1: OFF.%
seconds
Current display Immediately after change Display 0.1 seconds
after no key input
(2) Changing and displaying the parameters

The procedures for changing the parameters are given below.
Step 1 (Selection)
LCL
If the SET key is pressed when the Block-A, B, C or U is displayed, the flickering display section
moves from [Parameter display section] to [Setting value display section]. The flickering section
moves to the last digit of the setting value.
Local frequency Local frequency

A00-0: 10.00Hz LCL A00-0: 10.00Hz
SET
Current display Shifts to setting value setting
Step 2 (Change)
After the flickering section has moved to the setting value, the flickering number section can be
incremented and decremented by turning the "parameter increase/decrease knob".
Local frequency Local frequency Local frequency

A00-0: 9.99Hz A00-0: 10.00Hz A00-0: 10.01Hz
Decreases 1 in one count Current display Increases 1 in one count

when turned left when turned right
5-10
Step 3 (Setting)
LCL
Once the setting value has been decided, press the SET key again to enter the setting value.
The flickering section will move from the [Setting value display section] to the [Parameter display
section].

A00-0: 12.34Hz LCL
SET
A00-0: 12.34Hz
Current display Moves to parameter No. selection
Moving a digit
When setting the parameters, if the key is pressed, the flickering section will move "one digit to
the left". If the key is pressed at the top digit, the flickering section will move to the bottom digit.

A00-0: 10.00Hz A00-0: 10.00Hz

A00-0: 10.00Hz A00-0: 10.00Hz
Canceling the changes

After a parameter has been changed, the changes can be canceled and the state returned to the
RST
original state by pressing the MOD key. The next [Block No.] will appear.
The next [Block No.] will appear on the screen, but if the parameter which was being changed is
displayed again, it will appear with the original setting value.
Max. frequency(v Max. frequency(v Max. frequency(v

B00-4: 50.00Hz LCL B00-4: 50.00Hz Setting B00-4: 80.00Hz
SET value
change
Returns to RST
original MOD
parameter
RST Run Command meth
MOD
C00-0: 1.
RST
MOD
Local frequency Output frequency U00-0En

A00-0: 10.00Hz RST D00-0: OFF.Hz RST U00-0: 0.
MOD MOD
5-11
5.4.4 LCD panel display at fault occurrence
When a fault occurs in the inverter, the following type of display will appear on the LCD panel.
Local frequency Primary error co

D00-0: -56.32Hz Fault E00 : UV-2.
occurrence
FWD REV FLT LCL FWD REV FLT LCL
Current display Moves to fault history display

simultaneously with fault occurrence
When a fault occurs, the inverter operation stops, and the "FLT" LED on status display section.
At the same time, the head "E00" for the fault history and the fault code appear on the LCD panel.
Primary error co Explanations

Fault history No. E00 : UV-2. Display (fault code, etc.)
FWD REV FLT LCL
Status display
RST
Press the MOD key to return to the normal parameter selection display from the fault history display.
LCL
The faulty history will appear when the monitor mode is set to [D20-0: Error code entry], and the SET
key is pressed.
(1) Configuration of fault history

The fault history No. "E{{"indicates the following details.
E 0 0
0 : Primary fault
1 : Secondary fault
2 : Output frequency at fault
3 : Output current at fault
4 : DC voltage at fault
5 : Hardware detection fault at fault
6 : Cumulative power ON time at fault
7 : Cumulative run time at fault
0 : Latest fault
1 : Previous fault
2 : 2nd to last fault
3 : 3rd to last fault Software Ver. MM and earlier
4 : 4th to last fault Added from software Ver. NN
9 : 9th to last fault
E : Fault history display
5-12
(2) Displaying the fault history
The fault history will loop between E00 to E07, E10 to E17, E20 to E27 and E30 to E37 when the
key is turned. An explanation and details corresponding to the number will display. (The numbers have
been expanded to E90 to E97 from software version NN.)
Primary error co Secondary error

E00 : OV-4. E01 : ---.
Latest fault 0 : Primary fault Latest fault 1 : Secondary fault
[0V-4] [None]
Output frequary Output current o

E02 : 43.98Hz E03 : 61.2A
Latest fault 2 : Output frequency at fault Latest fault 3 : Output current at fault
[43.98Hz] [61.2A]
DC voltage on fa Fault infomatio

E04 : 746.V E05 : 746.V
Latest fault 4 : DC voltage at fault Latest fault 5 : Hardware detection fault
[746V] at fault
<See below>
Cumulative condu Cumulative run t

E06 : 246.h E07 : 234.h
Latest fault 6 : Cumulative power ON Latest fault 7 : Cumulative run time at
time at fault fault
[246h] [234h]
Primary error co
E10 : UV-2. Hereafter up to "3rd to last fault"
* Faults up to the 9th to last fault are
Previous fault 0 : Primary fault displayed from software version NN.
[UV-2]
Latest fault 5 : Hardware detection fault at fault (details)
* The top line is the latch signal

for the bottom line.
CPU WDT signal

Overcurrent detection
detection
Ground fault detection
Overheat detection Overvoltage detection
Power module error
* If there is a corresponding fault, the display will change from 0 to |.
Refer to the "Troubleshooting" section for details on faults, such as the fault codes.
5-13
5.5 LED panel
5.5.1 Display at power ON
The state when the power is turned ON with the panel connected
to the inverter is explained in this section.
All LEDs will turn ON for a short time, and then "OFF" will appear.
Hz Hz Hz
A A A

FWD REV FLT LCL FWD REV FLT LCL FWD REV FLT LCL
If the power is turned ON in the V/f mode, the "Hz" unit indicator will also turn ON.
If [C11-0: Initial mode] is set to =2: Remote, the "LCL" status display LED will turn OFF.
5.5.2 Basic display methods
(1) Differences in displays according to parameter operation methods

The displays on the LED panel differ as shown below according to the parameter operation method
("Sub No. method" and "Main & sub-No. selection method").
<Reference: The parameter operation method is selected with the parameter [C11-7: Operation panel
operation method selection].>
Sub-No. method

Hz Hz Hz
A A A

ON OFF
The "third decimal point dot" turns ON while the key is pressed to indicate that the main No. is
being changed.
Main & sub-No. selection method
LCL
SET
Hz Hz Hz
A A A

ON
The "third decimal point dot" turns ON while the parameter is being selected.
5-14
(2) Displaying the parameter No. and setting value

The parameter No. and setting value display methods differ for the monitor mode and parameter
mode.
Monitor mode
The "setting value" appears one second after the parameter No. is selected.
Hz Hz
A A

After one second, the display changes

from the parameter No. to the [%] unit
output current display.
LCL
* Press the SET key to confirm the parameter No. with the monitor display.
Parameter (A, B, C, U) mode

When the parameter No. is selected, that parameter No. and setting value will alternately display.
Hz Hz
A A

The parameter No. [B00-4] and current

setting value [50.00] alternately display.
(3) Parameters changeable only when stopped

If the (RUN) display appears when attempting to change from the parameter No. to the setting
value change state, it means that the "parameter is changeable only when stopped".
5-15
5.5.3 Display and operation methods for changing parameters
The procedures for changing the parameters are given below.
Step 1 (Selection)
Select the parameter No. for which the setting details are to be changed.
When the parameter No. is selected, that parameter No. and setting value will alternately display.
Hz Hz
A A

The parameter No. [B00-4] and current

setting value [50.00] alternately display.
Step 2 (Change)
LCL
Press the SET key when the parameter No. and setting value are alternately displaying.
The display will change from the alternated display to the "setting value change state".
* Setting value change state: The current setting value is fixed, and the last digit flickers.
Alternate display Setting value change state
LCL
Hz SET Hz
A A

Last digit flickers

Hz
A

When the key is pressed, the flickering digit will move one digit to the left.
Hz Hz Hz Hz
A A A A

Flicker Flicker Flicker Flicker
If the key is pressed in this state, the flickering digit's number can be incremented and
decremented, so change the data.
Hz Hz * Change from 50.00 to 60.00

A A

Step 3 (Setting)
LCL
After changing the data, press the SET key to enter the setting value. After the value is entered, the
parameter No. and setting value will alternately display.
Hz Hz
A A

Alternate display
5-16
5.5.4 LED panel display at fault occurrence
When a fault occurs in the inverter, the following type of display will appear on the LED panel.
Hz Hz Hz
A A A
Fault Alternate
occurrence display
FWD REV FLT LCL FWD REV FLT LCL FWD REV FLT LCL
Current display Moves to fault history display simultaneously with fault occurrence
The No. and details will alternately display at a one second cycle.
When a fault occurs, the inverter operation stops, and the "FLT" LED on the status display section.
At the same time, the head "E00" for the fault history and the fault code appear alternately on the LED
panel.
RST
Press the MOD key to return to the normal parameter selection display from the fault history display.
LCL
The faulty history will appear when the monitor mode is set to [D20-0: Error code entry], and the SET
key is pressed.
(1) Configuration of fault history

The fault history No. "E{{"indicates the following details.
E 0 0
0 : Primary fault
1 : Secondary fault
0 : Latest fault
1 : Previous fault
(2) Displaying the fault history
key is turned. An explanation and details corresponding to the number will display. (The numbers have
been expanded to E90 to E97 from software version NN.)
5-17
5.5.5 LED panel character notations
The LED panel has a 7-segment LED, and the data is displayed with abbreviations.
The meanings of the LED characters are shown below.
(1) Numeric
Display
Numerics 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(2) Alphabet
Display
Alphabet A B (b) C D (d) E F G H I J
Display
Alphabet L M (m) N (n) O P Q (q) R (r) S T (t) U
Display
Alphabet
V (v) Y
(Symbol)
Brackets
(3) Display messages

Display Name Explanation
OFF Indicates that the motor is stopped.
Indicates that the motor is running.
RUN Occurs when a parameter, which cannot be changed during operation,
was changed during operation.
Indicates that the parameters are locked.
Occurs when a parameter locked with C09-0 was operated.
LOCK
Also occurs when a key other than the STOP key was pressed while key
operations were prohibited with C09-1.
Indicates that the operation is being retried.
RETRY
The value displayed at the same time is the number of retries.
BRAKE Indicates that the brakes are being applied.
Pick Up Indicates that pick-up is being applied.
Over Indicates that the scale display has exceeded the upper limit 99999.
Indicates that an error occurred during the parameter copy function's
EEPROM Error
verify check using the operation panel.
ERROR Indicates that the fault display mode is active.
Minor Error Indicates that the minor fault display mode is active.
LIST Indicates that the list display mode is active.
Auto Tuning Start Indicates that automatic tuning will be started.
Auto Tuning End Indicates that automatic tuning has ended.
Data CHANGE Indicates the head of the list display.
Data END Indicates the end of the list display.
5-18
5.6 Monitor function
With the VT240EL, the status can be monitored by selecting the "monitor parameters (block-D
parameters)".
5.6.1 Speed, torque, current, load detection value, etc. (D17)
The analog values for the elevator are displayed.
Application
No. Parameter Unit Remarks
VEC PM V/f
D17 Elevator monitor
The car speed command value is displayed.
0 Car speed command m/s { {
<0.001m/s unit>
Car speed detection The car speed detection value is displayed with an m/s
1 m/s { {
(m/s unit) unit. <0.001m/s unit>
Car speed detection The car speed detection value is displayed with an
2 m/min { {
(m/min unit) m/min unit. <0.1m/min unit>
The motor speed is displayed.
3 Motor speed (MOT) min-1 The forward run direction is displayed with the + { {
polarity, and the reverse run direction with the polarity.
The motor's rated torque is displayed as a % unit using
the torque command as 100%. <0.1% unit>
Torque command value
4 % Drive is indicated with [+], and regeneration is indicated { {
(% unit)
with [-].
[OFF.] is displayed while stopped.
The torque command to the motor is displayed with an
Nm unit. <0.1Nm unit>
Torque command value
5 Nm Drive is indicated with [+], and regeneration is indicated { {
(Nm unit)
with [-].
Displays the voltage of the DC link circuit in the main
6 DC voltage V { {
circuit.
The current command value to the motor is displayed.
7 Current command A { {
The output current value is displayed.
8 Current detection A { {
Bias torque output The currently set torque bias value is displayed.
9 % { {
command The value does not change while running.
The analog torque bias input voltage value is displayed.
A Load detection V { {
<0.01V unit>
B Heat sink temperature C The heat sink temperature is displayed. <1C unit> { {
5-19
5.6.2 Sequence input/output status (D04, D20-3, 4, D08)
Application
VEC PM V/f
D04 Sequence status
0 { { {
1 { { {
Sequence input The sequence input's ON/OFF status is displayed.
2 { { {
3 { { {
4 { { {
5 { { {
Sequence output The sequence output's ON/OFF status is displayed.
6 { { {
7 { { {
The sequence input/output status can be displayed.

The function for which the status is displayed is assigned for each parameter as explained below.
The display differs for the LCD panel and LED panel, so refer to "1) LCD panel and LED panel displays"
below.
(1) LCD panel and LED panel displays

Due to differences in the display panel structure, the sequence input/output display differs slightly on
the LCD panel and LED panel.
On the LCD panel, the sequence ON/OFF status is indicated with [1] and [0]. On the LED panel, the
sequence ON/OFF status is indicated by turning the 7-segment LEDs [ON] or [OFF].
In the following explanation, the correspondence of each signal and LED is explained using
the LED panel's 7-segment LEDs.
The correspondence of the LCD panel and LED panel is shown below, so read the status
accordingly when using the LCD panel.
: Sequence OFF
LCD
: Sequence ON
Correspondence of LCD panel

and LED panel displays
: OFF (Sequence OFF)
LED : ON (Sequence ON)
: Excluded (always OFF)
5-20
(2) Sequence input (D04-0 to 3)

The signals assigned to D04-0 to 3 are shown below.
D040 D041
AFS2 AFS1 S5
AFS3 S6
S7
MBRK_ans
COP EMS S0
BRAKE RESET S1
EXC RUN S2
REV SE S3
D042 D043
OUTMC_ans E.FLT8
MBRK_ans2 E.FLT7
E.FLT6
FPOS
E.FLT5
E.FLT4
E.FLT3
E.FLT2
PCTL
E.FLT1 UVT-MSK
ACR
Symbol Name Symbol Name
EMS Emergency stop S0 Program setting selection
RESET Breakdown reset S1 Program setting selection
RUN Run (Forward run) S2 Program setting selection
REV Reverse run flag S3 Program setting selection
EXC Pre-excitation D04-1 SE Program setting selection
D04-0
BRAKE DC brake S5 Digital torque bias 1
COP Serial transmission selection S6 Digital torque bias 2
AFS1 Speed setting 1 S7 Digital torque bias 3
AFS2 Speed setting 2 MBRK_ans External brake answer
AFS3 Speed setting 3 FPOS Magnetic pole position estimation
D04-2 PCTL P control
ACR ACR
UVT-MSK UPS operation
E.FLT1 to 8 External fault input 1 to 8
D04-3
OUTMC_ans Output switch answer
MBRK_ans2 External brake answer 2
5-21
(3) Sequence output (D04-4 to 7)

The signals assigned to D04-4 to 7 are shown below.
D044 D045
EC0 COP RDELAY MBRK

EC1 SPD2 DVER
EC2 SPD1
EC3 ATN
ACC
IDET RUN ZSP DCC
REV FLT
LCL MC FAN ALM
RDY2 RDY1
D047
JEAK_OUT JEAK_IN
50%LOAD F_NOT
POSERR FPOS_EX
OUTMC FPOS
Setting No. Setting No.

Symbol Name Positive Negative Symbol Name Positive Negativ
logic logic logic e logic
RUN Run 1 -1 ACC Acceleration 17 -17
FLT Fault 2 -2 DCC Deceleration 18 -18
MC Charge completed 3 -3 ALM Minor fault 20 -20
RDY1 Ready (1) 4 -4 FAN Fan control 21 -21
D04-5
RDY2 Ready (2) 5 -5 ZSP Zero speed 23 -23
LCL Local 6 -6 MBRK External brake control 27 -27
REV Reverse run 7 -7 DVER Speed deviation error 28 -28
D04-4 IDET Current detection 8 -8 RDLEY Run delay answer 30 -20

Magnetic pole
Frequency (speed)
ATN 9 -9 FPOS position estimation 40 -40
attainment
complete
Frequency (speed) Estimating magnetic
SPD1 10 -10 FPOS_EX 41 -41
detection (1) pole position
Frequency (speed)
SPD2 11 -11 F_NOT Ramp not reached 42 -42
detection (2)
D04-7
COP Transmission selection 12 -12 JEAK_IN Jerk in 43 -43
EC0 to 3 Specific fault output 13 to 16 -13 to -16 JEAK_OUT Jerk out 44 -44
50%LOAD 50% LOAD or more 45 -45
Position error when
POSERR 46 -46
stopped
OUTMC Output MC 47 -47
5-22
No. Parameter Setting range

C13 Output terminal function
2 RA-RC terminal output selection
-55 to 55
3 PS01 terminal output selection Note 1) Nothing will be output if a value not listed in the D04-4, 5 or 7
4 PS02 terminal output selection table is set.
5 PS03 terminal output selection Note 2) Setting 0 is OFF fixed, and setting 31 is ON fixed.
6 FA-FB-FC terminal output selection
(4) LCD panel dedicated display methods (D20-3, 4)
Application
VEC PM V/f
D20 Extended monitor
Sequence input display The sequence input/output ON and OFF status is
3 { { {
(dedicated for LCD panel) displayed.
Sequence output display Note) This parameter does not appear when the LED
4 { { {
(dedicated for LCD panel) panel is connected.
This is the "sequence input/output status confirmation screen" which can be used only when using the
LCD panel.
LCL
When the No. is set to D20-3 or 4 and the SET key is pressed, the display will change to the
sequence input or output display.
An example for D20-4: sequence output is given below. The operation is the same for D20-3.
LCL RST
To return to parameter selection, press the SET key or MOD key.
LCL
SET
Sequence output RUN : OFF.
D20-4:SEQOUT FLT : OFF.
LCL RST
Initial display SET
or MOD
Display for sequence output
If the parameter increase/decrease knob is turned while the sequence details are displayed, the
display will move up and down.
MP08 : OFF.
Display area RUN : OFF.

FLT : OFF.
MC : ON.
The display area shifts up or down
RDY1 : ON. by one line when parameter
increase/decrease knob is turned.
The ON and OFF status is updated immediately when the sequence status changes.
Example : Start of operation (Sequence output: RUN is ON)
RUN : OFF. RUN : ON.

FLT : OFF. Start of FLT : OFF.
operation
5-23
(5) Terminal block input status display (D08-B)
Application
VEC PM V/f
D08 Control PCB terminal input display
Sequence input The ON/OFF states of the control PCB and relay
B Terminal block input interface option input terminals PSI1 to 11 are { { {
display displayed.
Sequence output The ON/OFF states of the control PCB and relay
D Terminal block output interface option output terminals PSO1 to 3, { { {
display FA-FB-FC, RA-RC and PSO4 to 7 are displayed.
The ON/OFF states of the control PCB terminal block TB-1 and 2 PSI1 to 7 and the relay interface
option input terminals PSI8 to 11 are displayed.
The signals assigned to DO8-B are indicated.
D08-B PSI11
PSI10
PSI9 Relay interface input
PSI8
PSI1
PSI7 PSI2
PSI6
Control PCB input
PSI3
PSI5 PSI4
The ON/OFF states of the control PCB terminal block TB-2 PSO1 to 3, FA-FB-FC, RA-RC and the
relay interface option output terminal PSO4 to 7 are displayed.
The signals assigned to DO8-D are indicated.
D08-D PS07
PS06
PS05 Relay interface input
PS04
PS01
PS02
Control PCB input
PS03
RA-RC FA-FB-FC
5-24
5.6.3 Fault monitor (D05)
Application
VEC PM V/f
D05 Minor fault monitor
0 Minor fault The internal minor fault status will display. { {
Hardware detection The status of the fault signal detected by the hardware
1 { {
fault status is displayed.
The minor fault's ON/OFF status is displayed.

The signals assigned with D05-0, 1 are shown below.
D050 : Minor fault

Position error when stopped
External fault
AI2 current input 3mA or less Speed position detection error

AI1 current input 3mA or less Reducing carrier frequency
Overload error (50% or more)
Speed deviation error
D051 : Hardware detection fault status
[*] The [*] in the upper line indicates

[*] a signal latched with the lower line.
[*]
[*]
[*] [*]
CPU WDT signal detection Overcurrent detection

Overheat detection Overvoltage detection
Power module error
5-25
5.6.4 Fault history reference (D20)
Application
VEC PM V/f
0 Error code entry The fault history will display. { { {
Minor fault past record
1 The minor fault history will display. { { {
indication
(1) Error code entry (D20-0)

LCL
Select the [D20-0: Error code entry] parameter and press the SET key to enter the faulty history
reference mode.
The fault history No. configuration is shown below. The history of up to four faults, from the 3rd to last
to the latest fault, can be viewed. (From software version NN the history of ten faults, from the 9th to
last fault to the latest fault, can be viewed.)
key is turned on the LCD panel, and the key is pressed on the LED panel. An explanation and
details corresponding to the number will display. (The numbers have been expanded to E90 to E97
from software version NN.)
Configuration of fault history No.
E 0 0
0 : Primary factor fault
1 : Secondary factor fault
0 : Latest fault
1 : Previous fault
5-26
Fault history No. Displayed details Explanation

The error code for the primary factor fault cause is
E*0 Details of primary fault
displayed.
The error code for the fault occurring secondarily is
E*1 Details of secondary fault
displayed.
E*2 Output frequency at fault occurrence Displayed with 0.01Hz unit.
Output current value at fault
E*3 Displayed with 0.1A unit.
occurrence
E*4 DC voltage value at fault occurrence Displayed with 1V unit.
Hardware detection fault at fault
E*5 Display item is same as D05-1.
occurrence
Cumulative power ON time at fault
E*6 Displayed with 1 hour unit.
occurrence
Cumulative operation time at fault
E*7 Displayed with 1 hour unit.
occurrence
* The history number between 0 and 3 appears at the "*" (asterisk) shown in the table.
* Refer to the "Troubleshooting" section for details on the error codes.
5-27
(2) Error code entry (D20-1)

LCL
Select the [D20-0: Error code entry] parameter and press the SET key to enter the faulty history
reference mode.
The fault history No. configuration is shown below. The history of up to four faults, from the 3rd to last
to the latest fault, can be viewed. (From software version NN the history of ten faults, from the 9th to
last fault to the latest fault, can be viewed.)
key is turned on the LCD panel, and the key is pressed on the LED panel. An explanation and
details corresponding to the number will display. (The numbers have been expanded to E90 to E97
from software version NN.)
Configuration of fault history No.
E 0 0
0 : Current minor fault
1 : All minor faults
0 : Latest fault
1 : Previous fault
The "current minor fault" and "all minor faults" are displayed as shown below.
Position error when stopped

External fault
AI2 current input 3mA or less Speed (position) detection

AI1 current input 3mA or less Carrier frequency reducing
Overload error (50% of overload counter exceeded)
5-28
Fault history No. Displayed details Explanation

The newly detected minor fault is displayed
M*0 Current minor fault
as shown below.
All minor faults at M*0 occurrence are
M*1 All minor faults
displayed as shown below.
M*2 Output frequency at fault occurrence Displayed with 0.01Hz unit.
M*3 Output current value at fault occurrence Displayed with 0.1A unit.
M*4 DC voltage value at fault occurrence Displayed with 1V unit.
M*5 Hardware detection fault at fault occurrence Display item is same as D05-0.
M*6 Cumulative power ON time at fault occurrence Displayed with 1 hour unit.
M*7 Cumulative operation time at fault occurrence Displayed with 1 hour unit.
5.6.5 Maintenance monitor (D21)
Application
VEC PM V/f
D21 Maintenance monitor
Cumulative conductivity The cumulative power ON time after product shipment
0 h. { { {
time will be counted and displayed.
The cumulative run time after product shipment will be
1 Cumulative run time h. { { {
counted and displayed.
2 CPU version Display for maker control. { { {
3 ROM version Display for maker control. { { {
(1) Cumulative conductivity time (D21-0)

The inverter power ON time after product shipment is counted and shown with a 1-hour unit.
(2) Cumulative run time (D21-1)

The inverter operation time after product shipment is counted and shown with a 1-hour unit.
5.6.6 Hardware monitor (D30)
Application
VEC PM V/f
D30 Hardware monitor
0 Inverter type This indicates the inverter type. { { {
1 Option PCB Displays the mounted option PCB. { { {
(1) Option PCB (D30-1)

The mounted optional PCB is displayed.
Display corresponds to the optional PCB is indicated.
Relay interface
5-29
5.6.7 Parameter A, B and C modification list
LCL
When the [D20-2: Parameter A, B and C modification list] parameter is selected and the SET key is
pressed, the parameter block A, B and C modification list will appear.
RST
Press the MOD key to return to the parameter selection.
When the list is displayed, the parameters which have been set or changed after power ON will
sequentially appear. Use the parameter increment/decrement knob on the LCD panel and the
key on the LED panel to scroll the parameters.
"D.CHG: D.END" (LCD) is displayed to indicate the end of the changed parameters.
On the LED panel, this is indicated by alternately displaying [d.CHG] and [d.END].
LCL
* The parameter can be changed by pressing the SET key when the parameter No. is displayed.
5.6.8 Analog input monitor function (D08-3 to A)
Application
VEC PM V/f
The voltage on Al1 terminal will be displayed in a unit of
3 AI1 input voltage display V 0.01V. When the Al1 terminal are for current setting { { {
(C12-0=2), 0.00 will be displayed.
4 AI2 input voltage display V 0.01V. When the Al2 terminal are for current setting { { {
5 AI3 input voltage display V { { {
0.01V.
The current on the Al1 terminal will be displayed in a
6 AI1 input current display mA unit of 0.01mA. When the Al1 terminals are for voltage { { {
setting (C12-0=1), 0.00 will be displayed.
The current on the Al2 terminal will be displayed in a
7 AI2 input current display mA unit of 0.01mA. When the Al2 terminals are for voltage { { {
setting (C12-4=1), 0.00 will be displayed.
8 AI1 input display (in %) % { { {
The voltage or current input into each terminal is
9 AI2 input display (in %) % expressed with 10V or 20mA as 100.00%. { { {
A AI3 input display (in %) %
The voltage and current input to the analogue input terminal AI1 3 on the control PCB are displayed.
5-30
5.6.9 Speed detection input display (D08-C)
Application
VEC PM V/f
Speed detection input The speed detection options ABZ phase signal input
C { { {
display and UVW phase signal input states are displayed.
The signal input conditions of the speed detection option are displayed. If the input terminal is opened, the
ON condition is displayed.
The UVW phases signals are displayed in case of C51-0 = 1 (ABZUVW phases).
D08-9 W phase
V phase
U phase
A phase
B phase
Z phase
5.6.10 Analog encoder input display (D09-0 to 7)
Application
VEC PM V/f
D09 Analog encoder input display
No problem if in the range of 10%.
0 A-phase detection offset % If deviated from the range, add C52-1 to the displayed {
value.
No problem if in the range of 10%.
1 B-phase detection offset % If deviated from the range, add C52-3 to the displayed {
value.
No problem if in the range of 50% to 200%, and the
A-phase detection
2 % difference with the B-phase detection amplitude is in the {
amplitude
range of 30%. If deviated from the range, adjust C52-0.
No problem if in the range of 50% to 200%, and the
B-phase detection
3 % difference with the A-phase detection amplitude is in the {
amplitude
range of 30%. If deviated from the range, adjust C52-2.
Add C52-5 to the displayed value so that the value is
4 C-phase detection offset % {
0%.
Add C52-7 to the displayed value so that the value is
5 D-phase detection offset % {
0%.
C-phase detection
6 % Adjust C52-4 so that the value is 100%. {
amplitude
D-phase detection
7 % Adjust C52-6 so that the value is 100%. {
amplitude
This function is valid from software version HH.
5-31
5-32
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
6.1 Programmable input/output ...................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Sequence inputs (C03, C04, C05, C06, C12)................................................................6-1
(1) Selecting the input point....................................................................................................6-1
(2) Functions of programmable sequence inputs and terminal block assignments. ...............6-2
(3) Program setting filter.........................................................................................................6-3
(4) Example of setting input terminal functions.......................................................................6-3
6.1.2 Sequence outputs (B39, C00, C13, C15, C24, C33) .....................................................6-5
(1) Programmable sequence output functions and setting numbers ......................................6-5
(2) Setting the output detection level......................................................................................6-7
(3) Example of setting output terminal functions ....................................................................6-10
6.1.3 Analog inputs (C02, C07, C12, C16) .............................................................................6-11
(1) Terminal input mode (C12, C16) .......................................................................................6-11
(2) Assigning the analog input function (C02, C07)................................................................6-14
6.1.4 Analog output (C13, C14)..............................................................................................6-16
(1) Output terminal function (C13-0, C13-1) ...........................................................................6-16
(2) A01, A02 output setting (C14)...........................................................................................6-17
6.2 Basic settings ........................................................................................................................6-19
6.2.1 Control mode selection (C30-0).....................................................................................6-19
6.2.2 Input power voltage (B01-0, B00-0)...............................................................................6-19
6.2.3 Motor rated output (B01-1, B00-2).................................................................................6-20
6.2.4 No. of motor poles (B01-2) ............................................................................................6-20
6.2.5 Rated output voltage (B01-3, B00-3) .............................................................................6-20
6.2.6 Speed (B01-4, B01-5)....................................................................................................6-21
6.2.7 Motor rated current (B01-6, B00-6) ...............................................................................6-21
6.2.8 No. of encoder pulses (B01-8).......................................................................................6-21
6.2.9 No-load output voltage (B01-9) .....................................................................................6-22
6.2.10 Carrier frequency (B01-A, B00-8)..................................................................................6-22
6.2.11 Elevator rated speed (B48-0) ........................................................................................6-22
6.2.12 Machine time constant (B4A-3) .....................................................................................6-22
6.2.13 Control method (C00) ....................................................................................................6-23
(1) Run stopping methods (C00-1).........................................................................................6-23
(2) Emergency stop (EMS) mode (C00-4)..............................................................................6-26
(3) Control source switchover method (J1) (C00-5) ...............................................................6-26
(4) Control source switchover method (J2) (C00-6) ...............................................................6-27
6.2.14 RUN delay timer (C20-3) ...............................................................................................6-27
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
6.3 Motor circuit constant ............................................................................................................6-28

6.3.1 PM motor (B03) .............................................................................................................6-28
6.3.2 IM (B02).........................................................................................................................6-29
6.4 Various speed settings ..........................................................................................................6-30
6.4.1 Multi-speed command (B10, B11, B48, B49).................................................................6-30
(1) Setting parameters............................................................................................................6-30
(2) Setting the S-shape ramp pass function ...........................................................................6-31
(3) Selection mode setting......................................................................................................6-32
(4) Examples of operation patterns ........................................................................................6-33
6.4.2 Analog commands (B4C-2) ...........................................................................................6-34
6.4.3 Panel (B48) ...................................................................................................................6-34
6.4.4 ASR response changeover function (B4A) ....................................................................6-35
(1) ASR response 1 (B4A-0) ..................................................................................................6-35
(2) ASR response 2 (B4A-1) ..................................................................................................6-35
(3) ASR response 3 (B4A-2) ..................................................................................................6-35
(4) Integral time constant compensation coefficient 1 (B4A-3) ...............................................6-36
(7) Changeover speed 1 (B4A-7) ...........................................................................................6-36
(8) Changeover speed 2 (B4A-8) ...........................................................................................6-36
(9) Changeover time 1 (B4A-9) ..............................................................................................6-36
(10) Changeover time 2 (B4A-A)..............................................................................................6-36
6.4.5 Torque compensation (B4C)..........................................................................................6-37
(1) Acceleration amount torque compensation gain ...............................................................6-37
(2) Acceleration amount torque compensation LFP time constant .........................................6-37
(3) ASR delay compensation 1...............................................................................................6-37
(7) ASR delay compensation LPF time constant....................................................................6-37
6.5 Torque bias function ..............................................................................................................6-38
6.5.1 With load sensor (B16, B46)..........................................................................................6-38
(1) Automatic torque bias selection ........................................................................................6-39
(2) Digital torque bias .............................................................................................................6-39
(3) Bias direction selection .....................................................................................................6-39
(4) Analog torque bias ............................................................................................................6-40
(5) Torque bias current rising edge/falling edge time..............................................................6-40
(6) Forward torque bias ..........................................................................................................6-41
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
6.5.2 Start lock control (Anti roll back function) (B4B) ............................................................6-41
(1) Outline of control...............................................................................................................6-42
(2) Adjusting the load sensor-less control ..............................................................................6-42
(3) Car movement at start lock error detection judgment distance (C27-7) ............................6-43
(4) Adjustment when using square-wave pulse output encoder .............................................6-43
6.6 External brake control ...........................................................................................................6-45
(1) External brake selection (B46-0).......................................................................................6-46
(2) Torque bias current rising edge/falling edge time (B46-1).................................................6-47
(3) Brake release wait time (B46-2)........................................................................................6-47
(4) Acceleration start wait time (B46-3) ..................................................................................6-47
(5) Brake engage wait time (B46-4) .......................................................................................6-48
(6) Torque bias attenuation wait time (B46-5).........................................................................6-48
(7) RUN error judgment time when engaging brake (B46-6) ..................................................6-48
(8) Brake answer error judgment time (B46-7) .......................................................................6-49
(9) Operation condition judgement time (B46-8) ....................................................................6-49
(10) Stop judgement time (B46-9) ............................................................................................6-49
(11) RUN-OFF wait time (B46-A) .............................................................................................6-49
(12) Deceleration command fault judgment time (B46-B) ........................................................6-49
(13) Brake answer error judgment speed level (B46-C) ...........................................................6-49
(14) Operation selection for brake operation fault (B46-D).......................................................6-50
6.7 Output switch control.............................................................................................................6-58
(1) Output switch signal (OUTMC) .........................................................................................6-58
(2) RUN delay timer (C20-3) ..................................................................................................6-58
(3) Output switch error judgment time (C20-4) .......................................................................6-58
(4) Output switch open wait time (C20-5) ...............................................................................6-58
6.8 Single-phase UPS operation function....................................................................................6-59
6.9 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................................6-60
6.9.1 Elevator fault (C27) .......................................................................................................6-60
(1) Motor lock judgment speed (C27-0) and judgment time (C27-1) ......................................6-60
(2) Roll back judgment distance (C27-2) ................................................................................6-60
(3) Position deflection error judgment distance when stopped (C27-3), judgment time (C27-4) 6-60
(4) Position deflection error fault output when stopped (C27-5) .............................................6-60
(5) Ready OFF level (C27-6)..................................................................................................6-60
6.9.2 Speed detection error (C24) ..........................................................................................6-61
(1) Over speed protection level (C24-0) .................................................................................6-61
(2) Speed detection error detection selection (C24-1) Deleted from software version GG .6-61
(3) Speed detection error level (C24-2) Deleted from software version GG .......................6-61
(4) Speed detection error fault output changeover (C24-4) ....................................................6-61
(5) Speed deviation error level (C24-5) ..................................................................................6-61
(6) Speed deviation error judgment time (C24-6) ...................................................................6-61
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
6.9.3 Overload (C22)..............................................................................................................6-62

(1) DBR overload (C22-4) ......................................................................................................6-62
(2) Carrier frequency automatic reduction (C22-6).................................................................6-62
(3) Phase failure detection (C22-7) ........................................................................................6-62
(4) Motor overload reference current (C22-8), motor overload reference time (C22-9)..........6-63
6.9.4 Overcurrent limit (B18-0) ...............................................................................................6-63
6.9.5 Ground fault detection (C31-1) ......................................................................................6-63
6.9.6 External brake fault (B46-6, 7).......................................................................................6-63
(1) RUN error judgment time when engaging brake (B46-6) ..................................................6-63
(2) Brake answer error judgment time (B46-7) .......................................................................6-64
(3) Deceleration command fault judgment time (B46-B) ........................................................6-64
(4) Brake answer error judgment speed level (B46-C) ...........................................................6-64
(5) Operation selection for brake operation fault (B46-D).......................................................6-64
6.9.7 Fault automatic reset function (C08-1, 2) ......................................................................6-65
(1) Fault automatic reset function enable selection (C08-1) ...................................................6-65
(2) Fault automatic reset wait time (C08-2) ............................................................................6-66
6.10 Panel and parameter related matters ....................................................................................6-66
6.10.1 Operation panel mode (C11) .........................................................................................6-66
(1) Default mode setting (C11-0) ............................................................................................6-66
(2) Operation panel monitor parameter (C11-3) .....................................................................6-66
(3) LCD panel : Language setting (C11-4)..............................................................................6-66
(4) LCD panel : contrast adjustment (C11-5)..........................................................................6-66
(5) LCD panel : Backlight OFF timer setting (C11-6) ..............................................................6-66
(6) Panel operation mode selection (C11-7)...........................................................................6-66
(7) FWD/REV LED display system (C11-8) ............................................................................6-67
6.10.2 Display skip (A05) .........................................................................................................6-67
6.10.3 Data and operation protection (C09) .............................................................................6-67
(1) Parameter protection function...........................................................................................6-67
(2) Operation panel protection................................................................................................6-68
(3) LCL switchover protection.................................................................................................6-68
(4) Fault history buffer clear ...................................................................................................6-68
(5) Default value load .............................................................................................................6-68
6.10.4 Password No. (C28, U00-1) ..........................................................................................6-69
(1) Password No. function valid (C28-0) ................................................................................6-69
(2) Password No. setting (C28-1)...........................................................................................6-69
(3) Password No. setting (U00-1)...........................................................................................6-69
6.10.5 Parameter copy function (U00-0) ..................................................................................6-69
6.11 Extended functions................................................................................................................6-70
6.11.1 Cooling fan ON/OFF control (C25-2) .............................................................................6-70
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
6.12 PM motor vector control ........................................................................................................6-71

6.12.1 ASR control constant (A10) ...........................................................................................6-71
(1) ASR drive torque limiter (A10-3) .......................................................................................6-71
(2) ASR regenerative torque limiter (A10-4) ...........................................................................6-71
(3) Emergency stop regenerative torque limiter (A10-5) ........................................................6-71
6.12.2 ACR control constant (PM)............................................................................................6-72
(1) ACR response (A20-0)......................................................................................................6-72
(2) ACR time constant (A20-1) ...............................................................................................6-72
(3) d axis current command cushion (A20-2) .........................................................................6-72
(4) q axis current command cushion (A20-3) .........................................................................6-72
6.12.3 Low path filter (B30) ......................................................................................................6-73
(1) ASR proportional item change rate limit (B30-2)...............................................................6-73
(2) Speed setting LPF time constant (B30-3) .........................................................................6-73
(3) Speed detection LPF time constant (B30-4) .....................................................................6-73
(4) Speed detection LPF time constant for ASR (B30-5) ........................................................6-73
(5) Torque current command setting LPF time constant (B30-7)............................................6-73
6.13 IM vector control....................................................................................................................6-74
6.13.1 ASR control constant (A10) ...........................................................................................6-74
(1) ASR drive torque limiter (A10-3) .......................................................................................6-74
(2) ASR regenerative torque limiter (A10-4) ...........................................................................6-74
(3) Emergency stop regenerative torque limiter (A10-5) ........................................................6-74
6.13.2 ACR control constant (IM) .............................................................................................6-75
(1) ACR response (A11-0)......................................................................................................6-75
(2) ACR time constant (A11-1) ...............................................................................................6-75
(3) ACR drive torque limiter (A11-2) .......................................................................................6-75
(4) ACR regenerative torque limiter (A11-3) ...........................................................................6-75
6.13.3 Low path filter (B30) ......................................................................................................6-76
(1) ASR proportional item change rate limit (B30-2)...............................................................6-76
(2) Speed setting LPF time constant (B30-3) .........................................................................6-76
(3) Speed detection LPF time constant (B30-4) .....................................................................6-76
(4) Speed detection LPF time constant for ASR (B30-5) ........................................................6-76
(5) Speed detection LPF time constant for compensation (B30-6) .........................................6-76
(6) Torque current command setting LPF time constant (B30-7)............................................6-76
6.14 V/f control mode ....................................................................................................................6-77
6.14.1 Torque boost (A02) ........................................................................................................6-77
(1) Manual torque boost selection ..........................................................................................6-77
(2) Automatic torque boost selection......................................................................................6-77
(3) Manual torque boost voltage.............................................................................................6-78
(4) R1 drop compensation gain ..............................................................................................6-78
(5) Slip compensation gain.....................................................................................................6-78
(6) Maximum torque boost gain..............................................................................................6-78
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
6.14.2 DC brake (A03) .............................................................................................................6-79

(1) DC braking voltage (A03-0) ..............................................................................................6-79
(2) DC braking time (A03-1) ...................................................................................................6-79
(3) DC braking current (A03-2)...............................................................................................6-79
6.14.3 Start/stop frequency (C01).............................................................................................6-80
(1) Start frequency (C01-0).....................................................................................................6-80
(2) Stop frequency (C01-1).....................................................................................................6-80
6.14.4 S-shape ramp path (B10-6) ...........................................................................................6-80
6.14.5 V/f middle point setting (B17) ........................................................................................6-80
6.15 Serial (C26) ...........................................................................................................................6-82
(1) Function selection (C26-0)................................................................................................6-82
(2) Parameter change protection (C26-1) ..............................................................................6-82
(3) Station No. (C26-2) ...........................................................................................................6-82
(4) Response timer (C26-3)....................................................................................................6-82
(5) Baud rate setting (C26-4)..................................................................................................6-82
(6) Stop bit setting (C26-5) .....................................................................................................6-82
(7) Parity setting (C26-6) ........................................................................................................6-83
(8) Speed unit setting (C26-7) ................................................................................................6-83

6.1 Programmable input/output
The VT240EL's sequence inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs are all programmable inputs/outputs.
The inverter's internal signal can be assigned with the parameters.
Refer to Chapter 4 for details on the control circuit wiring and circuit specifications.
6.1.1 Sequence inputs (C03, C04, C05, C06, C12)
(1) Selecting the input point

There are three types of sequence signal input points, the [Panel], [Terminal block] on base PCB, and
[Serial data] sent from the host CPU.
The input points can be determined by setting the parameters.
1) The emergency stop signal (EMS) is input with OR from the [Terminal block] and [Serial].
2) The reset signal (RESET) is input with OR from the [Panel], [Terminal block] and [Serial].
3) The run command [F RUN/ R RUN] is input from the [Panel], [Terminal block] and [Serial]. The
[Other input functions] are input from the [Terminal block] and [Serial]. The input points can be
determined with the parameters.
Terminal <OR>
block EMS
Serial EMS
Terminal
block RESET
<OR>
Serial RESET
Internal command
RST
Panel STOP
MOD
FWD
Other input Panel
functions
REV
BRAKE Local (LCL)
AFS1
AFS2 COP
AFS3 Terminal F RUN Remote (RMT)
block R RUN
S0 OFF
S1
S2 F RUN
S3 Serial ON
R RUN
SE
MBRK_ans C00-5
S5 COP
S6 Terminal Other input OFF 1 : Not used together
S7 block functions C00-6
EXC 1 : Terminal
ACR ON 2 : Used together
Local (LCL)
PCTL
Serial Other input 2 : Serial
FPOS_CMD
functions
UVT-MSK Remote (RMT)
6-1
(2) Functions of programmable sequence inputs and terminal block assignments.

The functions of the sequence inputs are shown below.
A random internal command can be assigned to the terminal block by setting the "number of the
assigned terminal" with the parameters C03, C04, C05, C06.
"ON fixed" can be set by setting the parameter value to [16], and "OFF fixed" can be set by setting [0].
No. Symbol Parameter Function Min. Max. Default
C03 Sequence input terminal function 1
This is the forward run command for the remote 1.
0 F RUN Forward run -11. 16.
operation mode. (Note 1)
When the motor is stopped, all run commands will be
stopped.
If turned ON while running, the stop operation will start. 3.
1 EMS Emergency stop -11. 16.
Select "ramp deceleration stop", "coast to stop fault (Note 1)
output valid" or "coast to stop fault output invalid" with
C00-4.
This is the reverse run command for the remote 2.
2 R RUN Reverse run -11. 16.
operation mode. (Note 1)
The DC brakes can be applied with this signal.
When used with the PM motor, DC excitation will take
6 BRAKE DC brake place. -11. 16. 0.
Note) Shaft torsion may occur depending on the load
torque.
The fault output (status display FLT ON, FAULT relay) is
7 RESET Breakdown reset -11. 16. 0.
turned OFF, and restart of operation is enabled.
Sequence command using serial transmission is
validated.
Serial transmission
8 COP When the control changeover method C00-6 is -11. 16. 0.
selection selected, the auxiliary sequence input point can be
selected.
D AFS1 Speed setting 1 The analog input selected with C07-0 is validated. -11. 16. 16.
E AFS2 Speed setting 2 The analog input selected with C07-1 is validated. -11. 16. 0.
F AFS3 Speed setting 3 The analog input selected with C07-2 is validated. -11. 16. 0.
4.
2 S0 -11. 16. (Note 1)
The speed set with B48-8 to F (program 0 to 7) is 5.
3 S1 -11. 16.
Program speed selected. (Note 1)
selection The program setting selection method (binary/direct 6.
4 S2 input) is set with B11-8. -11. 16. (Note 1)
5 S3 -11. 16. 0.
6 SE -11. 16. 0.
External brake
E MBRK_ans An answer to the external brake command is input. -11. 16. 0.
answer
0 S5 Digital torque bias 1 -11. 16. 0.
1 S6 Digital torque bias 2 The digital torque bias value (B16-1 to 5) is selected. -11. 16. 0.
8~ EFLT1~ The inverter coasts to a stop when the external fault is
External fault 1~8 -11. 16. 0.
F EFLT8 input.
"Pre-excitation operation," which establishes only the
motor's internal flux without generating a torque, is
0 EXC Pre-excitation carried out. -11. 16. 0.
Use this when torque is required from the start of
operation.
1 ACR ACR This selects ACR operation. -11. 16. 0.
2 PCTL P control The speed amplifier's PI control is switched to P control. -11. 16. 0.
B FPOS_CMD position estimation Use
Magnetic pole this to estimate the magnetic pole position -11. 16. 0.
separately from the run command.
This must be input during UPS operation to switch the
C UVT-MSK UPS operation -11. 16. 0.
mode.
Output switch An answer in response to the output switch command is
D OUTMC_ans answer (Note 2) -11. 16. 0.
input.
E MBRK_ans2 External brake The second answer in response to the external brake -11. 16. 0.
answer 2 (Note 2) command is input.
(Note 1) From software version JJ, (Note 2) From software version NN
6-2
Input terminals and setting numbers

OFF ON
Input terminal PSI1 PSI2 PSI3 PSI4 PSI5 PSI6 PSI7 PSI8 PSI9 PSI10 PSI11 Not available
fixed fixed
Positive
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
logic
No.
Negative
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11
logic
* The relay interface option (V24-RY0) is required for PSI8 to PSI11.
* If "-" is selected for the setting No., the input logic will be reversed.
(3) Program setting filter

Setting value Application
No. Symbol Parameter
Unit Min. Max. Default VEC PM RWE V/f
C12 Setting input terminal function
E Program setting filter sec 0.00 1.00 0.01
The program speed and ramp setting are set with the sequence commands S0 to SE. However,
chattering could occur when these input terminals are changed.
To prevent this, a batch filter process is applied on S0 to SE.
The input signal is valid if the same value is obtained for the S0 to SE input terminals for the set time
or longer. Thus, once the input is changed, the program settings will not change for the [C12-E: setting
time].
Set the value higher than the time at which chattering could occur and lower than the tolerable setting
delay time.
(4) Example of setting input terminal functions

An example of setting the input terminal functions is given below.
The functions assigned to each terminal are shown below. The external circuit contact signal is "ON
when closed" (positive logic) in this example.
RY24V UP run command...................... PSI1
RY24V
DOWN run command ............... PSI2
W1
SINK Emergency stop........................ PSI3
1
2 Multi-speed setting (S0) .......... PSI4
Run command UP Multi-speed setting (S1) .......... PSI5
PSI1
Multi-speed setting (S2) .......... PSI6
Run command 4.7k Fault reset................................. PSI7
DOWN PSI2 * UP run command : Forward run (F RUN)
DOWN run command : Reverse run (R RUN)
Emergency stop 4.7k
PSI3
Multi-speed S0 4.7k
PSI4
Multi-speed S1 4.7k
PSI5
Multi-speed S2 4.7k
PSI6
W2 4.7k
SINK
1
2
Fault reset
PSI7
4.7k Note) The circuit is set to "sink".
RY0
RY0V
6-3
The parameter settings for this example are shown below.
Terminal Setting
block value
0 F RUN Forward run PSI1 1
1 EMS Emergency stop PSI3 3
2 R RUN Reverse run PSI2 2
7 RESET Breakdown reset PSI7 7
2 S0 Program speed selection PSI4 4
6-4
6.1.2 Sequence outputs (B39, C00, C13, C15, C24, C33)

2 RA-RC output parameters -55. 55. 1.
3 PSO1 output parameters -55. 55. 4.
FA-FB-FC output
6 -55. 55. 2.
parameters
(1) Programmable sequence output functions and setting numbers

As a standard, the sequence output includes five outputs (1c contact output: 1, 1a contact output: 1,
open collector outputs: 3). The following signals can be random to these outputs.
The sequence outputs can be expanded up to nine outputs by connecting a relay interface option
(V24-RY0). (Select with C33-0 to 3)
Setting No.
Symbol Parameter Function Positive Negative
logic logic
OFF fixed The output is fixed to OFF. 0
This turns ON while running or during DC braking.
RUN Run Whether to turn this ON or OFF during pre-excitation can be 1 -1
selected with C00-7.
FLT Fault This turns ON during a fault. 2 -2
This turns ON when the DC main circuit voltage reaches a
MC Charge completed 3 -3
voltage higher than the MC ON level.
This turns ON when there is no fault, EMS is not activated,
RDY1 Ready (1) pre-charging is complete and the encoder signal is detected (only 4 -4
in PM motor control with sensor mode).
This turns ON when there is no fault, pre-charging is complete
RDY2 Ready (2) and the encoder signal is detected (only in PM motor control with 5 -5
sensor mode).
This turns ON when the operation mode is local (operation from
LCL Local 6 -6
the operation panel).
V/f: This turns ON while the output frequency is reverse running.
REV Reverse run 7 -7
VEC, PM: This turns ON while the motor is reverse running.
This turns ON when the output current reaches the detection
IDET Current detection 8 -8
level (C15-1) or higher.
This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) reaches the
Frequency (speed)
ATN set frequency (speed). The detection reach width is set with 9 -9
attainment
C15-0.
This turns ON when the output frequency (speed) absolute value
Frequency(speed)
SPD1 reaches a frequency (speed) that is higher than the speed set 10 -10
detection (1)
with the detection level (C15-2).
Frequency(speed)
SPD2 reaches a frequency (speed) that is higher than the speed set 11 -11
detection (2)
with the detection level (C15-3).
Transmission
COP This turns ON when serial transmission operation is selected. 12 -12
selection
EC0 13 -13
EC1 14 -14
Specific fault output This turns ON when the fault set up by C15-6,7,8,9 occurs.
EC2 15 -15
EC3 16 -16
(Continued on next page)
Note) The expression ON in the table indicates that the output circuits a contact is closed when positive
logic is set.
Note) The signals for setting numbers not listed in the table are OFF fixed.
6-5
Setting No.
Symbol Parameter Function Positive Negative
logic logic
ACC Acceleration This turns ON during acceleration. 17 -17
DCC Deceleration This turns ON during deceleration. 18 -18
ALM Minor fault This turns ON during a minor fault. 20 -20
This turns ON during running, jogging, pre-excitation and DC
braking. A three minute off delay is provided, so even if the above
FAN Fan control 21 -21
operations turn OFF, this control will not turn OFF for three
minutes. This is used for external fan control.
ZSP Zero speed 23 -23
is below the level set with zero speed (C15-4).
External brake
MBRK Outputs an external brake command. 27 -27
output
Speed deviation
DVER This turns ON during a speed deviation error. 28 -28
error
This signal delays (C15-5) the turning OFF of the sequence
RDELAY Run delay answer 30 -30
output RUN.
ON fixed The output is fixed to ON. 31/-31
Magnetic pole
This turns ON when the magnetic pole position estimation and
FPOS position estimation 40 -40
magnetic pole position detection are completed.
complete
Estimating
FPOS_EX magnetic pole This turns ON while estimating the magnetic pole position. 41 -41
position
This turns ON when the ramp output has not reached the set
F_NOT Ramp not attained 42 -42
speed.
JEAK_IN Jerk in This turns ON when jerk is output at the start of speed change. 43 -43
JEAK_OUT Jerk out This turns ON when jerk is output before speed attainment. 44 -44
This turns ON when the car load is heavier than the balance load.
50%LOAD Half load 45 -45
(Load information required.)
Position error when
POSERR This turns ON if the motor is turning while stopped. 46 -46
stopped
This turns ON simultaneously with the operation command input,
Output switch
OUTMC and turns OFF when the gate OFF passes the output switch open 47 -47
closed
standby time (C20-5).
Note) The expression ON in the table indicates that the output circuits a contact is closed when positive
logic is set.
Note) The signals for setting numbers not listed in the table are OFF fixed.
6-6
(2) Setting the output detection level

a) Run (RUN) output condition selection (B39-0, C00-7)

B39 Magnetic pole position estimation
Magnetic pole position
0 121. 223. 122.
estimation selection
1 2 1.
f0 :
f1 :
f2 : RUN signal output during magnetic pole position estimation
=1: Output
=2: Do not output
* Select this when using the magnetic pole estimation operation function.

C00 Control methods
RUN contact output
7 1. 2. 1.
conditions
Set the ON conditions for the sequence RUN output.

=1 : ON during pre-excitation
=2 : OFF during pre-excitation
* Pre-excitation is a function used with the IM (induction motor) vector control. This is invalid for
the PM motor, or when using the IM with V/f control mode.
b) Attainment (ATN) detection width (C15-0)

C15 Status output detection level, specific fault output selection
0 ATN Attainment detection width % 0.0 20.0 1.0
The attained output ATN

C15-0
operation width is set.
Set with a percentage to the max. Setting
frequency
frequency (B00-4) or max. speed (Setting speed)
(B01-4). Output frequency
(Motor speed)
ON ON Time
ATN
6-7
c) Current (IDET) detection level (C15-1)

1 IDET Current detection level % 5. 300. 100.
Output current
The current detection (IDET) operation level is
set.
Set with a percentage of the rated current 5%
C15-1
(B00-6, B01-6).
A 5% of hysteresis will occur with the IDET
operation.
Time
ON
IDET
d) Speed (SPD1,SPD2) detection level (C15-2, 3)

2 SPD1 Speed detection level 1 % 1.0 105.0 95.0
3 SPD2 Speed detection level 2 % 1.0 105.0 95.0
Output frequency
The speed detection SPD 1 and 2 operation level
is set.
1%
Set with a percentage to the max. frequency C15-2
(B00-4) or max. speed (B01-4).
1%
The output frequency or the motor speed will be C15-3
the comparison target.
A 1% of hysteresis will occur with SPD1 and 2
operation.
ON Time
SPD1
ON
SPD2
e) Zero speed (ZSP) detection level (C24-8)

8 ZSP Zero speed detection level m/s 0.001 0.150 0.002
The zero speed detection: ZSP operation level is set.
6-8
f) RDELAY output delay time setting (C15-5)

5 RDELAY RDELAY delay time sec 0.0 1000.0 1.0
Set the delay time from sequence output RUN OFF to RDELAY OFF in the sequence output
RDELAY.
Set the time with a 0.1 s unit. RDELAY output delay time
(C15-5)
Sequence output
RUN
Sequence output
RDELAY
If the sequence output RUN turns ON again during the delay time, the ON state will continue. The
conditions that cause DELAY to turn OFF at the subsequent RUN OFF will be applied after the
delay time elapses again.
(Note) RDELAY is reset if the power is turned OFF.
g) EC0 to 3 output fault selection (C15-6 to 9)

6 EC0 EC0 output fault selection 0.00.0 1.FF.F 0.00.0
To output only a specific fault, set this parameter. Only faults satisfying the set conditions will be
output to the EC0 to EC3 sequence outputs.
Set the details of the fault assigned to the sequence output EC0 to 3 with the following
configuration.
0. 00. 0
Fault sub-code (0x0 to 0xF)
Fault main code (0x00 to 0x13)
0: Major fault, 1: Minor fault
Normal fault No. table

Correspond- Correspond- Correspond- Correspond- Correspond-
No. No. No. No. No.
ing fault ing fault ing fault ing fault ing fault
00 None 04 OV 08 SP 0C GRD 10 BPFLT
01 EMS 05 UV 09 For future use 0D IO 11 EXFLT
02 PM 06 PHL 0A ATT 0E CPU 12 EL
03 OC 07 UOH 0B OL 0F For future use 13 For future use
Minor fault No. table

No. Corresponding fault No. Corresponding fault No. Corresponding fault
AI2 current input 3mA or
00 None 04 Speed deviation error 08
less
01 For future use 05 For future use 09 External fault input
Position deflection at stop
02 Carrier f decelerating 06 For future use 0A
error
AI1 current input 3mA or
03 Overload error (50% or more) 07
less
6-9
h) EC0 to 3, ALM OFF delay timer (C15-A to E)

A EC0 EC0 OFF delay timer sec 0.0 600.0 0.1
B EC1 EC1 OFF delay timer sec 0.0 600.0 0.1
C EC2 EC2 OFF delay timer sec 0.0 600.0 0.1
D EC3 EC3 OFF delay timer sec 0.0 600.0 0.1
E ALM ALM OFF delay timer sec 0.0 600.0 0.1
Set the output hold time for the sequence output assigned to the minor fault output.
Note that 0.0 is the setting value for holding the sequence output to the input of the fault reset
signal (RESET).
(3) Example of setting output terminal functions

An example of setting the output terminal functions is given below.
The functions assigned to each terminal are shown below.
TB2
External brake command (MBRK)...... RA/RC
Fault (FLT).......................................... FA/FC
RA MBRK Zero speed (ZSP)............................... PSO1
Ry RC COM READY 2 (RDY2) ............................... PSO2
Run (RUN) ......................................... PSO3
FA FLT
FB
Ry
FC COM
PSO1 ZSP
PSO2 RDY2
OFF PSO3
PSO3 RUN
PSOE
PULSE COM
ON
DS1-4
The parameter settings for this example are shown below.
No. Parameter Terminal block Setting value

2 RA-RC output parameters MBRK 27
3 PSO1 output parameters ZSP 23
4 PSO2 output parameters RDY2 5
5 PSO3 output parameters RUN 1
6 FA-FB-FC output parameters FLT 2
Note) If the output terminal function's setting value is [+] and when the internal signal turns "ON (changes
from 0 to 1)", the output circuit's contact will "close".
6-10
6.1.3 Analog inputs (C02, C07, C12, C16)
As a standard, there are three analog input channels. Each channel can be assigned to the internal setting
signals by using the programmable input function.
(1) Terminal input mode (C12, C16)

AI1 Terminal input mode
0 1. 2. 1.
selection
1 AI1 input gain 0.001 5.000 1.000
2 AI1 input offset -100.00 100.00 0.00
AI1 Current input mode
3 1. 2. 1.
selection
Filter time constant for AI1
4 ms 2. 250. 100.
input
5 AI2 terminal input mode 1. 2. 1.
6 AI2 input gain 0.001 5.000 1.000
7 AI2 input offset -100.00 100.00 0.00
8 1. 2. 1.
selection
9 ms 2. 250. 100.
input
A AI3 terminal input mode 1. 3. 1.
B AI3 input gain 0.000 5.000 1.000
C AI3 input offset -100.00 100.00 0.00
D ms 2. 250. 100.
input
C16 Setting input terminal function (Moving average time)
Moving average time for AI1
0 ms 0. 32. 10.
input
1 ms 0. 32. 10.
input
2 ms 0. 32. 10.
input
a) AI1, AI2 terminal input mode selection (C12-0, C12-5)

Select the input mode for the AI1 and AI2 terminals.
=1: Voltage input
Note) The DIP switches DS1-2 and 3 on the base PCB must be turned OFF.
=2: Current input
Note) The DIP switches DS1-2 and 3 on the base PCB must be turned ON.
DS1
1 2 ON
OPEN 1 120
W1PSI16 V1 2 I1
1 2 V2 3 I2
PSO3 4 PULSE
W2PSI7
* DS1-2AI1
DS1-3AI2
6-11
b) AI1, AI2 input gain (C12-1, C12-6) and offset (C12-2,C12-7)

If the AI1 and AI2 terminal input modes have been set to voltage input (C12-0, C12-5 =1), the
relation between the input signals and the internal setting signals are ;
Internal setting signal [%] = Input signal [V] / 10[V] x Gain x 100[%] + Offset[%]
Note ) The input signal effective range of 0 10V is equal to the internal setting input effective
range of 0 100%. However, when used to set torque, the internal setting of 100%
means that the setting of torque is 300%.
If the AI1 and AI2 terminal input modes have been set to current input (C12-0, C12-5 =2), the
relation between the input signals and the internal setting signals are ;
- when the current input mode of 4 20mA (C12-3, C12-8=1),
Internal setting signal [%] = (Input signal [mA] 4[mA]) / 16[mA] x Gain x 100[%] + Offset [%]
Note ) The input signal effective range of 4 20mA is equal to the internal setting input effective
- when the current input mode of 0 20mA (C12-3, C12-8=2),
Internal setting signal [%] = Input signal [mA] / 20[A] x Gain x 100[%] + Offset[%]
Note ) The input signal effective range of 0 20mA is equal to the internal setting input effective
c) AI1, AI2 current input mode selection (C12-3, C12-8)

If the AI1 and AI2 terminal input modes have been set to current input (C12-0, C12-5=2), set the
full scale of these input signal for these terminals.
=1 : 4 to 20mA =2 : 0 to 20mA
The relation of each input function's analog input value and setting value is shown below.
Setting range
AI1, AI2 AI3
Voltage Current Voltage
Signal name mode mode mode Function
-10 to 10V
4 to 20mA -5 to 5V
0 to 10V
0 to 20mA
1 to 5V
This is the speed setting.
-100 to
Speed setting 1 A positive polarity sets forward run, and a negative
100%
Speed setting 2 0 to 100% polarity sets reverse run.
Speed setting 3 If analog input is selected for the speed setting, the speed
0 to 100% setting can be changed between 1, 2 and 3 using the
sequence input (AFS1, AFS2, AFS3).
This is the torque setting for ACR operation.
-300 to
Torque setting 0 to 300% 300% A positive polarity sets the torque in the forward run
direction, and a negative polarity sets the torque in the
0 to 300% reverse run direction.
-100 to
Analog torque 100% This is the torque bias setting when analog is selected for
0 to 100%
bias setting the automatic torque bias selection (B16-0=2).
0 to 100%
Setting resolution AI1, AI2 (Voltage mode) : 0 to 10V/12 bit,

AI1, AI2 (Current mode) : 0 to 20mA/12 bit,
AI3 : -10V to 10V/12 bit
The resolution drops as the analog input range decreases.
Example) When using AI1 (voltage mode) with AI1 input gain (C12-1) 2.000: 0 to 5v/11bit
6-12
d) AI1, AI2, AI3 input filter time constants (C12-4, C12-9, C12-D)
The filter time constants of the input values for the AI1, AI12 and AI3 terminals can be set.
Fluctuation of the setting value caused by noise or sudden change of the input signal, etc., can be
suppressed by increasing the time constant.
e) AI3 terminal input mode selection (C12-A), AI3 input gain (C12-B), AI3 input offset (C12-C)
Set the full scale for the AI3 terminal analog input signal with C12-A.
=1 : -10V to +10V =2 : -5V to +5V =3 : +1V to +5V
The AI3 terminal input value can be multiplied by the gain set by C12-B and also can be increased
by the offset set by C12-C. In this case, set AI3 input mode to 10V 10V (C12-A=1).
The following example shows the relation of the voltage input value and speed setting value when
the AI3 input terminal function is set to speed setting.
Set frequency/speed Set frequency/speed

(forward run) (forward run)
100%
100% C12-A1
C12-B1.000
C12-C50.00
Sequence command
when running with FRUN C12-A1
50% C12-B2.000
C12-C0.00
-10VC12-A1
-5V C12-A2 C12-A=3 -10V
1V 10VC12-A1 5V 10V
5VC12-A2
Sequence command
Sequence command when running with FRUN
when running with RRUN
C12-A-=1,2 Sequence command

-100% when running with RRUN
-100%
(reverse run) (reverse run)
Example of C12-B=1.000, C12-C=0.00 Example of C12-B and C12-C used
f) Moving average time of AI1, AI2 and AI3 (C16-0,C16-1,C16-2)

These parameters set the moving average time of the input values of the AI1, AI2 and AI3
terminals. If the moving average time is increased, the fluctuation of the settings caused by noise
or rapid change of the input signal will be suppressed. If 0 (zero) is set, this function is not used.
If any odd value is set, the actual moving average time becomes the set value plus 1ms.
6-13
(2) Assigning the analog input function (C02, C07)

C02 Various setting input points selection
Seed setting input points
0 1. 4. 4.
selection
C07 Analog input terminal function
0 Speed setting 1 0. 11. 0.
6 Torque setting 0. 11. 0.
A Analog torque bias setting 0. 11. 0.
a) Speed setting input point selection (C02-0)

The speed setting input point is selected by setting the input destination's No.
=1 : Analog fixed
=4 : Sequence (when using multi-speed setting)
* When the setting value is 2, this is automatically changed to 1, and when set to 3, is
automatically changed to 4.
When using the local setting (LCL mode), the speed is set with [B48-1: Speed setting (for LCL)]
regardless of this setting.
b) Analog input terminal function (C07-0, 1, 2, 6, A)

The function can be assigned by setting the "analog input terminal setting data" in the internal
setting signal being used.
Each changeover sequence and parameter setting is related to the use of the analog input
function.
Confirm the state of the related changeover sequence and parameter setting status when using
this function.
Analog input terminal setting data
Setting data Input terminal

0 0% fixed
1 100% fixed
2 AI1
3 AI2
4 AI3
5 to 11 Not available
* The torque setting is 300% when the torque setting is "1: 100% fixed".
6-14
c) Block diagram of analog input terminal function
Panel setting (B48-1)

C07-2: Speed
setting 3
C07-1: Speed
setting 2 ON
C02-0 O
C07-0: Speed ON
setting 1 ON Off
Off =1
Off LCL
Off C03-F:AFS3
C03-E:AFS2
C03-D:AFS1
F/R
C02-0
S0
Multi-speed
S1
0% 0 command
S2 =4
100% 1
AI1 2
C12-0~D
ASR
C16-0~2
AI2 3
AI3 4
Forward run
C07-6 Torque setting -1
Reverse run C06-1:ACR
B16-0
OFF
=0
=2
S5 =1 -1
S6 Multi-speed
S7 command =1 Torque bias
B16-6
=2
C07-A :
Analog torque bias setting
Limiter
ON ACR
A11-2 : ACR drive torque limiter
A10-3 : ASR drive torque limiter
OFF
C06-1:ACR Inverter
A10-5 : Emergency stop regenerative
torque limiter ON EMS
A11-3 : ACR regenerative torque limiter ON
A10-4 : ASR regenerative torque limiter OFF
OFF
Panel setting C06-1:ACR
6-15
6.1.4 Analog output (C13, C14)
(1) Output terminal function (C13-0, C13-1)

0 A01 terminal output 0. 21. 0.
1 A02 terminal output 0. 21. 3.
The inverter's internal parameters can be output from the analog output terminals AO1 and AO2.
The parameters corresponding to the setting values and the full scale of those output signals are
shown below.
The output voltage and current value are output as a percentage of the full scale.
The output method and output gain, etc., can also be set with parameter No. C14.
Value Parameter Full scale

0 Output frequency 10V at Max. frequency
Setting frequency 10V at Max. frequency
1
Setting speed 10V at Max. speed
10V at Max. frequency
2 Ramp output
10V at Max. speed
3 Output current (Motor) 5V at Motor rated current
4 Output current (Inverter) 5V at inverter rated current
5 Output voltage 10V at Motor rated voltage
6 Inverter output power 5V at (Motor rated voltage Motor rated current)
5V at 300V (200V Series)
7 DC voltage
8 OLT monitor (device protection) 10V/100%
9 Heat sink temperature 10V at 100C
10 Motor speed 10V at Max. speed
11 Torque current 5V at Motor rated current
12 Excitation current 5V at Motor rated current
13 Actual motor speed 10V at Max. speed
14 Namp output 5V at Rated torque
15 OLT monitor (motor protection) 10V/100%
16 to 19 Not available
20 DM1 for maker maintenance 10V/1000h
Note) DM1, DM2 for maker maintenance are provided for maintenance by the maker.
The user must not set C13-0, 1 = 20, 21.
6-16
(2) A01, A02 output setting (C14)

C14 A01, A02 output setting
0 Output gain for A01 0.20 2.00 1.00
1 Output gain for A02 0.20 2.00 1.00
3 A01 output offset (Voltage) V -8.00 8.00 0.00
4 A02 output offset (Voltage) V -8.00 8.00 0.00
5 A01 output offset (Current) mA -15.0 15.0 0.00
6 A02 output offset (Current) mA -15.0 15.0 0.00
7 A01 output method 1. 3. 1.
8 A02 output method 1. 3. 1.
a) A01, A02 output method (C14-7, 8)

Set the AO1 and AO2 output method.
=1 : Voltage output 0 to 10V
=2 : Voltage output 0 to 10V (with 5V offset)
=3 : Current output 4 to 20mA
* Voltage output : Connect EL-bit W3 and W4 on the control PCB to "voltage mode side: 1".
Current output : Connect EL-bit W3 and W4 on the control PCB to "current mode side: 2".
1 : Voltage
2 : Current
W4 W3
1 2 1 2
* When set to "-2: voltage output 0 to 10V (with 5V offset)", the parameter reference point is
automatically set to 5V, and the output value gain is set to 0.5-fold.
b) AO1, AO2 output gain (C14-0, 1)

Set the AO1 and AO2 output gain.
If [C14-7, 9 AO1, AO2 output method] is set to [=2], a 0.5-fold gain will be applied, so the output
gain will be 0.5 [C14-0 or C14-1 gain].
6-17
Block diagram of analog output
Gain Offset
AO1
Internal parameter
(Set C13-0)

* The maximum output voltage
C14-0 C14-3 (Voltage output) of the AO1 and AO2 output is
C14-5 (Current output) COM approx. 11V.
A voltage higher than this will
not be output even if set.
AO2
Internal parameter
(Set C13-1)

C14-1 C14-4 (Voltage output)

C14-6 (Current output) COM
c) AO1, AO2 output offset (C14-3, 4, 5, 6)

Of the parameters selected with C13-0, 1, the following parameters have signs (+/-).
When these parameters are selected, the +/- classification can be assigned by using an offset
process on the output value.
Set C14-3, 4 for the voltage output and C14-5, 6 for the current output.
Value Parameter Full scale

0 Output frequency Max. frequency
Setting frequency Max. frequency
1
Setting speed Max. speed
10 Motor speed Max. speed
11 Torque current Motor rated current 2
12 Excitation current Motor rated current 2
13 Actual motor speed Max. speed
14 Namp output Rated torque 2
An example of setting the 5V offset for a voltage output is shown below.

If C14-7, 8 is set to 2, the offset amount when the option is set with C14-3, 4 is (5V+C14-3, 4
setting value).
Meter output [V] Meter output [V]

When offset is set
10V 10V
5V
Internal para- 0V Internal para-

-100% 0V 100% meter value [%] -100% 100% meter value [%]
When offset is not set For offset 5V, gain = 0.50

(Offset = 0V, gain = 1.00)
Note) If + or - is indicated with the offset, the signal will not be output from AO1, AO2 when the power
is shut off, so the voltage will be 0V (-100% in above example).
6-18
6.2 Basic settings
6.2.1 Control mode selection (C30-0)

C30 Control mode selection
0 Control mode selection 21. 24. 24.
2 1.
f0 : Control mode
=1 : V/f control
=2 : IM speed sensor-less vector control
=3 : IM speed vector control with sensor
=4 : PM motor control with sensor
f1 : Device overload mode

=2 : (Fixed)
Select the control mode
(Note) This parameter must always be set first.
When changing this parameter, press the key on the operation panel to enter the setting. At that
LCL
SET
point, the following parameters will be automatically changed to the default value.
1) Over-current limit (B18-0)
2) Rating related (B00, B01)
3) Manual torque boost voltage (A02-2)
4) DC brake voltage (A03-0)
6.2.2 Input power voltage (B01-0, B00-0)

B01 Output rating
0 Rated input voltage setting 1. 7. 7.
Select the rated input voltage from the following table.

When this data is changed, the output voltage data (B01-0) will be changed to the same value.
200V system 400V system

B00-0 or B00-1 value Power supply Power supply
voltage voltage
1 200V to 200V 380V to 380V
2 200V to 200V 400V 381 to 400V
3 220V 201 to 220V 415V 401 to 415V
4 220V 201 to 220V 440V 416 to 440V
5 230V 221 to 230V 460V 441 to 460V
6 240V 231 to 240V 480V 461 to 480V
7 230V 221 to 230V 400V 381 to 400V
* When V/f control is selected (C30-0 f0=1), the setting parameter is B00-0.
When the output voltage which is changed, the set is also subject to (B00-3).
6-19
6.2.3 Motor rated output (B01-1, B00-2)

B01 Output rating
Inverter
1 Motor rated output kW 0.10 750.00
rating
The motors rated output at the base speed is set.
* When setting B01-3 to a value and if it is smaller than the rated voltage indicated on the motors rating
nameplate, set the motor rated output in B01-1 to B01-3 setting/rated voltage on motor rating nameplate.
* rated voltage on motor rating nameplate.
* When V/f control is selected (C30-0 f0=1), this setting parameter is B00-2.
The base speed is also subject to the base rotation frequency.
6.2.4 No. of motor poles (B01-2)

B01 Output rating
2 No. of motor poles 2. 100. 4.
Set the number of poles as indicated on the motor nameplate.
6.2.5 Rated output voltage (B01-3, B00-3)

B01 Output rating
230. or
3 Rated output voltage V 40. 480.
400.
Set the rated voltage as indicated on the motor nameplate. If the rated voltage is larger than the power
voltage effective value of *0.85, set to lower than the power voltage effective value of *0.85.
Example: When using a 380V power, calculate 380V*0.85, and set 323V.
* If the rated input voltage setting (B00-0 B01-0) is changed, this value is also changed to the rated input
voltage value. This cannot be set higher than the rated input voltage.
* When V/f control is selected (C30-0 f0=1), this setting parameter is B00-3.
If this parameter is set to 39, the output voltage will be equal to the input voltage at the base frequency.
If a value other than 39 is set, the output voltage at the base frequency will be controlled with the value set
with this parameter.
6-20
6.2.6 Speed (B01-4, B01-5)

B01 Output rating
4 Max. speed min-1 40. 9999. 72.
5 Base speed min-1 40. B01-4 72.
Set the motor's base and maximum frequency and speed.
1) PM motor control mode (C30-0 f0=4)

Set B01-4 and B01-5.
The B01-5 minimum value is 1/1.5 of B01-4 or 150min-1, whichever is larger. The maximum value is
B01-4 or 9999min-1, whichever is smaller.
The B01-4 minimum value is B01-5 or 150min-1, whichever is larger. The maximum value is 1.5-fold of
The settings are limited so that the synchronous frequency determined by the number of motor poles
does not exceed 210Hz.
2) Vector control with IM sensor mode (C30-0 f0=3)

Set B01-4 and B01-5.
The B01-5 minimum value is 1/4 of B01-4 or 150min-1, whichever is larger. The maximum value is
The B01-4 minimum value is B01-5 or 150min-1, whichever is larger. The maximum value is 4-fold of
The settings are limited so that the synchronous frequency determined by the number of motor poles
does not exceed 180Hz.
3) V/f control mode (C30-0 f0=1)

Set B00-4 and B00-5. This parameter is valid only when B00-1 is set to 0.
The B00-5 minimum value is 1/7 of B00-4[Hz] or 1.0[Hz], whichever is larger. The maximum value is
B00-4[Hz] or 440.0[Hz], whichever is smaller.
The B00-4 minimum value is B00-5[Hz]or 3.0[Hz], whichever is larger. The maximum value is 7-fold of
B00-5[Hz] or 440.0[Hz], whichever is smaller.
6.2.7 Motor rated current (B01-6, B00-6)

B01 Output rating
Inverter Inverter Inverter
6 Motor rated current A
0.3 rating rating
Set the rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate.

This is the reference for the over-current limit, motor overload reference and analog output, etc.
6.2.8 No. of encoder pulses (B01-8)

B01 Output rating
8 No. of encoder pulses P/R 30. 10000. 8192.
The number of pulses per rotation of the encoder in use is set.
6-21
6.2.9 No-load output voltage (B01-9)

B01 Output rating
9 No-load output voltage V 20. 500. 160.
The motor terminal voltage during no-load at the base speed is set.
* If the design data is not known, set the same value as [B01-3 rated output voltage].
6.2.10 Carrier frequency (B01-A, B00-8)

B01 Output rating
According
A Carrier frequency setting 1. 5. to type
The relation of the setting value and carrier frequency is shown below.
1 = 2kHz 2 = 4kHz 3 = 6kHz 4 = 8kHz 5 = 10kHZ
The default value is shown below.
2010 to 2100, 4009 to 4070: 4 (8kHz)
2130 to 2280, 4100 to 4150: 2 (4kHz)
6.2.11 Elevator rated speed (B48-0)

B48 Elevator function
Car speed at maximum
0 m/s 0.050 4.000 1.000
speed
Set the car speed when the motor is running at the maximum speed.
6.2.12 Machine time constant (B4A-3)

B4A ASR response changeover function
3 Machine time constant ms 10. 20000. 1000.
This is used to calculate the ASR speed amplifier gain.

Set the time as required to accelerate the motor and load's total inertia to the base speed at the rated
torque.
2 -1 2
J [kgm ] (Nbase [min ])
Tm [msec] = 10.97
Power [W]
Tm : Machine time constant
J : Total inertia ( = 1/4 GD2 [kgfm2])
Nbase : Base speed
Power : Motor rated output
6-22
6.2.13 Control method (C00)

C00 Control method
1 Run stopping methods 1. 4. 2.
Emergency stop (EMS)
4 1. 3. 1.
mode
Control source switchover
5 1. 2. 1.
method (J1 setting)
Control source switchover
6 1. 2. 1.
method (J2 setting)
(1) Run stopping methods (C00-1)

Set the stopping method for RUN operation.
= 1: Coast to stop
=2: Zero speed command deceleration stop
=3: S-pattern deceleration stop
=4: Zero speed judgment stop
* The =3 setting is valid from software version II, and =4 is valid from software version JJ.
a) Coast to stop
When the RUN command from the controller turns OFF, the gate is shut off immediately. Thus,
adjust to turn OFF the run command after confirming the actual brakes have closed.
When RUN command turns OFF after When RUN command turns OFF
zero speed is attained before zero speed is attained
Motor speed
Not controlled after RUN

command turns OFF
Motor speed
Zero speed level Not controlled after RUN
command turns OFF
Time
RUN command ON OFF

Time
Time
Brake engage wait
timeB46-4
RUN command ON OFF
Brake open enable Time
MBRK ON OFF
Brake open enable

Torque bias attenuation MBRK ON OFF
wait timeB46-5
Torque bias Torque bias
Gate output ON OFF

Gate output ON OFF
Status Run Stop Status Run Stop
6-23
b) Zero speed command deceleration stop

When the RUN command from the controller turns OFF, the speed command is simultaneously set
to 0. When the detected speed reaches the zero speed judgment level (C24-8), brake open enable
(MBRK) turns OFF, the torque bias is attenuated, and then the gate is shut off. Note that the
decelerate rate cannot be specified.
Motor speed Motor speed

Speed command
Actual motor speed
Zero speed level Zero speed level
Time Time
RUN command ON OFF RUN command ON OFF
Brake engage wait Brake engage wait

timeB46-4 timeB46-4
Brake open enable Brake open enable

MBRK ON OFF MBRK ON OFF
Torque bias attenuation Torque bias attenuation

wait timeB46-5 wait timeB46-5
Gate OFF wait time Gate OFF wait time

Torque bias B46-A Torque bias B46-A
Gate output ON OFF Gate output ON OFF
Status Run Stop Status Run Deceleration Stop
6-24
c) S-pattern deceleration stop

When the RUN command from the controller turns OFF, the motor decelerates at the LCL
acceleration rate (B48-2) and Jerk (B48-3) setting. When the detected speed reaches the zero
speed judgment level (C24-8), brake open enable (MBRK) turns OFF, the torque bias is attenuated,
and then the gate is shut off. Linear ramp is applied if the Jerk setting (B48-3) is set to the
maximum value 1.500.
Motor speed Motor speed
Zero speed level Zero speed level
Time Time
RUN command RUN command ON OFF

ON OFF
Brake engage wait Brake engage wait

timeB46-4 timeB46-4
Brake open enable Brake open enable

MBRK ON OFF
MBRK ON OFF
Torque bias attenuation Torque bias attenuation

wait timeB46-5 wait timeB46-5
Gate OFF wait time Torque bias

Torque bias B46-A
Gate OFF wait time

B46-A
Gate output ON OFF
Gate output ON OFF

Status Run Stop
Status Run Deceleration Stop
6-25
c) Zero speed judgment stop

Regardless of the RUN command from the controller, when the command speed and detected
speed reach the zero speed judgment level (C24-8), brake open enable (MBRK) turns OFF, the
torque bias is attenuated, and then the gate is shut off.
Motor speed
Zero speed level
Time
The operation is not affected

even if RUN is turned OFF
during brake close to torque
bias attenuation.
RUN command ON
Brake engage wait

timeB46-4
Brake open enable

MBRK ON OFF
Torque bias attenuation

wait timeB46-5
Torque bias
Gate OFF wait time

B46-A
Gate output ON OFF
Status Run Stop
(2) Emergency stop (EMS) mode (C00-4)

Set the stopping method for the emergency stop.
= 1: Coast to stop without a fault output
= 2: Coast to stop with a fault output
= 3: Ramp down to stop
(3) Control source switchover method (J1) (C00-5)

Set whether to validate the remote auxiliary operation sequence for the local operation mode.
= 1: Disables = 2: Enables
6-26
(4) Control source switchover method (J2) (C00-6)

Select the No. of auxiliary operation sequence input points when the COP command is ON.
= 1: Terminal block input
= 2: Serial input
FWD
Other input Panel
functions
REV
BRAKE Local (LCL)
RESET
AFS1 COP
AFS2 F RUN Remote (RMT)
Terminal
Internal command
AFS3 block R RUN OFF
S0
S1 F RUN
S2 Serial ON
R RUN
S3
SE J1)C00-5
MBRK_ans COP
1 : Not used together
S5 Terminal Other input (J2)C00-6
block OFF
S6 functions
S7 1 : Terminal 2 : Used together
EXC ON
Local (LCL)
ACR
PCTL Serial Other input 2 : Serial
FPOS_CMD functions Remote (RMT)
UVT-MSK
6.2.14 RUN delay timer (C20-3)

C20 Setting interlock
3 RUN delay timer sec 0.00 10.00 0.00
The motor will be delayed from the run command (RUN X) by the time set in C20-3.
ON
[ F RUN ] RUN X
[ R RUN ] RUN Y RUN X
ON (delay timer) ON
< C20-3 > RUN Y
tDLY
C20-3
This is used for synchronization with peripheral machines such as mechanical brakes. This is used in a
system where emergency stop (EMS) is canceled simultaneously with or after then RUN command (RUN
X). The run delay timer will not function in the jogging or local modes.
Set this parameter to 0 when not using the function.
If the interlock is active, the FWD and REV LEDs on the operation panel will flicker.
6-27
6.3 Motor circuit constant
6.3.1 PM motor (B03)

B03 Motor circuit constant (PM)
PM motor winding
0 R1 resistance m 0.001 9.999 1.000
(Mantissa section)
PM motor winding
1 R1 resistance -1. 4. 0.
(Exponent section)
PM motor d axis inductance
2 Ld mH 0.001 9.999 1.000
(Mantissa section)
PM motor q axis inductance
3 Lq mH 0.001 9.999 1.000
(Mantissa section)
PM motor inductance
4 Ld, Lq -1. 4. 0.
(Exponent section)
The resistance and inductance elements are set as the PM motor circuit constants.
(1) Set the value of one phase converted into a 3-phase & Y connection.
(2) For the inductance element, set the value including the leakage inductance.
(3) If the wiring path is long, add the wiring path resistance and inductance elements to the motor
constant.
In the following wiring example, the set constants are calculated with the following expressions.
(B03-0, 1) = R LINE + R1
(B03-2, 4) = l LINE + l a + Md
(B03-3, 4) = l LINE + l a + Mq
Wiring path
impedance Motor Motor leakage PM motor
resistance inductance
VT240EL
R LINE l LINE R1 la
U phase
V phase
Md N Mq
S N
S
W phase
Input method
(B03-0, 1)
0
R1 = 1.000 10 [m]
B03-0 B03-1
(B03-2, 3, 4)
Ld or Lq = 1.000 100 [mH]
B03-2 or 3 B03-4
6-28
6.3.2 IM (B02)

B02 Motor circuit constant
Primary resistance Inverter
0 R1 m 0.010 9.999
(IM: Mantissa section) rating
Primary resistance Inverter
1 R1 -3. 4.
(IM: Exponent section) rating
Secondary resistance
2 R2 m 0.010 9.999 1.000
(IM : Mantissa section)
Secondary resistance
3 R2 -3. 4. 0.
(IM: Exponent section)
Leakage inductance
4 L mH 0.100 9.999 1.000
(IM: Mantissa section)
Leakage inductance
5 L -3. 4. 0.
Excitation inductance
6 M mH 0.100 9.999 1.000
Excitation inductance
7 M -3. 4. 0.
Iron loss resistance
8 Rm mH 0.100 9.999 1.000
Iron loss resistance
9 Rm -3. 5. 0.
Set the circuit constants for the T-1 type equivalence circuit
(1) Set the circuit constant as a one-phase value converted into a 3-phase Y connection.
(2) If the wiring path is long, add the wiring path resistance and inductance elements to the motor
constant.
The IM equivalence circuit : T type and T-I type equivalence circuit, and the T type equivalence circuit
T-I type equivalence circuit conversion expression is shown below.
R1 1 2 R1 L
Rm
R2/S V1 M R2/S
V1
M
T type equivalence circuit T-I type equivalence circuit
Conversion expression
M = M2/(2 + M)
2
L = (1 + M) M /(2 + M)
2
R2 = (M/(2 + M)) R2
Of these parameters, B02-0 to B02-7 can be automatically adjusted with automatic tuning. Refer to
Chapter 8 for details on automatic tuning.
If automatic tuning is not possible, and for the iron loss resistance: B02-8, 9, refer to the above diagram
and expression, and the motor design value, and set the appropriate value.
6-29
6.4 Various speed settings
6.4.1 Multi-speed command (B10, B11, B48, B49)
(1) Setting parameters

8 Speed setting program 0 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
9 Speed setting program 1 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
A Speed setting program 2 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
B Speed setting program 3 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
C Speed setting program 4 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
D Speed setting program 5 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
E Speed setting program 6 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
F Speed setting program 7 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
0 Acceleration setting program 0 m/s2 0.001 1.500 0.100
2
2 Acceleration setting program 2 m/s 0.001 1.500 0.100
2
2
3
8 Jerk setting program 0 m/s 0.001 1.500 0.200
9 Jerk setting program 1 m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
3
A Jerk setting program 2 m/s 0.001 1.500 0.200
B Jerk setting program 3 m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
C Jerk setting program 4 m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
3
D Jerk setting program 5 m/s 0.001 1.500 0.200
E Jerk setting program 6 m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
3
F Jerk setting program 7 m/s 0.001 1.500 0.200
Set the elevator car's ultimate speed with the speed setting, and set the acceleration and jerk to reach
that set speed. This allows the elevator speed to be set to provide a comfortable ride. The speed is set
with B48-8 to F, the acceleration with B49-0 to 7, and the jerk with B49-8 to F.
Each setting can be selected with the sequence inputs S0 to SE.
Note) 1) The maximum speed setting value is B48-0 :Car speed at maximum speed setting.
2) The maximum acceleration value is 10-fold the B48-0:Car speed at maximum speed setting.
3) If the jerk is set to the maximum value (1.500), jerk will be disabled.
6-30
Speed, acceleration and jerk

The speed, acceleration and jerk have a relation as shown below. The jerk (m/s3) sets the "car
acceleration, which varies in one second", and the acceleration (m/s2) sets the "car speed which
varies in one second". With the VT240EL, the [JERK_IN] and [JERK_OUT] sequence is output while
the jerk is being output.
JERK_IN : ON during jerk output interval after speed change starts
JERK_OUT : ON during jerk output interval when speed is reached
Jerk
Jerk setting
Time
Jerk setting
Acceleration
speed
Acceleration setting
Jerk setting
Time
Speed 1s
Speed setting
Acceleration Car speed setting at

setting maximum speed : B48-0
1s
Time
Sequence output
JERK_IN
Time
Sequence output
JERK_OUT
Time
(2) Setting the S-shape ramp pass function

To run with a speed shape which has no S-shape characteristics with jerk, set the jerk setting
parameters (B49-8 to F) to the maximum value (1.500). This will enable linear ramp operation without
an S-shape ramp with jerk. (Jerk will be handled as infinite.)
The S-shape ramp path function set with B10-6 can also be used at the same time.

B10 Acceleration/deceleration time setting
S-shape ramp pass function
6 1. 3. 1.
setting
Acceleration
= 1: No S-shape ramp pass
Acceleration speed setting
= 2: S-shape ramp passed when program setting is 0
Time
= 3: S-shape ramp passed when RUN command is OFF
Acceleration speed
setting
Speed
When jerk is set to Speed setting
maximum value, a pattern
with no S-shape Time
characteristics will be used.
6-31
(3) Selection mode setting

B11 Selection mode setting
8 Selection mode setting 1. 3. 1.
Select the selection mode for the program setting (B48-8 to F, B49-0 to 7, B49-8 to F).
= 1: Binary mode
= 2: Direct select mode
= 3: Direct select mode 2 (Software version NN and higher)
Sequence command combinations

Refer to the following table for the methods of selecting the program No. in each mode.
For binary mode (B11-8 = 1) For direct select mode (B11-8 = 2) For direct select mode 2 (B11-8 = 3)
Sequence command Program Sequence command Sequence command
Program No. Program No.
SE S3 S2 S1 S0 No. SE S3 S2 S1 S0 SE S3 S2 S1 S0
OFF OFF OFF 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Previous values OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2
OFF OFF ON 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0
OFF ON OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF Previous values
OFF ON ON 3 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF Previous values
* *
ON OFF OFF 4 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 3 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Previous values
ON OFF ON 5 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Previous values ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 3
ON ON OFF 6 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 4 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 4
ON ON ON 7 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 5
* S3 and SE are not used. ON OFF ON OFF OFF 6 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 6
ON ON OFF OFF OFF 7 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 7
* When S0 to S3 are all OFF, or when two or
more are ON between S0 and S3, the previous
values will be held. If there are no previous
values because the power has been turned
ON, etc., "0" will be set.
Relation of program No. and sequence command in each mode

Speed setting Zero speed High speed 1 High speed 2 Creep speed Zero speed
Program No. 0 1 5 2 0
S0
Binary mode S1
S2
S0
S1
S2
Direct select
mode
S3
SE
* In the direct select mode, the time for S0 to S3 to turn ON can be set randomly.
These must be turned OFF before the next speed setting is input.
When program 4 to 7 is set, SE must be turned ON before S0 to S3 are turned ON.
6-32
(4) Examples of operation patterns

A typical speed setting pattern is shown below.
The data for the same program No. as the selected speed is used for the acceleration and jerk
settings.
Speed setting Zero speed High speed Creep speed Zero speed
Program selection S0 to SE 0 1 2 0
(For binary mode)
Speed
command Speed Ramp setting 2
setting 1 Acceleration :
B48-9 setting B49-2 setting
Jerk : B49-A setting
Ramp setting 1
Acceleration :
Speed setting 2
B49-1 setting
B48-A setting
Jerk : B49-9 setting
Time
Ramp setting 0
Speed setting 0
Acceleration :
B48-8 setting
B49-0 setting
Jerk : B49-8 setting
Changing the speed setting

If the program speed setting is changed during acceleration or deceleration, the deceleration jerk
operation will start from that point and the deceleration will continue to the next set speed as shown
below.
Speed Speed setting changeover
during acceleration
Program (1) Program (2)
Speed setting (1)
Speed setting (2)

Time
JERK_IN JERK_OUT
Output Output
6-33
6.4.2 Analog commands (B4C-2)
When running with the external analog speed commands, the inverter's internal acceleration and jerk
settings are not used. The VT240EL's speed control cycle is 2ms. If the analog speed command signal is
digitally changed and the update cycle is slower than 2ms, the update cycle must be set.
In all other cases, such as when the cycle is faster than 2ms, set the default value "2ms".

B4C ASR extended
Speed command update
2 ms 2. 100. 2.
cycle
* This parameter is used only when the speed command is input with analog signals.
* If the update cycle is an odd value, round up the value.
Refer to "6.1.3 Analog inputs" for details on the analog input program settings.
6.4.3 Panel (B48)

1 Speed setting (during LCL) m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100
Acceleration setting 2
2 m/s 0.001 1.500 0.100
(during LCL)
3
3 Jerk setting (during LCL) m/s 0.001 1.500 0.200
Set the speed, acceleration and jerk used when operating with the operation panel.
The speed setting can be changed during operation. (Press the key after changing the value to apply
LCL
SET
the changes.)
Note) 1) The maximum speed setting value is B48-0 : Car speed at maximum speed setting.
2) The maximum acceleration is 10-fold the B48-0 : Car speed at maximum speed setting.
4) From software version II, if the stop method for RUN operation is S-pattern deceleration stop
(C00-1=3), jerk will be set.
6-34
6.4.4 ASR response changeover function (B4A)

0 ASR response 1 rad/s 1.0 100.0 10.0
Integral time constant
4 % 20. 500. 100.
compensation coefficient 1
5 % 20. 500. 100.
6 % 20. 500. 100.
7 Changeover speed 1 m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.050
9 Changeover time 1 sec 0.000 3.000 0.500
A Changeover time 2 sec 0.000 3.000 0.500
The speed response can be changed according to the speed command.

The "car vibration state" may differ according to the speed. The control response can be set individually for
starting, for high-speeds, and stopping, allowing the ride comfort to be finely adjusted.
Speed
command
Changeover time 1
(B4A-7) Changeover time 2
(B4A-8)
Response and Response 1 (B4A-0)

compensation Compensation coefficient 1
coefficient Response 2 (B4A-1) (B4A-4)
Compensation coefficient 2 (B4A-5)
Response 1 (B4A-0) Changeover time 1 Changeover time 2 Response 3 (B4A-2)

Compensation coefficient 1 (B4A-9) (B4A-A) Compensation coefficient 3
(B4A-4) (B4A-6)
(1) ASR response 1 (B4A-0)

This response is used in the interval for the speed to reach [changeover speed 1 (B4A-7)] after
starting.

This response is used in the interval after the speed command exceeds [changeover speed 1 (B4A-7)]
and then decelerates to [changeover speed 2 (B4A-8)].

This response is used if the speed is less than the [changeover speed 2 (B4A-8)] setting value during
deceleration.
6-35
(4) Integral time constant compensation coefficient 1 (B4A-3)

This response is used in the interval for the speed to reach [changeover speed 1 (B4A-7)] after
starting.

This response is used in the interval after the speed command exceeds [changeover speed 1 (B4A-7)]
and then decelerates to [changeover speed 2 (B4A-8)].

This response is used if the speed is less than the [changeover speed 2 (B4A-8)] setting value during
deceleration.
(7) Changeover speed 1 (B4A-7)

Set the speed to change from ASR response 1 to ASR response 2.
(8) Changeover speed 2 (B4A-8)

Set the speed to change from ASR response 2 to ASR response 3.
(9) Changeover time 1 (B4A-9)

Set the time to change "from ASR response 1 to ASR response 2" and "from integral time
compensation coefficient 1 to integral time compensation coefficient 2".
(10) Changeover time 2 (B4A-A)

Set the time to change "from ASR response 2 to ASR response 3" and "from integral time
compensation coefficient 2 to integral time compensation coefficient 3".
Usage of example
If the motor does not vibrate when the speed is somewhat high, but vibrates shortly after starting",
then
1) Set the "speed where vibration is eliminated" in changeover speed 1 (B4A-7), and
2) Increase the ASR response 1 (B4A-0) setting in increments of [1] or [2] from the default value.
Point
* Vibration may also occur if the set value is too high. If the vibration "does not stop" or "increases"
when the setting value is increased, try lowering the setting value.
* The integral time constant compensation coefficient 1 (B4A-03) has the same effect as ASR
response 1, but the "integral time constant compensation coefficient' should be adjusted when
the desired effect is not attained by adjusting the ASR response.
The control response will improve when the "integral time constant compensation coefficient"
value is decreased. (Note that this is the opposite of the ASR response.)
Vibration may occur if this coefficient is too small.
* It may be possible to reduce vibration during high-speed operation by increasing the integral time
constant compensation coefficient.
6-36
6.4.5 Torque compensation (B4C)

B4C ASR extended
Acceleration amount torque
0 % 0.0 200.0 80.0
compensation gain
1 compensation LFP time ms 0. 1000. 5.
constant
3 ASR delay compensation 1 % 0.0 100.0 0.0
ASR delay compensation
7 ms 0. 1000. 20.
LPF time constant
(1) Acceleration amount torque compensation gain

Set the gain for the acceleration amount torque compensation.
(2) Acceleration amount torque compensation LFP time constant

Set the LFP time constant for the acceleration amount torque compensation.
(3) ASR delay compensation 1

Set the ASR delay compensation gain for acceleration JERK_IN.

Set the ASR delay compensation gain for acceleration JERK_OUT.

Set the ASR delay compensation gain for deceleration JERK_IN.

Set the ASR delay compensation gain for deceleration JERK_OUT.
(7) ASR delay compensation LPF time constant

Set the LPF time constant for ASR delay compensation.
6-37
6.5 Torque bias function
6.5.1 With load sensor (B16, B46)
This function is used to apply torque bias from the start of operation based on the load feedback prior to
operation. This prevents rotation (drop) due caused by the load that results when releasing the elevator
brake. Either analog or digital load feedback can be selected.
The automatic torque bias control calculates the torque bias value from the load feedback (digital/analog).
The torque bias value is fixed when operation is started. The torque bias does not vary during operation,
and is revised gradually during stoppage. The block diagram is shown below.
Select the B16 setting

with the S6 to S7 multi-step
S7 S6 S5 Digital setting Digital
OFF OFF OFF 0 Select the mode
OFF OFF ON 1 with B16-0
OFF ON OFF 2
OFF ON ON 3 B16-0
OFF
ON * * 4
C05-0 * : Status is irrelevant Forward
C05-1 torque
C05-2 =0 bias
Digital bias 0 (B16-1) =0
=1 =2 + Torque
Digital bias 1 (B16-2) -1
=2 =1 bias
Program Digital bias 2 (B16-3) =1 + command
setting
Digital bias 3 (B16-4) =3
Digital bias 4 (B16-5) =4 =2

B16-6
Set the bias

Analog Torque bias amount
direction with B16-6
B16-B Torque bias

amount for full load
Torque bias
C07-A amount for
balanced load Analog Set the bias amount
C12
input for the analog mode
value
(load)
B16-A
Program
setting Torque bias B16-7 B16-8 B16-9
amount for no load
6-38
(1) Automatic torque bias selection

B16 Automatic torque bias selection
Automatic torque bias
0 0. 2. 0.
selection
Set the automatic torque bias function

=0 : Not used
=1 : Digital
=2 : Analog
* From software version II, the setting value is 0.
(2) Digital torque bias

1 Digital bias setting 0 % -150.0 150.0 -100.0
2 Digital bias setting 1 % -150.0 150.0 -50.0
3 Digital bias setting 2 % -150.0 150.0 0.0
When the load feedback is obtained as a digital value using a limit switch, etc., use the digital torque
bias.
Set the torque bias value in B16-1 to 5 (digital torque bias 0 to 4) as a ratio in respect to the rated
torque. Select the torque bias value with a digital input using sequence input S5 to S7.
The S5 to S7 signal input terminals are fixed with C06-A to C.
(3) Bias direction selection

6 Bias direction selection 1. 2. 1.
The torque bias direction can be selected.

If the motor forward runs when the elevator is rising, the motor is in "forward run".
=1 : Clockwise drive direction
=2 : Counterclockwise drive direction
6-39
(4) Analog torque bias

7 Analog bias voltage 0 % -100.0 100.0 0.0
A Output bias torque 0 % -150.0 150.0 -100.0
B Output bias torque 2 % -150.0 150.0 100.0
When the load feedback is obtained as an analog value, use the analog torque bias.
B16-7 to 9 (analog bias voltage) is set as a ratio in respect to the full scale of the input terminal
being used.
Analog bias voltage 0, output bias torque 0 : Lower limit value of input voltage and bias
torque at that point
Analog bias voltage 1 : Input voltage at balance point
Analog bias voltage 2, output bias torque 2 : Upper limit value of input voltage and bias
torque at that point
An analog programmable input setting is required. Set the analog input terminals to be used with
C07-A and C12-0 to C12-3.
(5) Torque bias current rising edge/falling edge time

B46 External brake control
Torque bias current rising
1 sec 0.00 0.50 0.20
edge/falling edge time
If the motor current is suddenly changed, an abnormal noise could be generated. This function sets
the rising edge/falling edge time of the torque bias current command to suppress this. Set the time
that the torque current reaches at 100%.
Run command
Run answer
(RUN) Turn the run
Torque bias rising edge time command OFF after
(B46-1) the run answer has
Torque bias turned OFF.
command amount

wait time (B46-5)
Brake release wait

Brake engage wait time (B46-4)
time (B46-2)
Brake open
command (MBRK)
Acceleration start
wait time (B46-3)
Speed command Zero speed
6-40
(6) Forward torque bias

B16 Automatic torque bias
C Forward torque bias 1 % -50.0 50.0 0.0
D Forward torque bias 2 % -50.0 50.0 0.0
This function applies a torque bias according to the operation direction, separately from the digital
torque bias and analog torque bias.
Forward run (F RUN): The torque is biased by the amount of the forward torque bias 1 (B16-C).
If a positive value is set, the torque is biased in the roll forward direction (direction which
accelerates in operation direction).
Reverse run (R RUN): The torque is biased by the amount of the forward torque bias 2 (B16-D).
If a negative value is set, the torque is biased in the roll forward direction (direction which
accelerates in operation direction).
6.5.2 Start lock control (Anti roll back function) (B4B)
CAUTION
This function assists the elevator system to eliminate the roll back (or roll forward) amount even
when a load detector (load sensor) is not used.
This function does not eliminate the need for a load detector required for the elevator system.
Even when using this function, the load detector required for the elevator system must be used.
When using this function, provide measures against noise in the pulse signal cable from the
encoder. Always use a shielded twisted pair cable when using a line drive output or analog
output encoder.
The VT240EL start lock control is a function that eliminates the feel of roll back or roll forward without using
the load capacity information received from the elevators load detector, which the conventional gearless
system was a required information.
The VT240EL start lock control is a function in which the roll back/forward cannot be felt without using the
load capacity information received from the elevators load detector conventionally required from gearless
system.
The elevator can be used without roll back or roll forward even when the elevator has been installed
without sufficient adjusting of the counterweight or the load detector. When using this function, install the
optional speed detect PCB 5 (V24-DN5) or 8 (V24-DN8) and an analog output encoder which satisfies the
following specifications.
Item Specifications
Supply voltage, current 5VDC0.25V, 250mA or less
Signal A, B sine wave voltage signal 1Vpp (incremental signal)
Zero point signal 0.5Vpp (reference mark signal)
C, D sine wave voltage signal 1Vpp (absolute signal)
Compatible encoder Heidenhein : ERN1387
Tamagawa Seiki : TS6213N555
* The parameter for the encoder selection (C51-0) should be set to :

C51-0=6 : with pole position estimation function (Not using the CD-phase signal)
C51-0=7 : without pole position estimation function (Using the CD-phase signal)
If a starting shock is allowable, a square-wave pulse output encoder can be used, but the number of
encoder pulses must always be 8192P/R or more.
This function is valid to control PM motors only.
6-41
(1) Outline of control

The load sensor-less control is a function which suppresses the roll back and roll forward in sequence
with the external brake control using the highly accurate phase information received from the analog
output encoder. The basic operation is shown below. (When not using brake answer MBRK_ans)

Time
Run command
(RUN)
B46-2
Brake release
command (MBRK) Allowable
Actual brake range
release
B46-3
Acceleration
(balanced load)
B4B-3
Acceleration
(normal)
Ensure approx.
Speed command 100ms
(normal)
Phase angle
(normal)
B4B-4
The load sensor-less control starts operation after the Run command has been input and the brake
release wait time (B46-2) has elapsed. There are two cases where the load sensor-less control will
end and acceleration will start.
(a) When the brakes have been released, roll back or roll forward occur, and the time that the motor
has rotated more than the pulses set in the start lock starting pulse (B4B-4) (Point B above) has
exceeded the start lock control timer (B4B-3) setting time (Point C above).
(b) If the motor does not rotate even when the brakes are released, such as with a balanced load, and
the load sensor-less control does not output a torque, and the acceleration start wait time (B46-3)
setting time is exceeded (Point D above).
If the brakes are controlled with a source other than the inverter, adjust the brake release wait time
(B46-2) so that actual brake release timing is within the (acceleration wait time: B46-3) - (start lock
control timer: B4B-3) -100ms range (interval between point A and Point B above) after the brake
release command (MBRK) ON timing (Point A above). If the brakes are released before Point A or the
brakes are released after Point B, the load sensor-less control will not function.
(2) Adjusting the load sensor-less control

a) Adjust the start lock gain (B4B-0). Increase to 50 in increments of 10.
If vibration occurs, set the gain to half the gain at that point.
Adjust the following items if vibration occurs.
It may be possible to suppress the vibration by increasing the ASR Kp compensation gain
(B4B-1) and ACR Kp compensation gain (B4B-2). Increase in increments of 0.5. If the vibration
does not stop, set the default value.
It may be possible to suppress the vibration by increasing the differential compensation gain
(B4B-9). Increase in increments of 0.010. If the vibration does not stop, set the default value or
0.000.
If the vibration does not stop with the above measures, check the encoder mounting state. If the
encoder mounting section is susceptible to vibration, the encoder may vibrate and the gain may
not increase.
b) Adjust the shock-less gain (B4B-A). Increase in increments of 1 until the starting shock is
eliminated. Usually the starting shock will stop at approx. 2. If vibration or noise is generated, set
the gain to half the gain at that point.
6-42
(3) Car movement at start lock error detection judgment distance (C27-7)
During start lock control, if the car moves more than the car movement distance set with C27-7: Car
movement at start lock error detection judgment distance, the state is judged as an error and the
operation stops with a fault.
A fault is not output when 0 is set.

B4B Start lock control (Anti-roll back function)
0 Start lock gain 0. 200. 0.
1 ASR Kp compensation gain 0.1 10.0 1.0
2 ACR Kp compensation gain 0.1 10.0 1.0
3 Start lock control timer ms 20. 1000. 150.
4 Start lock starting pulse pulse 0.01 1.00 0.05
5 Gain changeover level 0.01 10.00 1.00
6 Balance load gain 0. 100. 100.
7 Soft start gain 0. 2000. 0.
8 Soft start time constant ms 0.25 100.00 2.00
Differential compensation
9 0.000 0.200 0.050
gain
A Shock-less gain 0. 100. 0.
C27 Elevator fault setting
Cage moving distance
7 mm 0. 20. 20.
detected during start lock
(4) Adjustment when using square-wave pulse output encoder
4-1) Start lock gain (B4B-0)

This parameter adjusts the roll back rate when using the start lock function.
This function will not work when the default value (0) is set.
To use this function, set the acceleration start wait time (B46-3) to 0.50 or more.
Set this parameter to 1 and confirm that roll back does not occur at the full load or no load state. If
roll back occurs, increase the setting value in increments of 1, and adjust so that roll back does not
occur in each state.
4-2) ASR Kp compensation gain (B4B-1)

When this gain is increased, the roll back amount will decrease. However, if this value is too large, a
large noise may be heard from the motor when the elevator starts. Usually, this should be set in the
range of 0.5 to 4.0.
4-3) ACR Kp compensation gain (B4B-2)

When this gain is increased, the shock when the elevator starts can be reduced. However, if this value
is too large, a large noise may be heard from the motor when the elevator starts. Usually, this should
be set in the range of 1.0 to 4.0.
4-4) Start lock control timer (B4B-3)

If start lock control is applied for a long time, vibration may occur in the interval after motor brake
release and acceleration start. This parameter suppresses this vibration. Usually, this should be
adjusted in the range of 30ms to 200ms.
6-43
4-5) Start lock starting pulse (B4B-4)

Usually, this value does not need to be changed.
4-6) Gain changeover level (B4B-5)

Set the level to change between the start lock gain (B4B-0) which is valid during no load and full
load and the balance load gain (B4B-6) which is valid during balance load.
This is set between 30 and 100, but usually, the setting value should not be changed.
4-7) Balance load gain (B4B-6)

Check that the roll back and vibration do not occur near the balance load. If vibration occurs near the
balance load, decrease the setting value in increments of 1, and adjust so that vibration does not
occur.
4-8) Soft start gain and time constant (B4B-7, 8)

This function adjusts the ride comfort at the start. If the ride comfort is hard when starting, increase the
gain. Usually, this is set between 0 and 50. If this gain is too large, vibration may occur when starting.
Do not change the time constant from the default value.
6-44
6.6 External brake control

0 External brake selection sec 1112. 2322. 1112.
Torque bias current rising
1 sec 0.0 0.50 0.20
edge/falling edge time
2 Brake release wait time sec 0.00 2.50 0.00
3 Acceleration start wait time sec 0.00 2.50 0.00
4 Brake engage wait time sec 0.00 2.50 0.00
Torque bias attenuation wait
5 sec 0.00 3.00 0.30
time
RUN error judgment time
6 sec 0.0 25.0 5.0
when engaging brake
Brake answer error
7 sec 0.0 25.0 0.0
judgment time
Operation condition
8 sec 0.00 1.00 0.20
judgement time
9 Stop judgement time sec 0.00 0.50 0.05
A RUN-OFF wait time sec 0.00 0.50 0.00
Deceleration command fault
B sec 0.0 25.0 10.0
judgment time
Brake answer error
C % 0.0 25.0 2.0
judgment speed level
Operation selection for
D 0. 2. 0.
brake operation fault
The inverter brake can be turned ON and OFF in accordance with the inverter internal sequence. The
external brake function contains all types of waiting time settings and an interlock function.
A chart for the external brakes is shown below.
Run command
Run answer
(RUN) Turn the run
Torque bias rising edge time command OFF after
(B46-1) the run answer has
Torque bias turned OFF.
command amount

wait time (B46-5)
Brake release wait Brake engage wait time

Brake open time (B46-2) (B46-4)
command (MBRK)
Acceleration start
wait time (B46-3)
Speed command Zero speed
* This examples shows a case when the [external brake answer MRBK_ans] is not used.
6-45
(1) External brake selection (B46-0)

1 1 1 2.
f0 : Function selection
=2 : Function valid (Fixed)
f1 : IDET interlock
=1 : OFF
=2 : ON
f2 : Operation during acceleration wait time 1
=1 : Normal (multi-speed command)
=2 : Multi-speed command not updated
=3 : DC brake output
f3 : Operation during acceleration wait time 2
=1 : Frequency not output
=2 : Frequency output (for V/f)
a) f1 : (=2 : IDET interlock)

If the output current drops less than the IDET setting value of (C15-1) and when the brake release
is commanded (when MBRK turns ON), the fault I0-C will be output.
An error can be detected if an excitation current is not flowing during IM drive.
b) f2 : (=2 : Multi-speed command not updated)

The multi-speed command's update cycle is set to "after acceleration start wait time has elapsed"
instead of "simultaneous with command change".
Run command
Run answer
(RUN)
Torque bias rising edge time
(B46-1)
Torque bias
command amount
Brake release wait
time (B46-2)
Brake open
command (MBRK)
Acceleration start
wait time (B46-3)
Speed command
Multi-speed
command
X Y
Internal setting X Y
The multi-speed setting changes are

validated after the acceleration start wait
time has elapsed.
6-46
c) f2 : (=3 : DC brake)
The DC brake function is validated from the run command to speed output.
Run command
Run answer
(RUN)
(B46-1)
Torque bias
command amount
Brake release wait
time (B46-2)
Brake open
command (MBRK)
Acceleration start
wait time (B46-3)
Speed command
DC brake
d) f3 : (=2 : Frequency output (for V/f))

The frequency is output before the brakes are released.
Run command
Run answer
(RUN)
(B46-1)
Torque bias
command amount
Brake release wait
time (B46-2)
Brake open
command (MBRK)
Acceleration start
wait time (B46-3)
Speed command
Frequency is output
(2) Torque bias current rising edge/falling edge time (B46-1)

This function sets the torque current command's rising edge/falling edge time.
Set the time that the torque current changes 100%.
(3) Brake release wait time (B46-2)

Set the time to wait to release the brakes after the torque bias is established.
Use this to release the brakes while considering the IM excitation operation time.
(4) Acceleration start wait time (B46-3)

Set the time to wait from brake open to start of acceleration.
This parameter takes the time from brake excitation to actual opening into consideration.
When using the brake answer (MBRK_ans) signal, set [0.00].
6-47
(5) Brake engage wait time (B46-4)

Set the time from brake engage command output (MBRK: ON OFF) after zero speed (ZSP) has
turned ON while stopping.
(6) Torque bias attenuation wait time (B46-5)

Set the time to wait before starting torque bias current attenuation after the brake engage command is
output (MBRK: ON OFF).
Even if the brake engage command is output, there may be a delay before the brakes actually
engage.
When not using the brake answer (MBRK_ans) signal, do not [0.00].
DANGER
If [0.00] is set when not using the brake answer (MBRK_ans) signal, the car could drop when
stopping.
(7) RUN error judgment time when engaging brake (B46-6)

If the run command from the controller is [ON] for longer than this set time after the brakes are
engaged, it will be judged that an error has occurred, and a fault will be output [IO-D: RUN OFF delay
error].
This function will not activate when [0.00] is set.
Run command
Run answer
(RUN) A fault will occur if
Torque bias rising edge time this time is longer
(B46-1) than the set value.
Torque bias
command amount

wait time (B46-5)
Brake engage wait time

Brake open (B46-4)
command (MBRK)
Speed command
Zero speed
6-48
(8) Brake answer error judgment time (B46-7)

If the brake command (MBRK) and brake answer signal (MBRK_ans) do not match for longer than
this set time, the fault [IO-E: mechanical brake answer error] will occur.
Run command
Run answer
(RUN)
(B46-1)
Torque bias
command amount
Brake release wait Brake engage wait time Torque bias attenuation
time (B46-2) (B46-4) wait time (B46-5)
Brake open
command (MBRK)
Brake answer
(MBRK_ans)
Acceleration start
wait time (B46-3) Brake operation delay time
If the delay time is longer than
the set value, this function will
Zero
determine that there is a fault.
Speed command speed
(9) Operation condition judgement time (B46-8)

This is the time taken for the built-in sequence of the external brake control to judge whether the
normal operation has started, i.e., acceleration has finished. It is not necessary to change this
parameter.
(10) Stop judgement time (B46-9)

This is the time taken for the built-in sequence of the external brake control to judge whether the brake
engage wait time has started, i.e., deceleration has finished. It is not necessary to change this
parameter.
(11) RUN-OFF wait time (B46-A)

This parameter sets the time to wait for the RUN state to turn OFF after the torque command reaches
0 at stopping.
(12) Deceleration command fault judgment time (B46-B)

If the speed command after starting continues at a state lower than the zero speed level for longer
than this setting value, a fault is output [IO-D: RUN OFF delay error]. The speed command can be
judged as an error. This function will not activate when [0.0] is set.
(13) Brake answer error judgment speed level (B46-C)

When using brake answer signal 2 (MBRK_ans2), the brake answer signals error state is judged
during operation only at speeds higher than this setting value. Set a percentage in respect to the
maximum speed (B48-0) setting value.
6-49
(14) Operation selection for brake operation fault (B46-D)

Select the operation executed at an error when using brake answer signal 2 (MBRK_ans2).
=0: Stop with a fault if both MBRK_ans and MBRK_ans2 are faulty during operation. If only one is
faulty, continue operation, and output a fault after stopping operation.
=1: If a fault occurs during operation, output the minor fault ALM. Output a fault after operation stops.
=2: If a fault occurs in either MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2 during operation, output a fault and stop.
* The fault output with any selection is [IO-E: mechanical brake answer error] will occur.
A typical external brake chart is shown below.

a) When not using brake answer
a-1) When not using start lock control
RUN command input ON
Gate OFF wait time

Torque bias rising time B46-1 B46-A
Even if the RUN command is output
before this time, the gate output will
continue.
Torque bias
Brake release wait time

B46-2
Torque attenuation wait
MBRK time B46-5
Open
(Brake open enable)

B46-4
Acceleration start Speed detection

wait time B46-3
Speed command
Zero speed (ZSP)
Stop judgment time B46-9

Operation judgment time
B46-8
6-50
a-2) When using start lock control
Gate OFF wait time

Torque bias rising time B46-1 B46-A
continue.
Torque bias
Torque bias and start lock control

can be used together
When not using torque bias and the torque bias

setting value is 0, this status interval does not
take place (Actual time is 2ms)

Torque attenuation wait
B46-2
time B46-5
MBRK Open
(Brake open enable)

The start lock control begins in this interval after
B46-4
the actual brakes are released.
(Control does not start if there is no torque.)
Time in this interval:
When start lock control operation is valid: B4B-3
When start lock control operation is invalid: B46-3
Zero speed (ZSP)
Operation judgment time Stop judgment time B46-9

B46-8
6-51
a-3) When using magnetic pole estimation operation

estimation complete
OFF ON
FPOS
Estimating magnetic pole ON OFF

position
FPOS_EX
Torque bias ramp time B46-1
Torque bias command value

B46-2
MBRK Torque attenuation wait

Open time B46-5
(Brake open enable)
Brake engage wait time B46-4
Acceleration start wait time

B46-3
Speed
Zero speed (ZSP
Magnetic pole position estimation takes place at the first RUN command after the power is turned ON
and at the RUN command after a fault occurs.
Magnetic pole position estimation completes FPOS turns ON when the magnetic pole position
estimation ends normally.
Estimating magnetic pole position FPOS_EX turns ON only during magnetic pole position estimation.
6-52
b) When using only 1 contact (MBRK_ans) for brake answer
Torque bias rising time B46-1

Gate OFF wait time
B46-A
Torque bias command value continue.

B46-2 Torque attenuation wait time
B46-5
MBRK
(Brake open enable) Open

MBRK_ans B46-4
(Mechanical brake answer) Open
Acceleration start wait

time B46-3 Speed detection
Speed command
Zero speed (ZSP)
Operation judgment time Stop judgment time B46-9

B46-8
When using only one brake contact, it enables MBRK_ans (C04-E), and disables MBRK-ans2
(C06-E=0).
6-53
c) When using both brake contacts (MBRK_ans and MBRK_ans2)
Gate OFF wait time

Torque bias rising time B46-1
B46-A
continue.
Torque bias command value
Brake release wait time Brake engage wait time Torque attenuation wait time
B46-2 B46-5 B46-5
MBRK
(Brake open enable) Open
MBRK_ans
Open
(Mechanical brake answer)
Torque is attenuated after B46-5 using

MBRK_ans2 the time of the contact which turned
Open OFF last as a reference.
(Mechanical brake answer)
Acceleration starts after B46-3 using

the time of the contact which turned
OFF last as a reference. Speed detection
Acceleration start wait
time B46-3
Speed command
Zero speed (ZSP)
Stop judgment time B46-9

Operation judgment time
B46-8
6-54
d) Brake answer (MBRK_ans and MBRK_ans2) error operation

d-1) When both MBRK_ans and MBRK_ans2 turn OFF during operation
RUN command
Speed command
Note that a fault is not output if
Speed detection the speed at the error occurrence
is lower than B46-C.
B46-C: Default value 2%
Gate output
Brake answer error judgment

time B46-7 The motor stops with a fault if both MBKR_ans and
MBRK_ans2 (individually) pass the error judgment
time. (Does not follow B46-D setting.)
MBRK_ans
MBRK_ans2
FLT
6-55
d-2) When MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2 turns OFF during operation

1) If answer signal is recovered within error judgment time No error
RUN command
Speed command
Speed detection
When B46-D=0, operation continues if the error is limited to

MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2, and FLT is output after stopping.
Gate output
Brake answer error judgment time

B46-7
If either MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2 turns OFF and is

recovered within the B-46-7 time, the state is not judged as
MBRK_ans an error.
MBRK_ans2
2) If one brake answer turns OFF Judge as error. Fault output follows B46-D setting.
RUN command
Speed command
Note that a fault is not output if
the speed at the error occurrence
Speed detection
is lower than B46-C.

Gate output

B46-7
If MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2 turns OFF and
MBRK_ans B46-7 time passes, judge as an error.
MBRK_ans2
When B46-D=2, output

FLT immediately after When B46-D=0, 1, output FLT
error judgment. immediately after gate is shut off.
FLT
When B46-D=1, output ARM after error

is judged until gate is shut off.
ALM
6-56
3) If one brake answer turns OFF and is recovered after error judgment time has passed
Judge as error. Fault output follows B46-D setting.
RUN command
Speed command Note that a fault is not output if

the speed at the error occurrence
Speed detection is lower than B46-C.

Gate output
Brake answer error judgment

time B46-7
If MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2 turns OFF and B46-7 time passes,
MBRK_ans judge as an error.
MBRK_ans2
When B46-D=2, output

FLT immediately after When B46-D=0, 1, output FLT
error judgment. immediately after gate is shut off.
FLT
When B46-D=1, output ARM after

error is judged until gate is shut off.
ALM
d-3) If MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2 turns ON while stopped
RUN command
Speed command
Speed detection
Gate output

B46-7
MBRK_ans
MBRK_ans2
FLT
If MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2 turns ON and B47-7 time

passes, judge as an error.
6-57
6.7 Output switch control

3 RUN delay timer s 0.00 10.00 0.00
Output switch error judgment
4 s 0.00 2.50 0.00
time
5 Output switch open wait time s 0.00 2.50 0.00
The switch installed between the inverter and motor can be switched with run commands from the
host controller and the inverters internal sequence. This switch answer signal (OUTMC_ans) can be
monitored to judge a close error (OMC. OF) or open error (OMC. ON) fault.
FRUN or RRUN
(Run command)
C20-5: Output switch open

wait time
OUTMC
(Output switch signal)
T1 T2
C20-4: Output MC error C20-4: Output switch error
judgment time judgment time
OUTMC_ans
(Output switch answer)
C20-3: RUN delay timer
Gate
(Internal signal)
(1) Output switch signal (OUTMC)

This signal turns ON simultaneously with the RUN command input, and turns OFF after the gate
shuts OFF and the output switch wait time (C20-5) has passed.
(2) RUN delay timer (C20-3)

The gate turns ON when this set time has passed after both the RUN command and output switch
answer (OUTMC_ans) turn ON.
If the output switch error judgment time (C20-4) is set to 0, and if the OUTMC_ans is not assigned
to the sequence input terminal, operation will take place with only the run command conditions.
(3) Output switch error judgment time (C20-4)

T1>C20-4: The output switch close error OMC.OF occurs because the OFF status is continuing
even though the output switch signal is ON.
T2>C20-4: The output switch open error OMC.ON occurs because the ON status is continuing
even though the output switch signal is OFF.
(4) Output switch open wait time (C20-5)

The output switch signal turns OFF when this set time has passed after the gate shuts OFF.
6-58
6.8 Single-phase UPS operation function

C UVT-MSK UPS operation -11. 16. 0.
When the following type of system is configured, the inverter can be run with a single-phase 400V or
200V output UPS even if an instantaneous power failure occurs. (Example: When UVT-MSK signal is
assigned to PSI2.)
MC1
Vac1
VT240EL
Motor
(C06-C=2)
RY0 PSI2
Vac2
Single-phase SW1
UPS 400/200V
MC2
Period of operation with UPS
Vac1
MC1
Vac2
MC2
SW1
* Even if the single-phase 200V is supplied to a 400V series inverter, this function closes the solenoid
contact circuit in the inverters pre-charging circuit when it is judged that the DC voltage fluctuation
range is within the specified range.
The following precautions must be observed when using this function.
The MC1 and MC2 interlock and the SW1 operation sequence must be controlled with the user's
controller.
The voltage which can be output by the inverter during UPS operation is limited, so take
measures to lower the speed command from normal operation.
6-59
6.9 Troubleshooting
6.9.1 Elevator fault (C27)

C27 Elevator fault settings
0 Motor lock judgment speed m/s 0.010 0.200 0.025
1 Motor lock judgment time sec 0.0 2.0 0.8
2 Roll back judgment distance mm 0. 250. 20.
Position deflection error
3 judgment distance when mm 1. 250. 20.
stopped
4 s 0.0 2.0 0.8
judgment time when stopped
Position deflection error fault
5 1. 2. 2.
output when stopped
6 Ready OFF level % 0.0 20.0 1.0
(1) Motor lock judgment speed (C27-0) and judgment time (C27-1)
The motor lock error is detected if the "speed level" set with [C27-0: motor lock judgment speed]
continues for the time set with [C27-1: motor lock judgment time].
The fault will not be output if [C27-1: Motor lock judgment time] is set to [0.0].
(2) Roll back judgment distance (C27-2)

The roll back error is detected if the car roll back is more than the "car movement distance" set in
[C27-2: Roll back judgment distance] when starting. The fault will not be output if [C27-2: Roll back
judgement distance] is set to [0].
(3) Position deflection error judgment distance when stopped (C27-3), judgment time (C27-4)
The position deflection error is detected when stopped as if the state exceeding the "car movement
distance" set in [C27-3: Position deflection error judgment distance when stopped] continues for the
time set with [C27-4: Position deflection error judgment time when stopped]. The fault will not be
output if [C27-4: Position deflection error judgment time when stopped] is set to [0.0].
(4) Position deflection error fault output when stopped (C27-5)

The fault output of position deflection error when stopped can be selected from [ALARM] or [Fault].
=1 : ALARM
=2 : Fault
(5) Ready OFF level (C27-6)

The inverter's READY state turns OFF if the speed is higher than this setting.
Emergency operation should be required when the car has dropped, and the run command will not be
accepted if READY is turned OFF with a fault.
By setting this value, even if a fault is detected, READY will stay ON until the set level speed is
reached. Thus, the run command and the emergency operations become possible when the car has
dropped.
From software version NN, the setting value's lower limit is 0.0. This allows the function to turn the
inverters READY state OFF according to the speed detection value to be completely invalidated. (The
lower limit with software version MM and earlier was C24-8: Zero speed level or 0.2%, whichever was
smaller.)
* C27-7: Refer to page 6-43 for details on the car movement error detection judgment distance at start
lock.
6-60
6.9.2 Speed detection error (C24)

C24 Speed detection error monitor
0 Over speed protection level % 50.0 120.0 115.0
Speed detection error
1 1. 2. 2.
detection selection
2 Speed detection error level % 1.0 50.0 10.0
Speed detection error fault
4 1. 3. 2.
output changeover
5 Speed deviation error level % 1.0 50.0 10.0
6 sec 0.1 20.0 0.2
judgment time
(1) Over speed protection level (C24-0)

The over speed protection operation level is set.
The elevator speed at B48-0: maximum speed is 100%.
(2) Speed detection error detection selection (C24-1) Deleted from software version GG
Select how to control the speed detection error.
=1 : Speed detection error not monitored
=2 : Speed detection error monitored
(3) Speed detection error level (C24-2) Deleted from software version GG
The conditions for judging the speed detection error are set.
(4) Speed detection error fault output changeover (C24-4)

Select how to control the speed deflection error and output the fault.
=1 : No error monitoring performed, no ALM output, no FLT output
=2 : Error monitoring performed, no ALM output, FLT output performed
=3 : Error monitoring performed, ALM output performed, no FLT output
(5) Speed deviation error level (C24-5)

Set the error judgment command and the deviation level for detection.
(6) Speed deviation error judgment time (C24-6)

Set the time for judging speed deviation.
6-61
6.9.3 Overload (C22)

C22 Overload
4 DBR overload % 0.0 10.0 0.0
Carrier frequency automatic
6 1. 2. 1.
reduction
7 Phase failure detection 11. 22. 11.
Motor overload reference
8 % 50. 300. 125.
current
Motor overload reference
9 s 2. 300. 10.
time
(1) DBR overload (C22-4)

The VT240EL's DBR (regenerative braking resistor) is externally connected, so set this parameter to
[0.0], and protect the DBR with an external thermal relay, etc.
(2) Carrier frequency automatic reduction (C22-6)

Select the validity of the function which automatically reduces the carrier frequency to 2kHz when the
inverter's output current exceeds the 110% of the device's rated current and the cooling fin
temperature exceeds the standard value 1, and when the cooling fin temperature exceeds the
standard value 2 regardless of the current.
=1 : Reduction valid
=2 : Reduction invalid
* The following carrier frequency automatic reduction function, which is not related to this parameter
setting, is also available.
a) If the inverter output current exceeds the systems rated current for even an instant during one
operation cycle, the carrier frequency is reduced to the reference carrier frequency.
b) If the inverter output frequency is 2.5Hz or less and the inverter output current is 90% or more of the
systems rated current, the carrier frequency will be reduced to 2kHz.
(3) Phase failure detection (C22-7)
1 1.
f0 : Input phase failure detection function selection

=1 : Function valid
=2 : Function invalid
f1 : Output phase failure detection function selection

=1 : Function valid
=2 : Function invalid
1) Input phase failure detection

When this function is valid, a fault will be output if a state in which the inverter's output current
exceeds 55% or more of the device's rating and the DC voltage's pulsation width exceeds 15% of
the rated voltage (400V system: 600V, 200V system: 300V) for approx. three seconds.
2) Output phase failure detection

When this function is valid, a fault will be output if a state in which the output current's 3-phase
average value during normal operation exceeds 30% of the motor's rated current and one of the
phases has not reached 7.5% of the motor's rated current.
If the operation frequency is 40Hz or more, a 0.3 second judgment item is required. If the
frequency is less than 40Hz, a output cycle x 12-fold judgment item is required.
(Example: If the output frequency is 5Hz, the judgment time is 0.2 second 12-fold = 2.4 seconds.)
6-62
(4) Motor overload reference current (C22-8), motor overload reference time (C22-9)
If a state in which the output current exceeds the value set in [C22-8: overload reference current] for
the time set with [C22-9: Overload reference time], the overload fault (fault code OL-3) will occur.
Set C22-8 as a ratio in respect to the motor's rated current.
6.9.4 Over-current limit (B18-0)

B18 Over-current limit
0 Over-current limit % 50. 300. 180.
Set the over-current limit level.
6.9.5 Ground fault detection (C31-1)

C31 Main circuit option selection
1 1. 2. 1.
function
Set the validity of the ground fault detection function.

When this function is valid, the output current's zero phase will be detected. If higher than the judgment
value (approx. 50% of the unit rated current), a fault will be detected.
=1 : Detection valid
=2 : Detection invalid
6.9.6 External brake fault (B46-6, 7)

RUN error judgment time
6 sec 0.0 2.50 5.0
when engaging brake
Brake answer error
7 sec 0.0 25.0 0.0
judgment time
Deceleration command fault
B sec 0.0 25.0 10.0
judgment time
Brake answer error
C % 0.0 25.0 2.0
judgment speed level
Operation selection for
D 0. 2. 0.
brake operation fault
(1) RUN error judgment time when engaging brake (B46-6)

If the run command from the controller is [ON] for longer than this set time after the brakes are
engaged, it will be judged that an error has occurred, and a fault will be output [IO-D: RUN OFF delay
error].
6-63
(2) Brake answer error judgment time (B46-7)

If the brake command (MBRK) and brake answer signal (MBRK_ans) do not match for longer than
this set time, the fault [IO-E: mechanical brake answer error] will occur.
(3) Deceleration command fault judgment time (B46-B)

If the speed command after starting continues at a state lower than the zero speed level for longer
than this setting value, a fault is output [IO-D: RUN OFF delay error]. The speed command can be
judged as an error. This function will not activate when [0.00] is set.
(4) Brake answer error judgment speed level (B46-C)

When using brake answer signal 2 (MBRK_ans2), the brake answer signals error state is judged
during operation only at speeds higher than this setting value. Set a percentage in respect to the
maximum speed (B48-0) setting value.
(5) Operation selection for brake operation fault (B46-D)

Select the operation executed at an error when using brake answer signal 2 (MBRK_ans2).
=0: Stop with a fault if both MBRK_ans and MBRK_ans2 are faulty during operation. If only one is
faulty, continue operation, and output a fault after stopping operation.
=1: If a fault occurs during operation, output the minor fault ALM. Output a fault after operation stops.
=2: If a fault occurs in either MBRK_ans or MBRK_ans2 during operation, output a fault and stop.
* The fault output with any selection is [IO-E: mechanical brake answer error] will occur.
Refer to the section "6.6 External brake control".
6-64
6.9.7 Fault automatic reset function (C08-1, 2)

C08 Fault automatic reset function setting
Fault automatic reset
1 0. 2. 0.
function enable selection
Fault automatic reset wait
2 sec 0.5 20.0 2.0
time
This function divides the faults into six classes, and automatically resets the fault being held according to
the faults details and number of occurrences. The cumulative number of Fault occurrences for each class
is reset to zero when operation stops normally. The relation of the fault names and fault classes, and the
details of operation for each fault class are shown below.
Fault code Display Fault name Fault class

01 EMS Emergency stop C
02 PM-n Power module error B-2
03 OC-n Over-current B-5
04 OV-n Over-voltage B-5
05 UV-n Under-voltage B-5
06 PHL.n Phase failure B-5
07 UOH.n Overheat A (T)
SP-1 Over-speed B-1
SP-3 Speed deviation error
08 SP-5 Encoder initialization error
B-5
SP-6 Encoder error
SP-7 Z-phase error
0A ATT-n Automatic tuning error end A
0B OL-n Overload fault B-5
0C GRD.n Ground fault B-2
IO-1 Gate turn-off circuit error
IO-2 A/D converter error B-2
IO-3 Current detection error
IO-C External brake IDET error
0D RUN-OFF error
IO-D B-5
Speed command error at starting
IO-E External brake answer error
IO-F Temperature detector (Thermistor) A (T)
error
0E CPU.n CPU error A
11 E.FLT.n External fault A
12 EL-n Elevator fault B-5
13 OMC.OF External MC control MC close error B-5
14 OMC.ON External MC control MC open error B-5
Fault class Details of operations

A Cannot reset automatically.
Cannot reset automatically, but outputs fault after traveling to target
A (T)
floor.
B-1 Can reset automatically one time.
Can reset automatically two times. If a different fault in the same
B-2
class occurs, can reset automatically two times.
Can reset automatically three times. If a different fault in the same
B-5
class occurs, can reset automatically five times.
C Can reset automatically. The number of resets is not limited.
(1) Fault automatic reset function enables selection (C08-1)

Select whether to enable or disable the fault automatic reset function, and the reset conditions when
enabled.
=0: Disable fault automatic reset function.
=1: Use fault automatic reset function after fault automatic reset wait time (C08-2) has passed.
=2: Use fault automatic reset function when RUN command turns ON.
6-65
(2) Fault automatic reset wait time (C08-2)

When using the fault automatic reset function after fault automatic reset wait time (C08-2) has passed,
set the time from the fault to automatic reset.
6.10 Panel and parameter related matters
6.10.1 Operation panel mode (C11)

C11 Operation panel mode setting
0 Initial mode 1. 2. 2.
3 Monitor parameter 0.00.0 1.9F.F 0.00.0
4 Language setting (LCD) 0. 4. 0.
5 Contrast adjustment (LCD) -10. 5. 0.
6 Backlight OFF timer (LCD) sec 0. 225. 0.
Panel operation method
7 1. 2. 1.
selection
FWD/REV LED display
8 1. 2. 2.
system
(1) Default mode setting (C11-0)

Set which operation mode the operation panel starts up when the power is turned ON.
=1 : Local operation mode (LCL) =2 : Remote operation mode (RMT)
(2) Operation panel monitor parameter (C11-3)
Select the parameters displayed on the operation panel at power ON.
0.00.0
Sub No.
Main No.
0 : D block, 1 : A block
(3) LCD panel : Language setting (C11-4)

Select the language displayed on the LCD panel.
=0: English =1: French =2: German
=3: Spanish =4: Italian
(4) LCD panel : contrast adjustment (C11-5)
Adjust the contrast of the characters displayed on the LCD panel.
The character color will darken as a larger value is set.
(5) LCD panel : Backlight OFF timer setting (C11-6)
Set the time that the LCD panel backlight is ON.
Set the ON time with a second unit.
If the setting value is "0", the backlight will be ON at all times.
(6) Panel operation mode selection (C11-7)

The operation panel parameter operation method can be selected from two methods.
=1 : Sub-No. selection method =2 : Main & sub-No. selection method
Refer to section "5.3.2 Parameter operations".
6-66
(7) FWD/REV LED display system (C11-8)

The conditions of FWD or REV displayed on the LED operation panel can be selected.
= 1 : Motor rotating direction (speed detection)
= 2 : Plus / Minus of Speed command
6.10.2 Display skip (A05)

A05 Parameter B and C indicatory skip
Parameter B and C
0 1. 2. 1.
extended setting
1 Software option 1. 2. 1.
2 Hardware option 1. 2. 1.
The parameter display is skipped for each function in the extended functions, software option functions
and hardware option functions.
With the VT240EL, many of the elevator function related parameters are used with these extended and
option parameters, so "Display All" is set.
=1 : Display =2 : Skip
6.10.3 Data and operation protection (C09)

C09 Data and operation protection
Panel data protection
0 1. 9. 1.
function
1 Operation panel protection 1. 3. 1.
2 LCL switchover protection 1. 2. 1.
6 Fault history buffer clear 0. 9999. 0.
7 Default value load 0. 9999. 0.
(1) Parameter protection function

Set this parameter to prevent unintentional operations from operation panel.
Changing of the data can be protected per function group with the setting value as shown below.
Block B, C
Value Block A
Basic Extn. S/W H/W
1 : Unprotected (changeable)
2 : Protected (unchangeable)
3
4
5
6
7 to 8
9
(Note 1) Set 2 to prohibit all changes.
(Note 2) Set 1 to allow all changes. The 9 setting is for maker maintenance, so do not set it.
(Note 3) When using the password number function (when C28-0 is set to 2), this parameter will also be
locked. Set U00-1 to the value set with C28-1 to unlock the protection.
6-67
(2) Operation panel protection

This setting protects the operation panel FWD, REV and STOP key operations.
= 1 : All operation possible
= 2 : All operation prohibited (Note, the motor will stop when the STOP key is pressed for two or
more seconds)
= 3 : Only STOP key can be operated
(3) LCL switchover protection

Set the protection for switching between the local mode and remote mode during operation.
= 1: LCL mode switchover ( + keys) during running disabled
LCL STOP
SET
= 2: LCL mode switchover ( + keys) during running enabled

LCL STOP
SET
(Note) When switching from the local mode to the remote mode, if the terminal block F RUN or
R RUN is ON, the mode will not switch even if operation is stopped.
(4) Fault history buffer clear

The major fault and minor fault details will be cleared when [1] is set.
Only the major fault details will be cleared when [2] is set.
Only the minor fault details will be cleared when [3] is set.
The details are cleared when the key is pressed, but these setting values are not saved in the
LCL
SET
internal memory. This parameter must be set each time.

Use this before handing the unit over to the final user.
(Note) The setting values exceeding 2000 are codes for maker maintenance, so do not set.
(5) Default value load

All values or the values per function group are changed to the default values.
9 : All default values load (Excluding the maker maintenance parameters)
10 : Parameter A
11 : Parameters B, C basic functions
12 : Parameters B, C extended functions
13 : Parameter B software option function
Parameter C hardware option function
14 : Parameters B basic functions
15 : Parameters B extended functions
16 : Parameter B software option function
17 : Parameters C basic functions
18 : Parameters C extended functions
19 : Parameter C hardware option function
Nothing will occur when values other than the above are set.
This parameter setting value will not be registered in the internal memory.
(Note) The setting values exceeding 2000 are codes for maker maintenance, so do not set. If set, the
following inverter operation may be abnormal.
6-68
6.10.4 Password No. (C28, U00-1)

C28 Password No.
0 Password No. function valid 1. 2. 1.
1 Password No. setting 0. 9999. 0.
U00 Parameter control
1 Password No. setting 0. 9999. 0.
(1) Password No. function valid (C28-0)

Set the validity of the password No. when changing parameters.
=1 : Function invalid =2: Function valid
When the password No. function is valid and the panel data protection function (C09-0) is set to a
value other than 1, 6, or 9, C09-0 will be locked (changes disabled). To unlock the parameter, input the
value recorded in Password No. Setting (C28-1) at Password NO. input (U00-1).
(2) Password No. setting (C28-1)

Set the password No. used when the password No. function is valid. Once set the display will return to
0, so make sure not to forget the set number. The default password No. is "0000", but once the
password has been set, it cannot be reset to the default value even if default value load (C09-7) is
executed.
(3) Password No. setting (U00-1)

If the panel data protection function (C09-0) is locked, input the four-digit value set with password No.
setting (C28-1) into this parameter and unlock the function.
The default password No. is "0000".
6.10.5 Parameter copy function (U00-0)

0 Parameter copy function 0. 9999. 0.
The inverter parameters can be saved in the non-volatile memory in the operation panel. Conversely, the
saved parameters can be read to the inverter's non-volatile memory. This function is handy for setting the
same parameters in several inverters. Note that all operations in this function, including save, load, verify
check and clear, must be executed while the inverter is stopped.
1001 : Save
The inverter parameters are saved in the non-volatile memory in the operation panel.
2002 : Load
The parameters saved in the operation panel's non-volatile memory are read out to the inverter.
Note) When parameter data exceeding the set range could be read out, such as when using
inverters with different capacities, the parameters outside of the setting range may be
loaded and the parameter settings may be unset. In this case, always turn the power
OFF and ON once. If appears when the power is turned ON again, enter D20-2
and set the unset parameters.
3003 : Verify check

The parameter data saved in the operation panel's non-volatile memory is compared against the
parameter data saved in the inverter's non-volatile memory. . appears if the
parameters are different.
6-69
4004 : Clear
The operation panel's non-volatile memory is cleared.
5005: Load (including maintenance parameters)

The parameters saved in the operation panels non-volatile memory are read out to the inverter.
These parameters include the maintenance parameters (parameters adjusted at factory
shipment).
Note) This action must never be carried out by the user as the inverters normal
operations could be obstructed.
6.11 Extended functions
6.11.1 Cooling fan ON/OFF control (C25-2)

C25 Parameter control
2 Cooling fan ON/OFF control 1. 2. 2.
=1: ON/OFF control is enabled

The cooling fan is working during the inerter operation, and it is stopped 5 minutes after the inverter
stop. When the inverter is turned On, the cooling fan is working for 10 seconds.
=2: ON/OFF control is disabled

The cooling fan is working while the inverter power is On.
6-70
6.12 PM motor vector control
The PM motor control's speed control system is configured of the following types of blocks.
The numbers of the related parameters are shown in the block diagram.
ASR ACR
A10-3 A20-0
Dictated A10-0
P control Torque
speed A11-2 command B03-5 A20-1
gain A10-1 B30-2
Torque
current
LPF LPF operation
PM PP
Demagnetizing
Torque
B30-3 B30-7 A20-3
limiter
operation
1/s
current
A10-4
LPF I control gain A10-0 A10-2
A20-2
Current Position
A11-3 detection detection
B30-5
A10-5 C50-23
Load torque C51-x

observer Voltage
Motor speed saturation
prevention Motor position
control
Speed
detection
B30-4 Motor speed
LPF
6.12.1 ASR control constant (A10)

A10 ASR control constant
3 ASR drive torque limiter % 0.1 300.0 180.0
ASR regenerative torque
4 % 0.1 300.0 180.0
limiter
Emergency stop
5 % 0.1 300.0 180.0
regenerative torque limiter
* This parameter is common for "PM motor vector control" and "IM vector control".
(1) ASR drive torque limiter (A10-3)

The limit value for the ASR drive side is set.
This is also limited by [B18-0: Over-current limit].
(2) ASR regenerative torque limiter (A10-4)

The limit value for the ASR regenerative side is set.
(3) Emergency stop regenerative torque limiter (A10-5)

The ASR regenerative side limit value applied during the emergency stop mode is set.
6-71
6.12.2 ACR control constant (PM)

A20 ACR control constant (PM)
0 ACR response rad/s 100. 6000. 1000.
1 ACR time constant ms 0.1 300.0 20.0
d axis current command
2 ms 0.1 100.0 2.0
cushion time
q axis current command
3 ms 0.1 100.0 2.0
cushion time
(1) ACR response (A20-0)

Set the response angle frequency for the current regulator (ACR).
If the ACR response is too high, hunting will occur at a cycle of several ms.
If it is too low, the gain for the speed control system cannot be high.
Normally, this should be set between 500 and 1500rad/s.
(2) ACR time constant (A20-1)

Set the time constant for the current regulator (ACR).
If the time constant is too long or too short, the current will become unstable, and the overcurrent
protection will function.
Normally, this should be set between 5 and 20ms.
(3) d axis current command cushion (A20-2)

(4) q axis current command cushion (A20-3)
This is the cushion setting to prevent instability caused by overshooting, etc., when the current
command changes suddenly. Set at how many ms to change the current command value equivalent
to the motor rated current.
6-72
6.12.3 Low path filter (B30)

B30 Speed control extended function
ASR proportional item change
2 rate limit
% 1.0 400.0 50.0
3 Speed setting LPF time constant ms 0. 1000. 0.
Speed detection LPF time
4 constant
ms 0. 1000. 2.
5 constant for ASR
ms 0. 1000. 5.
Torque current command setting
7 LPF time constant
ms 0. 1000. 0.
The time constants of the low path filters used for speed detection, speed commands or torque current
commands, etc., are set.
By adjusting these time constants, vibration caused by noise and overshooting can be suppressed.
Note that if an excessively high value is set, the control performance could drop.
(1) ASR proportional item change rate limit (B30-2)

If the speed setting value or motor speed changes suddenly, this will prevent the ASR's P item from
suddenly changing.
(2) Speed setting LPF time constant (B30-3)

Set the low path filter time constant for the speed setting value.
Overshooting can be suppressed by setting this to the filter time constant equivalent to the speed
response.
(3) Speed detection LPF time constant (B30-4)

The speed detection noise is cut at the set time constant.
(4) Speed detection LPF time constant for ASR (B30-5)

Set the low path filter time constant used for the speed detection value input into the speed regulator.
(5) Torque current command setting LPF time constant (B30-7)

Set the low path filter time constant used for the torque current command.
6-73
6.13 IM vector control

The IM motor control's speed control system is configured of the following types of blocks.
The numbers of the related parameters are shown in the block diagram.
ASR ACR
A10-3 A11-0
Dictated P control A10-0
gain A11-2 Torque current A11-1
speed command
A10-1 B30-2
LPF

LPF

M PP
Torque
B30-3 limiter B30-7
1/s

LPF A10-4
I control gain A10-0 A10-2 Current Speed
A11-3 Torque detection detection
B30-5
command
A10-5
Load torque
observer Motor speed
Excitation Estimated
current motor speed Flux observer
LPF control & speed
Sensor-less estimation
B30-6 Vector control
Motor speed
LPF
Vector control
with sensor
B30-4
6.13.1 ASR control constant (A10)

3 ASR drive torque limiter % 0.1 300.0 180.0
ASR regenerative torque
4 % 0.1 300.0 180.0
limiter
Emergency stop
5 % 0.1 300.0 180.0
regenerative torque limiter
(1) ASR drive torque limiter (A10-3)

The limit value for the ASR drive side is set.
(2) ASR regenerative torque limiter (A10-4)

The limit value for the ASR regenerative side is set.
(3) Emergency stop regenerative torque limiter (A10-5)

The ASR regenerative side limit value applied during the emergency stop mode is set.
6-74
6.13.2 ACR control constant (IM)

A11 ACR control constant
0 ACR response rad/s 100. 6000. 1000.
1 ACR time constant ms 0.1 300.0 20.0
2 ACR drive torque limiter % 0.1 300.0 180.0
ACR regenerative torque
3 % 0.1 300.0 180.0
limiter
(1) ACR response (A11-0)

The ACR response radian frequency is set.
If the response is too low or too high, the current will become unstable, and the over current protection
will function. Normally, this should be adjusted in the range of 500 to 1000 (rad/s).
(2) ACR time constant (A11-1)

The ACR time constant is set.
If the time constant is too long or too short, the current will become unstable, and the over current
protection will function. Normally, this should be adjusted in the range of 5 to 20(ms).
(3) ACR drive torque limiter (A11-2)

The ACR drive side limit value is set.
(4) ACR regenerative torque limiter (A11-3)

The ACR regenerative side limit value is set.
6-75
6.13.3 Low path filter (B30)

ASR proportional item change
2 rate limit
% 1.0 400.0 50.0
3 Speed setting LPF time constant ms 0. 1000. 0.
4 constant
ms 0. 1000. 2.
5 constant for ASR
ms 0. 1000. 5.
6 constant for compensation
ms 0. 1000. 20.
Torque current command setting
7 LPF time constant
ms 0. 1000. 0.
The time constants of the low path filters used for speed detection, speed commands or torque current
commands, etc., are set.
By adjusting these time constants, vibration caused by noise and overshooting can be suppressed.
Note that if an excessively high value is set, the control performance could drop.
(1) ASR proportional item change rate limit (B30-2)

If the speed setting value or motor speed changes suddenly, this will prevent the ASR's P item from
suddenly changing.
(2) Speed setting LPF time constant (B30-3)

Set the low path filter time constant for the speed setting value.
Overshooting can be suppressed by setting this to the filter time constant equivalent to the speed
response.
(3) Speed detection LPF time constant (B30-4)

The speed detection noise is cut at the set time constant.
(4) Speed detection LPF time constant for ASR (B30-5)

Set the low path filter time constant used for the speed detection value input into the speed regulator.
(5) Speed detection LPF time constant for compensation (B30-6)

Set the low path filter time constant used for the speed detection value for constant output range
compensation or iron loss compensation, etc.
(6) Torque current command setting LPF time constant (B30-7)

Set the low path filter time constant used for the torque current command.
6-76
6.14 V/f control mode
6.14.1 Torque boost (A02)

A02 Torque boost
Manual torque boost
0 1. 2. 2.
selection
Automatic torque boost
1 1. 2. 1.
selection
Inverter
2 Manual torque boost voltage % 0.00 20.00
rating
4 R1 drop compensation gain % 0.0 100.0 100.0
5 Slip compensation gain % 0.00 20.00 0.00
6 Maximum torque boost gain % 0.00 50.00 0.00
(1) Manual torque boost selection

This parameter selects the manual torque boost function.
=1 : Disable = 2 : Enable
When manual torque boost is selected, the manual torque boost setting will be valid regardless of the
automatic torque boost selection state.
(2) Automatic torque boost selection

This parameter selects the automatic torque boost function.
=1 : Disable = 2 : Enable
The automatic torque boost function carries out voltage boosting and slip compensation using the
current detection value. This allows the torque to be improved when starting at a low speed regions.
When the function is selected, the three functions of R1 drop compensation, slip compensation and
maximum torque boost are valid.
Using this function, a 200% starting torque can be output with the Meidensha standard 3-phase
induction motor during a 150% output current. Even with a motor that cannot output a 200% torque
due to design, the maximum torque of the motor can be output.
The gain for the automatic torque boost, etc., is automatically adjusted when automatic tuning is
executed.
selection (A02-1)
Slip compensation gain

(A02-5)
1:OFF 2:ON
+
Set frequency
+ Overload limit Frequency
function command
Manual torque boost +
selection (A02-0) V/f
Voltage
+ +
command
Manual torque boost
voltage (A02-2)
1:OFF 2:ON +
Automatic torque
R1 drop compensation boost selection
gain (A02-4) + (A02-1)
+ 1:OFF 2:ON
Maximum torque boost
gain (A02-6)
(Note 1) To validate the only slip compensation function when manual torque boost is selected, set all
settings other than the slip compensation function (A02-5) to 0 (set A02-3, 4, 6 to 0).
6-77
CAUTION
When using only manual torque boost, carry out automatic tuning (B19-0 = 1).
When using automatic torque boost, always carry out automatic tuning (B19-0 = 2).
The maximum torque is not an instant output. It takes approx. 3 seconds for the maximum
torque to be reached.
If the motor vibrates abnormally, etc., the automatic torque boost cannot be used.
If the parameters automatically set with automatic tuning are set manually, the motor rotation
could become unstable.
With a motor which the base frequency greatly exceeds the commercial frequency, or with a
motor which a large constant output range, the rotation may be unstable and a sufficient torque
may not be output.
When outputting the maximum torque continuously, consider the heat generated on the motor
side, etc.
(3) Manual torque boost voltage

This parameter is automatically adjusted with automatic tuning (mode 1 and mode 2).
When adjusting this parameter, set the boost voltage at 0Hz as a percentage in respect to the rated
output voltage (B00-3).
(4) R1 drop compensation gain

Set how much to compensate the voltage drop caused by R1 (B02-0, 1: Motor primary resistance value)
measured with automatic tuning. Normally set 100% of the default value.
(Note 1) If the setting is too high, the rotation may become unstable, and the inverter may trip.
(Note 2) Sufficient torque might not be attained if the setting is too small.
(5) Slip compensation gain

This parameter is automatically adjusted with automatic tuning
Output frequency
(mode 2).
When setting manually, set the slip frequency for the motor rated
load as a percentage in respect to the base frequency (B00-5).
Load torque
The output frequency changes according to the motor rated torque
as shown right.
(Note 1) The output frequency will respond with a time constant of
approx. 500ms in respect to the changes in the load Time
torque.
(Note 2) When set too high, the motor rotation could become instable.
(6) Maximum torque boost gain

This parameter is automatically adjusted with automatic tuning (mode 2).
Set the optimum boost amount for the maximum torque output as a percentage in respect to the rated
output voltage (B00-3).
Normally, a value of 10 to 30% is set by automatic tuning.
(Note 1) When adjusted manually, the sufficient torque may not be attained.
(Note 2) If set too high, the rotation may become unstable and may trip.
6-78
6.14.2 DC brake (A03)

A03 DC brake
Inverter
0 DC braking voltage % 0.01 20.00
rating
1 DC braking time sec 0.0 20.0 0.0
2 DC braking current % 0. 150. 50.
V/f
C01-1 : Stop frequency
Maximum speed VEC,PM
C15-4 : Zero speed detection (ZSP) level
Enlarged
V/f
A03-0 : DC braking voltage
VEC,PM
Time A03-2 : DC braking current
A03-1 : DC braking time
* When the output frequency reaches the [C01-1 Stop frequency] while decelerating after the run
command turns OFF, the DC brakes will be applied. (In the VEC and PM control modes, after the
frequency reaches [C15-4 zero speed detection level]. or less)
(1) DC braking voltage (A03-0)

Set the output voltage for DC braking at stopping as a percentage in respect to the motor rated
voltage.
This parameter is automatically adjusted with automatic tuning (mode 1 and mode 2).
When adjusting manually, monitor the output current and raise the voltage in increments of 1% or less.
An excessive setting could result in tripping.
(2) DC braking time (A03-1)

Set the time for carrying out DC braking during operation stop. If this parameter is [0.0], the motor will
stop without DC braking.
(3) DC braking current (A03-2)

Set the current value output during DC brake operation in the VEC and PM control modes.
6-79
6.14.3 Start/stop frequency (C01)

C01 Start/stop frequency
Fmax/
0 Start frequency Hz 0.10 1.00
60.00
Fmax/
1 Stop frequency Hz 0.10 1.00
60.00
(1) Start frequency (C01-0)

This is the output frequency setting value when starting operation.
The output frequency is increased from this setting value.
(2) Stop frequency (C01-1)

Set the output frequency for starting DC brake operation while decelerating after the run command
turns OFF.
If the [A03-1 DC braking time] parameter is set to [0.0], the motor will stop without DC braking.
6.14.4 S-shape ramp path (B10-6)

B10 Acceleration/deceleration time setting
S-shape ramp pass function
6 1. 3. 1.
setting
=1 : This function is disabled.

=2 : The S-shape is passed when the program frequency setting function is used and the B48-8 speed
setting is used for the sequence commands S0 to SE.
=3 : S-shape is used only during the acceleration at the start of operation or acceleration/deceleration
when the frequency is changed. The S-shape is passed in all other cases.
6.14.5 V/f middle point setting (B17)

B17 V/f middle point
0 Frequency-1 Hz 0.00 B00-4 0.00
1 Voltage-1 % 0.0 200.0 0.0
2 Frequency-2 Hz 0.00 B00-4 0.00
3 Voltage-2 % 0.0 200.0 0.0
4 Frequency-3 Hz 0.00 B00-4 0.00
5 Voltage-3 % 0.0 200.0 0.0
6 Frequency-4 Hz 0.00 B00-4 0.00
7 Voltage-4 % 0.0 200.0 0.0
8 Frequency-5 Hz 0.00 B00-4 0.00
9 Voltage-5 % 0.0 200.0 0.0
A Voltage-Fmax % 0.0 200.0 0.0
V/f middle point use
B 1. 2. 1.
selection
6-80
When using a motor with special V/f characteristics, the special V/f characteristics can be set as shown
below by using this function.
V V
B17-A
B17-9 100% B00-3
(motor rated
B17-7 voltage)
B17-5
B17-3
B17-1
0 f 0 f
0 B17-0 B17-2 B17-4 B17-6 B17-8 Maximum 0 Base Maximum
frequency frequency frequency
B00-4 B00-5 B00-4
V/f characteristics when using middle V/f function Normal V/f characteristics
Set B17-B to 2 to use this function.

Refer to the upper left diagram, and set the frequency and voltage in B17-0 to A. Set the voltage as a
percentage in respect to the motor rated voltage (B00-3).
If this function is OFF (normal V/f control), the V/f characteristics will be the 100% voltage (motor rated
voltage) at the base frequency, and the 100% voltage at the maximum frequency as shown in the upper
right diagram.
When using four or less V/f changeover points, set the setting value to "0.00" in the order of B17-0
B17-2 B17-4 B17-6.
If all of the frequency settings (B17-0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are set to "0.00", the V/f characteristics will be the 100%
voltage (motor rated voltage) at the base frequency, and the B17-A setting voltage at the maximum
frequency.
A setting example is shown below.

V V
B17-A B17-A
B17-9 100
B17-7
B17-5
f f
B17-4 B17-6 B17-8 Maximum Base Maximum
frequency frequency frequency
B00-4 B00-5 B00-4
B17-0, B17-2 = 0.00 B17-0, B17-2, B17-4, B17-6, B17-8 = 0.00
When using 3 V/f changeover pionts When not setting a V/f changeover point
The range for each frequency setting value is limited so that the relation B17-0 B17-2 B17-4
B17-6 B17-8 B00-4 is established.
6-81
6.15 Serial (C26)

C26 Standard serial transmission setting
0 Function selection 0. 1. 0.
Parameter change
1 1. 5. 1.
protection
2 Station No. 0. 247. 1.
3 Response timer s 0.00 2.00 0.00
4 Baud rate setting 1. 7. 2.
5 Stop bit setting 1. 2. 2.
6 Parity setting 1. 3. 3.
7 Speed unit setting 0. 5. 0.
(1) Function selection (C26-0)

Select the serial communication method.
=0 : Standard serial ......... This is Meidensha's original protocol using ASCII codes.
=1 : Modbus .................... High-speed communication using binary codes is possible.
(2) Parameter change protection (C26-1)

The parameters shown with circles in the following table can be changed.
Setting Parameter B, C
Parameter A
value Basic Extend S/W H/W
1
2
3
4
5
: Changeable : Unchangeable
(3) Station No. (C26-2)

Set the local station No. for serial communication.
(4) Response timer (C26-3)

Set the minimum time for returning an answer after receiving a command during serial
communication.
When Modbus communication is selected, the data frame reception complete judgment time (silent
time) will be applied.
(5) Baud rate setting (C26-4)

Set the baud rate for serial communication.
=1 : 4800bps =2 : 9600bps =3 : 14400bps =4 : 19200bps =5 : 38400bps
=6 : 1200bps =7 : 2400bps
(6) Stop bit setting (C26-5)

Set the number of stop bits for serial communication.
=1: 1bit =2: 2bit
When Modbus communication is selected, the parity setting (C26-2) has a priority. The value is fixed
to 2 bits when parity is disabled, and 1 bit when parity is enabled.
6-82
(7) Parity setting (C26-6)

Set the parity for serial communication.
=1 : None =2 : Even =3 : Odd
(8) Speed unit setting (C26-7)

Set the unit used as a reference for writing and reading the frequency command (speed setting
command) value for the FW/FR command in the standard serial transmission function or one of the
functions of 03h, 10h settings in the Modbus communication function.
Example 1 :
C26-7=0 (for 0.01Hz or 0.1min-1 unit)
Standard serial command : (G01FW00000003000) :
For V/f setting ........................... 30.00Hz is written
For vector or PM setting ........... 300.0min-1 is written
Modbus command : 0110000000020400000BB8F4ED :
For V/f setting ........................... 30.00Hz is written
For vector or PM setting ........... 300.0min-1 is written
Example 2 :
C26-7=2 (for 0.01% unit)
Standard serial command : (G01FW00000003000)
30.00% is written
Modbus command : 0110000000020400000BB8F4ED
30.00% is written
% is a percentage of when 100% is the maximum frequency (B00-4) or maximum speed (B01-4).
When C26-7 is set between 3 and 5 unsigned, the - value is invalidated.
* With the VT240EL, the speed and frequency settings cannot be read and written, so this setting is invalid.
6-83
6-84
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
7.1 Magnetic pole position estimation function............................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Conditions for starting magnetic pole position estimation operation ..............................7-1
7.1.2 Operation chart..............................................................................................................7-1
7.1.3 Selecting the magnetic pole position estimation function ..............................................7-2
7.2 Flow to trial operation ............................................................................................................7-4
7.3 Actual examples of using multi-speed command ..................................................................7-5
7.3.1 Wiring ............................................................................................................................7-5
(1) Connection diagram..........................................................................................................7-5
(2) Parameters related to wiring .............................................................................................7-6
(3) Operation chart including magnetic pole position estimation operation ............................7-7
(4) Operation charge for normal operation .............................................................................7-9
(not including magnetic pole position estimation operation) .....................................................7-9
7.3.2 Parameters....................................................................................................................7-11
(1) Basic parameters (power voltage, motor rating related) ...................................................7-11
(2) Program settings (speed, acceleration, jerk).....................................................................7-12
(3) External brake control .......................................................................................................7-13
7.3.3 Automatically adjusting the motor constants for the PM motor ......................................7-14
(1) Parameters related to automatic adjustment ....................................................................7-14
(2) Tuning procedures and adjustment...................................................................................7-16
7.3.4 Adjusting the magnetic pole position estimation with the panel.....................................7-18
(1) Parameters related to automatic adjustment ....................................................................7-18
(2) Magnetic pole position estimation function adjustment procedures ..................................7-19
7.3.5 Trial operation using panel ............................................................................................7-21
7.3.6 Trial operation using controller (Inspection operation)...................................................7-22
7.3.7 Hints for trial operation ..................................................................................................7-23
(1) Relation of motor rotation direction and encoder signal polarity .......................................7-23
(2) Adjusting the command and rotation direction ..................................................................7-24
7.3.8 Adjustment during normal operation..............................................................................7-25
(1) Roll back adjustment ........................................................................................................7-25
(2) Adjusting the comfort of ride .............................................................................................7-26
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
7.4 Cases when not using magnetic pole position estimation function........................................7-29
7.4.1 Basic settings ................................................................................................................7-29
(1) Selecting the encoder .......................................................................................................7-29
(2) Magnetic pole position estimation selection......................................................................7-29
7.4.2 Setting parameters according to encoder type ..............................................................7-30
(1) Encoder selection (C51-0) ................................................................................................7-30
(2) Encoder AB phase advance direction selection (C50-2) ...................................................7-30
(3) AB phase-Z phase type selection (C51-1) ........................................................................7-31
(4) Encoder Z phase signal reversal (C51-2) .........................................................................7-31
(5) Encoder ABZ pulse type selection (C50-3) .......................................................................7-32
(6) Encoder UVW advance direction selection (C51-3)..........................................................7-33
(7) Encoder UVW pulse type selection (C51-6)......................................................................7-33
(8) Z-IN U phase angle (C51-5) .........................................................................................7-34
(9) UVW measurement start wait time (C51-7) ......................................................................7-35
(10) UVW measurement time (C51-8)......................................................................................7-35
(11) ABZ measurement start wait time (C51-9)........................................................................7-35
7.4.3 Tuning the Z-IN U phase winding phase angle (C51-4) ............................................7-36
(1) Outline ..............................................................................................................................7-36
(2) Procedure .........................................................................................................................7-36
7.4.4 Adjusting the analog output encoder setting (C52-0 to 7)..............................................7-38

The VT240EL is equipped with the "magnetic pole position estimation function" and suitable when the PM
motor (permanent magnetic synchronous motor) is used for applications which require mechanical brakes,
such as an elevator.
An encoder with U, V and W signals or absolute value signals must be used when controlling a PM motor.
The motor can be controlled with an incremental encoder having only A, B and Z phase signals by using
this "absolute position estimation function".
In addition, when the "magnetic pole position estimation function" is used, the encoder can be installed
without worrying about the positional relation of the Z phase and pole position, and the Z-phase does not
need to be adjusted during trial operation.
7.1 Magnetic pole position estimation function

The magnetic pole position estimation function is a function which recognizes the PM motor's magnetic
pole position.
The "magnetic pole position estimation operation" is carried out with the motor's rotor locked with
mechanical brakes, etc.
In the following explanation, the interval in which the "magnetic pole position estimation performance" is
carried out is called the "magnetic pole position estimation operation".
7.1.1 Conditions for starting magnetic pole position estimation operation

When the magnetic pole position estimation is completed, the [Magnetic pole position established flag
(FPOS)] will be set (ON).
The magnetic pole position estimation operation is carried out if the run command is input when the motor
is stopped and this [Magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS)] is not set (is OFF).
The [Magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS)] turns OFF in the cases; when the power is OFF, a
fault occurs, if one of the following parameter setting values is changed, or even if the value is not
changed and the operation panel SET key is pressed twice to enter the setting value.
* Parameters which affect FPOS: B01-0 to 9, B19-0, B39-0, B39-F, C30-0, C50-2, 3, C51-0 to 9, V52-0 to
7.
7.1.2 Operation chart

With the VT240EL, the magnetic pole position estimation operation sequence is incorporated in the
operation sequence for when a PM motor is used. The relation of the run command and internal sequence
is shown below.
If the [Magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS)] is OFF when the run command is issued, the
magnetic pole position estimation operation will start.
[Executing magnetic pole operation (FPOS_EX)] turns ON during the magnetic pole position estimation
operation. Whether to output the [run answer (RUN)] during the magnetic pole position estimation
function can be selected with B39-0: f2.
7-1
Run command

established (FPOS)
Estimating magnetic pole estimation operation
position (FPOS_EX) OFF at power
OFF or fault
Run answer (RUN)
Torque bias command
amount
Brake release command Brake release wait time (B46-5)
(MBRK) wait time (B46-2)
Acceleration Brake engage wait time (B46-4)
start wait time
Speed command (B46-3) Zero speed
f2 of B39-0 (magnetic pole position estimation selection)

=1 : Output =2 : Do not output
7.1.3 Selecting the magnetic pole position estimation function
The magnetic pole position estimation function is valid as the default.

An encoder with U, V and W signals or absolute value signals must be used when not using this function.

B39 Pole position presumption
0 121. 223. 222. {
1 2 2.
=1 : Magnetic pole position estimation function OFF
=2 : Estimation with secondary phase (normal)
=3 : Estimation with primary phase (only special SPM)
f1 : Control method
=2 : Estimation phase reference
f2 : Run (RUN) signal output during magnetic pole position estimation

=1 : Output
=2 : Do not output
(1) B39-0 f0
Set =2 (default value) to use the magnetic pole position estimation function.
If D16-0 to 3 do not satisfy the judgment standards even after adjusting, set =3, then adjust.
When not using the magnetic pole position estimation function, use an encoder with U, V and W
signals or absolute value signal, and set the value to 1.
* If [C51-0 Encoder selection] is set to 5 or 6, B39-0 f0, it will automatically be set to 2 (magnetic pole
position estimation function valid.)
(2) B39-0 f1
This parameter is fixed to =2: Estimation phase reference.
Note if the magnetic pole position estimation function is not used, control will be carried out with the Z
phase reference, so the encoder's Z phase must be adjusted.
7-2
(3) B39-0 f2
Select whether to output [Run answer (RUN)] during magnetic pole position estimation operation.
=1 : Output
=2 : Do not output
There are various types of motors having various types of characteristics.

The magnetic pole position estimation function may need to be adjusted in order to
match the motor's characteristics.
Refer to the section "Adjusting the magnetic pole position estimation function" for
details.
7-3
7.2 Flow to trial operation

The flow to operation when using the VT240EL and PM motor in combination is shown below.
The procedures from "installation and wiring" to "Confirmation of operation with inspection operation" are
given.
Always observe the procedures and precautions.
Refer to "Chapter 4 Wiring" and

Installation and wiring. correctly wire.
Power ON Carefully confirm the safety

before turning the power ON.
Set the basic parameters such

Setting the function as "programmable input/output",
parameters "power voltage" and "motor
rating".
If the motor constants
can be confirmed, set
from the panel.
If the motor
constants cannot
Setting the motor Setting the motor be confirmed,
constants (panel setting) constants (tuning setting) perform tuning.
Refer to Chapter
7.3.3.
(Note 1)
"Correctly wire" and set the
Adjusting the magnetic "motor constants". Refer to
pole position estimation Chapter 7.3.4.
from the panel
If the motor phase wiring Run the motor with panel

has been interchanged to operations to confirm the motor
adjust the rotation Trial operation using the
panel operation and the motor rotation
direction, always carry out direction, etc.
magnetic pole position
estimation again.
Trial operation using the Carry out inspection operation

controller (inspection with the controller, and confirm
operation) the car operation direction.
(Note 1) This shows the case when the magnetic pole position estimation function is used.
The encoder phase must be adjusted when using an encoder with U, V and W signals or
absolute value signals, and not using this magnetic pole position estimation function.
7-4
7.3 Actual examples of using multi-speed command

An actual example of using the multi-speed command is given below.
In this example system, an incremental encoder with only the A, B and Z phase signals is used. The
"V24-DN2 (line driver compatible)" speed detector PCB (option) is used, and the sequence input logic is
set to "sink type".
7.3.1 Wiring
(1) Connection diagram

An example of connecting the main circuit, encoder and sequence circuit is shown below.
Refer to "Chapter 4 Wiring" for details on each circuit's specifications.
76D DBR
L+1 L+2
VT240EL B
MCCB MC
L1 U
L2 V
PM
L3 W
L- PG
[A phase pulse output] -13[PAO] 5VDC Max.200mA -8[5RP]

[B phase pulse output] -14[PBO] -1[0RP]
-9[PA]
I=5 to 30mA -1[0RP] A phase -2[PAN]
MAX.24V+10%
-10[PB]
B phase
-3[PBN]
-11[PZ]
Z phase
-4[PZN]
V24-DN2 (Option)
TB1
20k ** Use twist-pair shielded cables
AI3
Load detector
20k
0 to 10V COM
0V
RY24V
RY24V
TB2
Run command UP PSI1 SINK RA MBRK : Brake release
1
Run command Ry RC COM command
PSI2 2 RY24V
DOWN W1 FA
Emergency stop PSI3 FLT : Fault
FB
EMS Ry
PSI4 4.7k FC COM
Multi-speed S0
PSI5 SOUR
Multi-speed S1 PSO1 ZSP : Zero speed
PSI6 4.7k
Multi-speed S2
PSO2 RDY2 : READY 2
Fault reset PSI7 1
2 RY0V OFF PSO3
RESET PSO3 RUN : Run
W2 PSOE COM
RY0 ON
RY0V DS1-4
TB2
7-5
(2) Parameters related to wiring

The "PCB settings" and programmable input/output settings required when wiring the circuit as shown
in (1) Connection diagram on the previous page are explained in this section. When these parameters
are set, data can be exchanged with the externally assigned signals.
a) Setting the PCB

Set both the L-bit W1 (for PSI1 to 6) and the W2 (for PSI7) to sink logic (No. 1 side).
DS1
ON
1 2
OPEN 1 120
W1 PSI1 to 6 V1 2 I1
V2 3 I2
1 2
PSO3 4 PULSE
W2 PSI7
b) Programmable input/output
z Program sequence input z Program sequence output

Terminal Setting Terminal Setting
No. Symbol Parameter No. Parameter
block value block value
C03 Sequence input terminal function - 1 C13 Output terminal function
0 F RUN Forward run PSI1 1 RA-RC terminal output
2 MBRK 27
1 EMS Emergency stop PSI3 3 selection
2 R RUN Reverse run PSI2 2 PSO1 terminal output
3 ZSP 23
selection
PSO2 terminal output
C04 Sequence input terminal function 2 4 RDY2 5
selection
2 S0 Program setting PSI4 4 PSO3 terminal output
5 RUN 1
3 S1 Program setting PSI5 5 selection
4 S2 Program setting PSI6 6 FA-FB-FC terminal output
6 FLT 2
selection
z Torque bias
Terminal Setting
No. Parameter An example for setting the
block value
load detector input to AI3 0
C07 Analog input terminal to 10V is shown here.
A Analog torque bias AI3 4
C12 Setting input terminal
A AI3 terminal input mode 0 to 10V 1
B AI3 input gain 1.000
C AI3 input offset 0.00
D Filter time constant for AI3 input 100.
B16 Automatic torque bias setting
0 Automatic torque bias selection Analog 2
6 Bias direction selection 1
7 Analog bias voltage 0 0.0
The default values are used here.
9 Analog bias voltage 2 100.0 Adjust these to the actual system.
A Output bias torque 0 -100.0
B Output bias torque 1 100.0
7-6
(3) Operation chart including magnetic pole position estimation operation

The timing of the signals between the inverter and peripheral devices such as the controller and
brakes is shown below. (The brake answer signal MBRK_ans) is not used.
Device and
signal direction Signal item
INV. READY
(RDY2) 1)
CONT.
3)
CONT. UP or DOWN
INV.
Executing magnetic
INV. pole position 10)
CONT. operation (FPOS_EX)
Magnetic pole
INV. position established 11)
CONT. (FPOS) 2)
INV. Run answer 5)
CONT. (RUN)
INV. T1
Torque bias T1
Motor 4)
9) T5
Brake release T2
INV. command 6)
CONT. (MBRK)
T3 T4
7) 8)
INV. Speed pattern
CONT. setting 0 : Zero speed 7 : High speed 3 : Creep 0 : Zero speed
INV. Speed pattern

Motor setting
INV. Zero speed
CONT. (ZSP)
Hoistway. Deceleration
CONT. start point
Hoistway Stop posiion
CONT. detection point
* INV. : Inverter
CONT. : Controller
The above chart shows the case which includes magnetic pole position estimation operation. The
magnetic pole position is estimated during the first operation and the first operation after recovering
from a fault. Thus, during normal operation (when magnetic pole position established: FPOS is ON),
the system will start the operation for applying torque bias as the run signal is received from the
controller.
1) READY (RDY2)
The RDY2 signal turns ON when the inverter is ready for operation.
2) Magnetic pole position established (FPOS)

Once magnetic pole position estimation is carried out, the magnetic pole position established
(FPOS) signal will remain ON if the state is normal.
3) Magnetic pole position estimation operation (FPOS_EX)

If the magnetic pole position is not set (FPOS: OFF), check the READY (RDY2: ON) state, and
then input the run command (UP or DOWN). The magnetic pole estimation operation will start
when the command is input.
The estimating magnetic pole position signal (FPOS_EX) will turn ON during this time.
7-7
4) Torque bias
When the magnetic pole position estimation operation is completed normally, the operation will
shift to normal operation.
The inverter will apply torque bias based on the load signal.
Set the gradient to apply torque bias with T1: [B46- Torque bias current rising edge/falling edge
time].
5) Run answer (RUN)

The RUN signal turns ON while the torque bias is applied.
The ON/OFF state during magnetic pole position estimation operation can be selected with B39-0
f2.
=1 : Output RUN even during magnetic pole position estimation
=2 : Do not output RUN during magnetic pole position estimation
6) Brake release command (MBRK)

When the torque bias is established, the inverter turns the brake release command (MBRK) ON to
enable brake release by the controller. Set the time to wait to release the brakes after the torque
bias is established with T2: [B46-2: Brake release wait time]. Use this to release the brakes taking
the IM excitation time into consideration.
The controller must confirm that the brake release command (MBRK) is ON before releasing the
brakes.
7) Speed pattern
After the brakes are released, switch the speed command from zero speed to high speed.
Set the time from the brake release command to start of acceleration with T3: [B46-3 Acceleration
start wait time].
This parameter is set to consider the time for the actual release of brakes after they are excited.
Set [0.00] when using the brake answer (MBRK_ans) signal.
8) Brake engage (MBRK)

When the speed command reaches zero <after zero speed (ZSP) turns ON>, the inverter will turn
the brake release command (MBRK) OFF to engage the brakes.
Set the time from brake engage command output after zero speed (ZSP) has turned ON with T4:
[B46-4 brake engage wait time].
9) Torque bias (when stopped)

The torque bias is attenuated after engaging the brakes.
Set the time to wait before starting torque bias current attenuation after the brake engage
command is output with T5: [B46-5 Torque bias attenuation wait time].
engage.
10) Run command (UP or DOWN)

Turn the run command from the controller OFF after the inverter's run answer (RUN) has turned
OFF.

This turns OFF if the inverter's power turns OFF or READY (RDY2) turns OFF.
7-8
(4) Operation charge for normal operation

(not including magnetic pole position estimation operation)
The magnetic pole position is estimated during the first operation and first operation after recovering
from a fault. Thus, during normal operation (when magnetic pole position established: FPOS is ON),
the system will start the operation for applying torque bias as the run signal is received from the
controller. The operation chart for normal operation is shown below.
Device and
INV. READY
(RDY2) 1)
CONT.
CONT. UP or DOWN
INV.
3) 10)
Magnetic pole
INV. position established
2) 11)
CONT. (FPOS)
INV. Run answer 5)

CONT. (RUN)
INV. T1
Torque bias T1
Motor 4)
9) T5
Brake release T2
INV. command 6)
CONT. (MBRK)
T3 T4
7) 8)
INV. Speed pattern
INV. Speed pattern

Motor setting
INV. Zero speed
CONT. (ZSP)
CONT. start point
* INV. : Inverter
CONT. : Controller
1) READY (RDY2)

The magnetic pole position established signal (FPOS) turns OFF if the magnetic pole position is
not set.
3) If the run command (UP or DOWN) is input when the [READY: RDY2] signal and [Magnetic pole
position established: FPOS] signal are ON, the normal operations (steps (4) to (10)) will take place.
7-9
* The details of the normal operations (steps (4) to (10)) are the same as 3) Operation chart
including magnetic pole position estimation operation.
4) Torque bias
When the magnetic pole position estimation operation is completed normally, the operation will
shift to normal operation.
Set the gradient to apply torque bias with T1: [B46-1 Torque bias current rising edge/falling edge
time].
5) Run answer (RUN)

The ON/OFF state during magnetic pole position estimation operation can be selected with B39-0
f2.
=1 : Output RUN even during magnetic pole position estimation
=2 : Do not output RUN during magnetic pole position estimation

brakes.
7) Speed pattern
start wait time].
This parameter is set to consider the time for the actual release of brakes after they are excited.

Set the time from brake engage command output after zero speed has turned ON with T4: [B46-4
brake engage wait time].

engage.

OFF.

7-10
7.3.2 Parameters
The basic parameters required for control are listed below.

Before starting use, refer to "Chapter 6 Various functions and parameters", and set the parameters
according to the system.
(1) Basic parameters (power voltage, motor rating related)
No. Parameter Unit Min. Max. Default Ref. page

0 Control mode selection 21. 24. 24. 6-19

B01 Output rating
0 Rated input voltage setting 1. 7. 7. 6-19
Inverter
1 Motor rated output 0.10 750.00 6-20
rating
2 No. of motor poles 2. 100. 4. 6-20
230. or
3 Rated output voltage V 40. 480. 6-20
400.
4 Max. speed (Nmax) min-1 40. 9999. 72. 6-21
5 Base speed (Nbase) min-1 40. B01-4 72. 6-21
6 Motor rated current A 6-21
rating0.3 rating rating
8 No. of encoder pulses P/R 30. 10000. 8192. 6-21
9 No-load output voltage V 20. 500. 160. 6-22
According
A Carrier frequency setting 1. 5. 6-22
to type

R1: PM motor winding resistance
0 m 0.001 9.999 1.000
(Mantissa section)
R1: PM motor winding resistance
1 -1. 4. 0.
(Exponent section)
Ld : PM motor d axis inductance
2 mH 0.001 9.999 1.000 6-28
(Mantissa section)
Lq : PM motor q axis inductance
3 mH 0.001 9.999 1.000
(Mantissa section)
Ld, Lq:
4 PM motor inductance (Exponent -1. 4. 0.
section)

B48 Elevator functions
0 Car speed at maximum speed setting m/s 0.050 4.000 1.000 6-22

B4A ASR Response changeover function
3 Machine time constant ms 10. 20000. 1000. 6-22

B11 Program frequency (speed) setting
8 Selection mode setting 1. 3. 1. 6-32
7-11
(2) Program settings (speed, acceleration, jerk)

B48-0 sett-
8 Speed setting (program 0) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
ing value
B48-0 sett-
A Speed setting (program 2) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
B Speed setting (program 3) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
6-30
B48-0 sett-
C Speed setting (program 4) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
D Speed setting (program 5) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
E Speed setting (program 6) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
F Speed setting (program 7) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
0 Acceleration setting (program 0) m/s2 0.001 1.500 0.100
6-30
8 Jerk setting (program 0) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
A Jerk setting (program 2) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
B Jerk setting (program 3) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
6-30
C Jerk setting (program 4) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
D Jerk setting (program 5) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
E Jerk setting (program 6) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
F Jerk setting (program 7) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
Note) The default speed setting (factory-set value) is [0.000].

Even if the program setting is selected with this setting and operation is started, the speed
designation will remain zero so the motor will not rotate. Always set the required speed setting
before starting use.
7-12
(3) External brake control

0 External brake selection 1112. 2322. 1112. 6-45
Torque bias current rising edge/falling edge 6-40
1 s 0.00 0.50 0.20
time 6-47
2 Brake release wait time (LB) s 0.00 2.50 0.00
6-47
3 Acceleration start wait time (BL) s 0.00 2.50 0.00
4 Brake engage wait time (DB) s 0.00 2.50 0.00
6-48
5 Torque bias attenuation wait time s 0.00 0.50 0.30
RUN error judgment time when engaging 6-48
6 s 0.0 25.0 5.0
brake 6-63
6-49
7 Brake answer error judgment time s 0.0 25.0 0.0
6-64
A RUN-OFF wait time s 0.00 0.50 0.05 6-49
B Deceleration command fault judgment time s 0.0 25.0 10.0 6-49
C Brake answer error judgment speed level % 0.0 25.0 2.0 6-64
6-50
D Operation selection for brake operation fault 0. 2. 0.
6-64
7-13
7.3.3 Automatically adjusting the motor constants for the PM motor
The PM motor's motor constants can be automatically adjusted with the parameter settings and operation
panel operations.
DANGER
The rotator must be fixed with mechanical brakes during the tuning process.
Do not start this process when the brakes are released or the stator is not fixed. It can be extremely
hazardous.
(1) Parameters related to automatic adjustment

Automatically adjusted parameters
The B03-2 to 4 motor circuit constants (for PM) are automatically adjusted.

Ld : PM motor d axis inductance
2 mH 0.001 9.999 1.000 6-28
(Mantissa section)
Lq : PM motor q axis inductance
3 mH 0.001 9.999 1.000 6-28
(Mantissa section)
Ld, Lq:
4 PM motor inductance (Exponent -1. 4. 0. 6-28
section)
Parameters displaying tuning judgment standards

The tuning results are displayed when tuning is completed. Judge the acceptability of the results with
this display.
If each displayed detail does not satisfy the standards, adjust the [tuning adjustment parameters] so
that the standards are satisfied.
No. Parameter Unit Standards Ref. page

D16 PM tuning monitor
The estimation results judgment
0 Judgment standards 1 % standards 1 is displayed. 7-16
This must be 120% or more .
1 Judgment standards 2 % standards 2 is displayed. 7-16
standards 3 is displayed.
2 Judgment standards 3 % 7-16
No applicable standards.
This does not need to be adjusted.
3 Judgment standards 4 standards 4 is displayed. 7-16
This must be within 10 .
7-14
Tuning adjustment parameters

These parameters are adjusted if the judgment standards displayed in D16-0 to 3 are not satisfied.

B19 Automatic tuning function
0 Automatic tuning selection 0. 7. 0. 7-16
1 Initial proportion compensation coefficient % 0. 1000. 100. 7-17
2 Initial time constant compensation coefficient % 0. 1000. 100. 7-17
B39 Pole position presumption
7-16
1 PM tuning voltage % 10. 200. 50.
7-17
7-16
2 PM tuning time 2. 32. 4.
7-17
3 Voltage error correction current % 0. 50. 10. 7-17
7-15
(2) Tuning procedures and adjustment
Preparation for tuning (1)

Set the output rating (B01) parameter.
The status display LED

Preparation for tuning (2) [LCL] will turn ON.
STOP LCL
Enter the local mode by pressing + SET .

Set [B19-0 automatic tuning selection] to 7 Tuning will start as soon as the key
(PM motor auto tuning). is pressed.
A clicking sound or thumping
sound is heard from the motor
during tuning.
Starting tuning
FWD REV
Press or to start tuning.
Display during tuning operation After tuning

adjustment has
[LCL] will flicker during tuning, and it will been completed,
change to a solid light when tuning is start tuning again.
completed.
Tuning error
If an error [ATT-n] occurs during tuning, refer to the section
Troubleshooting for Motor Constant Tuning on the next page.
Tuning adjustment
Confirming the adjustment results

After tuning is completed, confirm that the When D16-0, 1 are lower than standards
results satisfy the following judgment standards. Increase B39-1.
Standards If the D16-0, 1 values do not increase, also
Name
value increase B39-2.
Judgment
D16-0 120% or more
standards 1
Judgment
D16-1
standards 2
120% or more Normally, if the D16-0, 1 reference values are
Judgment satisfied, D16-3 (judgment standards 4) will satisfy
D16-3 Within 10 the judgment standards. If the D16-0, 1, 2
standards 4
standards are satisfied but D16-3 (judgment
standards 4) is not satisfied, automatic adjustment
cannot be completed. Set the motor design value
with the panel.
7-16
Troubleshooting for Motor Constant Tuning
[ATT-1] When ATT-1 or ATT-2 occurs

This indicates that a measurement error At an early stage of Auto-tuning
has occurred during tuning. (1) The B01 motor rating item may not be set correctly.
[ATT-2] Check the setting value.
This indicates that an operation error (2) Adjustment
has occurred during tuning. 1) Increase B19-1 by 100% and continue Auto-tuning
until the error disappears.
2) If high sound is heard from the motor, decrease
B19-1 until the sound disappears.
3) Increase B19-2 by 100% and continue Auto-tuning
until the error disappears.
4) If ATT-1 and ATT-2 occur even after the above
adjustments, continue to change B19-1 and B19-2
by 50% trying various combinations.
For some motors, better result may be obtained
when B19-1 and/or B19-2 is less than 100%.
[ATT-8] When ATT-8 occurs

This indicates that the output voltage A thumping sound is heard during operation.
was not stable for one second during
Increase or decrease B39-3 by 2 to 5% and continue
tuning.
Auto-tuning.
Normally, the thumping sound will subside in less than
a second.

This occurs if the standards are Follow the above procedures to adjust so that D16-0 to
displayed in D16-0 to 2 is greatly 2 to satisfy the standards.
[OC-x] When OC-x occurs

An overcurrent fault has occurred. This will occur if the B39-1 setting value is too high.
Decrease to B39-1.
Error displays
For V24-OP1 E00 : ATT-n
For V24-OP2
n : Automatic tuning step
DANGER
Do not use the inverter when the tuning judgment standards are not satisfied.
The inverter could start unexpected operations and result in a hazardous state.
7-17
7.3.4 Adjusting the magnetic pole position estimation with the panel
There are various types of motors having various types of characteristics. Adjustments to match the
motor's characteristics may be necessary for the magnetic pole position estimation function to work
properly.
Before starting normal operation, carry out magnetic pole position operation with the panel, and confirm
that the tuning standards are satisfied.
DANGER
The rotator must be fixed with mechanical brakes during the tuning process.
Do not start this process when the brakes are released or the stator is not fixed. It can be extremely
hazardous.
(1) Parameters related to automatic adjustment

Parameters tuning function selection
6-7
0 Pole magnetic position estimation selection 121. 223. 222. 7-2
7-29
Parameters displaying tuning judgment standards

The tuning results are displayed when tuning is completed. Judge the acceptability of the results with
this display.
If each displayed detail does not satisfy the standards, adjust the [tuning adjustment parameters] so
that the standards are satisfied.
No. Parameter Unit Standards Ref. page
The estimation results judgment standards 1 is displayed.
2 Judgment standards 3 % No applicable standards. This does not need to be 7-19
adjusted.
3 Judgment standards 4 7-19
This must be within 10 .
Tuning adjustment parameters

The following parameters are adjusted if the judgment standards displayed in D16-0 to 3 are not
satisfied.
B39 Pole position estimation (PM)
7-19
1 PM tuning voltage % 10. 200. 50.
7-20
2 PM tuning time 2. 32. 4. 7-19
3 Voltage error correction current (PM) % 0. 50. 10. 7-20
ACR gain for magnetic pole position
4 rad/s 100. 6000. 1500. 7-20
estimation
ACR time constant for magnetic pole position
5 ms 0.1 300.0 2.5 7-20
estimation
F Magnetic pole position estimation test mode 0. 1. 0. 7-19
7-18
(2) Magnetic pole position estimation function adjustment procedures


Preparation for tuning (2) [LCL] will turn ON.
STOP LCL

Starting tuning estimation operation will start as
Set the [B39-F: magnetic pole position soon as the key is pressed.
estimation test mode] to [1.], and press the A sound will be heard from the
LCL motor during estimating.
SET key. The magnetic pole position
estimation operation will be carried out once
LCL
when the SET key is pressed.
Display during tuning operation After tuning

adjustment has
[LCL] will flicker during tuning, and it will been completed,
change to a solid light when tuning is start tuning again.
completed.
Tuning error
If an error [ATT-n] occurs during tuning, refer to the section
Troubleshooting for Motor Constant Tuning on the next page.
Tuning adjustment
Confirming the adjustment results

After tuning is completed confirm that the results When D16-0, 1 are lower than standards
satisfy the following judgment standards. Increase B39-1.
Standards If the D16-0, 1 values do not increase, also
Name increase B39-2.
value
Judgment
D16-0 120% or more
standards 1
Judgment
D16-1 120% or more Normally, if the D16-0, 1, reference values are
standards 2
Judgment satisfied, D16-3 (judgment standards 4) will satisfy
D16-3 Within 10 the judgment standards. If the D16-0, 1, standards
standards 4
are satisfied but D16-3 (judgment standards 4) is
not satisfied, automatic adjustment cannot be
completed. Set the motor design value with the
panel.
7-19
Troubleshooting for magnetic pole position estimation

This occurs if the standards are 1) Repeat tuning by increasing B39-4 in increments of
displayed in D16-0 to 2 is greatly 100rad/s and decreasing B39-5 in decrements
d i t d 1.0ms until the error no longer occurs.
2) If ATT-9 occurs even after adjusting with 1) above,
return B39-4, 5 to the default value (B39-4: 1500.
B39-5: 10.0), and increase B39-3 by 5%. Then
repeat 1) above.
3) If ATT-9 occurs even after the above adjustments,
return B39-4 and 5 to the default (B39-4:1500,
B29-5:10.0), and perform 1) after decreasing B39-3
by 5%.
When OC-x occurs

[OC-x]
An over-current fault has occurred. This will occur if the B39-1 setting value is too high.
Decrease to B39-1.
Error displays
For V24-OP2
n : Automatic tuning step
DANGER
Do not use the inverter when the tuning judgment standards are not satisfied.
The inverter could start unexpected operations and result in a hazardous state.
7-20
7.3.5 Trial operation using panel
Run the motor with operation panel to confirm the motor operation and the motor rotation direction,
etc.
Check the following matters before starting trial

operation :
1) Are the parameters such as output rating set? 7.3.2 Parameters
2) Are the motor constants set?

If automatic tuning has been executed, are the 7.3.3 Automatically adjusting the motor
judgment standards satisfied? constants for the PM motor
3) Has the magnetic pole position estimation

7.3.4 Adjusting the magnetic pole position
function been adjusted?
estimation with the panel
Are the judgment standards satisfied?
(1) Set the operation speed, acceleration and jerk for operating with the operation panel with parameters
B48-1 to 3.
When operating for the first time, set the values to a low level, and gradually increase them
after confirming the operation and safety.
The speed setting can be changed during operation.

LCL
(Press the SET key after changing the value to apply the changes.)
Note) 1) The maximum speed setting value is B48-0: Car speed at maximum speed setting.
2) The maximum acceleration value is 10-fold the B48-0: Car speed at maximum speed
setting or 1.500, whichever is smaller.

1 Speed setting (during LCL) m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100 { { { {
Acceleration setting
2 m/s2 0.001 1.500 0.100 { { {
(during LCL)
3
3 Jerk setting (during LCL) m/s 0.001 1.500 0.200 { { {
STOP LCL
(2) To run the motor using the operation panel, press + SET to enter the local mode.
The status display LED [LCL] will turn ON.
FWD REV
(3) Confirm the safety and then press the or key to start operation.
FWD
Confirm that the motor runs in the "forward direction" while the key is held down.
* Forward run: Indicates that the motor is rotating in the counter-clockwise direction (CCW) looking
from the opposite-coupling side.
If any abnormality occurs, such as the "motor runs in reverse", "current flows but motor does not
rotate", or "motor quivers", the "motor main circuit wiring phase may be incorrect" or "the encoder's A
phase and B phase may be incorrect".
Refer to section "7.3.7 Hints for trial operation", and adjust the state.
If the main circuit wiring phase order has been interchanged, always carry out "magnetic pole
position estimation" again.
7-21
7.3.6 Trial operation using controller (Inspection operation)
After confirming that the motor operates correctly with trial operation from the panel, run the motor with the
run command from the controller. (Switch to the remote mode first.)
When carrying out trial operation with the controller, carry out inspection operation to confirm that the
command and car movement direction match.
Also confirm that the brake operation and speed command timing is correct.
(1) Confirm that the motor rotates in the forward run direction and the car moves up when the UP
command is issued from the controller.
(2) If the car lowers when the UP command is issued from the controller, the motor rotation direction and
car operation direction do not match. (The car is lowering when the motor rotates in the forward
direction.)
In this case, interchange the F RUN (C03-0) and R RUN (C03-2) settings in the inverter's sequence
input settings. The command and rotation direction will match.
Note that the recognition (lower when motor rotates in forward direction) in the inverter will not change
just by changing the settings. To change the recognition, the bias polarity must also be changed with
the following parameter (B16-6).
Setting when load direction is reversed

6 Bias direction selection 1. 2. 1. { {

The state in which the elevator rises when the motor is running in the forward direction is called
"Forward".
Examples
<Before changes>
The followings are the set and the car lowers in respect to the UP command :
Connect UP command to PSI1 and set FRUN .............................. C03-0 = 1
Connect DOWN command to PSI2 and set RRUN ....................... C03-2 = 2
Bias direction selection .................................................................. B16-6 = 1
<After changes>
Set as follows :
Connect UP command to PSI1 and change to RRUN................... C03-0 = 2
Connect DOWN command to PSI2 and change to FRUN............. C03-2 = 1
7-22
7.3.7 Hints for trial operation
(1) Relation of motor rotation direction and encoder signal polarity

When using the VT240EL with an elevator, due to the control, a basic relation applies to the following
items.
direction"
Encoder
Motor
Forward
run
Forward run (CCW)
Sheave A phase
B phase
Reverse UP( F RUN)
U run A
View point V
Reverse run W
B DOWN
(CW)
(R RUN)
U
V
Car W
Up
Counter-
weight
Down VT240EL
Load
sensor

direction"
When the U, V and W phases of the inverter and motor are connected to each other,
the forward run command is issued to the inverter (F RUN is turned ON), and the motor will
rotate in the CCW (counter-clockwise direction) looking from the coupling side (view point shown
in figure).
During forward run, the encoder signal polarity generates pulses in the A phase to B phase order.
During forward run, the car moves up.
Up
Down
Speed command Forward run

Reverse run
Elevator speed Up
Down
Encoder output (A phase)
Encoder output (B phase)
7-23
(2) Adjusting the command and rotation direction
a) Trial operation using panel

FWD
When carrying out trial operation with the panel, if the key is pressed and the forward run is
applied, the motor must rotate in the counter-clockwise direction (CCW). If the motor rotates in the
clockwise direction (CW), the motor wiring phase order definition is reversed.
If the encoder phase order and motor rotation direction do not match, the following problems may
occur.
Motor does not rotate
Current flows but motor does not rotate
Motor quivers
In this case, refer to the following table and correct the wiring and settings.
Motor rotation Encoder
direction signal order
Panel * Looking from * Using motor
Explanation Measures
operation opposite- rotation
coupling side direction as
reference
Counter- AB The relation is correct. No measures are required.
clockwise
(CCW) BA The encoder phase order is incorrect. Set C50-2=2.
1) The motor rotation direction is 1) Interchange the motor wiring V
reversed. phase and W phase so that the
The encoder signal relation is motor rotates in the
correct as AB in respect to the counter-clockwise direction when a
forward run command. forward run command is issued.
AB
2) When the measures for 1) above 2) Set C50-2=1 so that the encoder
are taken, the encoder signal will signal is AB in respect to the
"FWD" be reversed as BA in respect to forward run command.
(forward run the forward run command, so the
command) relation will be incorrect.
Clockwise (CW)
The encoder signal is also motor rotates in the
reversed as BA in respect to the counter-clockwise direction when a
forward run signal. forward run command is issued.
BA
2) When the measures for 1) above 2) "Measures 2)" are not required
are taken, the encoder signal will since "Measures 1)" were
be AB in respect to the forward effective.
run command, so the relation will
be correct.
Note 1) If the main circuit wiring phase order has been interchanged, always carry out
"magnetic pole position estimation" again.
Note 2) If the encoder phase order is adjusted (C50-2 changed), the pulse output from the
option PCB will also follow the settings. Check the signal order before using the
controller.
b) Trial operation using controller

The correct relation of the inverter's forward run command, motor and encoder signals can be set
in the section "Trial operation using panel".
Next, confirm the controller UP command and car travel direction with trial operation using the
controller.
Controller Inverter input Car travel
command signal direction
Up The relation is correct. No measures are required.
UP 1) Change the inverter input signal to
F RUN The controller command direction and [R RUN].
command Down
car travel direction do not match. 2) The load direction is reversed, so
reverse the load detection polarity.
Refer to "Chapter 7.3.6 Trial operation using controller" for the actual setting methods.
7-24
7.3.8 Adjustment during normal operation
After completing the inspection operation correctly with the procedures given in sections up to Chapter
7.3.6, carry out normal operation using the controller. Adjustments completed during normal operation
include adjustment of the roll back and adjustment of the ride comfort (suppression of vibration).
The parameters required for adjustment are given below.
(1) Roll back adjustment

Set the parameters according to the type of load feedback (digital or analog).
Refer to section "6.5 Torque bias function" for details.
The adjustment procedures using a load cell (analog feedback) are shown below.
Relation of torque bias amount and analog command input value
Torque bias amount
B16-B Torque bias amount

at full load
Torque bias amount

at balanced load
Analog input
value (load)
B16-A
Torque bias amount B16-7 B16-8 B16-9
at no-load
Parameter
Setting value
No. Parameter
Unit Min. Max. Default
* Set B16-7 to 9 (analog bias voltage) as a percentage of the full scale

of the input terminal being used.
<Example>
If the analog input voltage is (0 to 10V), the full scale is 10V.
If the analog input voltage for a full load (100% load) is 9V, the
percentage will be 90% (=9V/10V 100%).
7-25
Adjustment procedures
1) Calculate the analog input voltage in the no-load state as a percentage of the full scale, and set it in
the analog bias voltage 0 (B16-7).
* The load detection's analog input voltage can be confirmed with [D17-A: Load detection].
2) In the no-load state, operate the elevator from the lowest floor to the highest floor, and confirm that roll
back does not occur.
* If roll back occurs in the direction when the car is rising, the bias amount is too low.
Increase the output torque bias 0 (B16-A) until the roll back is eliminated.
Conversely, if roll back occurs in the direction when the car is lowering, the bias amount is
excessive.
Decrease the output torque bias 0 (B16-A) until the roll back is eliminated.
Note) "- (minus)" indicates the bias direction. Thus, "increase the setting value" here
means to increase the value.
3) Next, adjust the roll back in the full-road (100% load) state in the same manner as the no-load
adjustment.
Calculate the analog input voltage in the full-load state (100% load) as a percentage of the full scale,
and set it in the analog bias voltage 2 (B16-9).
4) In the full-load state (100% load), operate the elevator from the lowest floor to the highest floor, and
confirm that roll back does not occur.
* If roll back occurs in the direction when car is rising, the bias amount is too high.
Decrease the output torque bias 2 (B16-B) until the roll back is eliminated.
Conversely, if roll back occurs in the direction when car is lowering, the bias amount is too
low.
Increase the output torque bias 2 (B16-B) until the roll back is eliminated.
5) Set the analog bias voltage 1 (B16-8) to the value between B16-7 and B16-9.
[B168] = ( [B16-7] + [B16-9] ) / 2
_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/
_/_/_/ When using the _/_/_/
_/_/_/ "Start lock control (anti-roll back function) _/_/_/

_/_/_/ without the load sensor, refer to Chapter 6.5.2. _/_/_/
_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/
(2) Adjusting the comfort of ride

Vibration, which affects the comfort of ride, can be caused by various factors such as the effect of
electrical control, or the mechanical effect of the installation state. The precautions related to the
machine time constants, and the method for adjusting the state to lessen the effect of electric control,
such as control response and torque compensation, is explained in this section. The comfort of ride
can also be affected by insufficient torque during acceleration, so select an inverter with appropriate
capacity.
7-26
a) Machine time constants

The machine time constants refer to the time is required to accelerate the motor and loads total
inertia to the base speed at the rated speed. Calculate the constants as shown below and set
accordingly. If the machine time constants are not set correctly, the speed response will not follow
the setting, and it will be difficult to adjust the comfort of ride.
2
J Nbase
Tm = 10.97
Power
Tm: Machine time constant [ms]
J: Total Inertia [kg/m2] (=1/4 GD2 [kgf/m2])
-1
Nbase: Base speed [min ]
Power: Motor rated output [W]
Setting value
No. Parameter
b) Speed response
The "car's vibration state" may differ according to the speed. The comfort of ride can be adjusted in
detail by setting the control response for setting, high speeds and stopping.
Setting value
No. Parameter
Integral time constant compensation
4 % 20. 500. 100.
coefficient 1
5 % 20. 500. 100.
coefficient 2
6 % 20. 500. 100.
coefficient 3
9 Changeover time 1 sec 0.000 3.000 0.500
A Changeover time 2 sec 0.000 3.000 0.500
Speed
command
Changeover speed 1
(B4A-7)
Changeover speed 2
(B4A-8)
Response and
Response 1 (B4A-0)
compensation
Compensation
coefficient Response 2 (B4A-1) coefficient 1 (B4A-4)
Compensation
coefficient 2 (B4A-5)

Compensation (B4A-9) (B4A-A) Compensation
coefficient 1 (B4A-4) coefficient 3 (B4A-6)
7-27
Example of use
"The motor does not vibrate when the speed is somewhat high, but vibrates for a while after starting"
1) Set the "speed where vibration is eliminated" in changeover speed 1 (B4A-7).
* Vibration can also occur if the setting value is too high. If the vibration does not "cease" or
"increases" even when the setting value is increased, try decreasing the setting value.
response 1, but the "integral time constant compensation coefficient" should be adjusted when
value is decreased. (Note that this is the opposite of the ASR response.) Vibration could result if
this coefficient is too small.
c) Torque compensation
If the speed traceability during acceleration, etc., is poor (if the elevator speed is slow in respect to
the speed command), large vibration could occur.
In this case, compensate the acceleration torque to stabilize the speed traceability during
acceleration and support the speed delay and vibration.
If the speed traceability during acceleration is poor, and vibration, etc., occurs, increase [B4C-0:
acceleration amount torque compensation gain] in increments of 5.0%, and suppress the vibration.
Note that if the value is too high, the vibration could increase.
Setting value
No. Parameter
B4C ASR extension
Acceleration amount torque compensation
0 % 0.0 200.0 80.0
gain
Acceleration amount torque compensation
1 ms 0. 1000. 5.
LPF time constant
7-28
7.4 Cases when not using magnetic pole position estimation function
An encoder with U, V and W signals or absolute value signal must be used when not using this function.
7.4.1 Basic settings
(1) Selecting the encoder

Select the type of encoder to be used.

C51 Encoder setting
0 Encoder selection 1. 7. 5. {
=1 : A, B, Z-phase + U, V, W-phase signal

=2 : A, B, Z-phase + serial absolute signal
=3 : A, B, Z-phase + U, V, W-phase signal (reduced wiring)
=4 : A, B, Z-phase + C, D-phase (analog output type)
=5 : A, B, Z-phase with magnetic pole position estimation function
=6 : A, B, Z-phase + C, D-phase (analog output type) with magnetic pole position estimation
function, for start lock control
=7 : A, B, Z-phase + C, D-phase (analog output type) without magnetic pole position estimation
function, for start lock control
* =7 available from the software version II

* If [C51-0 Encoder selection] is set to 5 or 6, B39-0 f0 will automatically be set to 2 (magnetic pole
position estimation function valid.)
(2) Magnetic pole position estimation selection

Set parameter [B39-0: magnetic pole position estimation selection] to [xx1.], and set the magnetic pole
position estimation function to "OFF".

B39 Magnetic pole position estimation selection
0 121. 223. 222. {
1 2 1.
=1 : Magnetic pole position estimation function OFF
=2 : Estimation with secondary phase (normal)
=3 : Estimation with primary phase (only special IMP)
f1 : =2 : Estimated phase reference (fixed)

If f0=1, the control is based on the Z-phase pulse.
f2 : Run signal output during magnetic pole position estimation

=1 : Output
=2 : Do not output
7-29
7.4.2 Setting parameters according to encoder type
The various parameters which must be set for each type of encoder are shown below.
Refer to the following parameter numbers and set each parameter appropriately for the encoder being
used.
ABZ+UVW Analog Analog

Parameter ABZ + ABZ + Only
Name (reduced (using (using
No. UVW Serial ABZ
wiring) DN4) D5/8)
Encoder AB phase advance direction
C50-2 { { { { { {
selection
C50-3 Encoder ABZ pulse type selection { { { { { {
C51-0 Encoder selection 1 2 3 5 4 6 7*
C51-1 AB phase-Z phase type selection { { { { { {
C51-2 Encoder Z phase signal reversal { { { { { {
Encoder UVW advance direction
C51-3 { {
selection
C51-4 Z-IN U phase winding phase angle { { { { {
C51-5 Z-IN U phase angle { { { { {
C51-6 Encoder UVW pulse type selection { {
C51-7 UVW measurement start wait time {
C51-8 UVW measurement time {
C51-9 ABZ measurement start wait time {
C52-0 A-phase detection gain { {
C52-1 A-phase detection offset { {
C52-2 B-phase detection gain { {
C52-3 B-phase detection offset { {
C52-4 C-phase detection gain {
C52-5 C-phase detection offset {
C52-6 D-phase detection gain {
C52-7 D-phase detection offset {
* C51-0 = 7 can be set from software version II.
(1) Encoder selection (C51-0)

Refer to "Chapter 7.4.1 Basic selection, Section 1)".
(2) Encoder AB phase advance direction selection (C50-2)

C50 Encoder setting
Encoder AB phase advance
2 1. 2. 1. { { {
direction selection
7-30
Set according to the potential relation of the encoder AB phase signals when the motor is rotated in
the clockwise direction.
=1: Forward =2: Reverse
* Encoder signal waveform when motor is rotating in counter-clockwise direction (CCW)
A phase
B phase When C50-2 = 1 (during CCW rotation)
Time
A phase
When C50-2 = 2 (during CW rotation)
B phase
Time * If C50-2 is set to 2, set C50-3 to 0.
(3) AB phase-Z phase type selection (C51-1)
(4) Encoder Z phase signal reversal (C51-2)

C51 Encoder setting
AB phase-Z phase type
1 0. 2. 1. {
selection
Encoder Z phase signal
2 1. 2. 1. {
reversal
With the VT240EL, the following four patterns are estimated for the A, B, Z-phase signals.
1) Rising edge of A phase which comes when Z phase signal is High (during forward run)
2) Falling edge of A phase which comes when Z phase signal is High (during reverse run)
3) Rising edge of Z phase (during forward/reverse run)
Zero point Zero point
A phase A phase
B phase B phase
Z phase Z phase
Time Time
For 1) For 2)
Zero point Zero point
A phase A phase
B phase B phase
Z phase Z phase
Time Time
For 3) (Forward run) For 3) (Reverse run)
7-31
C51-1 (AB phase - Z phase type selection) must be set to 0 for the relations shown in 1) and 2)
above to be established. IN all other cases 3), this is set to 1.
=0 : Zero point position detection at rising edge of A phase when B phase is Low and Z phase is
High (no Z phase error detection)
=1 : Zero point position detection at rising edge of Z phase (no Z phase error detection)
=2: Zero point position detection at rising edge of Z phase (Z phase error detection)
C51-2 (encoder Z phase signal reversal) is set to 2 if the Z phase signal ON is defined as Low.
=1 : Non-invert
=2 : Invert
(5) Encoder ABZ pulse type selection (C50-3)

C50 Encoder setting
Encoder ABZ pulse type
3 0. 15. 0. {
selection
Only when using an encoder with signal specifications that cannot be handled with the C50-2 and
C51-2 settings, set C50-3 to reverse or interchange the signals.
The signal conversion circuit will function with the combination shown in the table below according to
the C50-3 setting No.
(Note) Set C50-3 to 0 (no signal reversal/interchange) when C50-2 and C51-2 have been set.
C50-3 AB
A-IN forward/ B-IN forward/ Z-IN forward/
setting inter-
reverse run reverse run reverse run
value change
0
1 Reverse
2 Reverse No
3 Reverse Reverse inter-
change
4 Reverse Reverse
5 Reverse Reverse A-IN1 AB interchange
6 Reverse Reverse A phase signal
B-IN1
7 Reverse Reverse Reverse B phase signal
8 Z-IN Z phase signal
9 Reverse
10 Reverse AB Signal conversion circuit
11 Reverse Reverse inter-
change
12 Reverse
13 Reverse Reverse
14 Reverse Reverse
15 Reverse Reverse Reverse
7-32
(6) Encoder UVW advance direction selection (C51-3)
(7) Encoder UVW pulse type selection (C51-6)

C51 Encoder setting
Encoder UVW advance
3 1. 2. 1. {
direction selection
Encoder UVW pulse type
6 0. 7. 0. {
selection
Set these parameters when using an A, B, Z phase + U, V, W phase signal or wire-reduced type A, B,
Z phase + U, V, W phase signal encoder.
When using the wire-reduced type A, B, Z phase + U, V, W phase signal encoder, the VT240EL
defines the first signal input in the A, B, Z phase signal wire as the U, V, W phase signals respectively.
Refer to the following figure and set C51-3 (encoder UVW advance direction selection) according
to the phase relation of the encoder's U, V, W phase signals during forward run (CCW rotation).
* Encoder signal waveform when motor is rotating in counter-clockwise direction (CCW)
U phase
V phase When C51-3 = 1 (during CCW rotation)
W phase
Time
U phase
V phase When C51-3 = 2 (during CW rotation)
W phase * If C51-3 is set to 2, set C51-6 to 0.

Time
Refer to the following diagram and table, and invert the signals with the C51-6 setting only when
using an encoder with signal specifications which cannot be handled with the C51-3 setting.
C51-6 U-IN V-IN W-IN

setting forward/ forward/ forward/
value reverse reverse reverse Reverse
run run run During CCW rotation
U-IN
u
0
1 Reverse V-IN v
2 Reverse
W-IN w
3 Reverse Reverse
4 Reverse Time
5 Reverse Reverse Signal conversion circuit
6 Reverse Reverse
7 Reverse Reverse Reverse
7-33
(8) Z-IN U phase angle (C51-5)
a) For A, B, Z phase + U, V, W phase signal or wire-reduced type A, B, Z phase + U, V, W phase

signal.
If there is a phase difference between the Z phase pulse and U phase pulse of the encoder being
used, set that phase difference in C51-5.
If there is no phase difference between the Z phase pulse and U phase pulse, set "0".
Z phase
C51-5 180
U phase
60
V phase
W phase
Time
Encoder Z phase and U, V, W phase signals (during CCW rotation)
b) For A, B, Z phase + serial absolute signal

Only when there is a phase difference between the Z phase pulse and serial absolute signal zero
point, set that phase difference with an angle unit.
Z phase
C51-5
Serial signal
0
Time
Encoder Z phase and serial absolute signal (during CCW rotation)
c) For sine wave signal

Set the phase of the sine wave signal generated by the Z phase pulse of the encoder in use in
C51-5.
Z phase
C51-5
SIN signal
90
COS signal
Time
Encoder Z phase and sine wave signal (during CCW rotation)
7-34
(9) UVW measurement start wait time (C51-7)

(10) UVW measurement time (C51-8)
(11) ABZ measurement start wait time (C51-9)

C51 Encoder setting
UVW measurement start
7 ms 0. 1000. 2. { {
wait time
8 UVW measurement time ms 0. 1000. 2. { {
ABZ measurement start wait
9 ms 0. 1000. 2. { {
time
When using a wire-reduced type A, B, Z phase + U, V, W phase signal encoder, set the parameters
according to the specifications of the encoder in use.
The A, B, Z phase signal wires have a high impedance (hereafter, HI-Z) when the encoder power is
turned ON. Set the UVW signal measurement start time in C51-7 based on the time that all three wires
are released from the high impedance state.
Set the UVW signal measurement end time in C51-8 based on the UVW signal measurement start
time (C51-7).
(If the UVW signal cannot be measured after this time elapses, the fault "SP-6" will be output.)
Set the time to wait before starting control with the ABZ signal in C51-9 based on the UVW signal
measurement end time (C51-8).
(Note) The timer operates at a 2ms cycle, so set all of these times with an integer fold of 2.
Encoder power
Encoder output signal HI-Z

UVW signal output ABZ signal output
Inverter reception UVW signal ABZ signal

state measurement measurement
Time
UVW signal UVW signal ABZ signal

measurement measurement measurement
start wait time start wait
C51-7 C51-8 C51-9
Wire-reduced type encoder output signal
7-35
7.4.3 Tuning the Z-IN U phase winding phase angle (C51-4)
(1) Outline
This automatic tuning is a function with automatic adjusts of the phase angle (C51-4) of the encoder Z
phase pulse and PM motor U phase coil.
When C51-4 is automatically adjusted with this automatic tuning function, the phase does not need to
be adjusted when installing this encoder onto the PM motor. Even if the adjustment has been
completed, it should be readjusted to increase the adjustment accuracy.
C51-4 During forward run (CCW)

Z phase
Vuv
PM motor inductive Vu Vv
electromotive
waveform
Time
30
(2) Procedure
CAUTION
Do not carry out maintenance, such as wiring or mounting the option PCB while the PM motor is running.
Even if the inverter power is not turned ON, the PM motor could rotate by the connected load or machine
and cause a high voltage generating in the motor terminals. If the PM motor is connected to the inverter,
the inverter could be powered when the PM motor rotates.
Always ground the motor and inverter.
When executing automatic tuning, the motor must be isolated from the load and machine, etc.
The motor will automatically rotate in the forward and reverse run directions during automatic tuning.
Always check the safety around the motor before starting automatic tuning.
Automatic tuning can be started only in the local operation mode. Confirm that the "LCL" LED is ON.
The motor could vibrate and rotate during automatic tuning.
If the vibration is large, stop operation immediately.
If the automatic tuning function does not end correctly, always turn the inverter power OFF before
investigating or confirming the operation.
The contact output FLT will function if the automatic tuning does not end correctly. In equipment that uses
this contact, keep the operation of the related devices in mind.
After setting the encoder parameters or after automatic tuning, do not move the position at which the
encoder is fixed onto the motor, or interchange the motor's U, V, W phase wires.
7-36

1) Separate the motor from the load so that the motor
can be rotated as an isolated unit.
2) Set the output rating (B01) and motor constant (B03)
parameters.
3) Confirm that [A03-2: DC brake current] is set to 50%.
4) Set the encoder related parameters listed in section
7.4.2.

[LCL] will turn ON.
STOP LCL

Set [B19-0 automatic tuning selection] to 6 (encoder
phase adjustment (for PM)).

The motor must be rotated, so if the mechanical brakes
are engaged, release them.
Tuning will start as soon as
the key is pressed.
The motor will rotate
during tuning.
Starting tuning
FWD REV
Press or to start tuning.

This occurs if the Z phase pulse Check whether the Z phase
is not detected within three turns is disconnected.
(12 seconds) after tuning is
executed.
Tuning operation display

[LCL] will flicker during tuning, and will change to a solid
light when finished.
7-37
DANGER
The motor must be rotated during this tuning.

Separate the motor from the load so that the isolated motor can be rotated with no load.
The motor will rotate so check the safety around the motor before starting.
If it is difficult to operate the motor only :

With this method, the motor is rotated several turns with inspection, and then the value displayed
at D15-0 is set for C51-4.
<Procedures>
1) Set the motor rating or encoder AB phase advance direction settings, and adjust the magnetic
pole position estimation.
* Refer to the explanation on magnetic pole position estimation for details.
2) Set B39-0 f0=2, and the magnetic pole position estimation function is used.
Set the B39-0 f0 to 2 (estimation phase reference).
3) Carry out inspection operation and rotate the motor. A value will appear at D15-0 after several
rotations.
* The first value at D15-0 is zero.
4) After the operation stops, manually set the D15-0 value in C51-4.
5) Set B39-0 f0=1, and the magnetic pole position estimation function is not used.
DANGER
Always start operation after completing the required settings.

There is a risk of unpredicted operation.
7.4.4 Adjusting the analog output encoder setting (C52-0 to 7)

C52 Analog output encoder setting
0 A-phase detection gain % -200.0 200.0 100.0 {
1 A-phase detection offset % -20.0 20.0 0.0 {
2 B-phase detection gain % -200.0 200.0 100.0 {
3 B-phase detection offset % -20.0 20.0 0.0 {
4 C-phase detection gain % -200.0 200.0 100.0 {
5 C-phase detection offset % -20.0 20.0 0.0 {
6 D-phase detection gain % -200.0 200.0 100.0 {
7 D-phase detection offset % -20.0 20.0 0.0 {
Usually, this does not need to be adjusted, but make sure that the settings are within the following range
with low-speed inspection operation. When operation is started and a signal is input from the encoder, a
value is set in D09. Adjust so that the D09 value is as shown below. Adjust the offset before adjusting the
gain. Add the amount displayed in D09-0/1 to the offset in C52-1/3.
7-38
No. Name Target value Adjustment accuracy Working range

D09-0 A-phase detection offset 0.0% 3% 10%
D09-1 B-phase detection offset 0.0% 3% 10%
D09-2 A-phase detection amplitude 100.0% 100% to 200% 50% or more
D09-3 B-phase detection amplitude 100.0% 100% to 200% 50% or more
D09-4 C-phase detection offset 0.0% 3% 10%
D09-5 D-phase detection offset 0.0% 3% 10%
D09-6 C-phase detection amplitude 100.0% 100% to 200% 50% or more
D09-7 D-phase detection amplitude 100.0% 100% to 200% 50% or more
Note that the difference between the A-phase detection amplitude and B-phase detection amplitude is
within 5% for the adjustment accuracy and within 30% for the working range. Adjust the gain so that the
target value is within the adjustment accuracy. Due to secular changes, error up to the working range will
not affect the ride comfort. When adjusting, take the secular changes into consideration and adjust to the
target value is within the adjustment accuracy.
* C52-4 to 7 and D09-4 to 7 are valid from software version II.
7-39
7-40
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
8.1 Flow to trial operation ............................................................................................................8-1

8.2 Actual examples of using multi-speed command ..................................................................8-2
8.2.1 Wiring ............................................................................................................................8-2
(1) Connection diagram..........................................................................................................8-2
(2) Parameters related to wiring .............................................................................................8-3
(3) Operation chart .................................................................................................................8-4
8.2.2 Parameters....................................................................................................................8-6
(1) Basic parameters (power voltage, motor rating related) ...................................................8-6
(2) Program settings (speed, acceleration, jerk).....................................................................8-7
(3) External brake control .......................................................................................................8-8
8.2.3 Automatically adjusting the motor constants for the IM motor .......................................8-9
(1) Automatic adjustment procedures ....................................................................................8-9
(2) Troubleshooting for motor constant tuning........................................................................8-10
(3) Precautions.......................................................................................................................8-10
8.2.4 Trial operation using panel ............................................................................................8-11
8.2.5 Trial operation using controller (Inspection operation)...................................................8-12
8.2.6 Hints for trial operation ..................................................................................................8-13
(1) Relation of motor rotation direction and encoder signal polarity .......................................8-13
(2) Adjusting the command and rotation direction ..................................................................8-14
8.2.7 Adjustment during normal operation..............................................................................8-15
(1) Roll back adjustment ........................................................................................................8-15
(2) Adjusting the comfort of ride .............................................................................................8-16
8.1 Flow to trial operation
The flow to operation when using the VT240EL and IM motor in combination is shown below.
The procedures from "installation and wiring" to "Confirmation of operation with inspection operation" are
given.
Always observe the procedures and precautions.
Refer to "Chapter 4 Wiring" and

Installation and wiring. correctly wire.
Power ON Carefully confirm the safety

before turning the power ON.
Set the basic parameters such

Setting the function as "programmable input/output",
parameters "power voltage" and "motor
rating".
If the motor constants
can be confirmed, set
from the panel.
If the motor
constants cannot
Setting the motor Setting the motor be confirmed,
constants (panel setting) constants (tuning setting) perform tuning.
Refer to Chapter
8.2.3.
Run the motor with operation

Trial operation using the panel to confirm the motor
panel operation and the motor rotation
direction, etc.
Trial operation using the Carry out inspection operation

controller (inspection with the controller, and confirm
operation) the car operation direction.
8-1
8.2 Actual examples of using multi-speed command

An actual example of using the multi-speed command is given below.
In this example system, an incremental encoder only with the A, B and Z phase signals is used. The
"V24-DN1 (complementally compatible)" speed detector PCB (option) is used, and the sequence input
logic is set to "sink type".
8.2.1 Wiring
(1) Connection diagram

An example of connecting the main circuit, encoder and sequence circuit is shown below.
Refer to "Chapter 4 Wiring" for details on each circuit's specifications.
76D DBR
L+1 L+2
VT240EL B
MCCB MC
L1 U
L2 V
IM
L3 W
L- PG
[A phase pulse output] -13[PAO] 12VDC Max.150mA -8[12P]

[B phase pulse output] -14[PBO] -2[0P]
-10[PA]
I=5 to 30mA -6,-7[OP] A phase -3[0P]
MAX.24V+10%
-11[PB]
B phase
-4[0P]
-12[PZ]
Z phase
-5[0P]
V24-DN1 (Option)
TB1
20k
** Use twist-pair shielded cables
AI3
Load detector
20k
0 to 10V COM
0V
RY24V
RY24V
TB2
Run command UP PSI1 SINK RA MBRK : Brake release
1
Run command Ry RC COM command
PSI2 2 RY24V
DOWN W1 FA
Emergency stop PSI3 FLT : Fault
FB
EMS Ry
PSI4 4.7k FC COM
Multi-speed S0
PSI5 SOUR
Multi-speed S1 PSO1 ZSP : Zero speed
Multi-speed S2 PSI6 4.7k
PSO2 RDY2 : READY 2
Fault reset PSI7 1
2 RY0V OFF PSO3
RESET PSO3 RUN : Run
W2 PSOE COM
RY0 ON
RY0V DS1-4
TB2
8-2
(2) Parameters related to wiring

The "PCB settings" and programmable input/output settings are required when wiring the circuit as
shown in (1) Connection diagram on the previous page and are explained in this section. When these
parameters are set, data can be exchanged with the externally assigned signals.
a) Setting the PCB

Set both the L-bit W1 (for PSI1 to 6) and the S2 (for PSI7) to sink logic (No. 1 side).
DS1
ON
1 2
OPEN 1 120
W1 PSI1 to 6 V1 2 I1
V2 3 I2
1 2
PSO3 4 PULSE
W2 PSI7
b) Programmable input/output
z Program sequence input z Program sequence output

Terminal Setting Terminal Setting
No. Symbol Parameter No. Parameter
block value block value
C03 Sequence input terminal function - 1 C13 Output terminal function
0 F RUN Forward run PSI1 1 RA-RC terminal output
2 MBRK 27
1 EMS Emergency stop PSI3 3 selection
2 R RUN Reverse run PSI2 2 PSO1 terminal output
3 ZSP 23
selection
C04 Sequence input terminal function 2 4 RDY2 5
selection
2 S0 Program setting PSI4 4 PSO3 terminal output
5 RUN 1
3 S1 Program setting PSI5 5 selection
4 S2 Program setting PSI6 6 FA-FB-FC terminal output
6 FLT 2
selection
z Torque bias
Terminal Setting
No. Parameter
block value An example for setting the
C07 Analog input terminal load detector input to AI3 0
to 10V is shown here.
A Analog torque bias AI3 4
C12 Setting input terminal
A AI3 terminal input mode 0 to 10V 1
B AI3 input gain 1.000
C AI3 input offset 0.00
D Filter time constant for AI3 input 100.
0 Automatic torque bias selection Analog 2
6 Bias direction selection 1
The default values are used here.
A Output bias torque 0 -100.0 Adjust these to the actual system.
B Output bias torque 1 100.0
8-3
(3) Operation chart

The basic operation chart when using an IM is shown below.
Device and
INV. READY
(RDY2) 1) 10)
CONT.
CONT. UP or DOWN
INV. 2)
9)
INV. Run answer
CONT. (RUN) 4)
INV. T1
Torque bias 3) T1
Motor
T2 8) T5
INV. Brake release
command 5)
CONT. (MBRK)
T3 T4
6) 7)
INV. Speed pattern
INV. Speed pattern

Motor setting
INV. Zero speed
CONT. (ZSP)
CONT. start point
1) READY (RDY2)
2) RUN command
Turn the RUN command ON while the inverter READY (RDY2) signal is ON.
3) Torque bias
Set the gradient to apply torque bias with T1: [B46- Torque bias current rising edge/falling edge
time].
4) Run answer (RUN)


brakes.
8-4
6) Speed pattern
start wait time].
This parameter is set to consider the time to actual release the brakes after they are excited.

Set the time from brake engage command output after zero speed (ZSP) has turned ON with T4:
[B46-4 brake engage wait time].

engage.
When not using the brake answer (MBRK_ans) signal, do not set to [0.00].

OFF.

8-5
8.2.2 Parameters
The basic parameters required for control are listed below.

Before starting use, refer to "Chapter 6 Various functions and parameters", and set the parameters
according to the system.
(1) Basic parameters (power voltage, motor rating related)

0 Control mode selection 21. 24. 24. 6-19

B01 Output rating
0 Rated input voltage setting 1. 7. 7. 6-19
Inverter
1 Motor rated output 0.10 750.00 6-20
rating
2 No. of motor poles 2. 100. 4. 6-20
230. or
3 Motor rated voltage V 40. 480. 6-20
400.
-1
4 Max. speed (Nmax) min 40. 9999. 72. 6-21
5 Base speed (Nbase) min-1 40. B01-4 72. 6-21
6 Motor rated current A 6-21
rating0.3 rating rating
8 No. of encoder pulses P/R 30. 10000. 8192. 6-21
9 No-load output voltage V 20. 500. 160. 6-22
According
A Carrier frequency setting 1. 5. 6-22
to type

Inverter
0 R1 : Primary resistance (Mantissa section) m 0.010 9.999 6-29
rating
Inverter
1 R1 : Primary resistance (Exponent section) -3 4 6-29
rating
R2 : Secondary resistance (Mantissa
2 m 0.010 9.999 1.000 6-29
section)
R2 : Secondary resistance(Exponent
3 -3 4 0. 6-29
section)
4 L : Leakage inductance (Mantissa section) mH 0.100 9.999 1.000 6-29
5 L : Leakage inductance (Exponent section) -3 4 0. 6-29
6 M : Excitation inductance (Mantissa section) mH 0.100 9.999 1.000 6-29
M : Excitation inductance (Exponent
7 -3 4 0. 6-29
section)
8 Rm : Iron loss resistance (Mantissa section) m 0.100 9.999 1.000 6-29
9 Rm : Iron loss resistance (Exponent section) -3 5 0. 6-29

0 Car speed at maximum speed setting m/s 0.050 4.000 1.000 6-22

B4A ASR Response changeover function
3 Machine time constant ms 10. 20000. 1000. 6-22
8 Selection mode setting 1. 3. 1. 6-32
8-6
(2) Program settings (speed, acceleration, jerk)

B48-0 sett-
ing value
B48-0 sett-
ing value
B48-0 sett-
A Speed setting (program 2) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
B Speed setting (program 3) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value 6-30
B48-0 sett-
C Speed setting (program 4) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
D Speed setting (program 5) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
E Speed setting (program 6) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
B48-0 sett-
F Speed setting (program 7) m/s 0.000 0.000
ing value
6-30
A Jerk setting (program 2) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
B Jerk setting (program 3) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
6-30
C Jerk setting (program 4) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
D Jerk setting (program 5) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
E Jerk setting (program 6) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
F Jerk setting (program 7) m/s3 0.001 1.500 0.200
Note) The default speed setting (factory-set value) is [0.000].

Even if the program setting is selected with this setting and operation is started, the speed
designation will remain zero so the motor will not rotate. Always set the required speed setting
before starting use.
8-7
(3) External brake control

6-40
1 Torque bias current rising edge/falling time s 0.00 0.50 0.20
6-47
2 Brake release wait time (LB) s 0.00 2.50 0.00
6-47
3 Acceleration start wait time (BL) s 0.00 2.50 0.00
4 Brake engage wait time (DB) s 0.00 2.50 0.00
6-48
5 Torque bias attenuation wait time s 0.00 0.50 0.30
RUN error judgment time when engaging 6-48
6 s 0.0 25.0 5.0
brake 6-63
6-49
7 Brake answer error judgment time s 0.0 25.0 0.0
6-63
A RUN-OFF wait time s 0.00 0.50 0.05 6-49
B Deceleration command fault judgment time s 0.0 25.0 10.0 6-49
C Brake answer error judgment speed level % 0.0 25.0 2.0 6-64
6-50
D Operation selection for brake operation fault 0. 2. 0.
6-64
8-8
8.2.3 Automatically adjusting the motor constants for the IM motor
The IM motor's constants can be automatically adjusted by automatically adjusting the B02-0 to 7 motor
circuit constants shown below.
Rotary type automatic adjustment or manual adjustment is required to achieve the motor's fullest capacity
and performance.

Inverter
0 R1 : Primary resistance (Mantissa section) m 0.010 9.999
rating
Inverter
1 R1 : Primary resistance (Exponent section) -3 4
rating
2 R2 : Secondary resistance (Mantissa section) m 0.010 9.999 1.000
6-29
3 R2 : Secondary resistance(Exponent section) -3 4 0.
4 L : Leakage inductance (Mantissa section) mH 0.010 9.999 1.000
5 L : Leakage inductance (Exponent section) -3 4 0.
6 M : Excitation inductance (Mantissa section) mH 0.010 9.999 1.000
7 M : Excitation inductance (Exponent section) -3 4 0.
(1) Automatic adjustment procedures

[LCL] will turn ON.
STOP LCL

Set [B19-0 automatic tuning selection] to 1 Tuning will start as soon as
(simple adjustment). the key is pressed.
A sound will be heard from
the motor during tuning.
Starting tuning
FWD REV
Press or to start tuning. Caution
In the simple adjustment mode (mode 1), the excitation
inductance is estimated using the motor rating values so
there may be an error in the output voltage. If a high
accuracy is required for the actual output torque used for
Display during tuning operation the torque command (accuracy of 10% or more in
[LCL] will flicker during tuning, and it will respect to rated output torque), carry out the following
change to a solid light when tuning is adjustment after automatic tuning.
completed. 1) Carry out rated speed operation with a load of 10% or
less, and adjust B02-6, 7 (M': excitation inductance) so
that B01-9 (no-load output voltage) and output voltage
(D03-1) match.
2) Carry out rated speed operation with a 100% load, and
Tuning error adjust B02-2, 3 (secondary resistance) so that the
If an error [ATT-n] occurs during tuning, refer rated voltage (B01-3) and output voltage (D03-1)
to the section Troubleshooting for Motor match.
Constant Tuning on the next page. If the secondary resistance (B02-2) value is increased
(or decreased) during operation, the output voltage will
decrease (or increase).
8-9
(2) Troubleshooting for motor constant tuning
No. Cause and measures

1) The motor may not be connected correctly.
Check the connection.
2) The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set correctly.
n=1
Check the parameter settings.
3) A special circuit constant motor may be in use.
Change B19-1, 2.
The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set correctly.
n=2
1) The load and machine may not be separated.
Separate the load and machine.
n=3 2) The acceleration time may be short.
Decrease the B48-2: acceleration setting (for LCL).
3) If the motor is vibrating, adjust the torque stabilization gain (B18-2).
1) The load and machine may not be separated.
n=4 Separate the load and machine.
2) If the motor is vibrating, adjust the torque stabilization gain (B18-2).
1) If the motor is not stopped, decrease the B48-2: acceleration setting (for LCL).
n=5 2) If the motor is stopped, the B00 and B01 parameters may not be set correctly.
The B00 and B01 parameters may not be set correctly.
n=6
Error display
For V24-OP2
n: Automatic tuning step
(3) Precautions
If the rated voltage indicated on the motors rating nameplate is larger than the power voltage effective
value *0.85, set the power voltage effective value *0.85 or less for the rated voltage (B01-3).
Example: For 380V power, calculate 380V*0.85, and set 323V or less.
When setting the rated voltage (B01-3) to a value smaller than the rated voltage indicated on the
motors rating nameplate, set the rated output (B01-1) to B01-3 setting/rated voltage on motor rating
nameplate * rated voltage on motor rating nameplate.
8-10
8.2.4 Trial operation using panel
Run the motor with panel operations to confirm the motor operation and the motor rotation
direction, etc.
(1) Set the operation speed, acceleration and jerk for operating with the operation panel with parameters
B48-1 to 3.
When operating for the first time, set the values to a low level, and gradually increase them
after confirming the operation and safety.
The speed setting can be changed during operation.

LCL
(Press the SET key after changing the value to apply the changes.)
Note) 1) The maximum speed setting value is B48-0: Car speed at maximum speed setting.
2) The maximum acceleration value is 10-fold the B48-0: Car speed at maximum speed
setting or 1.500, whichever is smaller.

1 Speed setting (during LCL) m/s 0.000 B48-0 0.100 { { { {
Acceleration setting 2
2 m/s 0.001 1.500 0.100 { { {
(during LCL)
3
3 Jerk setting (during LCL) m/s 0.001 1.500 0.200 { { {
STOP LCL
(2) To run the motor using the operation panel, press + SET to enter the local mode.
The status display LED [LCL] will turn ON.
FWD REV
(3) Confirm the safety and then press the or key to start operation.
FWD
Confirm that the motor runs in the "forward direction" while the key is held down.
* Forward run: Indicates that the motor is rotating in the counter-clockwise direction (CCW) looking
from the opposite-coupling side.
If any abnormality occurs, such as the "motor runs in reverse", "current flows but motor does not
rotate", or "motor quivers", the "motor main circuit wiring phase may be incorrect" or "the encoder's A
phase and B phase may be incorrect".
Refer to section "8.2.6 Hints for trial operation", and adjust the state.
8-11
8.2.5 Trial operation using controller (Inspection operation)
After confirming that the motor operates correctly with trial operation from the panel, run the motor with the
run command from the controller. (Switch to the remote mode first.)
When carrying out trial operation with the controller, carry out inspection operation to confirm that the
command and car movement direction match.
Also confirm that the brake operation and speed command timing is correct.
(1) Confirm that the motor rotates in the forward run direction and the car moves up when the UP
command is issued from the controller.
(2) If the car lowers when the UP command is issued from the controller, the motor rotation direction and
car operation direction do not match. (The car is lowering when the motor rotates in the forward
direction.)
In this case, interchange the F RUN (C03-0) and R RUN (C03-2) settings in the inverter's sequence
input settings. The command and rotation direction will match.
Note that the recognition (lower when motor rotates in forward direction) in the inverter will not change
just by changing the settings. To change the recognition, the bias polarity must also be changed with
the following parameter (B16-6).
Setting when load direction is reversed

6 Bias direction selection 1. 2. 1. { {

The state in which the elevator rises when the motor is running in the forward direction is called
"Forward".
Examples
<Before changes>
The followings are set and the car lowers in respect to the UP command :
Connect UP command to PSI1 and set FRUN .............................. C03-0 = 1
Connect DOWN command to PSI2 and set RRUN ....................... C03-2 = 2
<After changes>
Set as follows :
Connect UP command to PSI1 and change to RRUN................... C03-0 = 2
Connect DOWN command to PSI2 and change to FRUN............. C03-2 = 1
8-12
8.2.6 Hints for trial operation
(1) Relation of motor rotation direction and encoder signal polarity

When using the VT240EL with an elevator, due to the control, a basic relation applies to the following
items.
direction"
Encoder
Motor
Forward
run
Forward run (CCW)
Sheave A phase
B phase
Reverse UP( F RUN)
U run A
View point V
Reverse run W
B DOWN
(CCW)
(R RUN)
U
V
Car W
Up
Counter-
weight
Down VT240EL
Load
sensor

direction"
When the U, V and W phases of the inverter and motor are connected to each other, and
the forward run command is issued to the inverter (F RUN is turned ON),
the motor will rotate in the CCW (counter-clockwise direction) looking from the coupling side
(view point shown in figure).
During forward run, the encoder signal polarity generates pulses in the A phase to B phase order.
During forward run, the car moves up.
Up
Down
Speed command Forward run

Reverse run
Elevator speed Up
Down
Encoder output (A phase)
Encoder output (B phase)
8-13
(2) Adjusting the command and rotation direction
a) Trial operation using panel

FWD
When carrying out trial operation with the panel, if the key is pressed and the forward run is
applied, the motor must rotate in the counter-clockwise direction (CCW). If the motor rotates in the
clockwise direction (CW), the motor wiring phase order definition is reversed.
If the encoder phase order and motor rotation direction do not match, the following problems may
occur.
Motor does not rotate
Current flows but motor does not rotate
Motor quivers
In this case, refer to the following table and correct the wiring and settings.
Motor rotation Encoder
direction signal order
Panel * Looking from * Using motor
operation opposite- rotation
coupling side direction as
reference
Counter- AB The relation is correct. No measures are required.
clockwise
(CCW) BA The encoder phase order is incorrect. Set C50-2=2.
The encoder signal relation is motor rotates in the
correct as AB in respect to the counter-clockwise direction when a
forward run command. forward run command is issued.
AB
2) When the measures for 1) above 2) Set C50-2=1 so that the encoder
are taken, the encoder signal will signal is AB in respect to the
"FWD" be reversed as BA in respect to forward run command.
(forward run the forward run command, so the
command) relation will be incorrect.
Clockwise (CW)
The encoder signal is also motor rotates in the
reversed as BA in respect to the counter-clockwise direction when a
forward run signal. forward run command is issued.
BA
2) When the measures for 1) above 2) "Measures 2)" are not required
are taken, the encoder signal will since "Measures 1)" were
be A=>B in respect to the forward effective.
run command, so the relation will
be correct.
Note 1) If the main circuit wiring phase order has been interchanged, always carry out
"magnetic pole position estimation" again.
Note 2) If the encoder phase order is adjusted (C50-2 changed), the pulse output from the
option PCB will also follow the settings. Check the signal order before using the
controller.
b) Trial operation using controller

The correct relation of the inverter's forward run command, motor and encoder signals can be set
in the section "Trial operation using panel".
Next, confirm the controller UP command and car travel direction with trial operation using the
controller.
Controller Inverter input Car travel
command signal direction
Up The relation is correct. No measures are required.
UP 1) Change the inverter input signal to
F RUN The controller command direction and [R RUN].
command Down
car travel direction do not match. 2) The load direction is reversed, so
reverse the load detection polarity.
Refer to "Chapter 8.2.5 Trial operation using controller" for the actual setting methods.
8-14
8.2.7 Adjustment during normal operation
After completing the inspection operation correctly with the procedures given in sections up to Chapter
8.2.6, carry out normal operation using the controller. Adjustments completed during normal operation
include adjustment of the roll back and adjustment of the ride comfort (suppression of vibration).
The parameters required for adjustment are given below.
(1) Roll back adjustment

Set the parameters according to the type of load feedback (digital or analog).
Refer to section "6.5 Torque bias function" for details.
The adjustment procedures using a load cell (analog feedback) are shown below.
Relation of torque bias amount and analog command input value
Torque bias amount
B16-B Torque bias amount

at full load
Torque bias amount

at balanced load
Analog input
value (load)
B16-A
Torque bias amount B16-7 B16-8 B16-9
at no-load
Parameter
Setting value
No. Parameter
* Set B16-7 to 9 (analog bias voltage) as a percentage of the full scale

of the input terminal being used.
<Example>
If the analog input voltage is (0 to 10V), the full scale is 10V.
If the analog input voltage for a full load (100% load) is 9V, the
percentage will be 90% (=9V/10V 100%).
8-15
Adjustment procedures
1) Calculate the analog input voltage in the no-load state as a percentage of the full scale, and set it in
the analog bias voltage 0 (B16-7).
* The load detection's analog input voltage can be confirmed with [D17-A: Load detection].
2) In the no-load state, operate the elevator from the lowest floor to the highest floor, and confirm that roll
back does not occur.
* If roll back occurs in the direction when the car is rising, the bias amount is too low.
Increase the output torque bias 0 (B16-A) until the roll back is eliminated.
Conversely, if roll back occurs in the direction when the car is lowering, the bias amount is
excessive.
Decrease the output torque bias 0 (B16-A) until the roll back is eliminated.
Note) "- (minus)" indicates the bias direction. Thus, "increase the setting value" here
means to increase the value.
3) Next, adjust the back roll in the full-road (100% load) state in the same manner as the no-load
adjustment.
Calculate the analog input voltage in the full-load state (100% load) as a percentage of the full scale,
and set it in the analog bias voltage 2 (B16-9).
4) In the full-load state (100% load), operate the elevator from the lowest floor to the highest floor, and
confirm that roll back does not occur.
* If roll back occurs in the direction when the car is rising, the bias amount is too high.
Decrease the output torque bias 2 (B16-B) until the roll back is eliminated.
Conversely, if roll back occurs in the direction when car is lowering, the bias amount is too
low.
Increase the output torque bias 2 (B16-B) until the roll back is eliminated.
5) Set the analog bias voltage 1 (B16-8) to the value between B16-7 and B16-9.
[B168] = ( [B16-7] + [B16-9] ) / 2
_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/
_/_/_/ IM control is not compatible with _/_/_/
_/_/_/ "Start lock control (anti-roll back function) _/_/_/
_/_/_/ without load sensor. _/_/_/

_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/
(2) Adjusting the comfort of ride

Vibration, which affects the comfort of ride, can be caused by various factors such as the effect of
electrical control, or the mechanical effect of the installation state. The precautions related to the
machine time constants, and the method for adjusting the state to lessen the effect of electric control,
such as control response and torque compensation, is explained in this section. The comfort of ride
can also be affected by insufficient torque during acceleration, so select an inverter with appropriate
capacity.
8-16
a) Machine time constants

The machine time constants refer to the time required to accelerate the motor and loads total
inertia to the base speed at the rated speed. Calculate the constants as shown below and set
accordingly. If the machine time constants are not set correctly, the speed response will not follow
the setting, and it will be difficult to adjust the comfort of ride.
2
J Nbase
Tm = 10.97
Power
Tm: Machine time constant [ms]
J: Total Inertia [kg/m2] (=1/4 GD2 [kgf/m2])
-1
Nbase: Base speed [min ]
Power: Motor rated output [W]
Setting value
No. Parameter
b) Speed response
The "car's vibration state" may differ according to the speed. The comfort of ride can be adjusted in
detail by setting the control response for setting, high speeds and stopping.
Setting value
No. Parameter
4 % 20. 500. 100.
5 % 20. 500. 100.
6 % 20. 500. 100.
9 Changeover time 1 s 0.000 3.000 0.500
A Changeover time 2 s 0.000 3.000 0.500
Speed
command
Changeover speed 1
(B4A-7)
Changeover speed 2
(B4A-8)
Response and
Response 1 (B4A-0)
compensation
Compensation
coefficient Response 2 (B4A-1) coefficient 1 (B4A-4)
Compensation
coefficient 2 (B4A-5)

Compensation (B4A-9) (B4A-A) Compensation
coefficient 1 (B4A-4) coefficient 3 (B4A-6)
8-17
Example of use
"The motor does not vibrate when the speed is somewhat high, but vibrates for a while after starting"
1) Set the "speed where vibration is eliminated" in changeover speed 1 (B4A-7).
* Vibration can also occur if the setting value is too high. If the vibration does not "cease" or
"increases" even when the setting value is increased, try decreasing the setting value.
response 1, but the "integral time constant compensation coefficient" should be adjusted when
value is decreased. (Note that this is the opposite of the ASR response.) Vibration could result if
this coefficient is too small.
c) Torque compensation
If the speed traceability during acceleration, etc., is poor (if the elevator speed is slow in respect to
the speed command), large vibration could occur.
In this case, compensate the acceleration torque to stabilize the speed traceability during
acceleration and support the speed delay and vibration.
If the speed traceability during acceleration is poor, and vibration, etc., occurs, increase [B4C-0:
acceleration amount torque compensation gain] in increments of 5.0%, and suppress the vibration.
Note that if the value is too high, the vibration could increase.
Setting value
B4C ASR extension
0 % 0.0 200.0 80.0
compensation gain
1 compensation LPF time ms 0. 1000. 5.
constant
8-18
8-19
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
9.1 Protective functions ...............................................................................................................9-1

9.2 Troubleshooting with fault display .........................................................................................9-2
9.2.1 Emergency stop, power module error, overcurrent........................................................9-2
9.2.2 Overvoltage, undervoltage, phase failure ......................................................................9-3
9.2.3 Overheat, speed error ...................................................................................................9-4
9.2.4 Automatic tuning error, overload fault ............................................................................9-5
9.2.5 Ground fault, I/O error ...................................................................................................9-6
9.2.6 CPU error, external fault, E2PROM data error ...............................................................9-8
9.2.7 Elevator fault .................................................................................................................9-9
9.2.8 Output switch control error ............................................................................................9-10

9.1 Protective functions
The VT240EL has the protective functions shown below.
Name Function
Power module fault The output is cut off and the operation is stopped if operation of the main circuit power
(PM) modules over-current is detected.
Over-current control The output is cut off and the operation is stopped if the instantaneous output current
trip (OC) exceeds the default value (approx. 300% of the system rating).
Over-voltage control The output is cut off and the operation is stopped if the instantaneous main circuit DC
trip (OV) voltage exceeds the default value (800V (400V system)/400V (200V system)).
The output is cut off and the operation is stopped if the DC voltage drops to 65% or less
Under-voltage trip (UV) of the rating (600V (400V system)/300V (200V system)).
This function is not valid if the sequence input [UVT_MSK] is ON.
A phase failure in the main circuit input/output is detected, the output is shut off, and the
Phase failure (PHL)
operation is stopped.
An increase in the heat sink temperature is detected with the thermistor and
Over-heat (UOH) thermostat. When the temperature exceeds the default value, the output is cut off and
the operation is stopped.
There are systems of overload and motor overload.
Over-load control trip The output is cut off and the operation is stopped if 180% is exceeded for 5 seconds or
(OL) 170% for 30 seconds (system overload), or if the C22-8, 9 value is exceeded (motor
overload).
Grounding control trip The output will be cut off and the operation will stop if a ground fault is instantaneously
(GRD) detected.
Self-diagnosis The built-in CPU, peripheral circuits and data are tested and monitored for
(IO, dER, CPU) abnormalities.
The output current is limited with the over-current limiter set with B18-0.
Over-current limit With the V/f control, the output frequency is automatically adjusted to less than the
over-current limiter.
This is valid only during V/f control. If the output frequency is reduced suddenly, the DC
voltage will rise in the main circuit due to the regenerative power from motor. The
Over-voltage limit
output frequency will be automatically adjusted to prevent the DC voltage in the main
circuit from exceeding the default value.
9-1
9.2 Troubleshooting with fault display
9.2.1 Emergency stop, power module error, over-current
Sub-code Cause Measures

EMS : Emergency stop This indicates that the sequence command EMS is ON.
(Code : 01)
When set in C00-4=2 (fault output at Take actions against the EMS cause, and
EMS emergency stop), this will occur if the turn the EMS input OFF.
sequence command EMS is input.
PM-n : Power module error Indicates that the short circuit protection circuit activated.
(Code : 02)
PM-1 Stopped 1) The main circuit element may be 1) Replace the main circuit element.
In constant speed faulty. 2) Check the safety of the motor wiring.
PM-2 2) A short circuit in the load may have 3) Improve the installation environment
operating
occurred in respect to noise, such as the
PM-3 Accelerating 3) This may have malfunctioned due to grounding method or wiring distance.
PM-4 Decelerating noise.
PM-5 Braking
PM-6 In ACR
PM-7 In excitation
PM-9 In automatic tuning
OC-n : Over-current This indicates that an output over-current has occurred.
(Code : 03)
1) The main circuit element may be 1) Replace the main circuit element.
broken. 2) Improve the installation environment
OC-1 Stopped
2) This may have malfunctioned due to in respect to noise, such as the
noise. grounding method or wiring distance.
1) The load may have changed suddenly 1) Carry out ASR adjustment, and
(car vibration). suppress the car vibration.
2) The power voltage may have dropped. 2) Confirm that the power supply is
3) The power module may have correct.
malfunctioned due to noise. 3) Improve the installation environment
In constant speed
OC-2 4) If this occurs during magnetic pole in respect to noise, such as the
operation
position estimation, the setting value grounding method or wiring distance.
may be incorrect. 4) Adjust the following parameters.
Decrease the B39-1, 2 setting value
Decrease the B39-4 setting value
Increase the B39-5 setting value
1) The acceleration rate may be too fast. 1) Decrease the acceleration setting.
OC-3 Accelerating 2) The ACR control setting may be 2) Adjust the ACR gain (A20-0) and time
incorrect. constant (A20-1).
OC-4 Decelerating 1) The decelerate rate may be too fast. 1) Decrease the deceleration setting.
OC-5 Braking 1) A short circuit or sudden change of the 1) Check the state of the motor wiring
OC-6 In ACR load may have occurred. and load.
OC-7 In excitation
1) The setting value may be incorrect. 1) Decrease the B19-1, 2 setting value.
OC-9 In automatic tuning 2) When using PM automatic tuning,
decrease the B39-1, 2 setting value.
9-2
9.2.2 Overvoltage, under-voltage, phase failure

OV-n : Overvoltage This indicates that the instantaneous main circuit DC voltage exceeded the
default value.
(Code : 04) Default value: 800V (400V series)/400V (200V series)
1) The power voltage may have 1) Set the power voltage to within the
OV-1 Stopped
increased. specified range.
In constant speed increased. specified range.
OV-2
operation 2) The speed or load may have 2) Check the state of the motor wiring and
fluctuated suddenly. load.
OV-3 Accelerating
increased. specified range.
2) The speed or load may have 2) Check the state of the motor wiring and
fluctuated suddenly. load.
3) The DC regeneration (DB) may not 3) Check the wiring for the DC
OV-4 Decelerating
be functioning properly. regeneration (DB) circuit. Check
4) The power voltage may have whether the regenerative resistor (DBR)
increased. resistance value is too high.
4) Set the power voltage to within the
specified range.
OV-5 Braking 1) The power voltage may have 1) Set the power voltage to within the
OV-6 In ACR increased. specified range.
OV-7 In excitation
OV-9 In automatic tuning
UV-n : Under-voltage This indicates that the main circuit's DC voltage dropped to 65% or less of the
rating during operation.
(Code : 05) ) Rated value: 600V (400V series)/300V (200V series)
In constant speed 1) A power voltage drop, input phase 1) Investigate and correct the power
UV-2
operation failure, instantaneous voltage drop or system.
UV-3 Accelerating instantaneous power failure may
have occurred.
UV-4 Decelerating
UV-5 Braking * This fault will not occur if the
UV-6 In ACR sequence input [UVT-MSK: UPS
operation] turns ON during UPS
UV-7 In excitation operation.
UV-9 In automatic tuning
PHL.n : Phase failure This indicates that a phase failure occurred in the inverter's input or output.
(Code : 06)
1) There may be a phase failure in the 1) Investigate the AC input power supply,
AC input power supply. and eliminate the element.
2) The AC input wiring may be 2) Check that the AC input wire tightening
disconnected. state, and around the terminal block.
PHL.1 Input phase failure 3) The loads torque ripple may be 3) Adjust the ASR.
excessive.
* The validity of the fault detection
can be set with [C22-7: phase
failure detection function selection].
1) The motor wiring may be 1) Check the wire tightening state, and
disconnected. around the terminal block.
2) The motor's primary coil may not be 2) Check the motor.
PHL.2 Output phase failure correct.
* The validity of the fault detection
can be set with [C22-7: phase
failure detection function selection].
9-3
9.2.3 Overheat, speed error

UOHn. : Overheat This indicates that the heat sink temperature has increased abnormally.
(Code : 07)
1) A trouble may have occurred in the 1) If there is an abnormality, replace the
Detect with inverter cooling fan. fan.
UOH1. 2) The ambient temperature may have 2) Lower the ambient temperature 45C or
thermistor
risen. less.
3) The inverter vent or heat-sink may 3) Remove all obstacles from around the
be clogged. ventilation port.
Detect with * If this error occurs during operation,
UOH2.
thermostat the motor will stop with a fault after
the operation is stopped.
SP-n : Speed error This indicates that an error related to the motor speed or encoder has occurred.
(Code : 08)
1) The setting value may be incorrect. 1) Set the over-speed level with C24-0.
SP-1 Over-speed 2) The motor speed may have Check the setting value.
increased because of the load. 2) Check for an abnormality in the load.
1) The setting value may be incorrect. 1) The error level is set with C24-5, 6.
2) The speed tracking may be delayed Check the setting value.
because of an insufficient torque. 2)
3) The car may be vibrating abnormally. a) Check whether the load is excessive.
4) When using the anti-roll back b) Check whether the torque limit setting
function, the encoder may be value A10-3, 4, A11-2, 3 and
disconnected. over-current limit value B18-0 settings
Speed deviation (If operated in the direction that the value are too small.
SP-3
error load is pulled, the car could vibrate Note) If these settings are too high, the
vigorously.) system's ratings could be
* The error between the speed exceeded, and cause an
command value and actual speed over-current or shorten the product
may be excessive. life. Always use the settings within
* The fault output can be set with the rated range
[C24-4: fault output changeover]. 3) Carry out ASR adjustment.
4) Check for an abnormality in the encoder.
1) UVWABZ type 1), 2)
When an abnormal UVW signal state Confirm that the C51-0 settings match
continued for 0.3 seconds. the encoder in use.
2) Serial ABZ 3), 4)
When the correct serial signal could a) Check that the wiring to the speed
not be detected for 0.3 seconds. detection option is correct.
Encoder
SP-5 3) Wire-reduced type b) Check for an abnormality in the
initialization error
When the 3-terminal signal "000" or encoder.
"111" state continued for two
seconds.
4) SIN/COS type
When an abnormal SIN/COS signal
state continued for 0.3 seconds.
1) Serial ABZ 1) Check that the wiring to the speed
The received signal error continued detection option is correct.
for two seconds 2), 3)
2) Wire-reduced type Check for an abnormality in the
The UVW signal measurement failed encoder.
when starting
3) SIN/COS type
SP-6 Encoder error The SIN/COS signal disconnection
was detected during operation
* When C51-0-4, the fault occurs after
stopping.
When C51-0=6, 7, the fault occurs
regardless of whether the motor is
running or stopped.
The encoders Z-phase signal 1) Check that the wiring to the speed
Z-phase detection connection may be incorrect or broken. detection option is correct.
SP-7
error (This occurs only when C51-1=3.) 2) Check for an abnormality in the
encoder.
9-4
9.2.4 Automatic tuning error, overload fault

ATT-n : Automatic tuning error This indicates that the automatic tuning or magnetic pole position estimation did
not end correctly. (Code : 0A)
1) Initialization of Auto-tuning is failed. 1) Try Auto-tuning again with B19-1, -2 to be
2) The motor may not be connected increased by 50% respectively.
correctly. 2) Check the motor wiring connection.
3) The B00 and B01 motor rating 3) Check the B00, B01 motor constant settings.
ATT-1 Setting error parameters may not be set correctly. 4)
4) When using PM motor automatic tuning a) Check that the Z phase signal is not
(B19-0 = 6), the Z phase signal may not broken.
have been detected when the motor was b) Check that the No. of encoder pulse setting
rotating. B01-8 matches the encoder being used.
1) The B00 and B01 motor rating 1) Check the B00, B01 motor constant
ATT-2 Operation error
parameters may not be set correctly. settings.
ATT-3 Run error 1) In the automatic tuning mode in 1) Separate the load, or lessen the load.
which motor rotates, the load may
ATT-4 Load error not have been separated.
ATT-5 End process error 1) The B00 and B01 motor rating 1) Check the B00, B01 motor constant
Convergence parameters may not be set correctly. settings.
ATT-6
operation error
1) The measurement results D16-0, 1 1) Increase B39-1, 2 so that D16-0, 1 were
were not within the references. within the references.
ATT-9 Retry error 2) Adjust the ACR setting B39-4, 5.
Increase or decrease B39-3. For the
details, refer to Page 7-14 to 7-20.
1) The current detection value for the U, 1) Confirm that the motor wire is not
Wire disconnection
V or W phase is 0. disconnected.
during magnetic
ATT-A 2) The MC into which the motor wire is
pole position
inserted may not be operating. Check
estimation detected
the operation.
OL-n : Overload fault This indicates that an overload occurred.
(Code : 0B)
1) The load is too large. 1) Check that the inverter capacity is
* This occurs if the output current correct.
System rating exceeds the system's overload
OL-1 reference during operation.
overload
Overload reference: Inverse time
characteristics for 5 seconds over
180%, or 30 seconds at 170%
1) The deceleration rate may be too 1) Decrease the acceleration rate setting.
fast. 2) Select a resistance value that matches
2) The DB resistance value may be too the system.
big for the regenerative power. 3) Check the C22-4 setting value, and set
3) The [C22-4: DB overload] setting an appropriate value.
value may not be correct.
OL-2 DB resistor overload * This indicates that due to the
regenerative power, the operation
duty of the DB resistor exceeds the
set value.
With the VT240EL, set C22-4 to
[=0.0], and protect the DB resistor
with an external circuit such as a
thermal relay.
1) The motor may be overloaded. 1) Check whether the motor capacity is
Motor rated 2) The [C22-8, 9: motor overload appropriate.
OL-3
overload reference current, time] setting value 2) Check the C22-8, 9 setting value, and
may be incorrect. set an appropriate value.
9-5
9.2.5 Ground fault, I/O error

GRD.n : Ground fault This indicates that a ground fault occurred.
(Code : 0C)
GRD.1 Stopped 1) A ground fault may have occurred in 1) Restore the ground fault point.
In constant speed the power cable or motor. 2) Improve the installation environment in
GRD.2 2) This may have malfunctioned due to respect to noise, such as the grounding
operation
noise. method or wiring distance.
GRD.3 Accelerating
* The fault output can be set with
GRD.4 Decelerating [C31-1: ground fault detection
GRD.5 Braking function].
GRD.6 In ACR
GRD.7 In excitation
GRD.9 In automatic tuning
IO-n : I/O error This indicates that an I/O error occurred.
(Code : 0D)
1) The VT240S may be malfunctioning 1) Look for and remove any sources of
due to external noise, etc. noise around the inverter.
Gate turn-off circuit 2) The OC, OV, GRD or PM fault may 2) Check the faulty history, and investigate
IO-1
error have occurred immediately after the the cause.
run command was input (within
6ms).
1) The VT240S may be malfunctioning 1) Look for and remove any sources of
due to external noise, etc. noise around the inverter.
2) The operation temperature may be 2) Use the inverter in the operation
IO-2 A/D converter error increased. temperature of 45 degree C or lower.
If this error should occur in the
temperature less than 45 degree C,
contact the dealer.
1) The current detector connectors may 1) Properly connect these.
Current detection
IO-3 be connected improperly. 2) Replace if necessary
error
2) The current detector may be faulty.
1) The [C15-1: IDET level] setting may 1) Check the C15-1 setting value, and set
be incorrect. an appropriate value.
2) The excitation current may not be 2) Check that the motor connection is
flowing because incorrect motor correct.
External brake IDET connection.
IO-C
error * The output current is not reaching
the IDET level (C15-1) when the
external brakes are released.
* This does not occur when B46-0 f1
set to 1 (default value).
1) The B46-6 setting value may be 1) Set an appropriate value to match the
incorrect. controller settings.
IO-D RUN OFF error
2) The RUN signal sequence may be 2) Check that the controller setting and
incorrect. sequence input cables are correct.
1) The speed command may be 1) When using the multi-speed command,
incorrect. confirm that the controller settings are
* This error occurs if the speed correct and that the sequence input wire
command does not rise above the is correct.
Speed command at 2) When using the analog speed
IO-D zero speed for longer than the time
starting error command, confirm that the analog input
set in B46-B after the external
brakes are opened. is correct.
* This does not occur when B46-B is
set to 0.00.
9-6

IO-n : I/O error This indicates that an I/O error occurred.
(Code : 0D)
1) The answer signal may not be input 1) Check the input state of the brake
from the external brakes. answer signal [MBRK_ans].
* This occurs if the external brake
release command MBRK and
External brake external brake answer input
IO-E
answer error MBRK_ans do not match for the
time set in [B46-7: brake answer
error judgment time].
* This does not occur when B46-7 is
set to 0.00.
1) This occurs when an abnormal 1) Check whether the temperature
temperature is detected or an error detector is faulty. Replace if necessary.
occurs in the temperature detector.
Temperature * If this error occurs during operation,
IO-F
detection error operation will continue with the
carrier frequency switched to 2kHz.
A fault will be output after the
operation stops.
9-7
9.2.6 CPU error, external fault, E2PROM data error

CPU.n : CPU error This indicates that an error occurred during the CPU, RAM or ROM
self-diagnosis.
(Code : 0E)
CPU.1 Watch dog error 1) This may be malfunctioning due to 1) Look for and remove any sources of
external noise, etc. noise around the inverter.
CPU.2 CPU operation error Turn the power OFF and ON once.
* CPU.1
CPU internal RAM CPU operation is delayed.
CPU.3
error This is detected during normal
CPU.4 External RAM error operation.
E2PROM check sum * CPU.8
CPU.5 This is only displayed.
error
2
The gate is not cut off, and FLT is
CPU.7 E PROM read error not output.
2
CPU.8 E PROM write error * CPU1 to 6, 7, 8
This cannot be output with a specific
CPU.A Stack overflow fault output function.
E.FLT.n : External fault This indicates that an external fault occurred because of the sequence input.
(Code : 11)
1) The sequence input cable may be 1) Remove the error at the EXFLT
E.FLT. faulty. transmission source. Check whether
External fault 1 to 8
1 to 8 2) The C05-8 to F setting values may the sequence input cable is faulty.
be incorrect. 2) Set C05-8 to F to appropriate values.
DER : E2PROM data error This indicates that an error occurred in the data stored in the E2PROM.
(Code : )
This indicates that there is an error in 1) Enter D20-2 and reset all the
the various data stored in the E2PROM. parameters by pressing SET key
(Note) If this appears when starting twice. Then switch the power Off and
up, the details are not On again.
DER. E2PROM data error 2) If the above operation should not
recorded internally. These
details are not read out with have any effect, please contact the
the fault history (D20-0) after dealer.
starting up normally.
9-8
9.2.7 Elevator fault

EL-n : Elevator fault This indicates that a fault occurred in the elevator application.
(Code : 12)
1) The motor's mechanical brakes may 1) Check that the mechanical brakes
not have been released. are normal, and correctly released.
2) The encoder's AB phases may be 2)
reversed. a) Check that the encoder wiring is
EL-1 Motor lock error
(The speed is not fed back.) correct.
3) The encoder cable may be b) Set C50-2 to an appropriate value.
disconnected. 3) Check that the encoder cable is
(The speed is not fed back.) correct.
1) The roll back is excessive. 1) Set the B16-6 setting value
When using the feedback function appropriately according to the car
with load sensor, the torque bias movement direction and motor
direction may be reversed (B16-6 rotation direction.
setting is incorrect). 2) Set these parameters to appropriate
2) The torque bias setting may be values.
incorrect. 3) Check that the input cable is correct.
(B16-7 to 8 when using analog 4) Adjust the control constants (B4B-0
signals, B16-1 to 5, C05-0 to 2 when to 3).
EL-2 Roll back error
using digital signals.)
3) The feedback input cable (load
sensor feedback cable when using
analog signals, sequence input cable
when using digital signals) may be
faulty.
4) When using the anti-roll back
function, this control constant may
be incorrect.
1) The motor may not have been locked 1) Confirm that the motor's mechanical
with the mechanical brakes when brakes are normal, and that the
stopped. motor is locked when the brakes are
* This occurs if the motor's car moves engaged.
Position fluctuation
EL-3 past the set value when stopped.
when stopped error
* The error is not monitored when
C27-4 is set to 0.0.
The fault is not output when C27-5
is set to 1.
1) The encoder AB direction selection 1) Confirm that the encoder AB direction
may be incorrect. is correct, and set C50-2 properly.
2) The encoder connection may be 2) Confirm that the encoder wiring is
broken. correct. Also confirm that the
3) If this error should occur frequently, encoder properly works. If there is
the roll-back/forward may be caused any problem in the encoder, change
Cage moving error due to low start-lock gain. the encoder.
EL-4 4) If this error should occur sporadically, 3) Adjust the start-lock gain (B4B-0) by
during start lock
noise may be on the encoder. increasing the value by 0.2.
* This error is detected when the cage 4) Perform countermeasures against
moves for more than the set value the noise on the encoder.
during the start lock control.
* In case of C27-7=0, this error is not
detected.
9-9
9.2.8 Output switch control error

OMC.OF : Output switch control Switch close error This indicates that an error occurred in the output switch's
answer signal.
(Code : 13)
1) This occurs if the OUTMC_ans is 1) Check the switch.
OFF while the OUTMC is ON, and 2) Confirm that each signal cable is
this state continues for longer than correctly connected.
the time set in C20-4.
2) The switch may not be operating.
3) The switch's auxiliary contact may
Output switch control
OMC.OF not be operating.
Switch close error
4) The signal cable connected to the
sequence input may be
disconnected or connected in
reverse.
* This does not occur when C20-4 is
set to 0.00.
OMC.ON : Output switch control Switch open error This indicates that an error occurred in the output switch's
answer signal.
(Code : 14)
1) This occurs if the OUTMC_ans is 1) Check the switch.
ON while the OUTMC is OFF, and 2) Confirm that each signal cable is
this state continues for longer than correctly connected.
the time set in C20-4.
2) The switch's auxiliary contact may
Output switch control not be operating.
OMC.ON
Switch open error 3) The signal cable connected to the
sequence input may be
disconnected or connected in
reverse.
* This does not occur when C20-4 is
set to 0.00.
9-10
9-11
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
10.1 Connection method..............................................................................................................10-1

10.2 Communication specifications .............................................................................................10-3
10.3 Procedures for enabling communication with host controller ...............................................10-3
10.4 Using the VT240EL Series dedicated communication (standard serial communication) .....10-5
10.4.1 Setting the standard serial transmission function..........................................................10-5
10.4.2 Transmission procedure ...............................................................................................10-6
10.4.3 Transmission format .....................................................................................................10-6
10.4.4 Transmission rules........................................................................................................10-6
10.4.5 Creating a check sum ...................................................................................................10-8
10.4.6 Transmission commands ..............................................................................................10-9
10.4.7 Setting data write (FW) .................................................................................................10-10
10.4.8 Setting data read (FR) ..................................................................................................10-11
10.4.9 Sequence command write (CW) ...................................................................................10-12
10.4.10 Sequence command read (CR) ..................................................................................10-12
10.4.11 Block- A, B, C and U parameter write (DW)................................................................10-13
10.4.12 Block-A, B, C, U and D parameter read (DR) .............................................................10-14
10.4.13 Fault history read (ER)................................................................................................10-15
10.4.14 List of transmission error codes ..................................................................................10-16
10.4.15 Serial transmission sequence command Bit assignment table ...................................10-17
10.5 Using Modbus communication.............................................................................................10-18
10.5.1 Setting the Modbus communication function ................................................................10-18
10.5.2 Modbus protocol ...........................................................................................................10-19
10.5.3 VT240EL Modbus communication time chart ...............................................................10-20
10.5.4 Exceptional response code...........................................................................................10-21
10.5.5 List of standard serial communication code correspondence .......................................10-22
10.5.6 List of Modbus registers and setting examples .............................................................10-23
10.5.7 Modbus additional functions .........................................................................................10-32

The VT240EL is equipped with a serial transmission function using RS485 as a standard. The inverter can
be controlled with a host computer using this function.
Either the Modbus network with Modbus protocol or the VT240EL series original communication protocol
standard serial communication can be selected with the parameters.
CAUTION
The VT240EL is not capable of reading and writing of speed or frequency settings using
serial communication or Modbus communication.
10.1 Connection method

This network is configured of one host computer (master) and 1 to 32 VT240EL units (slaves).
CN2 (connector type: modular) on the basic section or TB3 is used for the connection.
The total length of the connected cable must be within 150 meters.
By using a commercially-available RS485-RS232C converter or USB converter unit as a relay, the inverter
can be connected to a host computer equipped with a serial port or USB, such as a commercially-available
personal computer.
Connecting the host computer and VT240EL (1-on-1)
Host computer Host computer Host computer
RS485
RS232C RS232C USB

VT240EL unit VT240EL unit RS232C/RS485 VT240EL unit USB/RS485
RS485 RS485 converter RS485 converter
CN2 CN2 CN2

or or or
TB3 TB3 TB3
DS1-1 DS1-1 DS1-1
CAUTION
Do not connect both CN2 and TB3 to the host computer.

CN2 is a RJ11 (4-pole 4-core) type modular connector. Pay attention to the number of poles, and prepare
the cable and connector.
Separate the communication cable from the main circuit cable and other power cable.
A shielded twisted pair cable should be used for connecting TB3 and the host computer.
Connect the twisted pair cable's shield to the TB3 SG.
When using a 1-on-1 connection, set the inverter's resistance (DS1 No. 1 switch on basic section) to the
120 side.
When connecting the TB3 and shielded twisted pair cable, do not solder the wires which are exposed after
the sheath is peeled off.
If the communication is distorted and not carried out properly because of noise, etc., connect a ferrite core,
etc., to the cable, and increase the noise resistance.
10-1
When connecting several VT240EL units, connect two wires to each TB3 terminal, and couple the
VT240EL units.
An example of the connection is shown below.
Connecting the host computer and VT240EL (connecting several units)
Host computer
VT240EL unit VT240EL unit VT240EL unit
TB3 TB3 TB3

DS1-1 DS1-1 DS1-1
The details of the TB3 terminal section are shown below.
SG D- D+
TB3
Shielded
To host computer
or inverter
Shielded wire
To next inverter
Shielded
Shielded wire
CAUTION
Separate the communication cable from the main circuit cable and other power cable.
A shielded twisted pair cable should be used for connecting TB3 and the host computer.
Connect the twisted pair cable's shield to the TB3 SG.
When using several slave units, set the resistance (DS1 No. 1 switch on basic section) of the last inverter to
120.
When connecting the TB3 and shielded twisted pair cable, do not solder the wires which are exposed after
the sheath is peeled off.
If the communication is distorted and not carried out properly because of noise, etc., connect a ferrite core,
etc., to the cable, and increase the noise resistance.
10-2
10.2 Communication specifications
Item Specification
Connection method RS485, 2-wire type
Transmission distance Total extension distance: 150m
Baud rate Select from 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400bps
Transmission method Start-stop synchronization, half-duplex communication
Frame configuration Start : 1 bit
Data : 8 bits
Stop : Select from 1 bit or 2 bits
Parity : Select from none, odd or even
Error detection Sum check, parity, framing
Transmission code 8-bit binary or ASCII
Communication protocol Select from Modbus-RTU communication or standard serial
communication
Number of stations Set between 1 and 32
The factory settings are shown below.

Communication protocol : Standard serial communication
Baud rate : 9600bps
Frame configuration : Start: 1bit, Data: 8bit, Stop: 2bit, Parity: odd, Station No.: 01
10.3 Procedures for enabling communication with host controller
The communication parameters must be set to enable communication with the host controller.
The procedure is given below.
(1) Select C26-0, and select the communication method.
Example: C26-0=0: Select standard serial communication.
(2) Select the station No.
Example: C26-2=18
(3) Set the baud rate.
Example: C26-4=5: 38400bps
(4) Set the number of stop bits.
Example: C26-5=1: Stop bit 1 bit
(5) Set the parity.
Example: C26-6=1: No parity
(6) After completing the settings, turn the power OFF once. When the control power has turned OFF, turn
the power ON again.
Communication with the set communication method is now possible.
10-3
An excerpt of the parameter C26 setting details is given below.
No. Parameter Unit Default Min. Max. Function

0 Function selection 0. 0. 1. 0: Standard serial 1: MODBUS
The parameters with a { mark below can be
changed.
Set- Block A Block B, C Parameter
ting Para-
value meter Basic Extend S/W H/W
Parameter change 1 { { { { {
1 1. 1. 5.
protection 2
3 {
4 { {
5 { { {
{: Changeable : Unchangeable
2 Station No. 1. 0. 247. Set the local station No.
Set the minimum time from receiving command
3 Response timer s 0.00 0.00 2.00
to returning an answer.
Standard serial =1: 4800 =2: 9600 =3: 14400
4 communication baud bps 2. 1. 7. =4: 19200 =5: 38400
rate setting =6: 1200 =7: 2400
Standard serial
5 communication stop 2. 1. 2. =1: 1 bit =2: 2 bit
bit setting
Standard serial
6 communication parity 3. 1. 3. =1: None =2: Even =3: Odd
setting
=0: 0.01Hz or 0.1min-1 unit: signed
Standard serial =1: 0.1Hz or 1min-1 unit: signed
communication =2: 0.01% unit: signed
7 0. 0. 5.
frequency (speed) =3: 0.01Hz or 0.1min-1 unit: unsigned
-1
unit setting =4: 0.1Hz or 1min unit: unsigned
=5: 0.01% unit: unsigned
10-4
10.4 Using the VT240EL Series dedicated communication

(standard serial communication)
The following exchanges can be carried out with the host computer by using the VT240EL series
dedicated communication protocol (hereinafter, standard serial communication).
(1) Reading and writing of Block-A, B, C, U parameters
(2) Reading of Block-D monitor parameters
(3) Reading and writing of sequence commands
(4) Reading of fault history
10.4.1 Setting the standard serial transmission function
(1) When executing sequence command write (CW) from the host computer and operating, make sure
that the sequence command serial transmission selection (COP) is ON.
Example) Operation mode : Remote (RMT)
COP command : C03-8 = 16 (ON fixed)
(The inverter is always run with the sequence commands from the host computer.)
Refer to section 10-4-9 Sequence command write (CW) for details on the CW command.
Note) When sending auxiliary operation sequence commands other than emergency stop (EMS),
reset (RESET), or run (F RUN, R RUN) as serial transmission data from the host computer,
make sure that the control switchover method (J2 setting) is serial transmission input.
(C00-6=2)
(2) Set parameter change protection with C26-1.
(3) Set the local station number with C26-2.
(4) Set the response timer value with C26-3.

The response timer is the timer which specifies the minimum time for the VT240EL to return the
response packet after the host computer sends the command packet.
Terminal <OR>
EMS
block
Serial EMS
Terminal
RESET
block <OR>
Serial RESET
S TO P R ST
Panel M OD
Internal command
Other input FW D
functions Panel
R EV
BRAKE Local (LCL)
AFS1
AFS2
AFS3 Terminal F RUN COP Remote (RMT)
S0 block R RUN OFF
S1
S2 F RUN ON
S3 Serial
R RUN
SE
MBRK_an
COPC00-5
S5 1 : Not used together
S6 Terminal Other input C00-6 OFF
S7 block functions
EXC 1 : Terminal
ACR ON 2 : Used together Local (LCL)
FPOS_CM
U functions Remote (RMT)
DVT-MSK
10-5
10.4.2 Transmission procedure
The VT240EL constantly waits for a command from the host computer.
When the VT240EL correctly receives a command from the host computer, it returns a response as shown
below.
Host computer VT240EL

Command
Response
Command
Response
10.4.3 Transmission format
1 packet
Maximum 128 Bytes
"(" "G" STN TEXT "&" SUM ")" CR
(1) Data format: 8-bit ASCII

(2) Packet size: Maximum 128 Bytes
(3) Packet contents
"(" : Head code (1 Byte)
"G" : VT240EL designation code (1 Byte)
STN : Station No. (2 Bytes) Example) Station 1 "01"
Input with a hexadecimal.
TEXT : Text area
"&" : Check sum judgment code (1 Byte)
When not using the check sum, delete the check sum judgment code and check sum.
SUM : Check sum (2 Bytes)
")" : Final code (1 Byte)
CR : Carriage return (1 Byte)
10.4.4 Transmission rules
(1) When there is a request from the host computer, the VT240EL checks the station No. given in the
packet, and processes the request when it matches the local station No. If the station numbers do not
match, the packet is ignored.
(2) Any space codes (20Hex) in the packet sent from the host computer are ignored. Note that the check
sum is calculated including the space codes.
(Example)
( G 0 1 F R 0 0 0 0 & 8 E ) CR
(The space code (The check sum, including the

is ignored.) space code, is calculated.)
10-6
(3) The check sum is always added to the response packet.

The check sum can be omitted from the packet sent from the host computer, but the check sum is
always added to the packet sent from the VT240EL.
(4) All transmission and reception data is 8-bit ASCII data.
(5) All data input before "(" is input in the reception data is ignored.
(6) Even if "(" is input while receiving the packet, the data received up to that point will be aborted.
(Example)
( G (
(Ignored)
Even if "(" is input while receiving the
packet, the data received up to that point
will be aborted.
(7) The reception is interpreted as done only when ")" CR is received.
(8) Several commands can be arranged in one packet. (Up to nine commands.)
In this case, "," is used as the delimiter between commands.
If there are more than ten commands in one packet, a command and error code indicating the excess
will be returned from the VT240EL.
Up to nine commands will be executed normally. An example of the command and response is shown
below.
(Example) Host computer transmission command packet
( G00FW00000001000 , FR0000 , CW0000000000040402 ) CR
(1st command) (2nd (3rd command)
command)
(delimiter) (delimiter)
Response packet
( G00AK , FR00000001000 , AK & 0E )
(Response to (Response to (Response to

1st command) 2nd command) 3rd command)
Make sure that the transmission command packet fits within 128 Bytes.
Also make sure that the response packet in respect to the command packet is within 128 Bytes.
(9) A broadcast packet can be sent.

By setting the station No. to "FF", all VT240EL units in the transmission path will process the packet.
The VT240EL will not send any response packet in respect to the broadcast packet. Thus, only write
requested commands which are valid in the broadcast packet.
(Example)
( G F F F W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 4 ) CR
(By setting the station No. to "FF", the broadcast

packet will be received by all stations.)
10-7
10.4.5 Creating a check sum
(Example)
( G 0 0 F R 0 0 0 0 & 4 D ) CR
28H 47H 30H 30H 46H 52H 30H 30H 30H 30H 26H
Add all
24D HEX
Convert low-order 1 Byte to ASCII
The ASCII codes of the characters between "(" and "&" are added with hexadecimal, and the low-order
byte of the obtained value is converted into 2 characters ASCII code and used for the check sum.
10-8
10.4.6 Transmission commands
Basic command format

CMD Data No.
DATA
(2 Byte) (4 Byte)
Command list
Host computer to VT240EL
CMD Data No. DATA Function
nnnnnnn
FW 000n
(7-digit decimal) This command is invalid with the VT240EL.
FR 000n None
nn nn
CW 000n (12-digit Sequence command write
hexadecimal)
CR 000n None Only sequence command read
Annn
nnnnnn
Bnnn
DW (6-digit decimal or Block-A, B, C, U parameter write
Cnnn
4-digit hexadecimal)
Unnn
Dnnn
Annn
DR Bnnn None Block-D, A, B, C, U parameter read
Cnnn
Unnn
ER 000n None Fault history read
Host computer from VT240EL

CMD Data No. DATA Function
nnnnnnn
FR 000n This command is invalid with the VT240EL.
(7-digit decimal)
nn nn
CR 000n (12-digit Sequence command read (response)
hexadecimal)
Dnnn
Annn nnnnnn
DR Bnnn (6-digit decimal or Block-D, A, B, C, U parameter read (response)
Cnnn 4-digit hexadecimal)
Unnn
nn nn
ER 000n Fault history read (response)
(44-digit)
Successful completion response in respect to write
AK None None
request command
Error code
NK nn None Error response in respect to command
(2 byte)
10-9
10.4.7 Setting data write (FW)

Function : This command is invalid with the VT240EL.
The setting data is written to the selected setting register when the sequence command CFS
is ON and the various setting input point selection: C02 is set to serial fixed. The contents of
the setting data are determined by the control mode selection (C30-0: f0) and data No.
Command
F W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0
CMD DATA. No DATA
(4-digit decimal data No. In this (7-digit decimal setting value. In this
example, this is the "Frequency example, 30.00Hz is set.)
setting" write command.)
Response
A K (Successful completion)
N K Error code
(Error response:
(2 Byte) Refer to the list of transmission error codes for details on
the error codes.)
Setting data table

Control mode DATA No. Name Unit Min. value Max. value
B00-4:Max. B00-4:Max.
V/f control
0 0 0 0 Frequency command frequency frequency
C30-0 : f0 = 1 Following
setting (-) setting
C26-7
setting B01-4:Max. B01-4:Max.
0 0 0 0 Speed command speed speed
setting (-) setting
IM vector, PM 0 0 0 1 Torque setting 0.1% -300.0 300.0
motor control
C30-0 : f0 = 2, 3, 0 0 0 2 Torque bias 1 setting 0.1% -300.0 300.0
4 Drive torque limiter
0 0 0 3 0.1% 0.0 100.0
reduction setting
Regenerative torque limiter
0 0 0 4 0.1% 0.0 100.0
reduction setting
Coded data
(Example)
DATA
0 0 0 1 2 3
(The data will be negative data when "-" is added.)
The data can be set as negative data by adding "-" to the highest order digit of the DATA area.
In the above example, the data is -123.
Frequency command/speed command unit

The units for the frequency command/speed command can be changed with the C26-7: frequency
(speed) unit setting.
The default setting is C26-7=0: 0.01Hz or 0.1min-1 (signed)
10-10
10.4.8 Setting data read (FR)

The setting value set with the FW command is read and returned.
Command
F R 0 0 0 1
CMD DATA. No
(4-digit decimal data No.

In this example, this is the "Torque setting" read command.)
Response
F R 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
CMD DATA. No DATA
(4-digit decimal data No. (7-digit decimal read data. In this

The data No. sent to the example, the data is 100.0%.)
host is returned.)
N K Error code (Error response:

(2 Byte) Refer to the list of transmission error codes for details on the
error codes.)
When the data to be read is coded

For negative read data, a "-" is added to the highest order digit of the data.
(Example)
DATA
0 0 0 1 2 3
(If a "-" is attached to the highest order digit, the data is a negative value.)
In the above example, the data is -123.
10-11
10.4.9 Sequence command write (CW)

Function : A sequence command is issued to the VT240EL. The data sent at this time is held by the
internal sequence command register until it is rewritten. To validate this sequence command,
the sequence command: COP must be ON.
Command
C W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 0 0 0 5
CMD DATA. No DATA1 DATA2
(4-digit decimal. Refer to section (8-digit hexadecimal setting value. In this example
10-4-15 Sequence command bit 000A0005h is set.
assignment table for the numbers.) * Refer to section 10-4-15 Sequence command bit
assignment table for details on the setting values.
Response

error codes.)
10.4.10 Sequence command read (CR)

Function : The sequence command set with the CW command is read and returned.
Command
C R 0 0 0 1
CMD DATA. No
(4-digit decimal date No.

Refer to section 10-4-15 Sequence command bit assignment table for the numbers.)
C R 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 B 6 0 0 2
CMD DATA. No DATA1 DATA2
(4-digit decimal. (8-digit hexadecimal read data. In this example, 004B6002h is read.)
The data No. sent to the * Refer to section 10-4-15 Sequence command bit assignment table
host is returned.) for details on the setting values.
N K Error code
(Error response:
error codes.)
10-12
10.4.11 Block- A, B, C and U parameter write (DW)

Function : The Block-A, B, C and U parameter data in the VT240EL unit is changed.
Note that the parameter change protection may be set with C26-1.
Parameters cannot be changed during operation. Other parameters which cannot be changed
during serial transmission are listed in the cautions.
The data is configured from the list of constants without the decimal point.
Example) B48-1 (speed setting LCL) 1.234m/s 001234
Command
<Example: Block-B parameter setting>
D W B 4 8 1 0 0 1 2 3 4
CMD DATA. No DATA
(4-digit data No.

(6-digit decimal or 4-digit hexadecimal
In this example, this is B48-1:
setting value. In this example, 1.234 is
speed setting (LCL))
set in decimal.)
Response
N K Error code (Error response

(2 Byte) Refer to the list of transmission error codes for details on the error
codes.)
Setting data table

DATA No. Name
A n n n Block-A parameter
B n n n Block-B parameter
C n n n Block-C parameter
U n n n Block-U parameter
Sub No.
Main No.
CAUTION
The parameters that cannot be changed with the write command are shown below. If the write command is
executed for these parameters, an error will be returned (Parameter Read/Write Disable).
A04-0 to 7 (Custom constants) A05-0 to 2 (Block-B, C parameter display skip)
B19-0 (Automatic tuning function) C10-0 to 7 (Custom parameter selection)
C26-0 to 7 (Serial transmission setting)
Parameters not related to control mode selected with C30-0: f0.
(Parameters that are not displayed on the operation panel.)
Coded data
The data can be set as negative data by adding "-" to the highest order digit of the DATA area.
DATA
0 0 1 2 3
10-13
10.4.12 Block-A, B, C, U and D parameter read (DR)

Function : The values of the block-A, B, C, U and D parameters in the VT240EL are read.
Command
<Example: For parameter B read>
D R B 4 8 2
CMD DATA. No
(4-digit decimal data No. Refer to the previous setting data table for details on the numbers.)
Response
D R B 4 8 2 0 0 0 5 4 3
CMD DATA. No DATA
4-digit data No. (6-digit decimal or 4-digit hexadecimal.

The data No. sent to the host In this example, 0.543 in decimal is set.)
is returned.)

error codes.)
Setting data table

DATA No. Name
A n n n Block-A parameter
B n n n Block-B parameter
C n n n Block-C parameter
U n n n Block-U parameter
Sub No.
Main No.
CAUTION
The parameters that cannot be read with the read command are shown below. If the read command is
executed for these parameters, an error will be returned (Parameter Read/Write Disable).
Refer to 10-4-14 List of transmission error codes for details on the error codes.
D20-0 (Fault history display) D20-2 (Parameter A, B, C change list)
D30-1 (Option PCB) C10-0 to 7 (Custom parameter selection)
C26-0 to 7 (Serial transmission setting) D30-0 (Inverter type)
D22-0 (Automatic tuning progress state) Parameters subject to skip with A05-0 to 2
Parameters not related to control mode selected with C30-0: f0.
(Parameters that are not displayed on the operation panel.)
If the data is coded with the targeted data for read, "-" will be attached to the highest-order digit of
DATA.
DATA
0 0 1 2 3
10-14
10.4.13 Fault history read (ER)

Function : The fault history buffer of the VT240EL is read.
Command
DATA No. Explanation
E R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Latest fault history
CMD DATA. No
0 0 0 1 Previous fault history
0 0 0 2 2nd to last fault history
(4-digit decimal data No. refer to the table 0 0 0 3 3rd to last fault history
on the right for details on the number.)
Response
E R 0 0 0 0 0 D 0 1 ; ; 0 0 3 2
CMD DATA. No DATA
(4-digit data No. (Fault buffer corresponding to

The data No. sent to the host is returned.) setting is displayed.)

error codes.)
There are four fault history buffers from the latest to the 3rd to last fault histories. One group of these
buffers is stored in the response.
In one buffer, two fault causes, and the output frequency, output current, DC voltage, hardware fault
signal, cumulative power ON time, and cumulative run time at the time of fault occurrence are stored.
Details of group (DATA)

; 0 3 0 4 ; 0 0 0 0 ; 0/ 0 0 0 0 0 ; 0 0 0 0
Primary fault Secondary fault Output frequency Output current

(4-digit hexadecimal) (4-digit hexadecimal) (5-digit decimal + code) (4-digit decimal)
; 0 3 0 4 ; 0 0 0 0 ; 0 0 0 0 0 ; 0 0 0 0 0
DC voltage Hardware fault signal Cumulative power ON time Cumulative run time
(4-digit decimal) (4-digit hexadecimal) (5-digit decimal) (5-digit decimal)
43 bytes of data are sent to the response data as shown above.

; is used to delimit each item in the group.
The hardware fault signal indicates the status of the D05-1: Hardware detection fault status bit as a 0
to FF hexadecimal.
10-15
10.4.14 List of transmission error codes
The error codes added to the NK response in respect to a command from the host computer are shown
below.
Error code Error name Details

A transmission error, such as parity error or overrun
01 Transmission error
error, was detected.
02 Check sum error The check sum is illegal.
10 Illegal command The command is not defined.
1) The parameter does not exist, or
11 Illegal parameter
2) The transmission format does not match.
1) The data limit is exceeded, or
12 Illegal data
2) The format does not match.
The designated parameter is write-protected.
13 Parameter protect
(Write-protected with C26-1.)
Changing not possible during The designated parameter cannot be changed during
14
operation operation.
Transmission/reception
15 The transmission/reception data exceeds 128 Bytes.
buffer overflow
16 Parameter read/write disable A read or write-prohibited parameter was accessed.
20 EEPROM BUSY The VT240EL is using the non-volatile memory.
10-16
10.4.15 Serial transmission sequence command Bit assignment table

DATA No : 0 0 0 0
DATA1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Always 0 AFS3
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 S0
Always 0 S1
Always 0 S2
Always 0 S3
Always 0 SE
DATA2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AFS2 EMS
AFS1 RST
Always 0 FRUN
Always 0 RRUN
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
BRAKE EXC
Always 0 Always 0
DATA No : 0 0 0 1
DATA1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Always 0 MBRK_ans
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 S5
UVT-MSK S6
Always 0 S7
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
DATA2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 ACR
Always 0 PCTL
Always 0 Always 0
FPOS_CMD Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
10-17
10.5 Using Modbus communication
The Modbus communication method is a single master/slave method. Only the master can start
communication. The slave detects this communication, executes the designated function, and returns a
response message. The master can communicate with the designated slave (station No.) and broadcast to
all slaves. When using broadcast transmission, the slave only carries out the designated function and does
not return a response message.
The following exchanges can be made with the host computer by using this communication function.
(1) Reading and writing of Block-A, B, C, U parameters
(2) Reading of Block-D monitor parameters
(3) Reading and writing of sequence commands
(4) Reading of fault history
(5) Reading of sequence status
10.5.1 Setting the Modbus communication function
(1) When executing sequence command write from the host computer and operating, make sure that the
sequence command serial transmission selection (COP) is ON.
Example) Operation mode : Remote (RMT)
COP command : C03-8 = 16 (ON fixed)
(The inverter is always run with the sequence commands from the
host computer.)
Note) When sending auxiliary operation sequence commands other than emergency stop (EMS),
reset (RESET), or run (F RUN, R RUN) as serial transmission data from the host computer,
make sure that the control switchover method (J2 setting) is serial transmission input.
(C00-6=2)
(2) Set parameter change protection with C26-1.
(3) Set the local station number with C26-2.
Terminal <OR>
EMS
block
Serial EMS
Terminal
RESET
block <OR>
Serial RESET
R ST
Panel S TO P
M OD
Internal command
Other input FW D
functions Panel
R EV
BRAKE Local (LCL)
AFS1
AFS2
AFS3 Terminal F RUN COP Remote (RMT)
S0 block R RUN OFF
S1
S2 F RUN ON
S3 Serial
R RUN
SE
MBRK_an
COPC00-5
S5 1 : Not used together
S6 Terminal Other input C00-6 OFF
S7 block functions
EXC 1 : Terminal
ACR ON 2 : Used together Local (LCL)
FPOS_CM
UVT-MSK functions Remote (RMT)
D
10-18
10.5.2 Modbus protocol
The VT240EL is compatible only with the Modbus compliant RTU mode.
The communication protocol for the RTU mode is explained below.
End/start Address Function Data CRC End/start

Silent interval of 3.5 8bit 8bit 8bit n 16bit Silent interval of 3.5
characters or more characters or more
Changeable with Slave: 1 to 99 Correspondence: Calculated for Changeable with
C26-3 Broadcast: 0 001, 002, 003, each C26-3
008, 00F, 010, command
017
Exception response:
BIT7: ON
(1) End/start
In the RTU mode, a silent interval of 3.5 characters or more (varies according to baud rate) is inserted
at the start and end of transmission. The silent interval is a state in which data is not sent. Note that if
C26-3 is not equal to 0.00, the setting value will be followed.
(2) Address
The slave side station No. is designated as Address. If a request is made from the slave side, the local
station No. is set. The station No. is set with C26-2.
(3) Function/Data
The function executed by the slave is designated in Function and Data. Refer to the following
explanations for details on the functions.
(4) CRC
CRC is an error check. The value is calculated and set based on the details of Address to Data. The
following calculation method is used. The CRC work is a 16-bit long (2-byte) variable used for
convenience to calculate CRC. It has no special meaning.
1) CRC work = 0 FFFF

2) Exclusive OR of CRC work low-order byte and send data (8-bit) used to replace CRC work
low-order byte. (CRC work low-order byte = CRC work low-order byte OR send data (8-bit))
3) The following process is executed according to the state of the CRC work LSB.
CRC work LSB Process

0 CRC work is shifted one bit to the right. MSB is set to 0 at this time.
CRC work is shifted one bit to the right. MSB is set to 0 at this time.
1 The following operation is executed.
CRC work = CRC work XOR 0A001
4) The step 3) process is repeated for 8 bits (8 times).

5) The steps 2) to 4) are repeated for all send data (data from Address to before CRC).
6) The CRC work calculated with steps 1) to 5) is CRC.
10-19
Example of command:
01 03 0002 0002 65CB (Send command: Read torque setting)
CRC (Calculated and set)
DATA2 (number of registers)
DATA1 (start register)
Function
Address
(designates the station No. of the send destination slave)
CAUTION
In the command example, a space is inserted to delimit each function. Do not insert the spaces when actually
inputting the command.
In the above command, input [01030002000265CB], and send.
10.5.3 VT240EL Modbus communication time chart
The time chart for communication with the host computer is shown below.
Host computer side Silent VT240EL send data 1 Silent VT240EL send data 2 Silent
interval (Addr, Func, Data, CRC) interval (Addr, Func, Data, CRC) interval
VT240EL side Silent Receive Silent Received VT240EL send data 1 Silent
interval data interval data analyze (Addr, Func, Data, CRC) interval
The VT240EL judges the blocks of received

data from the host side with the silent After the data received from the host
interval. The reception analysis process is is analyzed, a response is sent.
started.
The host computer waits for the silent interval time, and then sends one packet of data.
When sending data continuously, the host computer waits for the silent interval again.
The VT240EL recognizes the data sent after waiting the silent interval as the head of the packet, and starts
the reception process. After the data is received, if a state in which no data is received for longer than the
silent interval continues, the VT240EL determines that the reception is completed, judges and processes
the contents of the command, and creates a request package.
10-20
10.5.4 Exceptional response code
The VT240EL judges and processes the data based on the packet received from the host computer. If the
data is illegal or if data exceeding the range is received, an exception response is returned to indicate that
the process cannot be completed.
The exceptional response is sent by setting bit7 of the sent function code to 1.
The exception response codes sent after the function code are shown below.
List of exception response codes

Code Name Occurrence conditions
01h Illegal function A function code, which is not listed, was set.
02h Illegal address An address, which does not exist, was set.
03h Illegal data An error was found in the data setting.
No number corresponding to In the MUX data command, a parameter, which does not exist, was
0Bh
MUX data set.
In the MUX data command, a parameter exceeding the Max./Min.
0Ch MUX data incorrect setting
was set.
In the MUX data command, a parameter, which is not allowed to be
0Dh MUX data lock
read or written, was accessed.
Unchangeable during There is a trial to change a parameter, which cannot be changed
0Eh
operation during the operation.
There is a trial to change a parameter, which is not allowed to be read
10h No read / write parameter
or written.
14h EEPROM busy Non-volatile memory in VT240EL is being used.
An example of the exception response sent from VT240EL is shown below.
01 83 02 C0F1 (Response: Replies that illegal data was accessed)
CRC (Calculated on the INV side and automatically set.)
Exception response code (Illegal address)
Function (bit 7 turns ON)
Addr (slave side station No.)
CAUTION
In the command example, a space is inserted to delimit each function. Do not insert the spaces when actually
inputting the command.
In the above example, the response is displayed as [018302C0F1].
10-21
10.5.5 List of standard serial communication code correspondence
The correspondence of the previous standard serial communication command and the MODBUS functions
is shown below.
Standard serial
Function Start register: Function communication
command
01h 0000 : Sequence command (input) 1 read
CR
Read Coil Status 0020 : Sequence command (input) 2 read
02h
Sequence status (output) read
Read Input Status
Fault information read
0063 : Read latest fault information
0073 : Read previous fault information
0083 : Read 2nd to last fault information
03h
0093 : Read 3rd to last fault information ER
Read Holding Register
00A3 : Read latest minor fault information
00B3 : Read previous minor fault information
00C3 : Read 2nd to last minor fault information
00D3 : Read 3rd to last minor fault information
03E9 : Common Multiplexed data read value
08h
Self-diagnosis mode
Diagnostic
0Fh 0000 : Sequence command (input) 1 write
CW
Force Multiple Coils 0020 : Sequence command (input) 2 write
10h
Parameter write DW
Preset Multiple Registers
03E7 : Common Read multiplexed data

Write MUX command
17h
Read/Write Multiple Parameter read DR
Registers
10-22
10.5.6 List of Modbus registers and setting examples
The details of each function and examples of setting the commands are given in the following section.
Function 01h (Read Coil Status)

Details of function Start register designation Number of registers
0000h : Sequence command 1 0020h
Sequence command (Input) read
0020h : Sequence command 2 (Sequence data 32 bit)
Function : The sequence command (input) is read.

This function carries out the same process as the CR command in the standard serial
transmission function.
Refer to section 10-4-15. Serial transmission sequence command bit assignment table for the
layout of bits in the read command.
Setting example:
Modbus command setting example

01 01 0000 0020 3DD2
CRC code
Number of registers
Start register
Function
Station No.
Command contents : The contents of the sequence command 1 are read.
Response
01 01 02 10035007 FAD3 (Successful example) 01 81 02 C191 (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Details of data Exceptional response
Size (32bit) Function
Function Station No.
Station No.
The correspondence of the read data contents and serial transmission sequence command's bit
assignment table is shown below.
Standard serial Modbus
Details of data
(DATA No.) (Start register)
1003 5007
DATA 1
DATA 2
10-23
Function 02h (Read input Status)

Details of function Start register designation Number of registers
0040h
Sequence status read 000h : Fixed
(Sequence data 64 bit)
Function : The sequence status is read.

Refer to the bit assignment table on the next page for the layout of bits in the read command.
Setting example:
01 02 0000 0040 79FA

CRC code
Number of registers
Start register
Function
Station No.
Command contents : The contents of the sequence status are read.
Response
01 02 08 10035007 3827811F D37D (Successful example) 01 82 03 00A1 (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Status data 2 Exceptional response

Status data 1 Function
Size Station No.
Function
Station No.
The contents of the read status data are as follow.
1003 5007 3827 811F

Sequence status 3
Sequence status 2
Sequence status 1
Sequence status 0
Refer to the following table for the bit assignment of each status.
10-24
Serial transmission sequence status bit assignment table
Sequence status 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IDET ATN
REV SPD1
LCL SPD2
RDY2 COP
RDY1 EC0
MC EC1
FLT EC2
RUN EC3
Sequence status 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Always 0 Always 0
ZSP DVER
Always 0 MBRK
FAN Always 0
ALM Always 0
Always 0 RDELAY
DCC Always 0
ACC Always 0
Sequence status 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Always 0 FPOS
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 Always 0
Sequence status 3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Always 0 Always 0
Always 0 FPOX_EX
Always 0 F_NOT
Always 0 JEAK_IN
Always 0 JEAK_OUT
Always 0 50%LOAD
Always 0 POSERR
Always 0 OUTMC
10-25
Function 03h (Read Holding Register)

Number of
Control mode Details of function Start register Unit Min. value Max. value
registers
B00-4:Max. B00-4:Max.
0002h
V/f control Frequency setting 0000h frequency frequency
(32-bit data)
Following setting (-) setting
C26-7 setting B01-4:Max. B01-4:Max.
0002h
Speed setting 0000h speed speed
(32-bit data)
setting (-) setting
0002h
IM vector Torque setting 0002h 0.1%/LSB -300.0 300.0
(32-bit data)
control
PM motor 0002h
Torque bias 1 setting 0004h 0.1%/LSB -300.0 300.0
control (32-bit data)
Drive torque limiter 0002h
0006h 0.1%/LSB 0.0 100.0
reduction setting (32-bit data)
Regenerative torque 0002h
0008h 0.1%/LSB 0.0 100.0
limiter reduction setting (32-bit data)
0002h
Common Read multiplexed data 03E9h
(32-bit data)

Each setting value is read :
This function carries out the same process as the FR command in the standard serial
Setting example:

01 03 0002 0002 65CB
CRC code
No. of registers
Start register
Function
Station No.
Command contents : Torque setting value is read.
Response
01 03 04 000003E8 FA8D (Successful example) 01 83 02 C0F1 (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Data Exceptional response
Station No.

10-26
Details of function Start register Number of registers

Latest fault history 0063h 0010h
Previous fault history 0073h 0010h
2nd to last fault history 0083h 0010h
3rd to last fault history 0093h 0010h
Fault history buffer
Latest minor fault history 00A3h 0010h
Previous minor fault history 00B3h 0010h
2nd to last minor fault history 00C3h 0010h
3rd to last minor fault history 00D3h 0010h
Function : One item of the fault history is read out.

This function carries out the same process as the ER command in the standard serial
transmission function. Refer to the following section for the contents read out.
Setting example:

01 03 0063 0010 B418
CRC code
Number of registers
Start register
Function
Station No.
Command contents : Torque setting value is read.
Response
01 03 20 00000000 xxxx (Successful example) 01 83 02 C0F1 (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Data Exceptional response
Size (32byte) Function
Station No.
Refer to the following section for the data contents.
The data is configured of 32 bytes.

Each item is grouped in a 4-byte section. The details of the 4 bytes are shown below.
(The values in the following table are a setting example.)
00000203 0000040D 000003E8 00000005F 0000013A 00000001 00000000 00000000

Cumulative
Primary fault Secondary Frequency Current DC voltage Hardware Cumulative
power ON
details fault details value at fault value at fault at fault fault signal run time
time
0.01Hz/LSB 0.1A/LSB 1V/LSB 1 hour/LSB 1 hour/LSB
Refer to the list of fault codes for details on the primary fault and secondary fault.
The hardware fault signal indicates the status of the D05-1: Hardware detection fault status bit as a 0 to FF
hexadecimal.
10-27
Function 0Fh (Force Multiple Coils)

Details of function Start register command Number of registers No. of bytes
Sequence command 0000h : Sequence command 1 0020h
0004h
(input) write 0020h : Sequence command 2 (Sequence data 32 bit)
Function : The sequence command is written.

This function carries out the same process as the CW command in the standard serial
A 4byte command can be written in one command.
Refer to section 10-4-15. Serial transmission sequence command bit assignment table for
details on the bit assignment of the sequence command to be written in.
Setting example:

01 0F 0000 0020 04 01234567 47C4
CRC code
Data (4byte)
Size
Number of registers
Start register
Function
Station No.
Command contents : The data contents are written to sequence command 1.
Response
01 0F 20 3003 (Successful example) 01 8F 02 C5F1 (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Size (32bit) Exceptional response
Function Function
Station No. Station No.
The correspondence of the written sequence command bit assignment is shown below.
Standard serial Modbus

Details of data
(DATA No.) (Start register)
0123 4567
DATA 1
DATA 2
10-28
Function 10h (Preset Multiple Registers)

Control Start Number of Number
Details of function Unit Min. value Max. value
mode register registers of bytes
B00-4:Max. B00-4:Max.
0002h
V/f control Frequency setting 0000h 04h frequency frequency
(32-bit data)
Following C26-7 setting (-) setting
setting B01-4:Max. B01-4:Max.
0002h
Speed setting 0000h 04h speed speed
(32-bit data)
setting (-) setting
0002h
Torque setting 0002h 04h 0.1%/LSB -300.0 300.0
IM vector (32-bit data)
control Torque bias 1 0002h
PM motor 0004h 04h 0.1%/LSB -300.0 300.0
setting (32-bit data)
control
Drive torque limiter 0002h
0006h 04h 0.1%/LSB 0.0 100.0
reduction setting (32-bit data)
Regenerative torque
0002h
limiter reduction 0008h 04h 0.1%/LSB 0.0 100.0
(32-bit data)
setting

A value is written into each setting.
This function carries out the same process as the FW command in the standard serial
Setting example:

01 10 0000 0002 04 00001770 FDBB
CRC code
Data (4byte)
Size
Number of registers
Start register
Function
Station No.
Command contents : The data value (60.00Hz) is written to the frequency setting.
Response
01 10 00000002 41C8 (Successful example) 01 90 02 CDC1 (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Function Function

10-29
Start register Number of Number

Details of function
designation registers of bytes
0003h The parameter No. and parameter
Parameter write 03EBh 06h
(48 bit-data) value are set in the data section.
MUX command 0001h The parameter No. is set in the data
03E7h 02h
write (16 bit-data) section.
Function:
Parameter write: The parameter No. is set in the data section.
This function carries out the same process as the DW command in the standard
serial transmission function.
MUX command write: This function is used when using a PLC which does not support Function17h.
Refer to 10.5.7 Modbus additional functions when using this function.
Setting example:

01 10 03EB 0003 06 A00000001388 8981
CRC code
Data (6byte)
Size
Number of registers
Start registers
Function
Station No.
Command contents : The data value (50.00Hz) is written to parameter A00-0.

Response
01 10 03EB 0003 F078(Successful example) 01 90 0B 0DC7 (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Function Function
Data setting:
A000 00001388
Parameter designation section Data designation section
Divide the parameter designation section as shown below and set the parameter No.
15 8 7 0
Function Function code
Block-A parameter designation A
Function code Block No. Data No. Block-B parameter designation B
Block-C parameter designation C
Block-U parameter designation E
10-30
Function 17h (Read/Write Multiple Registers)

Details of function Start register Number of registers No. of bytes
0002h
Read parameter value 03E9h
(32-bit data)
Read parameter No. 0001h
03E7h 02h
setting (16-bit data)
Function : The parameter contents are read.

This process carries out the same process as the DR command in the standard serial
Setting example:

01 17 03E9 0002 03E7 0001 02 B004 9F52
CRC code
Parameter No.
Size
Number of registers
Start register
Number of registers
Start register
Function
Station No.
Command contents : The contents of parameter B00-4 are read out.

Response
01 17 04 00001388 F471 (Successful example) 01 97 10 4FFC (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Parameter data Exceptional response
Station No.
15 8 7 0
Block-D parameter designation D
Function code Block No. Data No. Block-A parameter designation A
Block-B parameter designation B
10-31
10.5.7 Modbus additional functions
The method for executing the multiplexed data read process, executed with Function 17h, using a
combination of Function 10h and 03h is explained in this section.
Function Details of function Start register Number of registers No. of bytes

0002h
03h Multiplexed data read value 03E9h
(32-bit data)
MUX command write for 0001h
10h 03E7h 02h
multiplexed data read value (16-bit data)
The following steps are used to read the parameters.

1) Set the parameter No. using the Function 10h MUX command write for multiplexed data read
value.
2) Read the setting values for the target parameters set in (1) using the Function 03h Multiplexed
data read value.
Example
1) Set the parameter No. using the Function 10h MUX command write for multiplexed data read
value.

01 10 03E7 0001 02 B015 3688
CRC code
Parameter No.
Size
Number of registers
Start register
Function
Station No.
Command contents : Parameter B01-5 is set.

Response
01 10 03E7 0001 B1BA (Successful example) 01 90 03 0C01 (Example of failure)

CRC code CRC code
Function Function
The parameter number is set in the same manner as Function 10h and 17h. (Refer to the next page.)
10-32
2) Read the setting values for the target parameters set in 1) using the Function 03h Multiplexed
data read value.
M od b us com m an d s e tting ex am p le
0 1 0 3 03 E 9 0 0 0 2 15 B B
C R C co d e
N u m b e r o f re g is te rs
Sta rt re g is te r
F u n ct io n
St a tio n N o .
C o m m a nd c on te n ts :
R e sp on s e
0 1 0 3 04 0 0 0 00 70 8 F 9 C5 (Su c ce ssf u l e xa m ple ) 0 1 83 1 0 4 0 FC (Exa m p le o f fa ilu re )

C R C co d e CRC c ode
D ata E xc e p t io n a l re s p o ns e
F u n c tio n
S ize ( 4 b yte )
St a tio n N o .
F u n ct io n
St a tio n N o .
C a u tio n : T h e d a ta is ou tp u t as a h e x ad e c im a l. 0 0 0 0 07 0 8 h = 1 8 0 0d
If 1) and 2) are sent and received normally, the B01-5 setting value is read out to the
response data field.
15 8 7 0
Block-D parameter designation D
Function code Block No. Data No. Block-A parameter designation A
Block-B parameter designation B
10-33
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
Chapter 11 Options
11.1 Outline of options .................................................................................................................11-1

11.2 Main circuit wiring devices ...................................................................................................11-1
11.2.1 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or fuse...............................................................11-1
11.2.2 Magnetic contactor (MC) ...............................................................................................11-1
11.3 DC regenerative braking (DB) option ...................................................................................11-2
11.4 ACL ......................................................................................................................................11-3
11.4.1 Application of ACL.........................................................................................................11-3
11.4.2 ACL outline dimensions.................................................................................................11-3
11.5 DCL......................................................................................................................................11-5
11.5.1 Application of DCL ........................................................................................................11-5
11.5.2 DCL outline dimensions ................................................................................................11-5
11.6 EMI filter...............................................................................................................................11-7
11.6.1 Application of EMI filter .................................................................................................11-7
11.6.2 4009 to 4070 / 2010 to 2020 .........................................................................................11-7
11.6.3 4100 to 4150 / 2040 to 2350 .........................................................................................11-7
11.6.4 External EMI filter outline drawing.................................................................................11-8
11.7 Option PCB ..........................................................................................................................11-10
11.7.1 Mounting the PCB .........................................................................................................11-10
11.7.2 Speed detection 1 (V24-DN1) .......................................................................................11-11
Chapter 11 Options
Chapter 11 Options
11.1 Outline of options
The VT240EL Series options include those shown below. This chapter will focus on the stand-alone
options and main circuit wiring devices.
Stand-alone option
DCL
DB unit
Main circuit wiring device
Power
supply MCCB or MC EMI filter
ACL Inverter unit
Fuse
Built-in PCB option
11.2 Main circuit wiring devices
11.2.1 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or fuse

Always install this device to protect wiring of the inverter and peripheral devices.
Select devices that match the inverter's ratings.
11.2.2 Magnetic contactor (MC)

Install this to provide an operation interlock.
When using the DB unit, always install this device to protect the DBR. Select devices that match the
inverter's ratings.
200V series 400V series
VT-240EL- Input current (A) VT-240EL- Input current (A)
2010 20 4009 15
2020 30 4015 15
2040 35 4020 20
2050 50 4030 25
2080 70 4040 35
2100 90 4050 50
2130 125 4060 60
2150 125 4070 70
2210 150 4100 80
2280 225 4130 100
2350 300 4150 125
Conditions for selecting devices

1) I (input current) = (IMkW)/IM/INV/COS/voltage/ 3
2) IM (motor efficiency) is 0.85 for 11kW or smaller, and 0.9 for 15kW and higher
3) INV (inverter efficiency) is 0.95.
4) 0.5 to 0.6 (input power factor) at COS, 0.9 when using ACL or DCL.
5) Power voltage is 200V/380V
11-1
Chapter 11 Options
11.3 DC regenerative braking (DB) option

The VT240EL is equipped with a DC regenerative braking circuit.
The resistance value when braking at 150% is shown below. If a higher braking torque is required, select
the option according to the required torque within the resistance value range higher than the minimum
resistance value shown below.
Always prepare a protective device to prevent burning of the DC regenerative braking resistor, and
structure a protective circuit that trips the MC on the input side when the protective device functions.

Applicable Minimum Resistance Applicable Minimum Resistance
Applicable Applicable
VT240EL DBTr resistance value at VT240EL DBTr resistance value at
motor motor
model current value 150% model current value 150%
(kW) (kW)
rating (A) () braking () rating (A) () braking ()
2010 2.2 43 18 45 4009 2.2 15 103 179
2020 3.7 43 18 27 4015 3.7 22 70 106
2040 5.5 60 13 18 4020 5.5 50 31 72
2050 7.5 100 7.7 13 4030 7.5 50 31 52
2080 11 150 5.1 8.9 4040 11 100 15 36
2100 15 150 5.1 6.6 4050 15 100 15 26
2130 18.5 200 3.9 5.3 4060 18.5 100 15 21
2150 22 300 2.6 4.5 4070 22 150 10 18
2210 30 300 2.6 3.3 4100 30 150 10 13
2280 40 V23-DBU-L4 1.5 2.5 4130 37 200 7.7 11
2350 50 V23-DBU-L4 1.5 2.0 4150 45 300 5.1 8.7
Note) The 2280 and 2350 require an external DB unit (V23-DBU-L4).
11-2
Chapter 11 Options
11.4 ACL
11.4.1 Application of ACL
Make sure that capacity of the transformer used as the inverter's power supply is within the following range.
(For 4% impedance transformer)
2210 and smaller, 400V series : 500kVA or less
2280 and 2350 : Capacity that is 10-times or less inverter capacity
If the above values are exceeded, install an ACL on the inverter's input side.
This is also effective in improving the power factor of the inverter input, in suppressing the current high
harmonics and extending the life of the main circuit's electrolytic capacitor. The power factor will be approx.
0.9.
11.4.2 ACL outline dimensions
INV model ACL model Dimensions (mm) Weight Outline

ACL part No.
VT240EL- V21-ACL-LA (kg) drawing
A B C D E F G I J N
2010 12T N71P48994-12 120 75 140 70 55 7 8 M4 2.1

(1)
2020 18T N71P48994-18 180 90 200 120 66 4 8 M4 3.6
2040 27 N71P47982-27 180 90 140 120 66 50 8 100 M5 4
(2)
2050 35 N71P47982-35 180 90 140 120 66 60 8 100 M5 4
2080 55 N71P47982-55 180 100 140 120 76 60 8 66 36 M6 5.4
2100 70 N71P47982-70 180 100 140 120 76 85 8 65 40 M6 6.6
2130 70 N71P47982-70 180 100 140 120 76 85 8 65 40 M6 6.6
2150 90 N71P47982-90 180 115 140 120 91 85 8 60 39 M8 7.9 (3)
2210 140 N71P47982-140 180 135 150 120 111 100 8 60 40 M8 10.6
2280 200 N71P47982-200 230 140 175 120 110 100 10 75 52 M10 19
2350 260 N71P47982-260 230 150 175 120 120 110 10 69 56 M10 21
INV model ACL model Dimensions (mm) Weight Outline

ACL part No.
VT240EL- V21-ACL-LA (kg) drawing
A B C D E F G I J N
4009 6T N71P48995-6 120 75 140 70 55 7 8 M4 2.1

4015 10T N71P48995-10 120 95 140 70 75 7 8 M4 3.1
(1)
4020 14T N71P48995-14 180 90 200 120 66 4 8 M4 3.8
4030 18T N71P48995-18 180 90 200 120 66 4 8 M4 4
4040 27 N71P47983-27 180 95 140 120 71 50 8 62 38 M5 5
4050 35 N71P47983-35 180 105 140 120 81 60 8 60 39 M5 6.5
(3)
4060 35 N71P47983-35 180 105 140 120 81 60 8 60 39 M5 6.5
4070 45 N71P47983-45 180 115 140 120 91 60 8 60 40 M6 7.9
4100 70 N71P47983-70 180 130 140 120 106 70 8 95 M6 9.9 (2)
4130 90 N71P47983-90 230 140 175 120 110 85 10 77 50 M8 16
(3)
4150 90 N71P47983-90 230 140 175 120 110 85 10 77 50 M8 16
11-3
Chapter 11 Options
Earth
(1)
Earth
(2)
Earth
(3)
11-4
Chapter 11 Options
11.5 DCL
11.5.1 Application of DCL
Install this device to improve the power factor of the inverter input.
This is also effective in creating a balance with the power supply as the ACL. The power factor will be
approx. 0.9.
11.5.2 DCL outline dimensions
Rating
Preparation
Inverter type current Dimensions (mm)
drawing No Weight Shape
(A)
(kg) class
Preparation Capacity
VT240EL- A B C D E F G H I J N
type (mH)
N71P46997-16 15A
2010 86 84 72 71 70 28 20 M4 6 1.8 (1)
V21-DCL-LA15 1.7mH
N71P46997-17 22A
2020 65 130 215 45 110 50 M6 170 7 4.1
V21-DCL-LA22 1.2mH
N71P46997-18 32A
2040 65 130 195 45 110 50 M6 150 7 4.5
V21-DCL-LA32 0.78mH
(2)-1
N71P46997-19 45A
2050 65 130 220 45 110 50 M6 180 7 5.6
V21-DCL-LA45 0.55mH
N71P46997-20 60A
2080 65 130 225 45 110 50 M6 180 7 6.1
V21-DCL-LA60 0.4mH
N71P46997-21 80A
2100 65 130 240 45 110 80 M6 196 7 6.8
V21-DCL-LA80 0.3mH
N71P46997-22 100A
2130 65 130 240 45 110 90 M8 196 7 7.2
V21-DCL-LA100 0.24mH
N71P46997-23 120A
2150 65 130 253 45 110 110 M8 210 7 8.2
V21-DCL-LA120 0.2mH
(2)-2
N71P46656-12 150A
2210 75 140 246 55 120 100 M8 203 7 9
N71P46656-14 220A
2280 75 140 265 55 120 120 M10 222 7 11
N71P46656-15 270A
2350 75 140 307 55 120 120 M12 254 7 15
11-5
Chapter 11 Options
Rating
Inverter Preparation
current Dimensions (mm)
type drawing No Weight Shape
(A)
(kg) class
Preparation Capacity
VT240EL- A B C D E F G H I J N
type (mH)
N71P46997-4 8A
4009 96 94 82 80 80 28 20 M4 6 2.0
V21-DCL-HA8 6.8mH
N71P46997-5 12A
4015 96 94 82 80 80 28 20 M4 6 2.3 (1)
V21-DCL-HA12 4.2mH
N71P46997-6 18A
4020 105 109 88 88 95 32 20 M4 7 3.7
V21-DCL-HA18 2.9mH
N71P46997-7 25A
4030 65 130 232 45 110 50 M6 190 7 5.5
V21-DCL-HA25 2.1mH
N71P46997-8 32A
4040 65 130 235 45 110 50 M6 191 7 6.4
V21-DCL-HA32 1.6mH
N71P46997-9 40A
4050 65 130 250 45 110 65 M6 205 7 7.3
V21-DCL-HA40 1.2mH
(2)-2
N71P46997-10 50A
4060 65 130 240 45 110 65 M6 196 7 7.5
V21-DCL-HA50 0.96mH
N71P46997-11 60A
4070 65 130 240 45 110 70 M6 198 7 7.9
V21-DCL-HA60 0.82mH
N71P46997-12 80A
4100 65 130 247 45 110 70 M6 204 7 8.2
V21-DCL-HA80 0.58mH
N71P46656-1 90A
4130 65 130 249 45 110 90 M8 206 7 9
V21-DCL-HA90 0.49mH
(2)-1
N71P46656-2 110A
4150 65 130 265 45 110 100 M8 222 7 10
V21-DCL-HA110 0.4mH
H
K L
FC
MaxG
(1)
L
L
(2-1) (2-2)
11-6
Chapter 11 Options
11.6 EMI filter
11.6.1 Application of EMI filter
The EMI filter suppresses the electromagnetic noise generated by the inverter.
The electromagnetic noise is the radiation of electromagnetic waves in the radio frequency bands and that
conveyed to the power supply wires. Mounting of this device is recommended for creating a balance with
the peripheral devices of the inverter.

INV model INV model
EMI filter Shape class EMI filter Shape class
VT-240EL- VT-240EL-
2010 3SUP-HQ20-ER-6 4009 3SUP-HQ10-ER-6
(1)
2020 3SUP-HQ20-ER-6 4015 3SUP-HQ10-ER-6
2040 3SUP-HQ30-ER-6 4020 3SUP-HQ20-ER-6
2050 3SUP-HQ50-ER-6 4030 3SUP-HQ20-ER-6
(1)
2080 3SUPF-AH75-ER-6-OI 4040 3SUP-HQ30-ER-6
2100 3SUPF-AH100-ER-6-OI 4050 3SUP-HQ50-ER-6
2130 3SUPF-AH100-ER-6-OI (2) 4060 3SUP-HQ50-ER-6
2150 3SUPF-AH150-ER-6-OI 4070 3SUPF-AH75-ER-6-OI
2210 3SUPF-AH150-ER-6-OI 4100 3SUPF-AH75-ER-6-OI
2280 3SUPF-AH250-ER-6-OI 4130 3SUPF-AH100-ER-6-OI (2)
2350 3SUP-B192300-F 4150 3SUPF-AH100-ER-6-OI
(1) is a stand-alone type EMI filter which can be used in combination with the built-in option.
(2) is a stand-alone EMI filter used with capacities larger than (1).
11.6.2 4009 to 4070 / 2010 to 2020
The EMI filter can be built into the unit as an option. The leakage current is 60mA or less at 480V/50Hz,
and 70mA or less at 240V/50Hz.
The inverter will comply with the European EMC Standards (EN61800-3) when the EMI filter is built in.
Note) 4009 and 4015 comply with the European EMC Standards (EN61800-3 First Environment
Category C2).
Note) 4020 to 4070 / 2010 to 2020 comply with the European EMC Standards (EN61800-3 Second
Environment Category C3).
Note) The leakage current is based on the assumption that one wire is disconnected in a 3-phase circuit.
Note) Make sure that the motor wire length is 10m or less. A standalone EMI filter should be connected if
the distance exceeds 10m.
To provide measures against conductive noise, use a built-in and standalone EMI filter.
11.6.3 4100 to 4150 / 2040 to 2350
When taking measures against noise with the 4100, higher or 2040, and higher units, use a stand-alone
EMI filter. The European EMC Standards (EN61800-3 Second Environment Category C3) can be satisfied
by using a stand-alone EMI filter.
11-7
Chapter 11 Options
11.6.4 External EMI filter outline drawing
Earth M4
Earth M4
Indica-
Label
tion
(Label) Cover mounting
screw M3
Cover mounting
screw M3
Cover
Cover
3SUP-HQ(2050)-ER-610 Main body
30A Main body
3SUP-HQ(20 and 30)-ER-6 3SUP-H50-ER-6
Unit : mm
weight
A B C D E F G H
(kg)
3SUP-HQ20-ER-6 145 135 125 70 50 10 52 5.5 0.7
3SUP-HQ30-ER-6 145 135 125 70 50 10 52 5.5 0.7
3SUP-HQ50-ER-6 165 136 165 90 80 40 54 5.5 1.1
3SUPF-AH(75,100,150)-ER-6
3SUPF-AH(75, 100 and 150)-ER-6-OI
Unit : mm
weight
A B C D E F G H I J K L (kg)
3SUPF-AH75-ER-6-OI 260 245 182 116 90 33 18 80 23 M4 M6 5.5 3.2
3SUPF-AH100-ER-6-OI 260 245 182 116 90 33 18 80 23 M4 M6 5.5 3.2
3SUPF-AH150-ER-6-OI 310 290 220 163 133 42 25 100 30 M6 M8 6.5 3.2
11-8
Chapter 11 Options
3SUPF-AH200-ER-6-OI
Earth
3SUP-B192300-F
Unit : mm
weight
A B C D E F1 G H I J K L (kg)
3SUPF-AH250-ER-6-OI 364 345 325 280 180 150 42 120 25 30 M8 5.5 10
3SUP-B192300-F 430 320 230 250 270 260 136 180 110 50 M14 M8 23
11-9
Chapter 11 Options
11.7 Option PCB

This is a built-in type option mounted on the VT240EL control PCB.
One type can be selected from option I and option III.
These PCB options are connected to the connector on the VT240EL control PCB, and can be easily
mounted even after purchasing the VT240EL.
Indication of
Item Type Function Class rating nameplate
(Note 1)
This is a speed detection PCB for the
Speed detection 1 complimentary output type encoder.
V24-DN1
(complimentary I 1
N62P30609=1-01 Response frequency: Change between
compatible)
6010kHz and 20kHz.
This is a speed detection PCB for the line driver
Speed detection 2 output type encoder.
V24-DN2
(line driver I 2
N62P30610=1-01 Response frequency: 250kHz (signal: A, B, Z
compatible)
phase and serial data)
This is a speed (pole position) detection PCB for
the PM drive control, and is compatible with the
Speed detection 3 V24-DN3 line driver output type encoder. I 3
(PM compatible) N62P30611=1-01
Response frequency: 250kHz (signal: A, B, Z,
U, V, W phase)
Speed detection 4 Speed detection PCB compatible with Heidenhain
V24-DN4
(SIN/COS ERN1387. I 4
N62P30642=1-01
compatible) 1Vp-p 2-phase, 2-set sine wave + Z-phase pulse
This speed detection PCB is compatible with
Speed detection V24-DN5 Heidenhain ERN1387 and Tamagawa Seiki
5/8 (SIN/COS, N62P30676=1-01
TS6213N555. Use this for high-accuracy start lock I 5/8
start lock control V24-DN8
N62P30684=1-01
control.
compatible)
1Vp-p 2-phase, 2-set sine wave + Z-phase pulse
This is used to expand the contact input/output
V24-RY0 points.
Relay interface III N
N62P30612=1-01 Relay input : 4 points (PSI8 to 11)
1C contact output : 4 points (PSO4 to 7)
(Note1) "0" indicates that the optional PCB is not installed.
11.7.1 Mounting the PCB
Mount each option PCB at the position shown below.
Option III
(Position III)
Option I
(Position I)
Control PCB cover
11-10
Chapter 11 Options
11.7.2 Speed detection 1 (V24-DN1)
This V24-DN1 is a speed detection option PCB compatible with the complementary type encoder.
(1) Encoder specifications

The applicable encoder specifications are shown below.
Item Specifications
Supply voltage 12VDC 1.2V
Output method Complementary
Output signal voltage At V24-DN1 signal input terminal :
VH (signal high level voltage): 8.0V or more,
VL (signal low level voltage): 1.0V or less
Supply current 150mA (including signal supply current)
Rising/falling time Within 1S
Output signal 9030 phase difference signal (A phase, B phase)
Pulse output frequency Encoder pulse output frequency 6010kHz at motor's maximum speed
(2) Pulse output specifications

This V24-DN1 can divide and output the detected encoder pulses. The division is set with C50-0. The
pulse output specifications are shown below.
Item Specifications
Power voltage Max. 24VDC+10%
Pulse output current Min. ON current 5mADC or more, max. current 30mADC or less
Pulse output frequency Max. 70kHz or less
a) Refer to section 7) Wiring examples for the pulse output's external connection circuit.
b) The control PCB's pulse train output and this PCB's pulse output are connected internally.
Confirm that the DIP switch (DS1-4) in the control PCB is set to PS03.
c) PAO and 0P of the pulse output are made into a twisted pair. Moreover, PBO and 0P are similarly
made into a twisted pair.
(3) Mounting method
1) Remove the VT240EL unit's front cover.
CAUTION
There is a risk of electric shocks. Always observe the following matters.

voltage between terminals L+1 or L+2 and L is 15V or less before starting the wiring work. (Check with
the "CHARGE" LED if the unit is not provided with the L terminal.)
2) Confirm that the V24-DN1 EL-bit is set to W2 side.

(Confirm that the W1 side is OPEN.)
11-11
Chapter 11 Options
3) Mount the PCB onto the option I position on the control PCB cover.
V24-DN1
Option I mounting position

Option I fixing jaw
Enlarged (1)
view
(2) Jaw
Mounting method
a) Insert the option PCB (V24-DN1) into the two jaws in the (1) direction.
b) Confirm that the PCB is mounted, and then press the PCB in the (2) (control PCB cover) direction.
Fix with the option I fixing jaws.
c) Finally, confirm that the PCB is mounted correctly.
V24-DN1 PCB shape
4) Connect the wires to the option PCB.

2
Use 0.75mm (30m or less) of shielded twisted pair wire strands for the wire.
Connect the cable to the terminal TB2.
If the inverter operates incorrectly when the cable is connected to terminal TB2, disconnect the
cable from TB2, and connect the encoder side cable to the encoder's grounding terminal. The state
may be improved.
Treat the end of the connected wire as shown below.
5mm
Shield
To TB2
CAUTION
Since the sensor's faint signals are handled, keep this cable as far away from the inverter's input/output
wire to prevent malfunctioning caused by noise.
11-12
Chapter 11 Options
(4) Terminal block (TB1) layout

Pin No. Symbol Function
1 12P 12VDC power supply 12V 0.6V Max. 150mA
2 0P 12VDC common
3 0P Encoder A phase input common
4 0P Encoder B phase input signal common
5 0P Encoder Z phase input signal common
6 0P Frequency divider A phase output common
7 0P Frequency divider B phase output common
8 12P 12VDC power supply 12V 0.6V Max. 150mA
9 PPS SH-D12/12 encoder input signal
10 PA Encoder A phase input signal
11 PB Encoder B phase input signal
12 PZ Encoder Z phase input signal
13 PA0 Frequency divider A phase output signal
14 PB0 Frequency divider B phase output signal
No. 8 pin No. 14 pin
No. 8 pin No. 14 pin from left on upper level

No. 1 pin No. 7 pin from left on lower level
No. 1 pin No. 7 pin
(5) Encoder power supply

If the current supplied to the encoder (including the signal supply current) exceeds 150mA, supply the
power to the encoder from an external power source. In this case, connect the external power source
only to the encoder side, and do not connect to the V24-DN1 power (TB1-2[OP], TB1-1, -8[12P])
Encoder TB1
V24-DN1
H -1,8[12P]
12V 12V External
K power -2[0P] 12VDC Max.150mA
0V 0V source
11-13
Chapter 11 Options
(6) Encoder signal

With the VT240EL, the counter-clockwise rotation (CCW) looking from the motor shaft is defined as
forward run, and clockwise rotation (CW) is defined as reverse run.
Forward run (CW) Reverse run (CW)
Definition of VT240EL motor rotation direction

In case of the forward run, the signals input to A, B and Z phases of V24-DN1 are supposed to be as
described in the following diagram. If not, set C50 and C51 parameters referring to 7.4.2. Setting
parameters according to encoder type.
VH
A phase
VL
VH
B phase
VL
90 90 90 90
VH
Z phase
VL
In the standard setting, the edge is required in

A-phase when Z-phase is high and B-phase is low.
If this condition is not the case, set C51-1 to 1 (the
edges of AB and Z phases are the same).
11-14
Chapter 11 Options
(7) Wiring example

An example of wiring with the SUMTAK LF- BM-C12F is shown below.
P o ly e t h yle n e in s u la t e d in st ru m e n t ca b le
R e f e re n ce t yp e K P E V -S C F (F u r u ka w a D e n k o )
2
0 .7 5 m m (3 0 m o r le ss ) O p tio n P C B
Tw ist e d , s h ie ld e d s t ra n d s
TB2 V 2 4 -D N 1
E n co d e r
L F B M C 1 2 F TB1
H -1 ,8 [1 2 P ]
12V
K -2 [0 P ] 1 2 V D C M a x.1 5 0 m A
0V
12V
A p h a se
22k
22 C -1 0 [PA ] 2 .2 k 3 . 3 k
1k
470P
0V M -3 [ 0 P ]
12 V
B p h a se
22 k
22 A -11 [ P B] 2 .2 k 3 . 3 k
1k
470P
M -4 [0 P]
0V
T Z p has e
-1 2 [P Z ] 2 .2 k 3 .3 k
1k
470 P
-5 [0 P ]
[ A p h a s e p u l se o u tp u t ] -1 3 [PA O ]
[B p h a s e p u l se o u tp u t] -1 4 [P B O ]
M A X .2 4 V + 1 0 %
I= M I N . 5 m A , M A X . 3 0 m A [C om m on]
-6 , -7 [0 P ]
S e t th e E L -b it t o W 2 (2 P P ).
W1 W2
1P P 2P P
11-15
Chapter 11 Options
This V24-DN2 is a speed detection option PCB compatible with the line driver type encoder.

Item Specifications
Output method Line driver
(Differential voltage of A , B , Z , R X in respect to A, B, Z, RX)
Supply current Max. 350mA (including signal supply current)
Rising/falling time Within 100nS
Output signal 1) 9030 phase difference signal (A phase, B phase) and zero point signal
(Z phase)
2) 9030 phase difference signal (A phase, B phase) and zero point signal
(Z phase) + serial signal (Refer to 2-1 Specifications)
3) 9030 phase difference signal (A phase, B phase) and zero point signal
(Z phase) + (U phase, V phase, W phase), wire-saving type
Pulse output frequency Max. 250kHz
a) Serial encoder output specifications

(SUMTAK AEI-008-****)
Transmission method Manchester encoded synchronization

Baud rate 1M [bps]
No. of transmission frames 2 frames (25 bits/frame)
Transmission format Refer to Fig. 1-1
Transmission error check CRC error check
Transmission time 66S (typ.)
Transmission cycle 84S 2S Refer to Fig. 1-2
Serial signal transmission method

1) Manchester encoded synchronization
Configuration in one frame
1 f ra m e (2 5 b it )
S ta rt M od em P o s it i o n s ig n a l F ra m e C R C S to p
s ig n a l a d d re s s a d d re s s s ig n a l s ig n a l
s ig n a l s ig n a l
( 3 b it ) (2 b i t ) ( 1 5 b it ) ( 1 b i t) ( 3 b it ) ( 1 b it )
11-16
Chapter 11 Options
Configuration of each frame

First frame
Start signal : 1 1 1 (Note 1-2)
Modem address signal : 0 0
Position signal :
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14
(LSB)
Frame address signal : 0
CRC signal : 0/1 0/1 0/1
Stop signal : 0
Second frame
Position signal :
D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 SYSD CERR ECER BATT 0 0
(MSB)
Frame address signal : 1
The start signal, model address signal, CRC signal and stop signal are the same as the first frame.
(Note 1-1)
D0 to D10 : One-rotation absolute value
D11 to D23 : Multi-rotation absolute value These signals are not used in VT240EL.
SYSD : Backup voltage drop
CERR : Absolute value range over
ECER : Tolerable speed exceeded at power ON or read error detected (automatically reset)
BATT : External battery alarm (automatically reset)
(Note 1-2) The first two bits of the start signal are output as the full bit interval H (1) signal.
The following 23 bits are all Manchester encoded.
Data "1" Data "0"
1 1
0 0
Manchester code
Fig. 1-1
2) Manchester encoded synchronization
Serial Second Second

output First frame First frame
L L frame L L frame
25 S 16 s 25 S
84 S + 2 S
Fig. 1-2 Transmission cycle for Manchester encoded synchronization
11-17
Chapter 11 Options
b) Wire-saving type encoder

Set the parameter No. C51-7, 8, 9 according to the specifications of the wire-saving encoder to be
used.
(Note 1-3) When using the wire-saving type encoder, do not use an external power source since the
power ON order could be affected.

The V24-DN2 can divide and output the detected encoder pulses. The division is set with C50-0. The
pulse output specifications are shown below.
Item Specifications
Power voltage Max. 24VDC + 10%
Pulse output current Min. ON current 5mADC or more, max. current 30mADC or less
Pulse output frequency Max. 70kHz or less
a) Refer to section 7) Wiring examples for the pulse output's external connection circuit.
b) The control PCB's pulse train output and this PCB's pulse output are connected internally.
Confirm that the DIP switch (DS1-4) in the control PCB is set to PS03.
c) PAO and 0P of the pulse output are made into a twisted pair. Moreover, PBO and 0P are similarly
made into a twisted pair.
(3) Mounting method
CAUTION

2) Mount the PCB onto the option l position on the control PCB cover.
V24-DN2
Option l mounting position

Option l fixing jaw
Enlarged (1)
view
(2) Jaw
11-18
Chapter 11 Options
Mounting method
a) Insert the option PCB (V24-DN2) into the two jaws in the 1) direction.
b) Confirm that the PCB is inserted, and then press the PCB in the 2) (control PCB cover) direction.
V24-DN2 PCB shape

2
Use 0.75mm (30m or less) of twisted pair cable strands for the wire.
Connect the cable to the terminal TB2.
may be improved.
5mm
Shield
To TB2
CAUTION
11-19
Chapter 11 Options

1 ORP 5VDC power common
2 PAN Encoder A phase not input (A)
3 PBN Encoder B phase not input (B)
4 PZN Encoder Z phase not input (Z)
5 RX Serial reception input signal
6 RXN Serial reception not input (RX)
7 CLH Pull-up (Use for encoder having clear signal validated at Low)
8 5RP 5VDC power (max : 350mA 5V5%)
9 PA Encoder A phase input signal (A)
10 PB Encoder B phase input signal (B)
11 PZ Encoder Z phase input signal (Z)
12 CLL Pull-down (Use for encoder having clear signal validated at High)
13 PA0 Frequency divider A phase output
14 PB0 Frequency divider B phase output

No. 1 pin No. 7 pin

power to the encoder from an external power source. In this case, connect the external power to the
encoder side, and connect only the external powers 0V to TB-1[ORP] on the V24-DN2. Do not
connect the external power supplys 5V to TB1-8[5RP] on the V24-DN2.
The following connection cannot be used when using the wire-saving type encoder.
5V External
0V
power
source
Encoder Option PCB
LF- BM-C05P TB1 V24-DN2
5V -8[5RP]
5V
0V -1[0RP] 5VDC Max.350mA
0V
The encoder's clear signal is not controlled with the CLH and CLL terminals.
11-20
Chapter 11 Options
(6) Encoder signal


In case of the forward run, the signals input to A, B and Z phases of V24-DN2 are supposed to be as
described in the following diagram. If not, set C50 and C51 parameters referring to 7.4.2. Setting
parameters according to encoder type.
VH
A phase
VL
VH
B phase
VL
90 90 90 90
VH
Z phase
VL
In the standard setting, the edge is required in

A-phase when Z-phase is high and B-phase is low.
If this condition is not the case, set C51-1 to 1 (the
edges of AB and Z phases are the same).
11-21
Chapter 11 Options
(7) Wiring example

An example of wiring with the SUMTAK LF- BM-C05P is shown below.
Polyethylene insulated instrument cable

Reference type KPEV-SCF (Furukawa ELECTRIC) Option PCB
0.75mm2 (30m or less)
Twisted, shielded strands V24-DN2
TB2
Encoder
TB1
LF BMC05P
5V -8[5RP]
5V
0V
10k
A -9[PA] 150
A phase
-2[PAN] 10k pulse
A
-10[PB] 150 10k

B
B phase
-3[PBN] 10k pulse
B
-11[PZ] 150
Z 10k
Z phase
-4[PZN] 10k pulse
Z
-5[RX] 150 10k

E
Serial
-6[RXN] 10k
-13[PAO]
[A phase pulse output]
-14[PBO]
[B phase pulse output]
MAX.24V+10%
I=MIN.5mA, MAX.30mA [Common] -1[0RP]
-7[CLH] 1k To [5RP]
-12[CLL] 1k To [0RP]
11-22
Chapter 11 Options
This V24-DN3 is a speed detection option PCB compatible with the line driver type encoder.
This option is used when the UVW signals as well as the ABZ signals are necessary to be taken for PM
motor control.

Item Specifications
Output method Line driver
(Differential voltage of A , B , Z , U , V , W respect to A, B, Z, U, V, W)
Supply current Max. 250mA (including signal supply current)
Rising edge/falling edge Within 100nS
time
Pulse output frequency Max. 250kHz
(2) Mounting method
CAUTION

V24-DN3 PCB shape
V24-DN3
Option I mounting
position
Option I fixing jaw
Enlarged (1)
view
(2) Jaw
11-23
Chapter 11 Options
Mounting method

Use 0.75mm2 (30m or less) of shielded twisted pair wire strands for the wire.
Connect the shielded wire to the terminal TB2.
may be improved.
5mm
Shield
To TB2
CAUTION

2 PAN Encoder A phase not input ( A )
3 PBN Encoder B phase not input ( B )
4 PZN Encoder Z phase not input ( Z )
5 PUN Encoder U phase not input ( U )
6 PVN Encoder V phase not input ( V )
7 PWN Encoder W phase not input (W )
8 5RP 5VDC power (max : 250mA 5VDC5%)
9 PA Encoder A phase input signal (A)
10 PB Encoder B phase input signal (B)
11 PZ Encoder Z phase input signal (Z)
12 PU Encoder U phase input signal (U)
13 PV Encoder V phase input signal (V)
14 PW Encoder W phase input signal (W)
11-24
Chapter 11 Options

power to the encoder from an external power source. In this case, connect the external power to the
encoder side, and connect only the external powers 0V to TB-1[ORP] on the V24-DN2. Do not
connect the external power supplys 5V to TB1-8[5RP] on the V24-DN2.
5V External
power
0V source Option PCB
Encoder
TB1
LHE- - V24-DN3
5V -8[5RP]
5V
0V
(5) Encoder signal


In case of the forward run, the signals input to A, B, Z, U, V and W phases of V24-DN3 are supposed
to be as described in the following diagram. If not, set C50 and C51 parameters referring to 7.4.2.
Setting parameters according to encoder type.
VH
A phase pulse VL
VH
B phase pulse VL
90 90 90 90
VH
Z phase pulse
VL
In the standard setting, the edge is required in A-phase when

Z-phase is high and B-phase is low. If this condition is not the
case, set C51-1 to 1 (the edges of AB and Z phases are the
same).
VH
U phase pulse
VL
VH
V phase pulse
VL
W phase pulse VH
VL
60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
11-25
Chapter 11 Options
(6) Wiring example

An example of wiring with the SUMTAK LHE- - is shown below.
Polyethylene insulated instrument cable

Reference type KPEV-SCF (Furukawa ELECTRIC)
0.75mm2 (30m or less)
Encoder 14-core twisted, shielded strands Option PCB
LHE TB1 V24-DN3
5V 5V -8[5RP]
0V White -1[0RP] 5VDC Max.250mA

0V
Black
B -9[PA] 150 10k
Yellow-green A phase
B -2[PAN] 10k pulse
Blue
A -10[PB] 150 10k
Red B phase
-3[PBN] 10k pulse
A
Pink
Z -11[PZ] 150 10k
Yellow Z phase
-4[PZN] 10k pulse
Z
Orange
U -12[PU] 150 10k
Nude U phase
U -5[PUN] 10k pulse
Brown
V -13[PV] 150 10k
Deep green V phase

-6[PVN] 10k pulse
V
Gray
-14[PW]
W 150 10k
Light blue W phase

-7[PWN] pulse
W 10k
Purple
Shield TB2
E
11-26
Chapter 11 Options
This V24-DN4 is a speed detection option PCB compatible with the Heidenhain encoder (ERN1387) which
outputs sine wave voltage signals. This option is used when the absolute-poison SIN/COS signals as well
as the ABZ signals are necessary to be taken for PM motor control.

Item Specifications
Interface Sine wave voltage signal
A and B sine wave voltage signal 1Vpp (incremental signal)
Signal Zero point signal 0.5Vpp (reference mark signal)
C and D sine wave voltage signal 1Vpp (absolute signal)
Supply current 200mA
Maximum frequency 100kHz
(2) Mounting method
CAUTION

V24-DN4 PCB shape
V24-DN4
Option I mounting
position
Option I fixing jaw
Enlarged (1)
view
(2) Jaw
11-27
Chapter 11 Options
Mounting method

may be improved.
5mm
Shield
To TB2
CAUTION

2 PAN Encoder A phase not input
3 PBN Encoder B phase not input
4 PZN Encoder Z phase not input (Note) (Note
5 PCN Encoder C phase not input Described as R-phase in the
6 PDN Encoder D phase not input HEIDENHEIN encoder.
7 0RP 5VDC power common With the VT240EL, input in the
8 5RP 5VDC power zero point signal Z-phase.
9 PA Encoder A phase input signal
10 PB Encoder B phase input signal
11 PZ Encoder Z phase input signal (Note)
12 PC Encoder C phase input signal
13 PD Encoder D phase input signal
14 5RP 5VDC power

No. 1 pin No. 7 pin
11-28
Chapter 11 Options
(4) Encoder signal

V24-DN4 transforms the sinusoidal waves of the A and B phases into square waves, which are used
as incremental signals. The analogue signals of the C and D phases, which are taken by the AD
converter as they are, are used as the absolute signals.
a) A and B phases : 2048 pulses / rotation
Z phase : 1 pulse / rotation
360 360
A A
90 90
B B
Z Z
Note) In case of forward run, the signals input to the A and B phases of V24-DN4 are
supposed to be as described in the above diagrams. However, if the encoder ERN1387
manufactured by HEIDENHEIN is installed on the motor shaft at the opposite end of the
sheave, set C50-2=2 because the A and B phases are reversed.
b) C and D phases : A cycle of SIN and COS waves / rotation
360
C Forward run (CW) Reverse run (CW)
90

Z
11-29
Chapter 11 Options
(5) Wiring example
Polyethylene insulated
instrument cable Option PCB
2
0.75mm (10m or less)
Twisted, shielded
V24-DN4
Encoder strands
ERN1387 A+ TB1-9 PA
A- TB1-2 PAN
B+ TB1-10 PB
B- TB1-3 PBN
R+ TB1-11 PZ
R- TB1-4 PZN
C+ TB1-12 PC Converter
C- TB1-5 PCN
D+ TB1-13 PD
D- TB1-6 PDN
TB1-8,14 5RP
5V
0V TB1-1,7 0RP
TB2
11-30
Chapter 11 Options
This V24-DN5 is a speed detection option PCB compatible with the encoder which outputs sine wave
voltage signals. By retrieving the sine wave type incremental signals with an AD converter, the speed can
be detected accurately even at extra-low speeds. This option PCB is used to perform start lock control at a
high accuracy.

Item Specifications
C and D sine wave voltage signal 1Vpp (absolute signal) (Note 1)
Heidenhain : ERN1387 (sine wave voltage signal : 0.6 to 1.2Vpp)
Compatible encoder
Tamagawa Seiki : TS6213N555 (sine wave voltage signal : 0.8 to 1.6Vpp)
(Note 1) The C and D absolute signals are not required when using IM control or when using the
magnetic pole estimation function with PM motor control.
Set the parameters related to the VT240EL settings as shown below according to the applications.

Motor type Encoder selection
estimation
IM PM motor Disabled Enabled C51-0

7 (Note 2)
6
(Note 2) Compatible from software version II.
11-31
Chapter 11 Options

V24-DN5 can divide and output the detected encoder pulses. The division is set with C50-0. The
pulse output specifications are given below.
Item Specifications
Power voltage Maximum 24VDC+10%
Pulse output current Minimum ON current DC5mA or more, maximum current DC30mA or less
Pulse output frequency Maximum 70kHz or less
a) Refer to section 6) Wiring examples for the pulse output external connection circuit.
b) The control PCBs pulse train output and this PCBs pulse output are connected internally.
Confirm that the control PCB DIP switch (DS1-4) is set to PS03.
c) Use twisted pair wires for the pulse output PA0 to 0RP(0V) and PB0 to 0RP(0V).
(3) Mounting method
CAUTION

V24-DN5
Option I mounting
position
Option I fixing jaw
Enlarged (1)
view
(2) Jaw
Mounting method
11-32
Chapter 11 Options
V24-DN5 PCB shape (Without revisions)
V24-DN5 PCB shape (Revision A)

may be improved.
5mm
Shield
To TB2
CAUTION
11-33
Chapter 11 Options

Symbol
Pin Symbol
(Without Function Function
No. (Revision A)
revisions)
1 0RP 5VDC power common 0V 5VDC power common
2 PAN Encoder A phase not input PAN Encoder A phase not input
3 PBN Encoder B phase not input PBN Encoder B phase not input
4 PZN Encoder Z phase not input (Note 1) PZN Encoder Z phase not input (Note 1)
5 PCN Encoder C phase not input PCN Encoder C phase not input
6 PDN Encoder D phase not input PDN Encoder D phase not input
7 PB0 Divider B-phase output PBO Divider B-phase output
8 0RP 5VDC power common NC Open
11 5RP 5VDC power 5V 5VDC power
12 PA Encoder A phase input signal PA Encoder A phase input signal
13 PB Encoder B phase input signal PB Encoder B phase input signal
14 PZ Encoder Z phase input signal (Note 1) PZ Encoder Z phase input signal (Note 1)
15 PC Encoder C phase input signal PC Encoder C phase input signal
16 PD Encoder D phase input signal PD Encoder D phase input signal
17 PA0 Divider A-phase output PAO Divider A-phase output
18 5RP 5VDC power 0V 5VDC power common
19 5RP 5VDC power 0V 5VDC power common
20 5RP 5VDC power NC Open
(Note 1) Described as R-phase in the ERN1387. With the VT240EL, input in the zero point signal
Z-phase.
* TB2 is the 5VDC power common, and is connected with TB1 ORP (0V).

11-34
Chapter 11 Options
(5) Encoder signal

The analog output signal when the encoder is rotated clockwise (CW) looking from the motor
installation end is as shown below.
[A, B phase signals]

Multi-cycle (2048 cycles for ERN1387 and TS6213N555) sine wave voltage signal in one encoder
rotation
360 360
A A
90 90
B B
Converted to
square-wave
signals and used
Z Z
[C, D phase signals]

One-cycle sine wave voltage signal in one encoder rotation
360
90
With the VT240EL, rotation in the counter-clockwise direction (CCW) looking from the motor shaft is
defined as forward run, and rotation in the clockwise direction (CW) is defined as reverse run. Thus,
for ERN1387 and TS6213N555, set the encoder AB advance direction selection to reverse (C50-2=2).

11-35
Chapter 11 Options
(6) Wiring example

1) Without revisions
instrument cable
2
Twisted, shielded strands Option PCB
V24-DN5 Rev0
Encoder
ERN1387 TB1
A+ -12 [PA]
or
TS6213N555 A- -2 [PAN]
B+ -13 [PB]
B- -3 [PBN]
R+ (Z+) -14 [PZ]
R- (Z-) -4 [PZN]
B
AD
C+ -15 [PC] Converter
-5 [PCN] C
C-
D+ -16 [PD]
-6 [PDN] D
D-
5V -11 (18,19,20) [5RP] 5VDC MAX.150mA
0V -1 (10) [0RP]
Shield TB2
MAX.24V+10% I=MIN.5mA, MAX.30mA

-17[PA0]
-9 [0RP]
-7 [PB0]
-8 [0RP]
11-36
Chapter 11 Options
2) With revisions A
instrument cable
2
V24-DN5 RevA
Encoder
ERN1387 TB1
A+ -12 [PA]
or
TS6213N555 A- -2 [PAN]
B+ -13 [PB]
B- -3 [PBN]
R+ (Z+) -14 [PZ]
R- (Z-) -4 [PZN]
B
AD
C+ -15 [PC] Converter
-5 [PCN] C
C-
D+ -16 [PD]
-6 [PDN] D
D-
5V -11 [5V] 5VDC MAX.150mA
0V -1 (10) [0RP]
Shield TB2
MAX.24V+10% I=MIN.5mA, MAX.30mA

-17 [PA0]
-18 [0V]
-7 [PB0]
-19 [0V]
11-37
Chapter 11 Options
The V24-DN8 is a speed detection option PCB which uses the V24-DN5 encoder signal input section as
the D-sub 15 connector and has a line drive signal pulse output circuit.

Item Specifications
C and D sine wave voltage signal 1Vpp (absolute signal) (Note 1)
Heidenhain : ERN1387 (sine wave voltage signal : 0.6 to 1.2Vpp)
Compatible encoder
Tamagawa Seiki : TS6213N555 (sine wave voltage signal : 0.8 to 1.6Vpp)
(Note 1) The C and D absolute signals are not required when using IM control or when using the magnetic
pole estimation function with PM motor control.
Set the parameters related to the VT240EL settings as shown below according to the applications.

Motor type Encoder selection
estimation
IM PM motor Disabled Enabled C51-0

7 (Note 2)
6
(Note 2) Compatible from software version II.

V24-DN8 can divide and output the detected encoder pulses. The division is set with C50-0. The
pulse output specifications are given below.
2-1) Open collector output

Item Specifications
Power voltage Maximum 24VDC+10%
Pulse output current Minimum ON current DC5mA or more, maximum current DC30mA or less
c) Use twisted pair wires for the pulse output PA0 to 0RP(0V) and PB0 to 0RP(0V).
11-38
Chapter 11 Options
2-2) Line driver output

Item Specifications
Pulse output current 2V or more differential (At output current 20mA or less)
c) Connect to the host controllers signal common using twisted pair wires for the pulse output PA+
and PA- and the PB+ and PB-, and using a shielded cable for 0V.
(3) Mounting method
CAUTION

V24-DN8 (Figure shows V24-DN5)

Option I mounting
position
Option I fixing jaw
Enlarged (1)
view
(2) Jaw
Mounting method
11-39
Chapter 11 Options
V24-DN8 PCB shape
Use 0.75mm2 (10m or less) of twisted pair shield wire strands for the cables.
Connect the encoder signal cable's shield wire to the D-SUB connector frame.
Connect the pulse output cables shield to TB1 0V.
If the inverter operates incorrectly when the shield cable is connected to the D-sub 15 connector,
disconnect the shield wire from the D-SUB connector frame or cut the V24-DN8 JP1 and connect
the encoder side shield wire to the encoders grounding terminal. The state may be improved.
Treat the end of the connected pulse output signal cable as shown below.
5mm
Shield
To TB1 0V
CAUTION
11-40
Chapter 11 Options
(4) Connector (CN2) layout

Pin
Symbol Function
No.
1 PBN Encoder B-phase - input
2 - Open
3 PZ Encoder Z-phase + input (Note 1)
4 PZN Encoder Z-phase - input (Note 1)
5 PA Encoder A-phase + input
6 PAN Encoder A-phase - input
7 0V 5VDC power common
8 PB Encoder B-phase + input
9 +5V 5VDC power
10 PCN Encoder C-phase - input
11 PC Encoder C-phase + input
12 PD Encoder D-phase + input
13 PDN Encoder D-phase - input
14 - Open
15 - Open
(Note 1) Described as R-phase in the ERN1387. With the VT240EL, input in the zero point signal
Z-phase.
No. 5 pin No. 1 pin
D-sub 15 connector, PCB side, female D-sub 15 connector, cable side, male
(View from cable side connector)

Pin
Symbol Function
No.
1 PA- Divider A-phase - output (line driver)
2 PB- Divider B-phase - output (line driver)
3 0V Divider output signal common
4 0V Divider output signal common
5 PA+ Divider A-phase + output (line driver)
6 PB+ Divider B-phase + output (line driver)
7 PA Divider A-phase output (open collector)
8 PB Divider B-phase output (open collector)
No. 5 pin No. 8 pin

No. 1 pin No. 4 pin

11-41
Chapter 11 Options
(6) Encoder signal

The analog output signal when the encoder is rotated clockwise (CW) looking from the motor
installation end is as shown below.
[A, B phase signals]

Multi-cycle (2048 cycles for ERN1387 and TS6213N555) sine wave voltage signal in one encoder
rotation
360 360
A A
90 90
B B
Converted to
square-wave
signals and used
Z Z
[C, D phase signals]

One-cycle sine wave voltage signal in one encoder rotation
360
90
With the VT240EL, rotation in the counter-clockwise direction (CCW) looking from the motor shaft is
defined as forward run, and rotation in the clockwise direction (CW) is defined as reverse run. Thus,
for ERN1387 and TS6213N555, set the encoder AB advance direction selection to reverse (C50-2=2).

11-42
Chapter 11 Options
(7) Wiring example

instrument cable
2
V24-DN5 Rev0
Encoder
ERN1387 CN
A+ -5 [PA]
or
TS6213N555 A- -6 [PAN]
B+ -8 [PB]
B- -1 [PBN]
R+ (Z+) -3 [PZ]
R- (Z-) -4 [PZN]
B
AD
C+ -11[PC]
Converter
-10 [PCN] C
C-
D+ -12 [PD]
-13 [PDN] D
D-
5V -9 [5V] 5VDC MAX.150mA
0V -7 [0V]
JP1
Shield Frame
MAX.24V+10% I=MIN.5mA, MAX.30mA TB1

-7 [PA]
-3 [0V]
-8 [PB]
-4 [0V]
Shield
-5 [PA+]
-1 [PA-]
-6 [PB+]
-2 [PB-]
11-43
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
12.1 Precautions for inspection....................................................................................................12-1

12.2 Inspection items...................................................................................................................12-1
12.2.1 Daily inspections ...........................................................................................................12-1
12.2.2 Periodic inspections ......................................................................................................12-2
12.2.3 Insulation test of main circuit.........................................................................................12-2
12.2.4 Insulation test of control circuit......................................................................................12-3
12.2.5 Inspection of spare parts...............................................................................................12-3
12.2.6 Storage conditions ........................................................................................................12-3
12.3 Measuring devices ...............................................................................................................12-3

12.1 Precautions for inspection
DANGER
Always wait at least 10 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting inspections.
Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the input power OFF before starting work.
Make sure that the displays on the operation panel have gone out before removing the front cover.
Remove the front cover, and confirm that the "CHARGE" LED in the unit has gone out. Also check that the
voltage between L+1 or L+2 and L- is 15V or less before starting the inspections.
Maintenance, inspections and part replacement must be done by a designated person.
(Remove all metal accessories such as watches, bracelets, etc., before starting the work.)
(Always use an insulation measure tool.)
Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks and injuries.
Always turn the power OFF before inspecting the motor or machine. A potential is applied on the motor
terminal even when the motor is stopped.
Failure to do so could lead to electric shocks and injuries.
Do not use parts other than those designated for the replacement parts.
Contact your inverter dealer for replacement parts.
CAUTION
Vacuum the inverter with a vacuum cleaner to clean it. Do not use water or organic solvents. Failure to
observe this could lead to fires or damage.
12.2 Inspection items

The inspection must be carried out periodically. Determine the cycle according to the installation
environment and working frequency of the VT240EL. If there are any abnormalities, the cause must be
inspected immediately and countermeasures should be taken.
12.2.1 Daily inspections
Inspection item Inspection details and work

Confirm that the ambient temperature is 10 to +45C, and that the humidity is 95%
Temperature/humidity
or less with no dew condensation.
Oil mist, dust and corrosive
Confirm that there is no oil mist, dust or corrosive gas, etc., in the VT240EL.
gas
Abnormal noise and Confirm that there is no abnormal noise or vibration from the installation site or
vibration VT240EL.
Input power source Confirm that the input voltage and frequency are within the specifications range.
Cooling fan Confirm that the cooling fan rotates normally and that no lint, etc. is stuck on it.
Indicator Confirm that all lamps on the operation panel light properly.
12-1
12.2.2 Periodic inspections
Inspection item Inspection details and work

VT240EL appearance Check the state of dirt and dust on the vent or heatsink, and clean if necessary.
Check the state of dirt and dust on the PCB and inside the equipment, and clean if
VT240EL interior
necessary.
Terminal block Tighten the terminal block screws if loose.
Cooling fan Replace the fan every three years.
Confirm that there is no liquid leaking or sheath discoloration.
Please exchange electrolytic capacitors of a main circuit for about five years. (When
Electrolytic capacitor the average annual temperature of the panel in which the VT240EL is stored is 25C
or less. Please consult with our company when it is used in the environment for the
average temperature to exceed 25C during year. )
An insulation test has been completed at the factory, so avoid performing a megger
test on the VT240EL if possible.
If the insulation test has to be carried out, use the method given in 12.2.3 Main
Insulation test
circuit insulation test and 12.2.4 Control circuit insulation test. Note that an
incorrect testing method could cause product damage.
Contact Meidensha when a pressure test is required.
Confirm that there is no looseness or play in the bearings or couplings.
Encoder
The bearings are not durable parts. They must be replaced periodically.
12.2.3 Insulation test of main circuit
(1) Turn OFF the power to all circuits connected to the VT240EL, and confirm that the operation panel
display has turned OFF. Then, remove the front cover.
(2) Confirm that the "CHARGE" LED on the PCB has gone out, and that the voltage between L+1, L+2
and L- (if unit capacity does not have L-, negative pole of main circuit electrolytic capacitor) is
completely discharged.
(3) Short-circuit of the main circuit terminals in a batch is shown below. If the unit capacity does not have
an L- terminal, add the main circuit electrolytic capacitor negative pole to the batch short-circuit.
If the test voltage could be applied on the control circuit, disconnect the control terminal block wiring.
(4) Carry out the megger test at 500VDC. Connect the + pole of the megger tester to where the main
circuit is short-circuited in a batch, and connect the - pole to the ground (grounding terminal), so that
the test voltage is not applied on the other circuits.
(5) When the VT240EL isolated, the state is normal if the megger measurement results are 1M or more.
VT240EL main circuit terminals
L1 L2 L3 L+1 L+2 B L- U V W
Short-circuit in a
batch
* Terminals L- and B may not be provided depending

500VDC megger on the capacity.
12-2
12.2.4 Insulation test of control circuit
Test the control circuit's insulation with the tester's high-resistance range. Never perform a megger test or
pressure test.
(1) Turn OFF the power to all circuits connected to the VT240EL, and confirm the safety.
(2) Confirm that the operation panel display has turned OFF. Then, remove the front cover.
(3) Confirm that the "CHARGE" LED on the PCB has gone out, and that the voltage between L+1, L+2
and L- is completely discharged.
(4) Disconnect all wires connected to the control circuit terminal.
(5) Measure the resistance between the control circuit terminal and ground. The insulation is normal if the
resistance is 1M or more.
12.2.5 Inspection of spare parts
The inspections must be performed even for parts which are not powered for a long time, such as spare
parts. The characteristics of the large capacity electrolytic capacitor, used in the main circuit, will drop if the
capacitor is not energized for a long time. Turn the power ON for approx. five hours once every six months.
Also check the operation of the VT240EL at this time. If the inverter has not been energized for a long time,
do not connect it directly to a commercial power supply. Instead, energize it by using a Slidac, etc., to
gradually increase the input voltage and confirm that there is no abnormality.
12.2.6 Storage conditions
Temperature +5C(winter) to +35C(summer)

Change in temperature 10C/day
Humidity Below 75% RH(without due condensation)
Atmosphere Without oil mist, dust, corrosive gas
Vibration Not allowed
Altitude 1000 m or below
Condition Without direct light / ultraviolet rays
12.3 Measuring devices

As the voltage and current on the input and output sides include high harmonics, the measured value will
differ according to the measuring device. When measuring with a device for commercial frequencies,
measure with the following circuits and noted measuring devices.
Use of a digital power meter is recommended for performing a highly accurate measurement.
A1 A4
Inverter
Power
A2 A5
A3 A6
V1 : Moving iron type voltmeter

V2 : Rectifying voltmeter
W 1 W 6 : Electrodynamometer type power meter
A1 A6 : Moving iron type ammeter
12-3
THYFREC VT240EL
Instruction Manual
13.1 Monitor parameter ...............................................................................................................13-1

13.2 Block-A Parameter ...............................................................................................................13-5
13.3 Block-B Parameter...............................................................................................................13-7
13.3.1 Basic function setting ....................................................................................................13-7
13.3.2 Extended function setting..............................................................................................13-10
13.3.3 Software option function setting ....................................................................................13-14
13.4 Block-C Parameter ..............................................................................................................13-20
13.4.1 Basic function settings ..................................................................................................13-20
13.4.2 Extended function setting..............................................................................................13-28
13.4.3 Hardware option function setting...................................................................................13-31
13.5 Block-U Parameters.............................................................................................................13-35
13.5.1 Utility mode ...................................................................................................................13-35

The parameters used with the VT240EL are listed below.
VEC, PM and V/f in the table indicate the "Vector control with IM speed sensor", "Control with PM motor
sensor" and "V/f control" modes respectively. The circle means that the corresponding parameter in that
mode is displayed.
13.1 Monitor parameter
Display Ref.
No. Parameter Unit Function
VEC PM V/f
page
D00 Output frequency monitor
0 Output frequency in Hz 0.01Hz will display when the gate is closed.

displays while the DC brake is in action.
1 Output frequency in % 0.01%
2 Motor speed in min
1
0.1min
-1 The forward run direction is displayed with the + polarity,
and the reverse run direction with the polarity. (This is
3 Motor speed in % 0.01% displayed even when stopped.)
This displays the detected rotation speed for V/f control or
5 Motor rotation speed 0.01% sensorless vector control in the case where the unit is
equipped with a speed detection option.
D01 Frequency setting monitor
0 Set frequency in Hz 0.01Hz The currently selected frequency setting value is displayed.
1 Set frequency in % 0.01% The max. frequency is displayed as 100%.
The set value input into speed control amplifier is
-1
2 Cushion output speed 0.1min displayed. The forward run direction is displayed with the +
polarity, and the reverse run direction with the polarity.
The set speed at the cushion functions input point is
-1 displayed.
3 Cushion input speed 0.1min
The forward run direction is displayed with the + polarity,
and the reverse run direction with the polarity.
D02 Current monitor
0 Output current (A unit display) 0.1A will display when the gate is closed.
1 Output current (%) 0.1% The motor rated current is displayed as 100%.
2 Unit overload (OL-1) monitor 0.1% OL-1 functions when this value reaches 100%.
3 Motor overload (OL-3) monitor 0.1% OL-3 functions when this value reaches 100%.
Depending on the capacity, UOH.1 may occur after running
4 Heatsink temperature 1C
in the range of 75C to 95C.
The torque current detection value is displayed using the
motor rated current as 100%.
Forward drive, reverse run regeneration direction is
5 Torque current detection 0.1%
indicated with + polarity.
Forward run, reverse drive direction is indicated with -
polarity.
The excitation currents detection value is displayed using
the motor rated current as 100%.
6 Excitation current detection 0.1%
With the PM motor control, the demagnetizing current is
indicated with polarity.
U phase output current amps
7 0.1A
(A unit display)
V phase output current amps will display when the gate is closed.
8 0.1A
(A unit display) The correct value is not displayed during automatic tuning.
W phase output current amps
9 0.1A
(A unit display)
D03 Voltage monitor
0 DC voltage 1V Displays the voltage of the DC link circuit in the main circuit.
Displays output voltage command. This may differ from the
1 Output voltage (command) 1V actual output voltage depending on the state of the power
or load. will display when the gate is closed.
Displays the inverters output power. This may differ from
2 Output power 0.1kW the actual output voltage depending on the state of the
power or load. will display when the gate is closed.
3 Carrier frequency 0.1kHz The current carrier frequency is displayed.
13-1
No. Parameter Unit Function Display Ref.

VEC PM V/f page
D04 Sequence status
0
1
Input 5-20
2
3 The ON/OFF state of the internal sequence data will
4 display.
5
Output 5-20
6
7
D05 Minor fault monitor
0 Minor fault monitor The internal minor fault status will display. 5-25
Hardware detection fault The status of the fault signal detected by the hardware is
1 5-25
status displayed.
D08 Control PCB terminal input monitor
AI1 random scale display Value to which coefficient set at C14-9 is applied on AI1
0 (max. frequency/rotation input displays. [OVER.] displays if the coefficient exceeds
speed reference) the 99999. to 99999. range.
AI2 random scale display Value to which coefficient set at C14-A is applied on AI2
AI3 random scale display Value to which coefficient set at C14-B is applied on AI3
3 AI1 input voltage display 0.1V 0.01V. When the Al1 terminal are for current setting
4 AI2 input voltage display 0.1V 0.01V. When the Al1 terminal are for current setting
5 AI3 input voltage display 0.1V
0.01V.
The current on the Al1 terminal will be displayed in a unit of 5-30
6 AI1 input current display 0.01mA 0.01mA. When the Al1 terminals are for voltage setting
The current on the Al2 terminal will be displayed in a unit of
7 AI2 input current display 0.01mA 0.01mA. When the Al2 terminals are for voltage setting
8 AI1 input display (in %) 0.01% The voltage or current input into each circuit is indicated as
9 AI2 input display (in %) 0.01% a percentage in respect to that input terminal's full scale.
(Only voltage input is indicated for AI3 terminal.)
A AI3 input display (in %) 0.01%
The ON/OFF status of the control PCB terminal block
Sequence input terminal sequence input PSI1 to 7 is indicated with the lower line bit,
B 5-24
status display and the ON/OFF status of PSI8 to 11 when the relay option
is mounted is indicated with the upper line bit.
The speed detection options ABZ-phase signal input and
UVW-phase signal input status are displayed.
Speed detection signal input
C The UVW-phase is displayed only when C51-0 is set to 1. 5-31
status display
Note that if the input terminal is open, the ON state will be
displayed.
The ON/OFF state of the control PCB terminal block
sequence output terminal PS01 to 3, FA-FB-FC and RA-RC
Sequence output terminal
D is displayed with the lower line bit, and the ON/OFF state of 5-24
block output display
PS04 to 7 when the relay option is mounted is displayed
with the upper line bit.
13-2

VEC PM V/f page
D09 Analog encoder
The A-phase offset is displayed. Adjust C52-1 so that the
0 A-phase detection offset 0.1%
offset is 0%. Add the displayed value to C52-1.
The B-phase offset is displayed. Adjust C52-3 so that the
1 B-phase detection offset 0.1%
The A-phase amplitude is displayed. Adjust C52-0 so that
2 A-phase detection amplitude 0.1%
the offset is 100%.
The B-phase amplitude is displayed. Adjust C52-2 so that
3 B-phase detection amplitude 0.1%
the offset is 100%. 5-31
The C-phase offset is displayed. Adjust C52-5 so that the 7-39
4 C-phase detection offset 0.1%
The D-phase offset is displayed. Adjust C52-7 so that the
5 D-phase detection offset 0.1%
The C-phase amplitude is displayed. Adjust C52-4 so that
6 C-phase detection amplitude 0.1%
the offset is 0%.
The D-phase amplitude is displayed. Adjust C52-6 so that
7 D-phase detection amplitude 0.1%
the offset is 0%.
D10 Built-in PLC monitor
0 Built-in PLC display 1
1 Built-in PLC display 2 The built-in PLC function cannot be used with the
2 Built-in PLC display 3 VT240EL.
3 Built-in PLC display 4
This display value indicates:
Forward drive, reverse run regeneration direction with +
D11 Torque setting monitor
polarity.
Forward run, reverse drive direction with - polarity.
The currently selected torque setting of the current control
0 Torque setting input point %
input points is selected.
The setting value input from the analog torque setting is
1 Analog torque setting % 6-12
displayed.
to
4 ASR output % The ASR output is displayed. 6-15
The forward run direction torque is displayed with the +
Torque setting (after torque
5 % polarity, and the reverse run direction torque with the
limiter)
polarity.
D12 Slip
The slip is displayed as a percentage in respect to the base
0 Slip %
speed.
D14 Automatic torque bias
Displays the currently set torque bias value at the
analog/digital auto torque bias setting.
This display value indicates:
0 Automatic torque bias setting % 6-38
Forward drive, reverse run regeneration direction with +
polarity.
Forward run, reverse drive direction with - polarity.
D15 Electric angle monitor
Use this display value when setting C51-4 using the
magnetic pole position estimation function.
0 Z-phase electric angle When magnetic pole position estimation is disabled, 0.0 will
7-38
appear if B39-0 f1 is set to 0.
0 Judgment standard 1 %
This must be 120% or more.
1 Judgment standard 2 %
This must be 120% or more.
7-14
The estimation results judgment standards 3 is displayed. 7-18
2 Judgment standard 3 % No applicable standards.
This does not need to be adjusted.
3 Judgment standard 4 This must be within 10
13-3

VEC PM V/f page
D17 Elevator monitor
The speed command value is displayed as the car speed
0 Speed command (SPD) m/s
unit 0.001m/s.
The speed detection value is displayed as the car speed
1 Speed detection (SFB) m/s
unit 0.001m/s.
The speed detection value is displayed as the car speed
2 Speed detection (SFB) m/min
unit 0.1m/s.
-1 The speed detection value is displayed as the motor speed
3 Motor speed (MOT) min -1
unit 0.1min .
4 Torque command value %
indicated with + polarity.
Forward run, reverse drive direction is indicated with - 5-19
5 Torque command value Nm polarity. 0.1% unit 0.1Nm unit
6 DC voltage (VDC) Vdc 1V unit Same as D03-0
7 Current command (IOUT) A 0.1A unit
8 Current detection (IDET) A 0.1A unit Same as D02-0
Bias torque output command indicated with + polarity.
9 %
(LOAD) Forward run, reverse drive direction is indicated with -
polarity. 0.1% unit Same as D14-0
A Load detection (VLOAD) V 0.01V unit Analog input voltage value
B Heat sink temperature C 1C unit Same as D02-4
The fault history reference mode will display when SET
0 Fault code entry
is pressed.
5-26
The minor fault history reference mode will display when
1 Minor fault history indication SET is pressed.
The mode for referring to and changing parameters that
Parameter A, B and C
2 differ from the default value will display when SET is 5-30
modification list entry
pressed.
The sequence input reference mode will display when
Sequence input display SET is pressed.
3 5-23
(dedicated for LCD panel)
This parameter appears when the LED panel is connected.
The sequence output reference mode will display when
Sequence output display SET is pressed.
4 5-23
(dedicated for LCD panel)
This parameter appears when the LED panel is connected.
D21 Maintenance monitor
The cumulative power ON time after product shipment will
0 Cumulative conductivity time h.
be counted and displayed.
The cumulative run time after product shipment will be
1 Cumulative run time h. 5-29
counted and displayed.
2 CPU version Display for maker control.
3 ROM version Display for maker control.
D22 Automatic tuning
Automatic tuning progression
0 The progression state of automatic tuning is displayed.
display
D23 - Fault automatic reset function
0 Class B-1 fault The number of times that the automatic reset execution for
1 Class B-2 fault faults in each class is displayed. These values are reset to 6-65
zero when operation stops normally.
2 Class B-5 fault
D30 Hardware monitor
0 Inverter type This indicates the inverter type.
5-29
1 Option PCB Displays the mounted option PCB.
13-4
13.2 Block-A Parameter
No. Parameter Min. Max. Default Function Display Ref.

(Unit) VEC PM RWE V/f page
A02 Torque boost
Manual torque boost
0 1. 2. 2. =1: Disable = 2: Enable
selection
1 1. 2. 1. =1: Disable = 2: Enable 6-77
selection
Inverter Set the boost voltage at 0Hz.
Manual torque boost
2 0.00 20.00 rating This is automatically adjusted by the
voltage
(%) automatic tuning.
Square law speed 0.00 Set the reduced voltage at base
3 0.00 25.00
torque (%) frequency/2.
Set how much to compensate the voltage
R1 drop compensation 100.0
4 0.0 100.0 drop caused by R1 measured with
gain (%)
automatic tuning.
Set the motors rated slip.
0.00
5 Slip compensation gain 0.00 20.00 This is automatically adjusted by the 6-77
(%)
automatic tuning.
This is automatically adjusted by the
Maximum torque boost 0.00 automatic tuning. The optimum boost
6 0.00 50.00
gain (%) amount for outputting the maximum torque
is set.
A03 DC Brake
This is automatically adjusted by the
Inverter
automatic tuning. When setting manually,
0 DC braking voltage 0.01 20.00 rating
monitor the output voltage and change the
(%)
setting in increments of 1% or less.
0.0 6-79
1 DC braking time 0.0 20.0 Set the time to apply the DC brakes.
(s)
This is used instead of the DC brake
50.
2 DC braking current 0. 150. voltage in the vector mode and PM mode.
(%)
This is not adjusted with automatic tuning.
A05 Parameter B and C indicatory skip
0 Extended setting 1. 2. 1. = 1: Display, = 2: Skip
1 Software option function 1. 2. 1. = 1: Display, = 2: Skip 6-67
Hardware option
2 1. 2. 1. = 1: Display, = 2: Skip
function
180.0
3 ASR drive torque limiter 0.1 300.0
(%) The torque limit values for the ASR drive
ASR regenerative 180.0 side and regenerative side are set.
4 0.1 300.0 6-71
torque limiter (%) 6-74
Emergency stop The ASR regenerative side limit value
180.0
5 regenerative torque 0.1 300.0 applied during the emergency stop mode is
(%)
limiter set.
A11 ACR control constant
The ACR gain and time constant are set.
1000. This will affect the current response. If the
0 ACR response 100. 6000. gain is too low or too high, the current will
(rad/s)
become unstable, and the over current
20.0 Normally adjust the response between 500
1 ACR time constant 0.1 300.0 and 1000, and the time constant between 5 6-75
(ms)
and 20ms.
180.0
2 ACR drive torque limiter 0.1 300.0
(%) The torque limit values for the ACR drive
ACR regenerative 180.0 side and regenerative side are set.
3 0.1 300.0
torque limiter (%)
13-5

A20 ACR control constant (PM)
The ACR gain and time constant are set.
This will affect the current response. If the
1000.
0 ACR response 100. 6000. gain is too low or too high, the current will
(rad/s)
become unstable, and the over current
Normally adjust the response between 500
and 2000, and the time constant between 5
20.0 and 20ms.
1 ACR time constant 0.1 300.0
(ms) 6-72
* This setting value is used even during
magnetic pole position estimation.
This is the cushion setting to prevent
d axis current command 2.0
2 0.1 100.0 instability caused by overshooting, etc.,
cushion time (ms)
when the current command changes
suddenly.
q axis current command 2.0 Set at how many ms to change the current
3 0.1 100.0 command value equivalent to the motor
cushion time (ms)
rated current (100% current).
13-6
13.3 Block-B Parameter
13.3.1 Basic function setting

B00 Output rating
Rated input voltage Select the rated input voltage from the
0 1. 7. 7. 6-19
setting following table.

setting Power supply Power supply
voltage voltage
1 200V to 200V 380V to 380V
When this data is changed,
2 200V to 200V 400V 381 to 400V
the output voltage data
(B00-3) will be changed to 3 220V 201 to 220V 415V 401 to 415V
the same value. 4 220V 201 to 220V 440V 416 to 440V
5 230V 221 to 230V 460V 441 to 460V
6 240V 231 to 240V 480V 461 to 480V
7 230V 221 to 230V 400V 381 to 400V
Max./base frequency Select the output frequency rating from the

1 0. 9. 1.
simple setting combination below.
Fbase Fbase Fmax [Hz]

Setting Fmax [Hz] Setting
[Hz]
[Hz]
Free setting on B00-4 5 50 100
0
and B00-5 6 60 70
1 50 50 7 60 80
2 60 60 8 60 90
3 50 60 9 60 120
4 50 75
Inverter
The motor rated output at the base
2 Motor rated output 0.10 750.00 rating
frequency is set.
(kW)
DC-AVR does not operate when set to 39.
The input voltage equals the output voltage
at the base frequency.
DC-AVR operates so that the set voltage is 6-20
230.
attained at the base frequency when not
or
3 Rated output voltage 39. 480. set to 39.
400.
When the rated input voltage setting
(V)
(B00-0) is changed, this data is also
changed to the rated input voltage value.
This cannot be set above the rated input
voltage.
Fbase fbase*7
50.00
4 Max. frequency (Fmax) or or
(Hz) When "B00-1" is a value other than 0, this
3.00 440.00
will be rewritten with the data set in the
Fmax/7 Fmax simple setting.
50.00
5 Base frequency (Fbase) or or
(Hz)
1.00 440.00
This is the reference value for the
Inverter Inverter
Inverter over-current limit, OLT, current % display, 6-21
6 Motor rated current rating rating
rating analog input and output.
0.3 (A)
(Set with decimal point position: 0.1A unit.)
1 = 2kHz 2 = 4kHz 3 = 6kHz
4 = 8kHz 5 = 10kHz
Follows
Default value:
8 Carrier frequency 1. 5. cap-
Capacity type
acity
2010 to 2100, 4009 to 4070: 4
2130 to 2350, 4100 to 4150: 2
13-7

B01 Output rating
Rated input voltage Select the rated input voltage from the
0 1. 7. 7. 6-19
setting following table.

setting Power supply Power supply
voltage voltage
1 200V to 200V 380V to 380V
When this data is changed, 2 200V to 200V 400V 381 to 400V
the output voltage data
(B01-3) will be changed to 3 220V 201 to 220V 415V 401 to 415V
the same value. 4 220V 201 to 220V 440V 416 to 440V
5 230V 221 to 230V 460V 441 to 460V
6 240V 231 to 240V 480V 461 to 480V
7 230V 221 to 230V 400V 381 to 400V
Inverter
The motors rated output at the base speed
1 Motor rated output 0.10 750.00 rating
is set.
(kW)
Set the number of poles indicated on the
2 No. of motor poles 2. 100. 4.
motor nameplate.
6-20
DC-AVR functions to attain the set voltage
230. at the base frequency.
or If the rated input voltage setting (B01-0) is
3 Rated output voltage 40. 480.
400. changed, this value is also changed to the
(V) rated input voltage value. This cannot be
set higher than the rated input voltage.
The max. speed is set. Set a value that is
4-times or less of the base speed.
In the case of PM motor control, set a value
72. 1.5 times or less of the base speed.
4 Max. speed 40. 9999. -1
(min ) The maximum value is determined by the
number of motor poles. The speed is
limited where the synchronous frequency is
120Hz.
The motor base speed is set. When higher 6-21
Max. 72.
5 Base speed 40. -1 than this speed, the flux control during
speed (min )
vector control will be weakened.
Inverter Inverter The motor current during full load at the
Inverter
6 Motor rated current rating rating base speed is set.
rating
0.3 (A) (Set with decimal point position: 0.1A unit.)
8192. The number of pulses per rotation of the
8 No. of encoder pulses 30. 10000.
(P/R) encoder in use is set.
160. The motor terminal voltage during no-load
9 No-load output voltage 20. 500.
(V) at the base speed is set.
1 = 2kHz 2 = 4kHz 3 = 6kHz
4 = 8kHz 5 = 10kHz 6-22
Follows
Carrier frequency Default value:
A 1. 5. cap-
setting Capacity type
acity
2010 to 2100, 4009 to 4070: 4
2130 to 2350, 4100 to 4150: 2
* The magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS) turns OFF when the B01-0 to 9 setting value is changed, or
even if the value is not changed and the operation panel SET key is pressed twice to enter the setting value.
13-8

The IM circuit constants are set.
B02 Motor circuit constant Some parameters are automatically
adjusted with automatic tuning.
R1: Inverter
0 Primary resistance 0.010 9.999 rating
(IM: Mantissa section) (m) This parameter is used when using the
R1: torque boost function in the V/f mode.
Inverter
1 Primary resistance -3 4
rating
(IM: Exponent section
R2:
1.000
2 Secondary resistance 0.010 9.999
(m) The default value has the following
(IM : Mantissa section)
meaning.
R2: 0
R2 = 1.000 10 [m]
3 Secondary resistance -3 4 0.
L:
1.000
4 Leakage inductance 0.100 9.999 U
(mH)
(IM: Mantissa section) This parameter appears, but is not used in 6-29
L: the V/f mode.
5 Leakage inductance -3 4 0. U
M:
1.000
6 Excitation inductance 0.100 9.999
(mH) The default value has the following
meaning.
M: Ld, Lq = 1.000 100 [m]
7 Excitation inductance -3 4 0.
Rm:
1.000
8 Iron loss resistance 0.100 9.999
(m) The default value has the following
meaning.
Rm: Rm = 1.000 100 [m]
9 Iron loss resistance -3 5 0.
B03 Motor circuit constant (PM) The PM motor circuit constants are set.
R1:
PM motor winding 1.000
0 0.001 9.999
resistance (m)
(Mantissa section) This combination means below
R1: R1 = 1.000 100 [m]
PM motor winding
1 -1. 4. 0.
resistance
(Exponent section)
Ld:
PM motor d axis 1.000 6-28
2 0.001 9.999
inductance (mH)
(Mantissa section) This combination means below
Ld, Lq = 1.000 100 [mH]
Lq: If the motor can be fixed with the
PM motor q axis 1.000 mechanical brakes, these
3 0.001 9.999
inductance (mH) parameters can be automatically
(Mantissa section) adjusted with automatic tuning.
Ld, Lq:
4 PM motor inductance -1. 4. 0.
(Exponent section)
13-9
13.3.2 Extended function setting

B10 Acceleration/deceleration time
S-shape ramp pass =1: OFF =2: For program 0 6-31
6 1. 3. 1.
function =3: For RUN-OFF 6-80
Select the program frequency setting
(B11-0 to 7) and program ramp (B41, B42)
8 Selection mode setting 1. 3. 1. selection mode. 6-32
=1: Binary mode =2: Direct select mode
=3: Direct select mode 2
Automatic torque bias
0 0. 2. 0. =0: Not used =1: Digital =2: Analog
selection
-100.0 These settings are selected according to
1 Digital bias setting 0 -150.0 150.0
(%) the state of sequence input: S5, S6 and S7
-50.0 (C05-0, 1, 2).
(%) S7 S6 S5
0.0 0 0 0 Setting 0
3 Digital bias setting 2 -150.0 150.0 0 0 1 Setting 1
(%)
0 1 0 Setting 2
50.0 6-38
4 Digital bias setting 3 -150.0 150.0 0 1 1 Setting 3
(%) 6-39
1 Setting 4
100.0 : State is irrelevant 6-40
(%)
Set the bias direction. 7-22
6 Bias direction selection 1. 2. 1. =1: Clockwise drive direction 7-26
=2: Counter-clockwise drive direction
8-12
0.0 8-16
7 Analog bias voltage 0 -100.0 100.0 Set the input voltage lower limit value.
(%)
50.0
8 Analog bias voltage 1 -100.0 100.0 Set the input voltage at the balance point.
(%)
100.0
9 Analog bias voltage 2 -100.0 100.0 Set the input voltage upper limit value.
(%)
-100.0 Set the bias torque at the input voltage
A Output bias torque 0 -150.0 150.0
(%) lower limit value.
100.0 Set the bias torque at the input voltage
B Output bias torque 2 -150.0 150.0
(%) upper limit value.
Set the torque bias amount for forward run
0.0 (F RUN).
C Forward torque bias 1 -50.0 50.0
(%) (This is output regardless of the B16-0
setting.) 6-38
Set the torque bias amount for reverse run 6-41
0.0 (R RUN).
D Forward torque bias 2 -50.0 50.0
(%) (This is output regardless of the B16-0
setting.)
B16-0 default value = 0: from software version II. B11-8 maximum value = 3: from software version NN.
13-10

B17 V/f middle point setting
Max. 0.00
0 Frequency-1 0.00 frequency
(Hz)
0.0
1 Voltage-1 0.0 200.0
(%)
Max. 0.00 The following rule applies to each
(Hz) frequency.
0.0 Fmaxfrequency-5frequency-4frequency
3 Voltage-2 0.0 200.0 -3frequency-2frequency-10
(%)
If the setting exceeds this rule, the
Max. 0.00 excessive frequency will be set to the same
(Hz) value as the changed setting value.
0.0 Set the frequency value to 0.00 when using
5 Voltage-3 0.0 200.0 4 points or less.
(%) 6-80
Note that there is need to set 0.00 from
Max. 0.00
6 Frequency-4 0.00 frequency frequency -1.
(Hz)
If all frequency settings are set to 0.00, the
0.0 voltage at the base frequency will be 100%,
7 Voltage-4 0.0 200.0
(%) and the B17-A setting value V/f
Max. 0.00 characteristics will be applied at the max.
8 Frequency-5 0.00 frequency frequency value.
(Hz)
0.0
9 Voltage-5 0.0 200.0
(%)
0.0
A Voltage-Fmax 0.0 200.0
(%)
B Function use selection 1. 2. 1. =1: Function invalid =2: Function valid
* B18-1 to 6 appear but are not used with
B18 Current limit
the vector mode.
Set the limit value for the output current
200. 6-63
0 Over current limit 50. 300. command |I1|.
(%) 2 2 6-71
|I1|=(Id +Iq )
Regenerative current 10.
1 5. 300. Set to 10% when not using the DBR option. U U
limit (%)
The disturbance symptoms which occur if
the current abnormally vibrates after motor
2 Torque stabilization gain 0.00 4.00 1.00 operation, is suppressed. U U 8-10
Increase or decrease by 0.05 units if the
motor vibrates.
Over current limit
3 0.00 2.00 0.25 Decrease if current hunting occurs. U U
function gain
Over current
4 0.00 2.00 0.25 U U
stabilization gain
Over current stall
5 0.00 2.50 1.00 Decrease if current hunting occurs. U U
prevention gain
Over current stall Increase if current hunting occurs.
6 10. 1001. 100. U U
prevention time constant P control will be applied if 1001 is set.
13-11

=1: Simple adjustment
=2: Extended adjustment for V/f Control
=3: Basic adjustment for Vector Control
=4: Extended adjustment for Vector Control
=5: Calculation of no load voltage for
Vector Control
=6: Encoder phase adjustment (PM)
Automatic tuning =7: PM motor automatic tuning
0 0. 7. 0.
selection
V/f: = 1 and 2 can be used
Sensor-less- IM vector: = 3, 4 and 5 can be
used
IM vector with sensor: = 1, 3, 4 and 5 can 7-15
be used 8-9
PM: = Only 6 and 7 can be used
The motor runs in the 2, 3, 4 and 6 modes.

Initial proportion When using a motor with special circuit
compensation 100. constants, set the default conditions for
1 0. 1000.
coefficient (Automatic (%) automatic tuning. If automatic tuning ends
tuning function) incorrectly, change these settings and
execute automatic tuning again.
Initial time constant For IM, increment or decrement the setting
compensation 100. value in an approx. 50% interval.
2 0. 1000.
coefficient (Automatic (%) For PM, increment or decrement the value
tuning function) in an approx. 100% interval.
If the speed setting value or motor speed
ASR proportional item 50.0
2 1.0 400.0 changes suddenly, this will prevent the
change rate limit (%)
ASR's P item from suddenly changing.
Overshooting can be suppressed by setting
Speed setting LPF time 0.
3 0. 1000. this to the filter time constant equivalent to
constant (ms)
the speed response. 6-73
The speed detection noise is cut. 6-76
Speed detection LPF 2.
4 0. 1000. This parameter appears, but is not used in U
time constant (ms)
the V/f mode.
Set the low path filter time constant used
Speed detection LPF 5.
5 0. 1000. for the speed detection value input into the
time constant for ASR (ms)
speed regulator.
Set the low path filter time constant used
Speed detection LPF for the speed detection value for constant
20.
6 time constant for 0. 1000. output range compensation or iron loss 6-76
(ms)
compensation compensation, etc.
(This is not used with VT240EL.)
Torque current
0. Set the low path filter time constant used 6-73
7 command setting LPF 0. 1000.
(ms) for the torque current command. 6-76
time constant
* The magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS) turns OFF if B19-0: automatic tuning is executed.
13-12
Default Display Ref.

No. Parameter Min. Max. Function
(Unit) VEC PM RWE V/f
page
B33 Fluctuation compensation reference speed table
200.
0 Table reference speed 0 100. 9999. -1
(min )
400. These parameters are not used with the
(min ) VT240EL and do not need to be set.
600.
(min ) These parameters have the following
800. function.
(min )
This is the reference speed for
1000. compensating fluctuation in the exciting
(min ) inductance.
1200. If this parameter is adjusted with the
5 Table reference speed 5 100. 9999. -1 automatic tuning mode 4 (B19-0=4) and
(min )
B34 is set to the default value (100.0), this
1400. parameter will be set automatically.
(min )
1600.
(min )
B34 Fluctuation compensation
M fluctuation
0
compensation coefficient 0 These parameters are not used with the
M fluctuation 100.0 VT240EL and do not need to be set.
1 50.0 150.0
compensation coefficient 1 (%)
These parameters have the following
M fluctuation 100.0 function.
2 50.0 150.0
M fluctuation 100.0 This compensates the exciting inductance
3 50.0 150.0
compensation coefficient 3 (%) fluctuation according to the B33 table
M fluctuation 100.0 reference speed.
4 50.0 150.0 Set the compensation table so that the
output voltage is constant during no-load
M fluctuation 100.0 operation throughout the entire operation
5 50.0 150.0
compensation coefficient 5 (%) range.
M fluctuation 100.0
6 50.0 150.0 This is adjusted with the automatic tuning
mode 4 (B19-0 = 4).
M fluctuation 100.0
7 50.0 150.0
B36 Field weakening electric current table
Field weakening electric A demagnetizing current is passed when a
-5.0 positive value is set, and a magnetizing
0 current table 0 (at torque -100.0 100.0
(%/I1) current is passed when a negative value is
command 0%)
set.
Field weakening electric
0.0
(%/I1)
command 25%)
0.0
(%/I1)
command 50%)
0.0
(%/I1)
command 75%)
0.0
(%/I1)
command 100%)
0.0
(%/I1)
command 125%)
0.0
(%/I1)
command 150%)
13-13
13.3.3 Software option function setting

B39 Magnetic pole position estimation
f0 =1: Magnetic pole position estimation
OFF
=2: Estimation with secondary phase
=3: Estimation with primary phase (only
special IPM)
* This parameter should usually be set to
2 when using magnetic pole position 6-7
estimation. 7-1
This parameter is automatically set to 2 7-2
when C51-0 is set to 5. 7-3
0 121. 223. 222. 7-8
f1 : setting value fixed to 2 7-10
=2: Operate with estimation phase 7-15
reference 7-18
7-29
f2 : Selection of operations valid during
magnetic pole position estimation
=1: Output RUN even during magnetic
pole position estimation
=2: Do not output RUN during magnetic
pole position estimation
Set the voltage amplitude for
50.
1 PM tuning voltage 10. 200. measurement.
(%)
The motor's rated voltage is 100%.
Set the voltage width for measurement.
2 PM tuning time 2. 32. 4.
Set a 250us unit integer-fold.
Set the current amplitude for correcting the
Voltage error correction 10.
3 0. 50. voltage error.
current (%)
The motor's rated voltage is 100%.
7-15
ACR gain for magnetic 1500. 7-18
4 100. 6000. Set the ACR gain and time constant for
pole position estimation (rad/s) 7-19
magnetic pole position estimation.
ACR time constant for This setting is applied even during PM 7-20
2.5
5 magnetic pole position 0.1 300.0 motor circuit constant automatic tuning.
(ms)
estimation
When "1" is set and the set key is pressed,
the magnetic pole position will be estimated
Magnetic pole position once.
F 0. 1. 0.
estimation test mode After the magnetic pole position is
estimated, the system will not start, and will
remain stopped.
* The magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS) turns OFF when the B39-0 setting value is changed, or even if
the value is not changed and the operation panel SET key is pressed twice to enter the setting value.
13-14

(Unit) VEC PM RWE V/f
page
f0: Function selection Fixed to ON (2).
f1: IDET interlock function
=1: OFF =2: ON
f2: Operation during acceleration wait time 1
=1: Normal (multi-speed command)
=2: Multi-speed command not updated
=3: DC brake output
f3: Operation during acceleration wait time 2
=1: Frequency not output
=2: Frequency output (for V/f)
Torque bias current Set the rising edge/falling edge time of the
0.20 6-40
1 rising edge/falling edge 0.00 0.50 torque bias current command as the time that
(s) 6-45
time the torque current changes 100%.
0.00 Set the wait time from the RUN command to
2 Brake release wait time 0.00 2.50
(s) the brake release command.
Set the wait time from the point the brakes are 6-42
Acceleration start wait 0.00 released until the motor accelerates. If there is 6-45
3 0.00 2.50
time (s) a brake answer (MBRK_ans), set from answer,
and if none, set time from command.
Set the wait time (cumulative) from the point
0.00 the frequency (speed) command value
4 Brake engage wait time 0.00 2.50
(s) reaches the zero speed setting or below until
the brake is engaged. 6-45
Set the time to wait before starting torque bias
Torque bias attenuation 0.30
5 0.00 3.00 current attenuation after the brake engage
wait time (s)
command is output.
RUN error judgment A fault stoppage occurs if ON for the RUN
5.0 6-45
6 time when engaging 0.0 25.0 setting time or longer when engaging the
(s) 6-63
brake brake. Error judgment is turned OFF at 0.00.
The brake command and brake answer do not
Brake answer error 0.0 match for the set time or longer, and a fault 6-45
7 0.0 25.0
judgment time (s) stoppage occurs. Error judgment is turned OFF 6-63
at 0.00.
This is the time taken to judge that the internal
Operation condition 0.20 sequence has shifted from acceleration start to
8 0.00 1.00
judgement time (s) the run state. Usually this setting value does
not need to be changed.
This is the time taken to judge that the internal
0.05 sequence has shifted from deceleration to the 6-45
9 Stop judgement time 0.00 0.50
(s) brake close wait time. Usually this setting value
does not need to be changed.
This parameter sets the time to turn the RUN
0.00
A RUN-OFF wait time 0.00 0.50 state OFF after the torque command reaches
(s)
zero at stopping.
If the speed command after starting continues
at a state lower than the zero speed level for
Deceleration command 10.0
B 0.0 25.0 longer than this setting value, a fault is output
fault judgment time (s)
[IO-D: RUN OFF delay error]. Set 0.0 to turn
this error judgment function OFF.
When using brake answer signal 2
(MBRK_ans2), the brake answer signals error
Brake answer error 2.0
C 0.0 25.0 state is judged during operation only at speeds
judgment speed level (%)
higher than this setting value. Set a percentage
in respect to the maximum speed (B48-0).
6-45
Select the operation executed at an error when
6-63
using brake answer signal 2 (MBRK_ans2).
0: Stop with a fault if both MBRK_ans and
MBRK_ans2 are faulty during operation. If
only one is faulty, continue operation, and
Operation selection for output a fault after stopping operation.
D 0. 2. 0.
brake operation fault 1: If a fault occurs during operation, output the
minor fault ALM. Output a fault after
operation stops.
2: If a fault occurs in either MBRK_ans or
MBRK_ans2 during operation, output a fault
and stop.
13-15

Car speed at maximum 1.000
0 0.050 4.000 Set the car speed at the maximum speed. 6-22
speed setting (ms)
Set the speed command.
B48-0
Speed setting (during 0.100 Only the speed during LCL can be changed
1 0.000 setting
LCL) (ms) during operation. (Acceleration and jerk
value
cannot be changed during operation.)
6-34
Set the acceleration. 7-21
Acceleration setting 0.100
2 0.001 1.500 2 The maximum value is limited to 10-fold the 8-11
(during LCL) (ms )
B48-0 setting value.
Set the jerk.
Jerk setting (during 0.100
3 0.001 1.500 3 If the maximum value is set, jerk will not be
LCL) (ms )
used in that program. (S-shape ramp path.)
B48-0
Speed setting 0.000
8 0.000 setting
(Program 0) (ms)
value
B48-0
Speed setting 0.000
9 0.000 setting
(Program 1) (ms)
value
B48-0
Speed setting 0.000
A 0.000 setting
(Program 2) (ms)
value
B48-0
Speed setting 0.000
B 0.000 setting
(Program 3) (ms)
value
Set the speed command. 6-30
B48-0
Speed setting 0.000
C 0.000 setting
(Program 4) (ms)
value
B48-0
Speed setting 0.000
D 0.000 setting
(Program 5) (ms)
value
B48-0
Speed setting 0.000
E 0.000 setting
(Program 6) (ms)
value
B48-0
Speed setting 0.000
F 0.000 setting
(Program 7) (ms)
value
The methods for setting a multi-speed command with the sequence commands S0 to SE are shown below.
There are three types of modes which can be selected with B11-8. The default mode is the binary mode.
For binary mode (B11-8 = 1) For direct select mode (B11-8 = 2) For direct select mode 2 (B11-8 = 3)
Sequence command Program Sequence command Program Sequence command Program
SE S3 S2 S1 S0 No. SE S3 S2 S1 S0 No. SE S3 S2 S1 S0 No.
OFF OFF OFF 0 Previous OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON 1 values OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0
OFF ON OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 0 Previous
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF ON ON 3 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 1 values
* *
ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 2 Previous
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON 5 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 3 values
ON ON OFF 6 Previous Previous
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
values values
ON ON ON 7
ON OFF OFF OFF ON 4 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 3
* S3 and SE are not used.
ON OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 4
ON OFF ON OFF OFF 6 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 5
ON ON OFF OFF OFF 7 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 6
ON ON OFF OFF OFF 7
* When S0 to S3 are all OFF, or when two
or more are ON between S0 and S3, the
previous values will be held. If there are
no previous values because the power
has been turned ON, etc., "0" will be set.
13-16

0 0.001 1.500 2
(Program 0) (ms )
1 0.001 1.500 2
(Program 1) (ms )
2 0.001 1.500 2
(Program 2) (ms )
3 0.001 1.500 2
(Program 3) (ms ) Set the acceleration. The maximum value
6-30
Acceleration setting 0.100 is limited at 10-fold the B48-0 setting value.
4 0.001 1.500 2
(Program 4) (ms )
5 0.001 1.500 2
(Program 5) (ms )
6 0.001 1.500 2
(Program 6) (ms )
7 0.001 1.500 2
(Program 7) (ms )
0.200
8 Jerk setting (Program 0) 0.001 1.500 3
(ms )
0.200
9 Jerk setting (Program 1) 0.001 1.500 3
(ms )
0.200
A Jerk setting (Program 2) 0.001 1.500 3
(ms )
0.200
B Jerk setting (Program 3) 0.001 1.500 3 Set the jerk.
(ms )
If the maximum value is set, jerk will not be 6-30
0.200 used in that program. (S-shape ramp path.)
C Jerk setting (Program 4) 0.001 1.500 3
(ms )
0.200
D Jerk setting (Program 5) 0.001 1.500 3
(ms )
0.200
E Jerk setting (Program 6) 0.001 1.500 3
(ms )
0.200
F Jerk setting (Program 7) 0.001 1.500 3
(ms )
13-17

10.0 Set the ASR response angle frequency for
0 ASR response 1 1.0 100.0
(rad/s) starting.
6-35
10.0 Set the ASR response angle frequency for 7-27
(rad/s) normal operation. 8-17
10.0 Set the ASR response frequency for when
(rad/s) stopped.
Set the time required to accelerate the
1000.
3 Machine time constant 10. 20000. motor and load's total inertia to the base 6-22
(ms)
speed at the rated torque as a ms unit.
ASR integral item Set the compensation coefficient multiplied
100.
4 compensation 20. 500. with the ASR integral time constant when
(%)
coefficient 1 starting.
100.
(%)
coefficient 2 normal operation.
100.
(%)
coefficient 3 stopped.
B48-0 When the ramp output command moves 6-35
ASR response 0.050 7-27
7 0.000 setting from the bottom to top of this level, it moves
changeover speed 1 (m/s) 8-17
value to response level 2.
B48-0 When the ramp output command moves
ASR response 0.010
8 0.000 setting from the bottom to top of this level, it moves
changeover speed 2 (m/s)
value to response level 3.
Set the time it takes for the ASR response
ASR response 0.500
9 0.000 3.000 and integral item compensation coefficient
changeover ramp 1 (s)
setting to change from 1 to 2.
Set the time it takes for the ASR response
ASR response 0.500
A 0.000 3.000 and integral item compensation coefficient
changeover ramp 2 (s)
setting to change from 2 to 3.
13-18

B4B Start lock control (Anti-roll back function))
Set the output torque for one encoder pulse
0 Start lock gain 0. 200. 0. (4f unit). This function is disabled when 0.0
is set.
ASR Kp compensation Compensate ASR proportional gain during
1 0.1 10.0 1.0
gain at start lock Start-lock.
ACR Kp compensation Compensate ACR proportional gain during
2 0.1 10.0 1.0
gain at start lock Start-lock.
150.
3 Start lock control timer 20. 1000. Set the time of Start-lock control.
(ms)
0.05 Set the timing for starting start lock control
4 Start lock start pulse 0.01 1.00
(Pulse) as an encoder pulse unit.
6-43
Set the number of pulses used as the
5 Gain changeover level 0.01 10.00 1.00
upper limit gain.
Set the lower limit gain for start lock. This is
6 Balance load gain 0. 100. 100.
adjusted when balancing the load.
7 Soft start gain 0. 2000. 0.
Set the control gain and time constant for
2.00 easing shock when starting.
8 Soft start time constant 0.25 100.00
(ms)
Differential Set the differential compensation gain for
9 0.000 0.200 0.050
compensation gain phase detection.
This is the gain for preventing shock when
A Shock-less gain 0. 100. 0.
starting.
B4C ASR extension
Acceleration amount
80.0 Set the gain for the acceleration amount
0 torque compensation 0.0 200.0
(%) torque compensation function. 6-37
gain
7-28
Acceleration amount Set the LPF time constant for the 8-18
5.
1 torque compensation 0. 1000. acceleration amount torque compensation
(ms)
LPF time constant function.
When using the analog speed input, set the
Speed command update
2 2. 100. 2. cycle at which the speed command is 6-34
cycle
updated.
ASR delay 0.0 Set the ASR delay compensation gain for
3 0.0 100.0
compensation gain 1 (%) acceleration or JERK_IN.
4 0.0 100.0
compensation gain 2 (%) acceleration or JERK_OUT.
5 0.0 100.0 6-37
compensation gain 3 (%) deceleration or JERK_IN.
6 0.0 100.0
compensation gain 4 (%) deceleration or JERK_OUT.
ASR delay
20. Set the LPF time constant inserted in the
7 compensation LPF time 0. 100.0
(ms) ASR delay compensation.
constant
13-19
13.4 Block-C Parameter
13.4.1 Basic function settings

C00 Control methods
Set the stopping method for RUN
operation.
= 1: Coast to stop
= 2: Ramp down to stop
The speed command is set to 0
simultaneously with RUN command
OFF.
= 3: Soft deceleration stop
After the RUN command turns OFF,
the motor decelerates according to
the B48-2, 3 acceleration and JERK
1 Run/stop methods 1. 4. 2. setting. 6-23
= 4: Zero speed judgment stop
Operation stops when the motor
speed drops below the zero speed
level.
With this stopping method, changes
in the status, such as RUN signal
OFF, do not affect how the motor
stops.
To stop the motor, always lower the
speed command to lower than the
zero speed level.
Set the stopping method for the emergency
stop.
Emergency stop (EMS) = 1: Coast to stop without a fault output
4 1. 3. 1. 6-26
mode = 2: Coast to stop with a fault output
= 3: Ramp down to stop without a fault
output
Set whether to validate the remote auxiliary
Control source
operation sequence for the local operation
5 switchover method 1. 2. 1. 6-26
mode.
(J1 setting)
= 1: Disables = 2: Enables
Select the No. of auxiliary operation
Control source sequence input points when the COP
6 switchover method 1. 2. 1. command is ON. 6-27
(J2 setting) = 1: Terminal block input
= 2: Serial transmittal input
The conditions for turning the sequence
Run contact output RUN output ON are set.
7 1. 2. 1. 6-7
condition selection = 1: ON at pre-excitation
= 2: OFF at pre-excitation
C01 Start/stop frequency
Fmax
1.00 When RUN is started, operation starts from
0 Start frequency 0.10 or
(Hz) this frequency.
60.00
6-80
Fmax The DC brakes are applied when the
Stop frequency 1.00
1 0.10 or output frequency value is less than this
(DC brake start) (Hz)
60.00 frequency value.
C02 Various setting input selection
Speed setting input = 1: Analog fixed
0 1. 4. 4. 6-14
points selection = 4: Sequence
13-20

0 FRUN Forward run -11. 16. 0. Setting Input terminal
1 EMS Emergency stop -11. 16. 0. -11 PSI11
-10 PSI10 Relay option
2 RRUN Reverse run -11. 16. 0. -9 PSI9 (reversed)
6 BRAKE DC brake -11. 16. 0. -8 PSI8
7 RESET Breakdown reset -11. 16. 0. -7 PSI7
6-2
-6 PSI6
COP Serial transmis-
8 -11. 16. 0. -5 PSI5 Base section
sion selection
-4 PSI4 terminal block
D AFS1 Speed setting 1 -11. 16. 0. -3 PSI3 (reversed)
E AFS2 Speed setting 2 -11. 16. 0. -2 PSI2
-1 PSI1
F AFS3 Speed setting 3 -11. 16. 0.
0 OFF fixed
C04 Sequence input terminal function 2 1 PSI1
S0 Program setting 2 PSI2
2 -11. 16. 0.
selection 3 PSI3
Base section
S1 Program setting 4 PSI4 terminal block
3 selection
-11. 16. 0. 5 PSI5
S2 Program setting
6 PSI6
4 selection
-11. 16. 0. 7 PSI7
S3 Program setting
8 PSI8 6-2
5 selection
-11. 16. 0. 9 PSI9 Relay option
10 PSI10
SE Program setting
6 -11. 16. 0. 11 PSI11
selection
12
MBRK_ans
13 Not
E External brake -11. 16. 0. usable
answer 14
15
C05 Sequence input terminal function 3 16 ON fixed
8 EFLT1 External Fault 1 -11. 16. 0.
9 EFLT2 External Fault 2 -11. 16. 0.
A EFLT3 External Fault 3 -11. 16. 0. 6-2
B EFLT4 External Fault 4 -11. 16. 0.
C EFLT5 External Fault 5 -11. 16. 0.
D EFLT6 External Fault 6 -11. 16. 0.
E EFLT7 External Fault 7 -11. 16. 0.
F EFLT8 External Fault 8 -11. 16. 0.
0 EXC Pre-excitation -11. 16. 0.
1 ACR ACR -11. 16. 0.
2 PCTL P control -11. 16. 0.
FPOS_CMD
B Magnetic pole position -11. 16. 0.
estimation command 6-2
UVT-MSK
C UPS operation
-11. 16. 0.
OUTMC_ans
D -11. 16. 0.
Output switch answer
MBRK_ans2
E -11. 16. 0.
External brake answer 2
13-21

C07 Analog input terminal function
Setting Input terminal
0 Speed setting 1 0. 11. 0. data
0 0% fixed
1 100% fixed
1 Speed setting 2 0. 11. 0. 2 AI1
3 AI2
4 AI3
2 Speed setting 3 0. 11. 0. 5 to 11 Not usable 6-14
6 Torque setting 0. 11. 0.
Analog torque bias

A 0. 11. 0.
setting
C08 Fault automatic reset function setting

0: Fault automatic reset function disable
Fault automatic reset 1: Fault automatic reset after set time
1 function enable 0. 2. 0. passage function enable
selection 2: Fault automatic reset using RUN
command ON function enable 6-65
When using fault automatic reset function
Fault automatic reset 2.0 with the C08-1=1 setting, set the time taken
2 0.5 20.0
wait time (s) from the fault occurrence to automatic
reset.
C09 Data and operation protection functions
Set to prevent unintentional operation from
the operation panel.
Set whether to enable or prohibit data
changing for each parameter function unit
as shown above.
Parameter data protection:
: Unprotected (changeable)
: Protected (unchangeable)
Setting Parameter Parameter B, C
Panel data protection data A Basic Extn. S/W H/W
0 1. 9. 1. 6-67
function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7, 8
9
= 1: Enable control from Operation Panel

= 2: Disable control from Operation Panel
1 Operation panel lock 1. 3. 1. (If STOP key pressed for 2 seconds, it
will be unlocked)
= 3: Only STOP key is available
= 1: Disables switchover while the drive is 6-68
LCL switchover running
2 1. 2. 1.
protection = 2: Enables switchover while the drive is
running
1: Clear the entire fault history.
6 Fault history clear 0 9999 0. 2: Clear only the major fault history.
3: Clear only the minor fault history.
13-22

C09 Data and operation protection functions
9: All setting values load (except
maintenance setting value)
10: Parameter A
11: Parameters B, C basic functions
12: Parameters B, C extended functions
13: Parameter B software option function
7 Default value load 0 9999 0. Parameter C hardware option function 6-68
14: Parameters B basic functions
15: Parameters B extended functions
16: Parameter B software option function
17: Parameters C basic functions
18: Parameters C extended functions
19: Parameter C hardware option function
C11 Operation panel mode setting
The initial operation mode for when the

0 Initial mode 1. 2. 2. power is turned ON is set
= 1: Local = 2: Remote
Select the parameters displayed first when
the power is turned ON.
0. 00. 0
Operation panel monitor
3 0.00.0 1.9F.F 0.00.0
parameter : Sub No.
: Main No.
: 0 : D block
1 : A block
Select the language displayed on the LCD

panel.
LCD panel: Language =0: English =1: French
4 setting 0. 4. 0. =2: German =3: Spanish
(LCD panel dedicated) =4: Italian
(This is displayed only when the LCD 6-66
panel is connected)
Adjust the contrast of the characters
LCD panel: Contrast
displayed on the LCD panel.
5 adjustment -10. 5. 0.
(This is displayed only when the LCD
(LCD panel dedicated)
panel is connected)
Set the time to turn ON the LCD panel's
backlight.
LCD panel: Backlight =0: Always ON
0.
6 OFF timer setting 0. 255. =Other than 0: Turns OFF when there is
(s)
(LCD panel dedicated) no operation for set time
(This is displayed only when the LCD
panel is connected)
Panel operation method =1: Conventional method
7 1. 2. 1.
selection =2: Main No. selection method
= 1 : Motor rotating direction (speed
FWD/REV LED display
8 1. 2. 2. detection)
system
= 2 : Plus / Minus of Speed command
13-23

AI1 Terminal input mode
0 1. 2. 1. = 1: Voltage input, = 2: Current input
selection
1 AI1 input gain 0.001 5.000 1.000 Set the gain and offset in respect to the
analog input value when the AI1 terminal
2 AI1 input offset -100.00 100.00 0.00 input mode is set to voltage.
3 1. 2. 1. = 1: 4 to 20mA, = 2: 0 to 20mA
selection
Filter time constant for 100. The setting value/2ms time constant is
4 2. 250.
AI1 input (ms) applied on the input value.
5 AI2 terminal input mode 1. 2. 1. = 1: Voltage input, = 2: Current input
6 AI2 input gain 0.001 5.000 1.000 Set the gain and offset in respect to the 6-11
7 AI2 input offset -100.00 100.00 0.00 input mode is set to voltage.
8 AI2 current input mode 1. 2. 1. = 1: 4 to 20mA, = 2: 0 to 20mA
9 2. 250.
A AI3 terminal input mode 1. 3. 1. = 1: 0 to 10V, = 2: 0 to 5V, = 3: 1 to 5V
B AI3 input gain 0.001 5.000 1.000 Set the gain and offset in respect to the
C AI3 input offset -100.00 100.00 0.00 input mode is set to voltage.
D 2. 250.
The program setting inputs are filtered with
0.01
E Program setting filter 0.00 1.00 the setting terminal batch. (Prevents 6-3
(s)
incorrect setting caused by chattering.)
13-24

0 A01 terminal output 0. 21. 0. Select the setting value from the following
6-16
1 A02 terminal output 0. 21. 3. table, and output.
Setting Parameter Terminal voltage Setting Parameter Terminal voltage

0 Output frequency 10V at Max. frequency 11 Torque current 5V at Motor rated current
Setting frequency 10V at Max. frequency 12 Excitation current 5V at Motor rated current
1
Setting speed 10V at Max. speed 13 Actual motor speed 10V at Max. speed
10V at Max. frequency 14 Namp output 10V at Rated torque
2 Ramp output
10V at Max. speed
Overload monitor
3 Output current (Motor) 5V at Motor rated current 15 10V at 100%
(motor protection)
4 Output current (Inverter) 5V at inverter rated current 16
5 Output voltage 10V at Motor rated voltage 17 Not usable -
5V at (Motor rated voltage 18
6 Inverter output power
Motor rated current)
19 Built-in PLC output 4 10V/1000h
7 DC voltage 20 DM1 for maker maintenance 10V/1000h
Overload monitor
8 10V at 100%
(unit protection)
9 Heat sink temperature 10V at 100C
10 Motor speed 10V at Max. speed
RA-RC terminal output

2 -55. 55. 1.
selection
3 -55. 55. 4.
selection
Select the setting value from the following
PSO2 terminal output table, and output. 6-5
4 -55. 55. 8.
selection -1 to -55 are the reverse output of 1 to 55.
5 -55. 55. 9.
selection
FA-FB-FC terminal
6 -55. 55. 2.
output selection
Setting Output Setting Output Setting Output Setting Output Setting Output Setting Setting Output
Output signal
data signal data signal data signal data signal data signal data data signal
0 Fixed to OFF 8 IDET 16 EC3 24 32 40 FPOS 48
1 RUN 9 ATN 17 ACC 25 33 41 FPOS_EX 49
2 FLT 10 SPD1 18 DCC 26 34 42 F_NOT 50
3 MC 11 SPD2 19 27 MBRK 35 43 JERK_IN 51
4 RDY1 12 COP 20 ALM 28 DVER 36 44 JERK_OUT 52
5 RDY2 13 EC0 21 FAN 29 37 45 50%LOAD 53
6 LCL 14 EC1 22 30 RDELAY 38 46 POSERR 54
7 REV 15 EC2 23 ZSP 31 Fixed to ON 39 47 OUTMC 55
Output signal
------ -8 IDET -16 EC3 -24 -32 -40 FPOS -48
-1 RUN -9 ATN -17 ACC -25 -33 -41 FPOS_EX -49
-2 FLT -10 SPD1 -18 DCC -26 -34 -42 F_NOT -50
-3 MC -11 SPD2 -19 -27 MBRK -35 -43 JERK_IN -51
-4 RDY1 -12 COP -20 ALM -28 DVER -36 -44 JERK_OUT -52
-5 RDY2 -13 EC0 -21 FAN -29 -37 -45 50%LOAD -53
-6 LCL -14 EC1 -22 ASW -30 RDELAY -38 -46 POSE -54
-7 REV -15 EC2 -23 ZSP -31 Fixed to ON -39 -47 OUTMC -55
13-25

C14 A01, A02 output setting
0 Output gain for A01 10V at Max. frequency when this is set to
0.20 2.00 1.00
1.00.
20mA (5V) at the rated current when this is
1 Output gain for A02 0.20 2.00 1.00 set to 1.00. (Max. 11V)
When C14-7 or 8 is set to 1 or 3, the offset
A01 output offset 0.00 can be fluctuated with this setting value.
3 -8.00 8.00
(Voltage) (V) If the offset is set to a value other than 0V,
the output which can be displayed with ,
such as the output frequency, can be
A02 output offset 0.00 output in the range of 0 to 10V centering on
4 -8.00 8.00
(Voltage) (V) this setting value. The absolute value is
output when 0.00 is set. 6-17
A01 output offset 0.0
5 -15.0 15.0
(Current) (mA) When C14-7 or 8 is set to 2, the offset can
A02 output offset 0.0 be fluctuated with this setting value.
6 -15.0 15.0
(Current) (mA)
A01 output method =1: Voltage 0V to 10V = 3: Current 4mA to

7 1. 3. 1. 20mA
selection
=2: Voltage 0V to 10V (5V offset)
When =2 is set, the gain will be set to a
A02 output method
8 1. 3. 1. 0.5-fold setting using the 5V point as the
selection
reference point.
AI1 random scale Analog input: Random scale coefficient
9 0.01 100.00 30.00
coefficient dedicated for AI1
A 0.01 100.00 30.00
B 0.01 100.00 30.00
13-26

Set the attained output (ATN) operation
Attainment (ATN) 1.0
0 0.0 20.0 width as a percentage in respect to the 6-7
detection width (%)
motors rated speed.
Set the current detection (IDET) operation
Current (IDET) 100.
1 5. 300. level as a percentage in respect to the
detection level (%)
motors rated current.
Speed detection (SPD1) 95.0 6-8
2 1.0 105.0 Set the speed detection (SPD1, SPD2)
level 1 (%)
operation level as a percentage in respect
Speed detection (SPD2) 50.0 to the motors rated speed.
3 1.0 105.0
level 2 (%)
1.0 Set the delay time for sequence RDELAY
5 RDELAY delay time 0.0 1000.0
(s) when RUN is ON.
EC0 output fault When only a specific fault is to be output,

6 0.00.0. 1.FF.F. 0.00.0. this parameter can be set so that only the
selection
fault with the set conditions is output with
EC1 output fault sequence output:EC0 to EC3.
7 0.00.0. 1.FF.F. 0.00.0. 6-9
selection 0. 00. 0
EC2 output fault

8 0.00.0. 1.FF.F. 0.00.0. : Sub No.
selection
: Fault No.
EC3 output fault : 0 : Normal fault
9 0.00.0. 1.FF.F. 0.00.0.
selection 1 : Monitor fault
Normal fault No. table

Correspond- Correspond- Correspond- Correspond- Correspond-
No. No. No. No. No.
ing fault ing fault ing fault ing fault ing fault
00 None 04 OV 08 SP 0C GRD 10 BPFLT
01 EMS 05 UV 09 None 0D IO 11 EXFLT
02 PM 06 PHL 0A ATT 0E CPU 12 POSERR
03 OC 07 UOH 0B OL 0F None 13 For future use
Minor fault No. table

No. Corresponding fault No. Corresponding fault No. Corresponding fault
00 None 04 Speed deviation error 09 External fault input
01 None 07 AI1 current input 3mA or less 0A Position deflection at stop error
02 Carrier f decelerating 08 AI2 current input 3mA or less
03 Overload error (50% or more)
0.1
A EC0 OFF delay timer 0.0 600.0
(s)
0.1 When a minor fault occurs, delay is applied
B EC1 OFF delay timer 0.0 600.0 for the set time if the minor fault occurrence
(s)
conditions are reset.
0.1 Note that if 0.00 is set, the operation will 6-10
C EC2 OFF delay timer 0.0 600.0
(s) not turn OFF and instead it will remain ON.
0.1 In either case, this will turn OFF regardless
D EC3 OFF delay timer 0.0 600.0
(s) of the setting when RST is turned ON.
0.1
E ALM OFF delay timer 0.0 600.0
(s)
13-27
13.4.2 Extended function setting

C16 Setting input terminal function (Moving average time)
Moving average time for 10. The moving average time is inserted in the
0 0. 32.
AI1 input (ms) AI1, AI2 and AI3 input value. This is
Moving average time for 10. effective as a measure against noise in the 6-11
1 0. 32. analog input signal, and to smoothen the
AI2 input (ms) 6-13
analog speed command signal. The
Moving average time for 10. moving average process is not executed
2 0. 32.
AI3 input (ms) when 0 is set.
Operation is started when the time
0.00 6-27
3 RUN delay timer 0.00 10.00 corresponding to the setting value has
(s) 6-58
elapsed from the run command.
A fault is displayed if the OUTMC output
and OUTMC_ans status do not match
within the set time.
OUTMC: ON and OUTMC_ans: OFF
Output switch error 0.00
4 0.00 2.50 Fault OMC.OF
judgment time (s)
OUTMC: OFF and OUTMC_ans: ON
6-58
Fault OMC.ON
If 0.00 is set, a fault will not appear even if
the states mismatch.
The OUTMC output turns OFF when the
0.00
5 Output switch open time 0.00 2.50 set time has passed after the gate output is
(s)
shut off.
C22 Overload
This parameter is for setting %ED of DBR
operation. When DBR transistor or DBR
built in the unit is used, set the parameter
0.0
4 DBR overload 0.0 10.0 within the specification.
(%)
When 0.0 is set, the protection function is
disabled. When the external DBR unit is
used, set to 0.0.
Carrier frequency
=1: Reduction enabled
6 automatic reduction 1. 2. 1.
=2: Reduction disabled
function selection
f0: Input phase failure detection function 6-62
selection
Phase failure detection =1: Function valid =2: Function invalid
7 11. 22. 11.
function selection f1: Output phase failure detection function
selection
=1: Function valid =2: Function invalid
Motor rated overload 125. If the output current exceeds the C22-A
8 50. 300.
reference current (%) setting value for the C22-B setting time, the
fault OL-3 will occur.
Motor rated overload 10. C22-A is set as a percentage of the motor
9 2. 300.
reference time (s) rated current.
C24 Speed detection error monitor
Over speed protection 115.0 The over speed protection operation level
0 50.0 120.0
level (%) is set.
Select speed deviation control error.
=1: No error monitoring performed, no
Control mode ALM output, no FLT output
4 changeover during 1. 3. 2. =2: Error monitoring performed, no ALM
speed deviation error output, FLT output performed 6-61
=3: Error monitoring performed, ALM
output performed, no FLT output
Speed deviation error 10.0 Set the error judgment command and the
5 1.0 50.0
level (%) deviation level for detection.
Speed deviation error 0.2
6 0.1 20.0 Set the time for judging speed deviation.
judgment time (s)
0.002
8 Zero speed level 0.001 0.150 Set the zero speed level. 6-8
(m/s)
13-28

C25 High-efficiency operation
=1: ON / OFF control is enabled. FAN is
ON when inverter runs.
Cooling fan ON/OFF
2 1. 2. 2. The fan runs for 10s when starting. 6-70
control
=2: ON / OFF control is disabled. FAN is
always ON.
0 Function selection 0. 1. 0. 0: Standard serial 1: Modbus
The parameters with a mark below can
be changed.
Set- Block A Block B, C Parameter
ting Para-
value meter Basic Extend S/W H/W
Parameter change 1
1 1. 5. 1.
protection 2
3
4
5
: Changeable : Unchangeable
2 Station No. 0. 247. 1. Set the local station No.

0.00 Set the minimum time from receiving
3 Response timer 0.00 2.00 6-82
(s) command to returning an answer.
Standard serial =1: 4800bps =2: 9600bps =3: 14400bps
4 communication baud 1. 7. 2. =4: 19200bps =5: 38400bps
rate setting =6: 1200bps =7: 2400bps
Standard serial
5 communication stop bit 1. 2. 2. =1: 1 bit =2: 2 bit
setting
Standard serial
6 communication parity 1. 3. 3. =1: None =2: Even =3: Odd
setting
-1
=0: 0.01Hz or 0.1min unit: signed
-1
Base section serial =1: 0.1Hz or 1min unit: signed
communication =2: 0.01% unit: signed
7 0. 5. 0. -1
frequency (speed) unit =3: 0.01Hz or 0.1min unit: unsigned
-1
setting =4: 0.1Hz or 1min unit: unsigned
=5: 0.01% unit: unsigned
13-29

C27 Fault setting
Motor lock error 0.025 Set the speed level for judging the motor
0 0.010 0.200
judgment speed level (m/s) lock error.
If the motor lock error state continues for
Motor lock error 0.8
1 0.0 2.0 this set time, the fault EL-1 will occur.
judgment time (s)
The fault is not output when 0.0 is set.
Set the car movement distance for judging
Roll back error judgment 20. a roll back error.
2 0. 250.
distance (mm) Fault EL-2 occurs when an error is
detected.
20. Set the car movement distance for judging
3 judgment distance when 1. 250.
(mm) a position deflection error when stopped.
stopped
If the position deflection error when
0.8 stopped exceeds this set time, it will be 6-60
4 judgment time when 0.0 2.0
(s) judged as an error.
stopped
No error is output when 0 is set.
Position deflection error The sequence output POSERR is output
5 fault output when 1. 2. 2. with either of the following settings:
stopped selection =1: Alarm output =2: Fault output
The inverter's READY state turns OFF if
the speed is higher than this setting.
Increase this setting value when carrying
emergency operations when the car has
1.0
6 Ready OFF level 0.0 20.0 dropped. Set as a percentage in respect to
(%)
the motors rated speed.
If 0 is set, the function which turns READY
OFF according to the speed detection
value will be disabled.
If the cage should move more distance
Cage moving distance
20. than the value set in this parameter, fault
7 detected during start 0. 20. 6-43
(mm) EL-4 occurs
lock
No error is output when 0 is set.
13-30
13.4.3 Hardware option function setting

C28 Password No.
Password No. function
0 1. 2. 1. =1: Function invalid =2: Function valid
valid
Set the password No. Once set the display 6-69
1 Password No. setting 0. 9999. 0. will return to 0, so make sure not to forget
the set number.
f0: The control mode is set.
=1: V/f control
=2: IM speed sensor-less vector control
0 Control mode selection 21. 24. 24. =3: IM speed vector control with sensor 6-19
=4: PM motor control with sensor
f1: Set the overload mode. (Fixed to 2)
=2: Major overload (150%-1min)
C31 Main circuit option selection
1 1. 2. 1. =1: Enabled =2: Disabled 6-63
function
C33 Output terminal function (Option)
Terminal output
0 -55. 55. 10.
selection
Terminal output
1 -55. 55. 11. Select the setting value from the following
selection
table, and output. 6-5
Terminal output -1 to -55 are the reverse output of 1 to 55.
2 -55. 55. 12.
selection
Terminal output
3 -55. 55. 13.
selection
Output signal
0 Fixed to OFF 8 IDET 16 EC3 24 32 40 FPOS 48
1 RUN 9 ATN 17 ACC 25 33 41 FPOS_EX 49
2 FLT 10 SPD1 18 DCC 26 34 42 F_NOT 50
3 MC 11 SPD2 19 27 MBRK 35 43 JERK_IN 51
4 RDY1 12 COP 20 ALM 28 DVER 36 44 JERK_OUT 52
5 RDY2 13 EC0 21 FAN 29 37 45 50% LOAD 53
6 LCL 14 EC1 22 30 RDELAY 38 46 POSERR 54
7 REV 15 EC2 23 ZSP 31 Fixed to ON 39 47 For future use 55
Output signal
-8 IDET -16 EC3 -24 -32 -40 FPOS -48
-1 RUN -9 ATN -17 ACC -25 -33 -41 FPOS_EX -49
-2 FLT -10 SPD1 -18 DCC -26 -34 -42 F_NOT -50
-3 MC -11 SPD2 -19 -27 MBRK -35 -43 JERK_IN -51
-4 RDY1 -12 COP -20 ALM -28 DVER -36 -44 JEAR_OUT -52
-5 RDY2 -13 EC0 -21 FAN -29 -37 -45 50% LOAD -53
-6 LCL -14 EC1 -22 -30 RDELAY -38 -46 POSERR -54
-7 REV -15 EC2 -23 ZSP -31 Fixed to ON -39 -47 For future use -55
* The magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS) turns OFF when the C30-0 setting value is changed, or even if
the value is not changed and the operation panel SET key is pressed twice to enter the setting value.
13-31

C50 Encoder setting
The pulse input from the encoder can be
divided in one nth, and output to an
Encoder pulse divided external source from PAOUT and PBOUT
0 1. 1023. 1.
output setting on the speed detection PCB.
Adjust the setting value so that the output
pulse is up to 70kHz.
Select the advance direction of the AB
signal input from the encoder.
Encoder AB advance
2 1. 2. 1. =1: Forward =2: Reverse U 7-30
direction selection
* This appears in the V/f control mode, but
will not function.
Set this only when the signal type cannot
Encoder ABZ pulse type
3 0. 15. 0. be selected with C50-2, C51-2. Take 7-32
selection
special care when setting.
A-IN1 B-IN1 Z-IN A-IN1 B-IN1 Z-IN

Setting Non Non Non AB inter- Setting Non Non Non AB inter-
No. invert invert invert change No. invert invert invert change
/ Invert / Invert / Invert / Invert / Invert / Invert
0 8
1 Invert 9 Invert
2 Invert 10 Invert
3 Invert Invert No inter- 11 Invert Invert AB inter-
4 Invert change 12 Invert change
5 Invert Invert 13 Invert Invert

6 Invert Invert 14 Invert Invert
7 Invert Invert Invert 15 Invert Invert Invert
A-IN1 AB interchangeable
Invert A
B-IN1
B
Invert
Z-IN Z
Invert During CCW rotation t
* The magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS) turns OFF when the C50-2, 3 setting value is changed, or even
if the value is not changed and the operation panel SET key is pressed twice to enter the setting value.
13-32

C51 Encoder setting
Select the type of signal input from the
encoder.
=1: A, B, Z-phase + U, V, W-phase signal
=2: A, B, Z-phase + serial absolute signal
=3: A, B, Z-phase + U, V, W-phase signal
(reduced wiring)
=4: SIN, COS signal
0 Encoder selection 1. 7. 5. =5: A, B, Z phase 7-30
=6: A, B, Z-phase (analog encoder)
=7: A, B, C-phase + C, D-phase (analog
encoder)
If C51-0 is set to 5, B39-0 f0 will be
automatically set to 2 (magnetic pole
position estimation function valid).
(B39-0 can be changed after this.)
=0: Zero point position detection at ON
edge of A phase when B phase is Low
and Z phase is High
AB phase-Z phase type
1 0. 2. 1. =1: Zero point position detection at edge of 7-31
selection
Z phase (Z-phase error not detected)
=2: Zero point position detection at edge of
Z phase (Z-phase error detected)
Select whether to reverse the Z signal input
Encoder Z signal
2 1. 2. 1. from the encoder. 7-31
reversal
=1: Do not reverse =2: Reverse
Select the advance direction of the UVW
Encoder UVW advance
3 1. 2. 1. signal input from the encoder. 7-33
direction selection
=1: Forward =2: Reverse
Z-IN U phase winding 0.0
4 0.0 359.9 Electrical angle from Z-IN to U winding 7-36
phase angle ()
0.0
5 Z-IN U phase angle 0.0 359.9 Electrical angle from Z-IN to u phase 7-34
()
Set this only when the signal type cannot
Encoder UVW pulse
6 0 7 0 be selected with C51-3. Take special care 7-33
type selection
when setting.
U-IN V-IN W-IN

Setting Non Non Non UV inter-
No. invert invert invert change Invert
/ Invert / Invert / Invert U-IN
u
0
V-IN v
1 Invert
2 Invert W-IN w
3 Invert Invert No inter-
4 Invert change During CCW rotation t
5 Invert Invert
6 Invert Invert
7 Invert Invert Invert
When using the reduced wiring ABZUVW

UVW measurement
encoder, set the time to wait from the
start wait time 2.
7 0. 1000. setting of the UVW signal to the 7-35
[For reduced wiring (ms)
measurement of UVW. The timer functions
ABZUVW]
at a 2ms cycle, so set an integer-fold of 2.
UVW measurement encoder, set the interval to measure the
time 2. UVW signal. If UVW cannot be measured
8 0. 1000. 7-35
[For reduced wiring (ms) within this time, a fault will be output. The
ABZUVW] timer functions at a 2ms cycle, so set an
integer-fold of 2.
13-33

ABZ measurement start
encoder, set the time to wait before starting
wait time 2.
9 0. 1000. control with the ABZ signal. The timer 7-35
[For reduced wiring (ms)
functions at a 2ms cycle, so set an
ABZUVW]
integer-fold of 2.
C52 Analog encoder setting
100.0
0 A-phase detection gain -200.0 200.0 Set the A-phase analog detection gain.
(%)
0.0
1 A-phase detection offset -20.0 20.0 Set the A-phase analog detection offset.
(%)
100.0
2 B-phase detection gain -200.0 200.0 Set the B-phase analog detection gain.
(%)
0.0
3 B-phase detection offset -20.0 20.0 Set the B-phase analog detection offset.
(%)
7-38
100.0
4 C-phase detection gain -200.0 200.0 Set the C-phase analog detection gain.
(%)
0.0
5 C-phase detection offset -20.0 20.0 Set the C-phase analog detection offset.
(%)
100.0
6 D-phase detection gain -200.0 200.0 Set the D-phase analog detection gain.
(%)
0.0
7 D-phase detection offset -20.0 20.0 Set the D-phase analog detection offset.
(%)
* The magnetic pole position established flag (FPOS) turns OFF when the C51-0 to 9 (other than C51-4) or C52-0 to 7
setting value is changed, or even if the value is not changed and the operation panel SET key is pressed twice to
enter the setting value.
13-34
13.5 Block-U Parameters
13.5.1 Utility mode

The parameter copy function is executed
while the inverter is stopped.
= 1001 : Save
The parameter data is saved from
the inverter to the operation
panel.
= 2002 : Load
The parameter data is loaded
from the operation panel to the
inverter.
If parameter data outside the
setting range, such as for a
different inverter capacity, could
be loaded, the settings of the
parameters not within the setting
range may be uncertain. In this
case, always turn the power OFF
and ON once.
0 Parameter copy function 0. 9999. 0. If appears when the
power is turned ON, enter D20-2
and set the uncertain data. 6-69
= 3003 : Verify check
The operation panel and inverter
parameter data contents are
verified and checked.
If the parameters differ,
will appear.
= 4004 : Clear
The parameter data of operation
panel is cleared.
= 5005 : Load including maintenance
The operation panel parameter
data, including maintenance data,
is read out.
Note) This must never be executed by
the end user. Normal inverter
operations will be disabled.
When C09-0 is locked, it can be unlocked
1 Password No. setting 0. 9999. 0. by inputting the 4-digit parameter set with
C28-0 in this parameter.
13-35
Revision History
Revision history
CPU ROM
Revision Issued on Revision details
version version
None January 2007 9581.0 9582.0

S/W Ver. EE
A July 2007 Corrections made due to changes in main circuit specifications
Anti-roll back function changed from servo lock control to start
lock control, and explanation on adjustment of related
parameters corrected 9581.5 9582.5
Corrections made due to CPU and ROM version changes
Explanation of option PCB speed detection 4 added
Mistakes corrected
S/W Ver. HH
B February 2008 Explanation of start lock control corrected
Chapter 11 Built-in PLC function deleted
Explanation of option PCB speed detection 5 added 9581.8 9582.8
Mistakes corrected
S/W Ver. 00
C January 2009 Explanation of software version display added
Precautions on rated voltage and rated output settings added
Explanation of carrier frequency automatic reduction added
Precautions on operation panel holder opening/closing
methods added
Number of saved fault histories (history of four faults -> ten
faults) changed
Explanation of analog output encoder monitor and parameters
added
Explanation of duplication of external brake signal added
Explanation of four stopping methods added 9581.F 9582.F
Explanation of multi-speed command setting method direct
input mode 2 added
Explanation of output switch control added
Explanation of single-phase UPS operation function added
Explanation of fault automatic reset function added
Explanation of conditions for magnetic pole position established
flag turning OFF added
Explanation of adjusting comfort of ride revised
Explanation of option PCB speed detection 8 added
Mistakes corrected
S/W Ver. 00
D April 2010 A table and outline dimensions of DCL are corrected.
9581.F 9582.F

VT240EL InstructionManual ST-3495 RevD

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

VT240EL InstructionManual ST-3495 RevD

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

THYFREC VT240EL

200V Series (2.2 to 50kW)

ST-3495D April 2010

Chapter 2 Standard Specifications

Chapter 3 Outline and Installation

Chapter 5 Operation Panel

6.4 Various speed settings ............................................................................................................. 6-30

Chapter 7 PM Motor Application

Chapter 9 Protective Functions and Faults

Chapter 10 Serial and Modbus Communication

Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 13 Parameter List

1.2 Precautions for safety

: When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading

: When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading

Qualified refers to satisfying the following conditions.

1.2.1 Transportation and installation

Do not connect an AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W).

1.2.4 Maintenance, inspection and part replacement

Never modify the product.

Dispose of this product as industrial waste.

1.3 Delivery inspection and storage

1.3.1 Delivery inspection and storage

1.3.2 Display on rating nameplate

(1) The following details are listed on the rating nameplate.

VT240EL4060 A F 2100 X000

Meidensha control No.

Indicates the control PCB option.

Indicates the operation panel selection.

Indicates the main circuit option 2.

Indicates the main circuit option 1.

1.4 Instruction manual guide

Chapter 2 Standard Specifications

Chapter 3 Outline and Installation

Chapter 5 Operation Panel

Chapter 6 Various functions and parameters

Chapter 7 PM Motor Application

Chapter 9 Protective Functions and Faults

Chapter 10 Serial and Modbus Communication

Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 13 Parameter List

Chapter 2 Standard Specifications

2.1 Precautions for standard specifications table ........................................................................2-1

Chapter 2 Standard Specifications

2.1.1 Max. applicable motor

2.1.2 Rated output voltage

(1) An output voltage exceeding the input voltage cannot be attained.

2.1.3 Reduced rating with carrier frequency

2.2 Standard specifications table

Rated input voltage 200 to 240V 10% 200 to 230V 10%

Rated output voltage 200 to 240V (Max.) 200 to 230V (Max.)

DC reactor Standalone Can be built in

Enclosure IP20 IP00

Cooling method Forced air cooling

2.2.2 400V series

Rated input voltage 380 to 480V 10%

Rated output voltage 380 to 480V (Max.)

EMI filter Can be built in Standalone

DC reactor Standalone Can be built in

Enclosure IP20 IP00

Cooling method Forced air cooling

2.3 Control specifications table

Transfer frequency Selectable from 2kHz, 4kHz, 6kHz, 8kHz, 10kHz

Local/remote changeover operation, forward run/reverse run direct operation, reference,